WLAN Networking Architectures
Foreword
⚫
Wireless local area networks (WLANs) overcome some disadvantages of wired
networks, such as poor mobility. With the development of Wi-Fi 6 technology, the
bandwidth performance gap between wireless and wired networks is narrowing
down. WLANs featuring flexible networking can adapt to complex and changeable
application scenarios.
⚫
This course describes common WLAN networking architectures, including Fat AP,
leader AP, WAC + Fit AP, agile distributed, Navi AC, and mesh.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe WLAN networking modes.

Configure WLAN services.

Describe the WLAN networking application scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
4
Huawei Confidential
Main NEs on an Enterprise WLAN
Manager +
controller +
analyzer
5
Portal server
IP
network
Core switch
Wireless
control
Wireless access
controller (WAC)
Wireless
access
Wireless access
point (AP)
Wireless
terminal
Laptop
Huawei Confidential
Aggregation
switch
DHCP server
Access switch
RADIUS server
Firewall
Native WAC
Central AP
Tablet
Remote unit (RU)
Mobile phone
Barcode scanner, automated guided
vehicle (AGV), smart wristband, etc.
WLAN Networking Architecture Overview (1/3)
Fat AP
Leader AP
Fat AP
Leader AP
STA
STA
• Networking characteristics: A Fat AP works independently and
requires separate configurations. It provides only simple functions
and is cost-effective.
• Networking characteristics: A leader AP can work independently or
manage a small number of APs to implement basic roaming
functions. This networking is cost-effective and has low no high
requirements on skills of network maintenance personnel.
• Application scenarios: homes, mini stores, etc.
6
Huawei Confidential
• Application scenarios: micro and small enterprises
WLAN Networking Architecture Overview (2/3)
WAC + Fit AP
Agile distributed
WAC
WAC
Central AP
Central AP
RU
Fit AP
Room
1
Room
2
Room
3
Room
N
Room
1
Room
2
Room
3
Room
N
STA
• Networking characteristics: Fit APs are centrally managed and
configured by a WAC, and provide a variety of functions. This
networking has high requirements on skills of network maintenance
personnel.
• Application scenarios: large and midsize enterprises
7
Huawei Confidential
• Networking characteristics: The agile distributed architecture divides
an AP into a central AP and RUs. Each central AP can manage
multiple RUs, providing good coverage at low costs. Agile distributed
APs can be used in the Fat AP, WAC + Fit AP, and cloud
management architectures.
• Application scenarios: scenarios with densely distributed rooms
WLAN Networking Architecture Overview (3/3)
Navi AC
CAPWAP
MP
Navi AC
STA1
CAPWAP
Local AC
Mesh
Fit AP
STA2
WAC
MPP
STA3
STA
• Networking characteristics: Guest traffic can be directed to a
specified WAC (Navi AC) for centralized management, which is
isolated from employee traffic.
• Application scenarios: large enterprises where guest traffic needs
to be isolated
8
Huawei Confidential
• Networking characteristics: A wireless mesh network (WMN) is a
dynamic self-organizing, and auto-configured star-type network that
consists of multiple wirelessly connected APs in a mesh topology,
and connects to a wired network through one or two portal nodes.
• Application scenarios: outdoor backhaul scenarios
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
◼
Fat AP
▫ Leader AP
▫ WAC + Fit AP
▫ Agile Distributed
▫ Navi AC
▫ Mesh
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
9
Huawei Confidential
Fat AP Networking
Networking description
Router
⚫
The Fat AP networking architecture is also called autonomous network
architecture because it can implement functions such as wireless user
access, service data encryption, and service data forwarding, without the
need of a dedicated device for centralized control.
Switch
⚫
Fat APs work independently and require no additional centralized control
device. Therefore, this networking is easy to deploy and cost-effective, and
is mainly applicable to homes and micro stores.
Fat AP
Fat AP
⚫
Since each Fat AP works independently and no centralized control device is
used, the Fat APs are difficult to manage and maintain. Therefore, the Fat
AP architecture is not recommended for enterprises.
STA
10
STA
Huawei Confidential
• In the Fat AP networking, APs work in Fat mode.
Managing a Fat AP
Step 1: Connect a PC to an AP (working in Fit mode by default) in wired or wireless mode and
run the following command to switch the AP to the Fat mode:
[Huawei] ap-mode-switch fat
STA1
Warning: The system will reboot and start in fat mode of V200R021C00SPC200. Continue?
Managing the
Fat AP in wired
mode
(y/n)[n]: y
Step 2: Connect the PC to the Fat AP.
Switch
Wired mode: Set the IP address of the PC's wired network adapter to 169.254.1.X/24 (except
169.254.1.1).
Wireless mode: Set the IP address of the PC's wireless network adapter to 192.168.1.X/24 (except
192.168.1.1).
Fat AP
Step 3: Manage the Fat AP.
Wired mode: Access http://169.254.1.1 or https://169.254.1.1 using a browser.
Wireless mode: Use the PC to search for the WLAN with the management SSID HUAWEI-LeaderAP-
xxxx (xxxx indicates the last four digits of the AP's MAC address) and associate with the WLAN.
Then access http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1 using a browser.
11
STA2
Managing the
Fat AP in
wireless mode
Huawei Confidential
• Connecting a PC to a Fit AP in wireless mode:
▫ Use the PC to search for the management SSID, which is hw_manage_xxxx
by default (xxxx indicates the last four digits of the AP's MAC address). To
obtain the default password, see the AP product documentation.
▫ Set the IP address of the PC's wireless network adapter to 192.168.1.X/24
(except 192.168.1.1) and access http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1
using a browser.
• Connecting a PC to a Fit AP in wired mode:
▫ Set the IP address of the PC's wired network adapter to 169.254.1.X (except
169.254.1.1) and access http://169.254.1.1 or https://169.254.1.1 using a
browser.
• Connecting a PC to a Fat AP in wireless mode:
▫ In wireless management mode, the default access address of APs running
versions later than V200R021C01 is http://169.254.2.1 or https://169.254.2.1.
To connect a PC to such an AP, set the IP address of the PC's wireless
network adapter to 169.254.2.X/24 (except 169.254.2.1).
Working Modes of Fat APs
Bridge mode
Service
gateway
Gateway mode
Router
Router
VLAN 10
Fat AP
Service
gateway
VLAN 20
Fat AP
Service VLAN 10
Service VLAN 10
A Fat AP connects to a wired network in
bridge mode. A router functions as the
WLAN service gateway. The AP's uplink
interface needs to allow packets from the
service VLAN to pass through.
A Fat AP connects to a wired network in
gateway mode. A router functions as an
independent gateway to connect the Fat
AP to the Internet. The Fat AP functions as
the WLAN service gateway.
12
Service
gateway
Public IP address
Fat AP
Service VLAN 10
A Fat AP in gateway mode functions as an
Internet egress, and has a public IP
address configured and the NAT function
enabled. The Fat AP functions as the
WLAN service gateway.
Huawei Confidential
• When wired and wireless users are in the same VLAN and use the same address
segment and gateway address, you can configure the Fat AP to work in bridge
mode.
• When wired and wireless users are in different VLANs and managed separately,
or the Fat AP functions as an Internet egress, you can configure the Fat AP to
work in gateway mode.
Example for Configuring a Fat AP to Work in Bridge Mode
⚫
Log in to a Fat AP through the web system, choose Wizard > Config Wizard > Single AP Configuration,
and set parameters as prompted.
13
Huawei Confidential
Example for Configuring a Fat AP to Work in Gateway Mode
⚫
Log in to a Fat AP through the web system, choose Wizard > Config Wizard > Single AP Configuration,
and set parameters as prompted.
14
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
▫ Fat AP
◼
Leader AP
▫ WAC + Fit AP
▫ Agile Distributed
▫ Navi AC
▫ Mesh
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
15
Huawei Confidential
Leader AP Networking
Networking description
⚫
In the leader AP networking, one AP works in Fat mode, and the other APs
work in Fit mode. The AP working in Fat mode is also called a leader AP.
⚫
The leader AP and other Fit APs are generally located on the same Layer 2
network.
⚫
Similar to a WAC, the leader AP uses the Control And Provisioning of
Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP) protocol to centrally manage and
configure Fit APs. To enable all APs to provide the same wireless services,
you only need to log in to the leader AP to perform configurations.
Fit AP
Leader AP
Fit AP
Fit AP
⚫
is needed. In addition, this networking has certain scalability and security,
and is applicable to WLANs of small and micro enterprises.
CAPWAP tunnel
⚫
16
This networking requires low network construction costs because no WAC
The wireless roaming function is supported in this networking.
Huawei Confidential
• Leader APs are managed in a similar way as Fat APs. For details, see "Managing
a Fat AP".
Working Modes of Leader APs
Bridge mode
Gateway mode
Switch
Independent
gateway
Switch
Room
Room
Leader AP
Fit AP
Fit AP
Built-in gateway
Leader AP
17
Fit AP
Fit AP
Huawei Confidential
• A leader AP in bridge mode functions as a network bridge and works with an
independent gateway in the uplink direction. The leader AP and Fit APs
communicate with each other on a Layer 2 network. The independent gateway
has the DHCP service enabled and allocates IP addresses to STAs and APs. The
direct forwarding mode is used, which reduces the load on the leader AP, so that
the leader AP can manage more Fit APs. Therefore, this networking mode is
recommended.
• A leader AP in gateway mode functions as a gateway, and no independent
gateway is required. The leader AP and Fit APs communicate with each other on
a Layer 2 network. In the uplink direction, the leader AP has NAT enabled and
connects to the Internet. In the downlink direction, the leader AP connects to a
switch and communicates with Fit APs. The leader AP has the DHCP service
enabled and allocates IP addresses to Fit APs and STAs. The networking is more
simplified than that in bridge mode. In this mode, service traffic is forwarded
through CAPWAP tunnels to the leader AP for processing. Therefore, the leader
AP is heavily loaded and can manage a limited number of Fit APs. When the
service traffic is heavy, the leader AP may become a bottleneck for service
forwarding.
• When the number of APs exceeds 24, it is recommended that an external
gateway be configured for STAs.
How APs Obtain IP Address for in the Leader AP Networking
An external DHCP server allocates IP
addresses to APs.
DHCP server
The built-in DHCP server allocates IP
addresses to APs.
Static IP addresses are configured for APs.
IP address
allocation
IP address
allocation
Fit AP
Leader AP
DHCP server
Fit AP
18
Leader AP
Fit AP
Fit AP
Static IP
address
Leader AP
Static IP
address
Fit AP
Static IP
address
Fit AP
Huawei Confidential
• By default, other APs on the same network as a leader AP do not need to be
authenticated when going online on the leader AP.
• Mode in which Fit APs connect to a leader AP:
▫ An external DHCP server can allocate IP addresses to all APs. Ensure that
the leader AP and Fit APs are in the same VLAN so that the Fit APs can
discover the leader AP through CAPWAP broadcast.
▫ The leader AP can function as a DHCP server to allocate IP addresses to Fit
APs. In this case, it is recommended that the leader AP and Fit APs be in the
same VLAN.
▫ Fit APs can connect to the leader AP using static IP addresses. In this case, it
is recommended that the leader AP and Fit APs be in the same VLAN.
• Mode in which a CAPWAP interface is created on the leader AP:
▫ To simplify configuration, the leader AP does not support manual
configuration of a CAPWAP interface. Instead, the CAPWAP interface is
automatically created by the leader AP.
• Layer 3 networking is supported between the leader AP and Fit APs.
▫ Static WAC-List (the leader AP's IP address) can be configured on Fit APs.
▫ Fit APs can obtain the IP address of the leader AP through DHCP Option 43.
Leader AP Deployment Process — Through the Web System
⚫
Deployment process:
Start
1. Select an AP as the leader AP and log in to the AP
(working in Fit mode by default). You can log in to the AP
Select the leader AP
in wired or wireless mode. For details, see "Fat AP
Networking".
2. Switch the AP's working mode to Fat. Then the AP restarts.
Switch the AP's working
mode to Fat
3. Log in to the leader AP. Associate a laptop with the SSID
HUAWEI-LeaderAP-XXXX. Open a browser on the laptop
Log in to the leader AP
and enter 192.168.1.1 in the address box to access the web
system.
Configure basic information
about the leader AP
4. Configure basic information about the leader AP, including
the AP name, time zone, date, and time.
Configure wireless services
5. Access the Config Wizard page, click Multi-AP
Configuration, and configure wireless services.
19
End
Huawei Confidential
• Prerequisites:
▫ One AP has been selected as the leader AP.
▫ WLAN planning and design have been completed.
▫ The APs have been connected and powered on according to the networking
diagram.
▫ The MAC address of the leader AP is available.
▫ The Windows operating system has been installed on a laptop, and the
Internet Explorer, Firefox, or Chrome browser has been installed.
▫ You have prepared one Ethernet cable if you want to connect the laptop to
the AP in wired mode. When the leader AP works in gateway mode, it does
not support the login in wired mode.
• The default wireless login address of an AP is 192.168.1.1 in V200R021C00 and
169.254.2.1 in V200R021C01 and later versions.
Key Configurations for a Leader AP
⚫
Switch the AP's working mode.
20
Huawei Confidential
⚫
Configure wireless services for the leader AP.
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
▫ Fat AP
▫ Leader AP
◼
WAC + Fit AP
▫ Agile Distributed
▫ Navi AC
▫ Mesh
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
21
Huawei Confidential
WAC + Fit AP Networking
Overview
Networking
Network planning
Service deployment
Architecture overview
In-path and off-path
networking
VLAN planning
Configuring AP
onboarding
Layer 2 and Layer 3
networking
IP address planning
Configuring WLAN
services
Data forwarding mode
22
Huawei Confidential
Verifying the
configuration
WAC + Fit AP Networking
CAPWAP tunnel 1
CAPWAP tunnel 2
⚫
A WAC provides WLAN access control, data forwarding, AP configuration
management, roaming management, and security control.
⚫
Fit APs encrypt and decrypt 802.11 packets, provide 802.11 physical layer
(PHY) functions, collect air interface statistics, and are managed by the WAC.
⚫
The WAC communicates with Fit APs using CAPWAP.
⚫
Compared with the Fat AP architecture, the WAC + Fit AP architecture has the
following advantages:
WAC
Fit AP
Fit AP
•

Easier configuration and deployment in multi-AP scenarios

Higher security

Easier upgrade and expansion
This architecture is applicable to large, midsize, and small campus networks
and scenarios where enterprises need to centrally manage WLANs.
The WAC + Fit AP networking is determined based on the networking mode, data forwarding mode, and the number of WACs.
23
Huawei Confidential
• A WAC communicates with Fit APs using CAPWAP. With CAPWAP, APs
automatically discover the WAC, the WAC authenticates the APs, and the APs
obtain software packages and the initial and dynamic configurations from the
WAC. CAPWAP tunnels are established between the WAC and APs.
• CAPWAP tunnels include control tunnels and data tunnels.
▫ CAPWAP control tunnels mainly transmit control packets (also called
management packets, which are used by the WAC to manage and control
APs).
▫ CAPWAP data tunnels mainly transmit data packets. The CAPWAP tunnels
allow for Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS) encryption, so that
transmitted packets are more secure.
• Compared with the Fat AP architecture, the WAC + Fit AP architecture has the
following advantages:
▫ Easier configuration and deployment: The WAC centrally configures and
manages the wireless network so that each AP does not need to be
configured separately. In addition, the channels and power of APs on the
entire network are automatically adjusted, eliminating the need for manual
adjustment.
▫ Higher security: Fat APs cannot be upgraded in a unified manner, so that
the latest security patches may not be installed on APs of all versions. In the
WAC + Fit AP architecture, security capabilities are mainly implemented on
the WAC, and software upgrade and security configuration only need to be
performed on the WAC. As such, global security settings can be quickly
performed. Additionally, to prevent malicious code from being loaded, the
WAC performs digital signature authentication for the software, enhancing
security of the upgrade process. The WAC also implements some security
functions that are not supported in the Fat AP architecture, including
advanced security features such as virus detection, uniform resource locator
(URL) filtering, and stateful inspection firewall.
• Easier upgrade and extension: The centralized management mode of this
architecture enables APs on the same WAC to run the same software version.
When an upgrade is required, the WAC obtains the new software package or
patch and then upgrades the AP version. The separation of AP and WAC
functions prevents frequent AP version upgrades. User authentication, network
management, and security functions only need to be implemented on the WAC.
Networking Modes: In-Path and Off-Path Networking
In-path networking
Off-path networking
Core switch
WAC
WAC
Core switch
(Optional) Aggregation switch
Access switch
Access switch
Fit AP
Fit AP
Fit AP
Fit AP
• Description: The WAC provides functions of both a WAC and an
aggregation switch. Data and management services of APs are all
forwarded and processed by the WAC.
• Description: The WAC is connected to the existing network in off-path mode
and processes management services of APs. Data services of APs can be
directly sent to the upper-layer network or centrally forwarded by the WAC.
• Applicability: new deployment of small and midsize centralized
WLANs
• Applicability: network reconstruction or deployment of new large and midsize
campus networks
25
Huawei Confidential
Networking Modes: Layer 2 and Layer 3 Networking
Layer 2 networking
Layer 3 networking
WAC
WAC
L2
Core switch
L2
L3
Access switch
L2
Access switch
Fit AP
Fit AP
Fit AP
• Description: The WAC and Fit APs are located in the same
broadcast domain. The APs can discover the WAC by
broadcasting packets. The networking, configuration, and
management are simple.
• Applicability: This networking applies to small-scale WLANs,
such as small enterprise networks, but is not applicable to
complex and refined WLANs of large enterprises.
26
Fit AP
• Description: The WAC and Fit APs are located on different network segments. The
intermediate network must ensure that the WAC and Fit APs are reachable to each
other. Additional configurations are required to enable the Fit APs to discover the
WAC. This networking is flexible and facilitates scale-out.
• Applicability: Layer 3 networking is applicable to large and midsize WLANs. For
example, in a large campus, APs can be deployed in each office building to provide
wireless coverage, and a WAC can be deployed in the core equipment room to
manage and configure all APs. It is recommended that the APs and WAC be
connected through a Layer 3 network.
Huawei Confidential
• When the APs and WAC are connected through a Layer 3 network and the APs
discover the WAC through DHCP (the WAC functions as a DHCP server), the
intermediate devices between the APs and WAC must support the DHCP relay
function.
Data Forwarding Mode — Direct Forwarding
Direct forwarding (also called local forwarding)
CAPWAP tunnel
•
Management traffic
Service data traffic
No traffic bypassing occurs. APs directly forward users' data packets
to the upper-layer network without encapsulating them in CAPWAP
Egress router
tunnels. All service data is forwarded locally by APs. Data traffic does
not pass through the WAC, thereby reducing the burden on the WAC.
WAC
Core switch
•
Direct forwarding is often used in the in-path networking. This
networking mode simplifies the network architecture and applies to
small and midsize centralized WLANs.
•
Access switch
Direct forwarding can also be used in the off-path networking. In this
networking mode, data packets do not need to be processed by the
WAC, eliminating the bandwidth bottleneck and facilitating the usage
of existing security policies. This networking mode applies to wired
Fit AP
Fit AP
and wireless convergence on large-scale campus networks or HQbranch scenarios.
27
Huawei Confidential
Data Forwarding Mode — Tunnel Forwarding
Tunnel forwarding (also called centralized forwarding)
CAPWAP tunnel
•
Management traffic
Service data traffic
Traffic forwarding: Service data packets are encapsulated by APs and
then sent to the WAC through CAPWAP tunnels. The WAC then
Egress router
forwards the packets to the upper-layer network. All data traffic and
management traffic pass through the WAC, facilitating security
control policy enforcement for wireless users.
WAC
Core switch
•
The WAC serves as the control and forwarding center on a WLAN. It
manages and configures APs and also forwards service data traffic.
•
Access switch
Tunnel forwarding is typically used in the off-path networking. In
this networking mode, the WAC centrally forwards data packets,
ensuring high security and facilitating centralized management and
Fit AP
28
Fit AP
control.
Huawei Confidential
• Service data traffic between the WAC and APs is transmitted over CAPWAP data
tunnels, while management traffic is transmitted over CAPWAP control tunnels.
In-Path Mode + Layer 2 Networking
Networking description
Router
•
A WAC is directly connected to APs or Layer 2 access switches, and provides
functions of both a WAC and an aggregation switch.
Core switch
•
The WAC and APs are in the same broadcast domain, and APs can discover
the WAC by broadcasting patches. The network architecture is simple.
•
WAC
Since the WAC is deployed in in-path mode, the direct data forwarding mode
is used in most cases. In this networking mode, wireless traffic must pass
through the WAC, regardless of the data forwarding mode. Therefore, the
WAC may become a performance bottleneck on the live network.
Access switch L2
Application scenarios and networking characteristics
•
AP1
AP2
AP3
•
29
Huawei Confidential
This networking mode applies to deployment of new small-scale WLANs,
such as small enterprise and branch networks.
AP4
The network architecture is simple and easy to maintain.
In-Path Mode + Layer 3 Networking
Networking description
Router
•
A WAC is connected to the network in in-path mode and located between
the aggregation and core switches. Depending on the network scale, the
WAC can be connected to multiple aggregation switches.
•
The WAC communicates with APs at Layer 3 and the APs can obtain the
WAC's IP address through DHCP.
•
Since the WAC is deployed in in-path mode, the direct data forwarding mode
is used in most cases. Compared with in-path + Layer 2 networking, Layer 3
networking is applicable to larger-scale WLANs and facilitates scale-out. In
addition, since all wireless traffic must pass through the WAC, the WAC
performance may become a performance bottleneck on the live network.
Core switch
WAC
L2
Aggregation
switch
L3
Access switch
Access switch
AP1
AP2
30
Huawei Confidential
AP3
AP4
Application scenarios and networking characteristics
L2
•
This networking mode applies to deployment of new small- and mediumscale WLANs, such as office networks of small and midsize enterprises.
•
The network architecture is simple and easy to maintain, and facilitates
scale-out.
Off-Path Mode + Layer 2 Networking
Networking description
Router
•
A WAC is connected to the core switch (or another network device) in offpath mode. The WAC and APs are located in the same broadcast domain
and communicate with each other at Layer 2.
Core switch
WAC
•
APs can discover the WAC by broadcasting packets.
•
If the direct forwarding mode is used, wireless traffic does not need to pass
through the WAC. If the tunnel forwarding mode is used, all wireless traffic
must be forwarded by the WAC.
Access switch
L2
Application scenarios and networking characteristics
•
This networking mode applies to new WLAN deployment for small and
midsize enterprises and campuses.
•
AP1
31
Huawei Confidential
AP2
This networking mode is applicable to WLAN construction based on an
existing network, and requires only a few changes to the existing network.
Off-Path Mode + Layer 3 Networking
Networking description
Router
•
L3
A WAC is connected to the core switch (or another network device) in offpath mode. The WAC and APs are located in different broadcast domains
and communicate with each other at Layer 3.
L2
Core switch
WAC
•
Typically, APs obtain the WAC's IP address through DHCP.
•
Compared with off-path + Layer 2 networking, Layer 3 networking is
applicable to larger-scale WLANs and supports flexible scale-out. The
traffic forwarding characteristics are similar to those in the off-path Layer
2 networking, and are not described here.
Access switch
L2
Application scenarios and networking characteristics
•
This networking mode applies to new WLAN deployment for large and
midsize enterprises and campuses.
•
AP1
32
Huawei Confidential
AP2
This networking mode is applicable to WLAN construction based on an
existing network, and requires only a few changes to the existing network.
Comparison of Typical WAC + Fit AP Networking Modes
Networking Mode
Advantage
Disadvantage
In-path mode + Layer 2
networking + direct or tunnel
forwarding
No data traffic bypassing, simple networking, and
simple management
Low scalability, not applicable to large-scale enterprise WLANs
Applicable only to new WLAN deployment, but not applicable to
network reconstruction
In-path mode + Layer 3
networking + direct or tunnel
forwarding
No data traffic bypassing, clear network architecture,
and high network scalability
Possible WAC performance bottleneck on large-scale networks
Applicable only to new WLAN deployment, but not applicable to
network reconstruction
Off-path mode + Layer 2
networking + direct forwarding
No data traffic bypassing, high forwarding efficiency
Easy WAC discovery for APs by broadcasting packets,
easy deployment
Low scalability, not applicable to large-scale enterprise WLANs
Complex service VLAN configuration
Off-path mode + Layer 2
networking + tunnel forwarding
Centralized data traffic forwarding by the WAC,
facilitating policy control and ensuring high security
Easy WAC discovery for APs by broadcasting packets,
easy deployment
Low scalability, not applicable to large-scale enterprise WLANs
Data traffic bypassing, low forwarding efficiency
Off-path mode + Layer 3
networking + direct forwarding
No data traffic bypassing, high forwarding efficiency
High scalability, applicable to large-scale WLAN
deployment
Complex service VLAN configuration
Off-path mode + Layer 3
networking + tunnel forwarding
Centralized data traffic forwarding by the WAC,
facilitating policy control and ensuring high security
High scalability, applicable to large-scale WLAN
deployment
Possible WAC performance bottleneck on large-scale networks
Data traffic bypassing, low forwarding efficiency
33
Huawei Confidential
VLAN Planning on a WLAN
VLAN planning in the WAC + Fit AP networking
CAPWAP tunnel
Management traffic
Service data traffic
Egress router
⚫
Two types of VLANs on a WLAN:

Management VLAN: transmits packets that are forwarded through
CAPWAP tunnels, including management packets and service data
WAC
packets forwarded through CAPWAP tunnels.
Core switch

Access switch
Fit AP
34
Huawei Confidential
Fit AP
⚫
Service VLAN: transmits service data packets.
VLAN planning rules:

The management VLAN must be different from service VLANs.

Service VLANs need to map to SSIDs based on service requirements.
Mapping Between Service VLANs and SSIDs (1/2)
SSID:VLAN = 1:1
SSID:VLAN = 1:N
Campus
network
Campus
network
Area A
SSID: Guest
VLAN: 100
35
Area B
SSID: Guest
VLAN: 100
Area A
SSID: Guest
VLAN: 100
Area B
SSID: Guest
VLAN: 200
An enterprise needs to provide WLAN coverage for areas A and B.
An enterprise needs to provide WLAN coverage for areas A and B.
To allow users to detect only one SSID and use the same data
To allow users to detect only one SSID but use different data
forwarding control policy, plan only one SSID and one VLAN. In
forwarding control policies, plan one SSID and two VLANs for the
this case, one SSID maps to one VLAN.
areas. In this case, one SSID maps to two VLANs.
Huawei Confidential
Mapping Between Service VLANs and SSIDs (2/2)
SSID:VLAN = N:1
SSID:VLAN = N:M
Campus
network
Campus
network
Area A
SSID: AreaA
VLAN: 100
36
Area B
Area A
SSID: AreaB
VLAN: 100
SSID: AreaA
VLAN: 100
Area B
SSID: AreaB
VLAN: 200
An enterprise needs to provide WLAN coverage for areas A and B.
An enterprise needs to provide WLAN coverage for areas A and B.
To allow users to learn area information upon detecting the WLAN
To allow users to learn area information upon detecting the WLAN
but use the same data forwarding control policy, plan one VLAN
but use different data forwarding control policies, plan two SSIDs
and two SSIDs (AreaA and AreaB) for the areas. In this case, two
and two VLANs for the areas. In this case, two SSIDs map to two
SSIDs map to one VLAN.
VLANs.
Huawei Confidential
VLAN Pool Use Case
Problem: entry effect
3
Solution
If a large number of STAs access the network
from an area, expanding the corresponding
Campus
subnet can ensure that STAs can obtain IP
network
addresses. However, this will expand the
broadcast domain, leading to transmission of
a large number of broadcast packets and
causing network congestion.
Campus
network
Entry area
So many STAs in
this area require a
large number of
IP addresses.
2
Another area
SSID: Guest
VLAN: 100 (a large
number of IP addresses)
Entry area
SSID: Guest
VLAN: 200
Roaming
SSID: Guest
VLAN pool
•
•
1 A large number of STAs access the network
from an area and then roam to other areas.
37
Another area
SSID: Guest
VLAN pool
In this scenario, a VLAN pool can be configured to provide
service VLANs.
The VLAN pool provides the VLAN management and assignment
algorithms. In this way, one SSID can map to multiple VLANs so
that a large number of STAs can be distributed to different
VLANs, narrowing down the broadcast domain.
Huawei Confidential
• This is a special WLAN scenario, in which a large number of STAs access the
network from an area and then roam to other areas. As a result, the number of
STAs in this area increases greatly, requiring a large number of IP addresses.
Typical areas include the entrance of a stadium and the lobby of a hotel.
Therefore, this phenomenon is generally called the entry effect. In this scenario, if
one SSID maps to only one VLAN that maps to one subnet, when a large number
of STAs access the network from an area, expanding the corresponding subnet
can ensure that STAs can obtain IP addresses. However, this may enlarge the
broadcast domain, leading to transmission of a large number of broadcast
packets, such as ARP and DHCP packets, and causing severe network congestion.
In this scenario, a VLAN pool can be configured to provide service VLANs. The
VLAN pool provides the VLAN management and assignment algorithms. In this
way, one SSID can map to multiple VLANs so that a large number of STAs can be
distributed to different VLANs, narrowing down the broadcast domain.
Example for Configuring the WAC + Fit AP Networking (1/2)
⚫
Requirement description:

Router
An enterprise uses the WAC + Fit AP networking architecture, in which
a WAC is connected to a core switch in off-path mode and
communicates with Fit APs at Layer 3.

The management VLAN is different from service VLANs. The VLANs
Core switch
and IP addresses are planned by engineers.

The core switch functions as a DHCP server to dynamically allocate IP
Service gateway
WAC
addresses to APs and STAs. It also functions as the gateway of service
VLANs.

The SSID Employee is used to provide wireless Internet access services
Access switch
Access switch
for employees. The PSK authentication and direct data forwarding
mode are used. Multiple VLANs are allocated for employees.

The SSID Guest is used to provide wireless Internet access services for
guests. The open-system authentication and tunnel data forwarding
mode are used. One VLAN is allocated for guests.
38
Huawei Confidential
AP1
AP2
AP3
Example for Configuring the WAC + Fit AP Networking (2/2)
⚫
Configuration roadmap:
1.
VLAN must be different from service VLANs.
2.
Start
Plan the network. Plan VLANs and IP addresses. Note that the management
Plan the network
Configure basic network services. Configure VLANs and IP addresses. Configure
DHCP for the management VLAN to which APs belong to dynamically allocate
Configure basic network services
IP addresses to APs.
3.
Configure AP onboarding. Configure the CAPWAP protocol to onboard APs.
4.
Configure WLAN services for employees. Create SSID Employee and configure
service parameters as required.
5.
Configure WLAN services for guests. Create SSID Guest and configure service
Configure AP onboarding
Configure WLAN services for employees
Configure WLAN services for guests
parameters as required.
6.
Check WLAN services. Run the display command to check whether the WLAN
Check WLAN services
services run normally, and verify that STAs can access the network.
End
39
Huawei Confidential
Planning the Network
VLAN ID
Description
IP Address Segment
VLAN 5
Management network
segment for the WAC
10.1.5.0/24
Core switch: 10.1.5.254/24
WAC: 10.1.5.1/24
VLAN 6
Management network
segment for APs
10.1.6.0/24
Core switch: 10.1.6.254/24
AP1: IP address dynamically obtained through DHCP
AP2: IP address dynamically obtained through DHCP
AP3: IP address dynamically obtained through DHCP
10.1.10.0/24
Core switch: 10.1.10.254/24
10.1.11.0/24
Core switch: 10.1.11.254/24
10.1.12.0/24
Core switch: 10.1.12.254/24
10.1.20.0/24
Core switch: 10.1.20.254/24
VLAN 10
VLAN 11
Network services for
employees
VLAN 12
VLAN 20
40
Network services for guests
Huawei Confidential
IP Address
Configuring AP Onboarding
⚫
Configure a DHCP address pool on the core switch and specify the WAC's IP address in DHCP Option 43.
[Core-SW] ip pool ap-pool
[Core-SW-ip-pool-ap-pool] network 10.1.6.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Core-SW-ip-pool-ap-pool] gateway-list 10.1.6.254
[Core-SW-ip-pool-ap-pool] option 43 sub-option 2 ip-address 10.1.5.1
⚫
Configure the CAPWAP source IP address of the WAC and configure AP onboarding. (The following uses AP1 as an example.)
# Enable the function of establishing CAPWAP DTLS sessions in none authentication mode.
[WAC] capwap dtls no-auth enable
# Configure the CAPWAP source IP address.
[WAC] capwap source ip-address 10.1.5.1
# Set the authentication mode of APs to MAC address authentication and add APs to the AP group.
[WAC] wlan
[WAC-wlan-view] ap auth-mode mac-auth
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-id 0 ap-mac F4DE-AF36-B3E0
[WAC-wlan-ap-0] ap-name AP1
[WAC-wlan-ap-0] ap-group default
[WAC-wlan-ap-0] quit
41
Huawei Confidential
• The configurations for onboarding AP2 and AP3 are similar to those for
onboarding AP1, and are not mentioned here.
• Add all APs to the AP group default. Set the country code for the AP group based
on the site requirements.
• If DTLS encryption for CAPWAP control tunnels has been enabled, when adding
an AP running a version earlier than V200R021C00 to the AP group, you can
enable the function of establishing CAPWAP DTLS sessions in none
authentication mode to allow the APs to establish DTLS sessions in none
authentication mode so that the APs can properly go online. After the APs go
online, they obtain new DTLS certificates to initiate DTLS sessions in secure mode
and go online again. To ensure network security, disable this function
immediately after the APs go online again to prevent unauthorized APs from
accessing the network.
Checking the AP Onboarding Status
⚫
Run the following command to check the AP status and basic information. If State is displayed as nor, the APs
go online successfully.
[WAC] display ap all
......
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ID
MAC
Name Group
IP
Type
State
STA Uptime
ExtraInfo
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
f4de-af36-b3e0 AP1 default
10.1.6.75
AirEngine5760-10
nor
0
13M:37S
-
1
f4de-af36-b540 AP2 default
10.1.6.38
AirEngine5760-10
nor
0
13M:4S
-
2
b4fb-f9b7-de40 AP3 default
10.1.6.164
AirEngine5760-10
nor
0
12M:42S
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 3
42
Huawei Confidential
Configuring WLAN Services for Employees
⚫
⚫
Create an SSID profile and configure an SSID.
⚫
Create a VLAN pool and add VLANs to it.
[WAC] wlan
[WAC] vlan pool Employee
[WAC-wlan-view] ssid-profile name Employee
[WAC-vlan-pool-Employee] vlan 10 to 12
[WAC-wlan-ssid-prof-Employee] ssid Employee
[WAC-vlan-pool-Employee] assignment hash
[WAC-wlan-ssid-prof-Employee] quit
[WAC-vlan-pool-Employee] quit
Create a security profile and configure a security policy.
⚫
Create a VAP profile and bind it to the AP group.
[WAC] wlan
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name Employee
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name Employee
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Employee] ssid-profile Employee
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-Employee] security wpa-wpa2 psk pass-phrase
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Employee] security-profile Employee
abc12345678 aes
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Employee] forward-mode direct-forward
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-Employee] quit
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Employee] service-vlan vlan-pool Employee
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Employee] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name default
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-default] vap-profile Employee wlan 1 radio all
43
Huawei Confidential
• The assignment command is used to configure the VLAN assignment algorithm
in a VLAN pool. By default, the VLAN assignment algorithm is hash in a VLAN
pool.
• When the VLAN assignment algorithm is set to even, service VLANs are assigned
to STAs from the VLAN pool based on the order in which STAs go online. Address
pools mapping the service VLANs evenly assign IP addresses to STAs. If a STA
goes online many times, it obtains different IP addresses.
• When the VLAN assignment algorithm is set to hash, VLANs are assigned to STAs
from the VLAN pool based on the hash result of their MAC addresses. As long as
the VLANs in the VLAN pool do not change, fixed service VLANs are assigned to
STAs. A STA is preferentially assigned the same IP address when going online at
different times.
Configuring WLAN Services for Guests
⚫
Create an SSID profile and configure an SSID.
⚫
Configure the link between the WAC and core switch to allow
packets from the service VLAN of guests to pass through.
[WAC] wlan
[WAC] vlan batch 20
[WAC-wlan-view] ssid-profile name Guest
[WAC] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[WAC-wlan-ssid-prof-Guest] ssid Guest
[WAC-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] description To_Core_SW
[WAC-wlan-ssid-prof-Guest] quit
[WAC-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port link-type trunk
[WAC-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 5 20
⚫
Create a security profile and configure a security policy.
⚫
Create a VAP profile and bind it to the AP group.
[WAC] wlan
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name Guest
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name Guest
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] ssid-profile Guest
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-Guest] security open
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] security-profile Guest
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-Guest] quit
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] forward-mode tunnel
Note: Configure a security policy for guests as required. In this
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] service-vlan vlan-id 20
example, open-system authentication is configured.
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name default
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-default] vap-profile Guest wlan 2 radio all
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-default] quit
44
Huawei Confidential
• Guest traffic is forwarded in tunnel forwarding mode. Guests' service data is
forwarded by the APs to the WAC, which then forwards the data to the service
gateway (located on the core switch in this example). Therefore, the link
between the WAC and core switch must allow packets from related VLANs
(VLAN 20 in this example) to pass through.
• The service VLAN (VLAN 20 in this example) must be created on the WAC.
Checking WLAN Services
⚫
Check the running status of VAPs. (The following uses AP1 as an example.)
[WAC] display vap ap-name AP1
WID : WLAN ID
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------AP ID
AP name
RfID
WID
BSSID
Status
Auth type
STA
SSID
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
AP1
0
1
F4DE-AF36-B3E0
ON
WPA/WPA2-PSK
0
0
AP1
0
2
F4DE-AF36-B3E1
ON
Open
0
Employee
Guest
0
AP1
1
1
F4DE-AF36-B3F0
ON
WPA/WPA2-PSK
0
Employee
0
AP1
1
2
F4DE-AF36-B3F1
ON
Open
0
Guest
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 4
45
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
▫ Fat AP
▫ Leader AP
▫ WAC + Fit AP
◼
Agile Distributed
▫ Navi AC
▫ Mesh
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
46
Huawei Confidential
Agile Distributed Networking
⚫
Room
Room
Room
Room
An agile distributed WLAN consists of a WAC and
agile distributed APs. An agile distributed AP is a
special AP, and consists of two independent
RU
RU
RU
components: central AP and RU.
⚫
PoE cable
Corridor
RUs. The central APs are connected to RUs via
Ethernet cables. Central APs do not provide radio
Central AP
RU
Room
47
RU
Room
functions. Instead, RUs function as radios of central
RU
Room
Room
The WAC centrally manages the central APs and
APs. A Layer 2 reachable tree network must be
WAC
deployed between the RUs and central AP.
Huawei Confidential
• A central AP can be deployed in an equipment room, ELV room, or corridor, and
connects to RUs in rooms via Ethernet cables, providing high-quality wireless
access services.
• The agile distributed networking applies to scenarios with densely distributed
rooms, such as dormitories, hotels, and hospital wards. In these scenarios, if the
WAC + Fit AP architecture is used and an AP is deployed in each room, a large
number of packets will be sent to the WAC, which may become a performance
bottleneck. To eliminate the performance bottleneck and provide independent
signal coverage for each room, APs can be deployed in corridors to transmit
signals to each room through antennas. However, this solution limits the
coverage distance. A longer distance causes higher signal attenuation. In
addition, multiple rooms share one AP, which causes poor signal quality and low
performance.
• The agile distributed networking has the following advantages:
▫ Easy management: Only a few central APs need to be managed. Only 200
APs are required to manage nearly 10,000 rooms (a single central AP can
manage up to 48 RUs).
▫ Flexible deployment and full signal coverage without coverage holes: The
central APs are connected to RUs in rooms via Ethernet cables without wall
penetration loss or feeder loss, providing high-quality signal coverage. The
RUs can be flexibly mounted to wall plates, walls, or ceilings.
▫ Ultra-long-distance coverage: Traditional APs can provide a maximum
coverage distance of 15 m with the help of antennas, while the connection
distance between central APs and RUs using Ethernet cables can reach up
to 100 m. The network coverage scope is therefore expanded by several
times. In addition, central APs can be deployed in corridors and support
ultra-long-distance coverage of over 100 m.
RU Onboarding Process on an AirEngine Series WAC
⚫
RU onboarding process:
Start
1. The central AP goes online. RUs go online only after the central AP goes online.
The onboarding process of the central AP is similar to that of a common AP.
The central AP goes online
2. RUs obtain IP addresses. RUs must be on the same Layer 2 network as the
central AP. RUs have static IP addresses configured or obtain IP addresses
through DHCP.
3. RUs establish CAPWAP tunnels with the WAC. RUs broadcast packets to discover
the central AP. The central AP returns the IP address of the associated WAC to
RUs obtain IP addresses
RUs establish CAPWAP tunnels
with the WAC
the RUs. Then, the RUs establish CAPWAP tunnels with the WAC.
4. RUs upgrade their versions. Each RU determines whether its system software
RUs upgrade their versions
version is the same as that specified on the WAC according to parameters in the
received packet. If the versions are different, the RU upgrades its version.
The WAC delivers service
configurations to RUs
5. The WAC delivers service configurations. The WAC delivers service configurations
to RUs, and the RU then goes online successfully.
48
Huawei Confidential
End
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
▫ Fat AP
▫ Leader AP
▫ WAC + Fit AP
▫ Agile Distributed
◼
Navi AC
▫ Mesh
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
49
Huawei Confidential
Navi AC Networking
⚫
Demilitarized zone (DMZ)
A large enterprise needs to deploy a WLAN to provide
wireless access services for both employees and guests.
Navi AC
However, guest data may bring potential security threats
to the network.
Local AC
⚫
In the Navi AC networking, guest traffic can be directed
to a dedicated WAC for centralized management, which
is isolated from employee traffic for security purposes.
Authentication server
for guests
WAC that manages APs is called local AC.
Intranet
authentication
server
⚫
CAPWAP tunnel 1
SSID1: Employee
SSID2: Guest
Employee STA
50
The dedicated WAC is called Navi AC, and the original
The local AC centrally manages APs, and the Navi AC
authenticates identities of guest STAs and forwards their
service data. A CAPWAP tunnel is established between
CAPWAP tunnel 2
the local AC and Navi AC to forward guests' service data.
Guest STA
Huawei Confidential
• The Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) is an independent zone on an enterprise network
and is isolated from the enterprise intranet. Generally, specific services on the
enterprise network are deployed in the DMZ, for example, the server that
provides web services for external networks, Navi AC, and guest authentication
server.
Example for Configuring the Navi AC Networking (1/2)
⚫
Requirement description:

An enterprise deploys a WLAN to provide wireless Internet
DMZ
access services for both employees and guests. Employees
Navi AC
use the SSID Employee, and guests use the SSID Guest.

The enterprise uses the Navi AC networking to implement
Local AC
10.1.99.1/24
isolation between employee traffic and guest traffic,
ensuring network security.

10.1.5.1/24
VLAN 100 is planned for guest services. The Navi AC
Authentication
server for guests
functions as a DHCP server to allocate IP addresses to
guest STAs.

Guests' service data is forwarded in tunnel forwarding
mode and sent by the local AC to the Navi AC for
centralized management.

The IP address of the local AC is 10.1.5.1/24, and that of
the Navi AC is 10.1.99.1/24.
51
Huawei Confidential
Intranet
authentication server
CAPWAP tunnel 1
SSID1: Employee
SSID2: Guest
Employee STA
CAPWAP tunnel 2
Guest STA
Example for Configuring the Navi AC Networking (2/2)
⚫
Configuration roadmap
Start
1. Plan and configure basic network data. Plan VLANs and IP addresses to
ensure that the local AC can communicate with the Navi AC at Layer 3.
2. Configure AP onboarding to ensure that the APs go online successfully
on the local AC.
Plan and configure basic network
data
Configure AP onboarding
3. Configure the Navi AC function. Specify the Navi AC on the local AC and
specify the local AC on the Navi AC.
4. Configure WLAN services for guests on the local AC and set the guest
service type to service-navi.
5. Configure WLAN services for guests on the Navi AC (the service
parameter settings must be the same as those on the local AC) and
Configure the Navi AC function
Configure WLAN services for
guests on the local AC
Configure WLAN services for
guests on the Navi AC
bind the services to the local AC.
6. Verify the Navi AC function.
Verify the Navi AC function
End
52
Huawei Confidential
Configuring the Navi AC Function
⚫
Specify the Navi AC on the local AC.
[Local_AC] capwap source ip-address 10.1.5.1
[Local_AC] wlan
[Local_AC-wlan-view] navi-ac ac-id 1 ip-address 10.1.99.1 description Navi_AC
⚫
Enable the Navi AC function on the Navi AC and specify the local AC.
[Navi_AC] capwap source ip-address 10.1.99.1
[Navi_AC] wlan
[Navi_AC-wlan-view] navi-ac enable
[Navi_AC-wlan-view] navi-ac
[Navi_AC-wlan-view-navi-ac] local-ac ac-id 1 ip-address 10.1.5.1 description Local_AC
53
Huawei Confidential
• The default role of a WAC is local AC. After the navi-ac enable command is
configured, the WAC becomes a Navi AC.
• The CAPWAP source IP addresses must be specified on both the local AC and
Navi AC and must be reachable to each other.
• The ac-id parameter is specified to identify the local ID of the local AC or Navi
AC. The value ranges from 0 to 15.
Configuring WLAN Services for Guests on the Local AC and
Navi AC
⚫
Configure WLAN services for guests on the local AC.
54
⚫
Configure WLAN services for guests on the Navi AC.
[Local_AC-wlan-view] vap-profile name Guest
[Navi_AC-wlan-view] vap-profile name Guest
[Local_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] ssid-profile Guest
[Navi_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] ssid-profileGuest
[Local_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] service-vlan vlan-id 100
[Navi_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] service-vlan vlan-id 100
[Local_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] security-profile Guest
[Navi_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] security-profile Guest
[Local_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] forward-mode tunnel
[Navi_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] forward-mode tunnel
[Local_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] type service-navi navi-ac-id 1 navi-
[Navi_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] navi-ac service-vlan-check enable
wlan-id 1
[Navi_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] quit
[Local_AC-wlan-vap-prof-Guest] quit
[Navi_AC-wlan-view] navi-ac
[Local_AC-wlan-view] ap-group name default
[Navi_AC-wlan-view-navi-ac] local-ac ac-id 1
[Local_AC-wlan-ap-group-default] vap-profile Guest wlan 1 radio all
[Navi_AC-wlan-view-navi-local-ac-1] vap-profile Guest wlan 1
Huawei Confidential
• The VAP service parameter settings on the local AC must be the same as those
on the Navi AC.
• The type service-navi command sets the VAP type to Navi AC. When the VAP
type is Navi AC, local traffic can be diverted to a specified WAC (Navi AC), which
can implement security, control, and management functions for STAs, such as
identity authentication, authorization, and accounting. The local AC provides
centralized AP management and coordination functions, for example, STA
onboarding and configuration delivery.
• On the local AC, the value of the navi-wlan-id parameter in the type service-navi
command must be the same as the value of the wlan-id parameter in the vapprofile profile-name wlan wlan-id command.
• The navi-ac service-vlan-check enable command enables service VLAN check on
the Navi AC. After this function is enabled, a STA is allowed to go online on the
Navi AC only when the STAs' access VLAN (service VLAN on the local AC) meets
the following conditions:
▫ The STA's access VLAN is the same as the service VLAN on the Navi AC.
▫ The STA's access VLAN is in the service VLAN pool configured in the VAP
profile on the Navi AC.
▫ The STA's access VLANs (all VLANs in a VLAN pool) belong to the service
VLAN pool configured in the VAP profile on the Navi AC.
Verifying the Navi AC Function
⚫
Check the running status of the local AC and Navi AC.
⚫
Check Navi VAP information and STA access information on
the Navi AC.
55
[Local_AC] display navi-ac run-status all
[Navi_AC] display navi-ac vap all
Current role:local
WID : WLAN ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC ID AC IP
AC ID AC IP
Mac
Role Status
STA Description
AC MAC
WID Status Auth type STA SSID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
1
10.1.99.1 642c-ac86-7dd6 navi normal
1
Navi_AC
10.1.5.1 642C-AC86-7DCD 1
ON
Open
1
Guest
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:1
Total: 1
[Navi_AC] display navi-ac run-status all
[Navi_AC] display navi-ac station all
Current role:navi
WLAN: WLAN ID
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
AC ID AC IP
STA MAC
Mac
Role Status
STA Description
AC ID WLAN VLAN IPv4 address
SSID
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1
081f-7153-901b 1
10.1.5.1 642c-ac86-7dcd local normal
0
Local_AC
1
100
10.1.100.110
Guest
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:1
Total: 1
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
▫ Fat AP
▫ Leader AP
▫ WAC + Fit AP
▫ Agile Distributed
▫ Navi AC
◼
Mesh
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
56
Huawei Confidential
Introduction to Mesh Technology
⚫
A WMN is a dynamic self-organizing, auto-configured network that consists of multiple wirelessly connected APs
in a mesh topology and connects to a wired network through one or multiple portal nodes.
⚫
A WMN has the following advantages:
Fast deployment
High robustness
Flexible networking
Various application
scenarios
High costeffectiveness
Building a traditional
A WMN is a self-
An AP can join or leave a
In addition to traditional
On a WMN, only portal
LAN requires a long
organizing network that
WMN at any time as
WLAN scenarios such as
nodes need to connect to
period of time. In
is not affected by a
required, allowing for
office spaces and
a wired network. This
contrast, building a
failure of a single node.
flexible networking.
campuses, a WMN also
reduces investments on
WMN takes only a few
If a node fails, data
As more mesh nodes are
applies to scenarios such
wired devices, cables,
packets are forwarded to
deployed on a WMN, the
as large-scale
and engineering.
the destination node
WMN coverage area can
along the backup path.
be rapidly expanded.
hours, as it requires only
APs to be installed.
warehouses, docks,
MANs, metro lines, and
emergency
communications.
57
Huawei Confidential
• On a traditional WLAN, APs exchange data with STAs using wireless channels
and connect to a wired network through uplinks. If no wired network is available
before a WLAN is constructed, it takes much time and money to construct a
wired network. If positions of some APs on a WLAN are adjusted, the wired
network must be adjusted accordingly, increasing the difficulty in network
adjustment. A traditional WLAN requires a long construction period and high
costs, and has poor flexibility and poor flexibility, so it does not apply to
emergency communications, wireless MANs, or areas with weak wired network
infrastructure. The construction of a WMN requires only APs to be installed,
which greatly speeds up network construction.
Basic Concepts of Mesh
•
Mesh point (MP): a mesh-capable node that uses IEEE 802.11 MAC and PHY protocols
for wireless communication. This node supports automatic topology discovery,
automatic route discovery, and data packet forwarding. An MP can provide both mesh
services and user access services.
MPP
•
Mesh portal point (MPP): an MP that connects a WMN to other types of networks. This
node provides the portal function to allow mesh nodes to communicate with external
networks.
MP
58
MP
Huawei Confidential
MP
•
Neighboring MP: an MP that directly communicates with another MP or MPP.
•
Candidate MP: a neighboring MP with which an MP prepares to establish a mesh link.
•
Peer MP: a neighboring MP that has established a mesh link with an MP.
Key Points for WMN Design
•
MPP deployment:

The MPP needs to connect to MPs over the air interface. Therefore, the MPP
deployment position must be determined based on the convenience of
connecting to the wired network and the line of sight (LOS) conditions for
connecting to each MP.
MPP
•
Planning and design:

Backhaul channel selection: To ensure high throughput and good user experience,
5 GHz channels with better air interface quality are often used as backhaul
channels. To prevent channel switching from affecting backhaul services, do not
MP
MP
use radar channels as backhaul channels.
MP

Frequency bandwidth selection: The 40 MHz or 80 MHz frequency bandwidth is
recommended for backhaul links to provide a high backhaul speed. The network
between MPs and STAs can use the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz frequency band to
implement signal coverage. Generally, the 20 MHz frequency bandwidth is used.
59
Huawei Confidential
Mesh Networking Mode — Mesh Wireless Bridging
⚫
In the following figure, AP1 to AP3 provide network access services for wired and wireless users. The three APs,
however, cannot access the Internet in wired mode because of geographical or environmental restrictions. To
address this issue, AP1 to AP3 can work with AP4 to construct a WMN so that wireless users can connect to the
Internet.
AP1
AP2
Access switch
AP3
60
Huawei Confidential
AP4
WAC
Mesh Networking — WMN with One MPP
⚫
In the following figure, AP2 to AP5 provide network access services for wireless users, and AP1 provides users with
wired access to the Internet. AP1 to AP5 are meshed to establish a secure, auto-configured, and self-healing WMN.
This networking mode facilitates fast and cost-effective WLAN deployment in outdoor environments where cabling
is difficult.
AP4
AP2
AP5
AP3
AP1
61
Huawei Confidential
WAC
Mesh Networking — WMN with Multiple MPPs
⚫
In the following figure, AP1 and AP11 provide users with wired access to the Internet. AP2 to AP5 provide network access services
for wired and wireless users in Area 1, and AP7 to AP10 provide network access services for wired and wireless users in Area 2.
AP6 resides in the overlapping area between Area 1 and Area 2.
AP4
AP2
AP1
Area 1
AP5
AP3
AP6
AP9
WAC
AP7
Area 2
AP11
AP10
62
Huawei Confidential
AP8
Example for Configuring the Mesh Networking (1/2)
⚫
Requirement description:

An enterprise uses the WAC + Fit AP networking architecture,
in which a WAC is connected to a core switch in off-path
Core switch
WAC
mode and communicates with Fit APs at Layer 3.

AP4 and AP5 use the mesh networking because cabling is
inconvenient for them.

AP3 functions as an MPP, and AP4 and AP5 function as MPs.

Mesh links need to provide security encryption mechanisms.

5 GHz channels with the 40 MHz frequency bandwidth are
used as the channels for mesh backhaul.

Access switch
Access switch
MPP
AP1
AP3
AP2
The distance between AP3 and AP4 and between AP3 and AP5
is about 120 m.
MP
MP
AP4
63
Huawei Confidential
AP5
Example for Configuring the Mesh Networking (2/2)
⚫
Configuration roadmap:
Configure MPP and MP roles
1. Configure MPP and MP roles. Configure an AP system profile and AP
groups. Specify AP3 as an MPP and AP4 and AP5 as MPs.
Configure the MPP to go online
2. Configure the MPP to go online and create a security profile for mesh
links. For details, see "WAC + Fit AP Networking".
3. Configure a mesh profile that defines a WMN ID and a mesh whitelist
that defines a list of neighbors that are allowed to establish mesh links
with them.
4. Configure mesh service parameters, including the channel, frequency
bandwidth, and coverage distance of mesh links.
5. Bind the mesh profile and mesh whitelist to the AP groups, so that the
APs can automatically discover mesh neighbors and establish mesh links
with them.
64
Huawei Confidential
Configure a security profile for
mesh links
Configure a mesh profile and a
mesh whitelist
Configure mesh service
parameters
Bind the mesh profile and mesh
whitelist to AP groups
Mesh links are established
successfully
Basic Configurations for the Mesh Networking (1/2)
⚫
Create an AP system profile and an AP group for
⚫
MPPs, and specify AP3 as an MPP.
⚫
Create an AP system profile and an AP group for MPs,
and specify AP4 and AP5 as MPs.
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name sys-mpp
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name sys-mp
[WAC-wlan-ap-system-prof-sys-mpp] mesh-role mesh-portal
[WAC-wlan-ap-system-prof-sys-mp] mesh-role mesh-node
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name mesh-mpp
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name mesh-mp
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mpp] ap-system-profile sys-mpp
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mp] ap-system-profile sys-mp
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-id 2 ap-mac b4fb-f9b7-de40
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-id 3 ap-mac f898-ef7f-b400
[WAC-wlan-ap-2] ap-name AP3
[WAC-wlan-ap-3] ap-name AP4
[WAC-wlan-ap-2] ap-group mesh-mpp
[WAC-wlan-ap-3] ap-group mesh-mp
Configure a security profile for mesh links.
⚫
Create a mesh profile and bind the security profile
for mesh links to it.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name mesh
[WAC-wlan-view] mesh-profile name mesh
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-mesh] security wpa2 psk pass-phrase a12345678
[WAC-wlan-mesh-prof-mesh] mesh-id mesh-net
aes
[WAC-wlan-mesh-prof-mesh] link-aging-time 30
[WAC-wlan-mesh-prof-mesh] security-profile mesh
[WAC-wlan-mesh-prof--mesh] quit
65
Huawei Confidential
• In the command for creating a mesh profile, the mesh-id parameter specifies a
WMN ID. In this example, the WMN ID is set to mesh-net.
Basic Configurations for the Mesh Networking (2/2)
⚫
Configure a mesh whitelist.
⚫
Configure mesh service parameters. (The following uses AP
group mesh-mpp as an example. The configuration for AP group
mesh-mp is similar.)
[WAC-wlan-view] mesh-whitelist-profile name mesh-list
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name mesh-mpp
[WAC-wlan-mesh-whitelist-mesh-list] peer-ap mac b4fb-f9b7-de40
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mpp] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-mesh-whitelist-mesh-list] peer-ap mac f898-ef7f-b400
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] calibrate auto-channel-select disable
[WAC-wlan-mesh-whitelist-mesh-list] peer-ap mac 60f1-8a9c-2b40
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] calibrate auto-txpower-select disable
[WAC-wlan-mesh-whitelist-mesh-list] quit
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] channel 40mhz-plus 157
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] coverage distance 2
⚫
Bind the mesh profile and mesh whitelist to radio 1 of APs in the AP groups mesh-mpp and mesh-mp.
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name mesh-mpp
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name mesh-mp
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mpp] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mp] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] mesh-profile mesh
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mp/1] mesh-profile mesh
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] mesh-whitelist-profile
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mp/1] mesh-whitelist-profile mesh-list
mesh-list
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mp/1] quit
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-mesh-mpp/1] quit
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mp] quit
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-mesh-mpp] quit
66
Huawei Confidential
Checking Mesh Link Information
⚫
After mesh services take effect, run the display wlan mesh link all command to check mesh link information.
<WAC> display wlan mesh link all
Rf : radio ID
Dis : coverage distance(100m)
Ch : channel
Per : drop percent(%)
TSNR : total SNR(dB)
P- : peer
Mesh : Mesh mode
Re : retry ratio(%)
RSSI : RSSI(dBm)
MaxR : max RSSI(dBm)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------APName P-APName P-APMAC
Rf Dis Ch
Mesh
P-Status
RSSI MaxR Per Re TSNR SNR(Ch0~3:dB)
Tx(Mbps) Rx(Mbps)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------AP3
AP5
60f1-8a9c-2b40
1 2
157
portal
normal
-13 -10
0
1
67
66/59/-/-
400
400
AP3
AP4
f898-ef7f-b400
1 2
157
portal
normal
-18 -18
0
3
67
66/59/-/-
400
400
AP4
AP5
60f1-8a9c-2b40
1 2
157
node
normal
-14 -12
0
4
64
58/63/-/-
400
400
AP4
AP3
b4fb-f9b7-de40
1 2
157
node
normal
-20 -20
0
4
64
58/63/-/-
400
400
AP5
AP4
f898-ef7f-b400
1 2
157
node
normal
-12 -1
0
6
69
68/62/-/-
400
400
AP5
AP3
b4fb-f9b7-de40
1 2
157
node
normal
-13 -2
0
4
69
68/62/-/-
400
400
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 6
67
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Networking Overview
2. WLAN Networking Architectures
3. WLAN Networking Application Scenarios
68
Huawei Confidential
Small and Micro Enterprises and Small Stores
Solution description
⚫
In the single-AP networking, a Fat AP functions as the gateway
and Internet egress device for STAs.
Fat AP
⚫
This networking applies to small and micro enterprises and stores
with small areas.
⚫
The number of concurrent online STA is usually less than 50.
⚫
Only wireless user access is required, and roaming is not
required.
STA
⚫
69
Huawei Confidential
STAs have simple Internet access requirements.
Small Enterprises
Solution description
⚫
Multiple APs are connected to the network through a switch,
providing a larger wireless coverage area than a single AP. In addition,
the switch can provide network access for wired terminals.
⚫
The leader AP networking is used to implement centralized AP
management and configuration and support WLAN roaming.
Leader AP
⚫
This networking applies to small and midsize experience stores and
logistics stores. It also applies to small enterprises that require
wireless coverage and access of a certain number of wired terminals
such as monitoring devices and printers.
⚫
If there are special Internet access requirements, an independent
gateway is generally used as the Internet egress device.
70
Huawei Confidential
Small and Midsize Enterprises
WAN
Solution description
Branch
HQ
⚫
The HQ and branches of an enterprise are
interconnected across a wide area network (WAN)
and internal network connectivity is implemented
through routing protocols. A WAC and an
authentication server are deployed in the HQ. The
WAC manages all Fit APs in the HQ and branches.
Authentication
server
WAC
⚫
forwarding mode as required.
Fit AP
⚫
Fit AP
Fit AP
Fit APs in the HQ can use the direct or tunnel
Fit APs in branches usually use the local
forwarding mode. Users are assigned IP addresses
by branch gateways and directly access Internet
resources through branch egresses.
71
Huawei Confidential
Large and Midsize Enterprises
Solution description
WAN
Branch
HQ
⚫
The HQ and branches of an enterprise
are interconnected across a WAN, and
internal network connectivity is
implemented through routing protocols.
⚫
Authentication
server
Branch WAC
HQ WAC
WACs are deployed in the HQ and
branches to manage Fit APs in the HQ
and branches, respectively.
Fit AP
⚫
Generally, the authentication server is
deployed only in the HQ.
Fit AP
Fit AP
⚫
This networking applies to large and
midsize enterprises and branches.
72
Huawei Confidential
Large Campuses with Standalone WACs
Solution description
Heartbeat
Egress zone
Server zone
⚫
If a wired network has been deployed for a large campus
and a wireless network needs to be deployed, or the
DC
wireless network scale is large, you are advised to deploy
standalone WACs.
Core layer
Standby WAC
Active WAC
⚫
core switches in off-path mode.
Eth-Trunk
Aggregation
layer
Generally, the WACs are connected to the aggregation or
⚫
To reduce changes to the existing wired network and
enable the WACs to centrally manage and control wireless
traffic, the tunnel forwarding mode is recommended.
Access layer
⚫
Fit AP
73
Huawei Confidential
Fit AP
To improve WAC reliability, the standalone WACs are
typically deployed in HSB mode.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) An enterprise WLAN does not have heavy user traffic or traffic
bottlenecks. To ensure WLAN security, the enterprise expects to centrally manage WLAN
data. Which of the following networking modes is applicable to this scenario? (
A. WAC off-path networking + direct data forwarding
B.
WAC off-path networking + tunnel data forwarding
C.
Layer 3 networking + direct data forwarding
D. Layer 2 networking + direct data forwarding
74
1. B
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes common WLAN networking architectures, including Fat AP, leader AP,
WAC + Fit AP, agile distributed, Navi AC, and mesh.
⚫
Upon completing this course, you will be able to understand common WLAN networking
architectures and construct suitable WLANs based on site environments and actual
requirements.
75
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
76
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (1/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
77
Full Name
AGV
Automated Guided Vehicle
AP
Access Point
CAPWAP
Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DMZ
Demilitarized Zone
DTLS
Datagram Transport Layer Security
IP
Internet Protocol
MAC
Media Access Control
MP
Mesh Point
MPP
Mesh Portal Point
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (2/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
78
Full Name
NAT
Network Address Translation
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
RU
Remote Unit
SSID
Service Set Identifier
STA
Station
URL
Uniform Resource Locater
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
WAC
Wireless Access Controller
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network
WMN
Wireless Mesh Network
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Reliability Technologies
Foreword
⚫
With the popularization of mobile applications, wireless local area networks (WLANs) are
carrying more and more services. It is becoming increasingly important to ensure network
stability and reliability. In practice, however, network faults and service interruption are
almost inevitable and affect services. An effective way to ensure system reliability is to
improve fault tolerance capabilities of the system, speed up fault recovery, and reduce the
impact of faults on services.
⚫
This course introduces you to Huawei WLAN reliability solutions, including Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) hot standby (HSB), dual-link cold backup, and N+1 backup,
CAPWAP link failover.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common WLAN reliability networking modes.

Know how to configure WLAN reliability solutions.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
WLAN Reliability Technology Overview
2.
VRRP HSB
3.
Dual-Link HSB
4.
Dual-Link Cold Backup
5.
N+1 Backup
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Reliability Technology Overview
On live networks, faults caused by various factors are inevitable. Reliability technologies focus on quickly recovering
networks from faults. Depending on methods for resolving network faults, WLAN reliability technologies are
categorized as fault detection or protection switching technologies.
⚫
Fault detection: focusing on fault detection and diagnosis
BFD
EFM
Two network devices establish a Bidirectional
Forwarding Detection (BFD)session and
periodically send BFD control packets to
detect the availability of the link between
them.
Devices periodically exchange detection
packets to report the link status. Ethernet in
the First Mile (EFM) supports the following
functions: peer discovery, link monitoring,
fault notification, and remote loopback.
Protection switching: focusing on network fault recovery
5
VRRP HSB
Dual-link HSB
Dual-link cold backup
N+1 backup
Multiple devices are
virtualized into one gateway.
When the master device fails,
traffic is quickly switched to
the backup device to ensure
continuous forwarding.
Two WACs are used to
manage the same APs and
back up STA information.
When the active WAC is
faulty, the standby WAC
takes over services.
Two WACs are used to
manage the same AP.
When the active WAC is
faulty, the standby WAC
replaces the active WAC
to manage the AP.
One WAC functions as the
standby WAC to provide
backup services for
multiple active WACs.
Huawei Confidential
• BFD is a standard link detection protocol based on UDP. It is used to quickly
detect and monitor the link status on the network, regardless of direct or indirect
links.
• EFM is a protocol working at the data link layer and is used to detect the
connectivity of direct links.
• This courses focuses on the device protection switching technology. Therefore,
fault detection technologies are not mentioned here.
Comparison of WAC Backup Modes
Item
VRRP HSB
The master and backup WACs
configured with VRRP have
independent IP addresses and
Implementation
share a virtual IP address. Each
AP sets up a CAPWAP link with
this virtual IP address.
Switchover
speed
The switchover is fast and has
little impact on services.
Dual-Link HSB
Dual-Link Cold Backup
Each AP sets up a primary and a
secondary CAPWAP link with the Each AP sets up a primary and a
secondary CAPWAP link with the
active and standby WACs,
respectively.
active and standby WACs,
respectively.
The active and standby WACs
back up STA information.
The AP status switchover is slow The AP status switchover is slow
and occurs only when CAPWAP and occurs only when CAPWAP
link disconnection timeout is
link disconnection timeout is
detected. After the AP status is detected. STAs need to go online
switched, STAs do not need to
again, and services are interrupted
go offline and online again.
for a short period of time.
N+1 Backup
Each AP sets up a CAPWAP link with
only one WAC.
The AP status switchover is slow and
occurs only when CAPWAP link
disconnection timeout is detected. APs
and STAs need to go online again, and
services are interrupted for a short
period of time.
This backup mode supports only
Load balancing the active/standby mode but not This backup mode supports both the active/standby and load balancing modes.
the load balancing mode.
Deployment of
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
WACs at
different places
The software versions of the two
The models and software versions of
The models and software
The models and software
WACs must be the same. No
the master and backup WACs can be
Constraints
versions of the two WACs must versions of the two WACs must
constraint is placed on the WAC
different. However, it is recommended
be the same.
be the same.
model.
that they be the same for the WACs.
Scenarios with high reliability
Scenarios with high reliability
Scenarios with low reliability
Application
Scenarios with low reliability
requirements
requirements
requirements
scope
requirements
Geographically centralized WAC Geographically separate WAC
Scenarios with high cost control
deployment
deployments
requirements
6
Huawei Confidential
Contents
7
1.
WLAN Reliability Technology Overview
2.
VRRP HSB
3.
Dual-Link HSB
4.
Dual-Link Cold Backup
5.
N+1 Backup
Huawei Confidential
VRRP Overview
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is a fault tolerance protocol that enables a standby router to
⚫
automatically replace a faulty active router — the next hop of a host (default gateway). In this way, the standby
router can forward packets if a fault occurs, thereby ensuring the continuity and reliability of network
communication. Routers in a VRRP group play two roles: master and backup.
⚫
When Router A is working properly:

Router A
Master
⚫
VRRP group
Primary link
Router A functions as the master device in the VRRP group and
is responsible for forwarding data traffic.
Router B
Backup
When Router A is faulty:

Secondary link
Router B detects VRRP heartbeat timeout and is elected as the
new master device.
Switch

Router B sends a gratuitous ARP packet. After receiving the
packet, the switch updates its MAC address table.
Intranet host
8

Router B responds to users' ARP requests and forwards traffic.
Huawei Confidential
• VRRP group: A group of routers in the same broadcast domain form a virtual
router, namely, a VRRP group. It provides a virtual IP address as the gateway
address of the intranet to implement gateway redundancy.
• When the master device is working properly, hosts on the network communicate
with external networks through the master device. If the master device fails, the
backup device becomes the new master device and takes over packet forwarding
to ensure network continuity.
▫ Master: indicates the master state. A device whose VRRP group state is
Master is called the master device. The master device is the owner of the
virtual IP address and virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. When the
master device receives an ARP request with the destination IP address being
the virtual IP address, it responds to the ARP request. Among multiple
routers in the same VRRP group, only one router is in active state, and only
the master router can forward the packets with the virtual IP address as the
next hop.
▫ Backup: indicates the backup state. A device whose VRRP group state is
Backup is called a backup device. The backup device does not respond to
ARP requests with the destination IP address being the virtual IP address.
Among the routers in the same VRRP group, all the routers except the
master router are backup routers. When the master device fails, a new
master device is elected from the remaining backup devices.
▫ Master election rules: The device with a higher priority (ranging from 0 to
255) is elected as the master device. If all devices have the same priority,
the device with a larger interface IP address is elected as the master device.
The running priority of the master device then automatically changes to
255.
• When Router A is working properly, the traffic forwarding process is as follows:
▫ Router A sends a gratuitous ARP packet that contains the VRRP virtual IP
address and virtual MAC address.
▫ The switch updates its MAC address table. That is, in the MAC address
table, the virtual MAC address is mapped to the interface that receives the
gratuitous ARP packet.
▫ An intranet user sends an ARP request to query the gateway address, which
is the virtual IP address.
▫ Router A responds to the ARP request by sending the virtual MAC address
to the user.
▫ Traffic from the intranet user is sent to the gateway, Router A. The intranet
user sends traffic to the virtual MAC address, and the switch forwards the
traffic to Router A based on the MAC address table.
• When Router A is faulty, the traffic forwarding process is as follows:
▫ If Router B does not receive VRRP packets from Router A within three
packet sending intervals, Router B automatically becomes the new master.
▫ Router B sends a gratuitous ARP packet that contains the VRRP virtual IP
address and virtual MAC address.
▫ The switch updates its MAC address table. That is, in the MAC address
table, the virtual MAC address is mapped to the interface that receives the
gratuitous ARP packet.
▫ An intranet user sends an ARP request to query the gateway address, which
is the virtual IP address.
▫ Router B responds to the ARP request by sending the virtual MAC address
to the user.
▫ Traffic from the intranet user is sent to the gateway, Router B. The intranet
user sends traffic to the virtual MAC address, and the switch forwards the
traffic to Router B based on the MAC address table.
VRRP HSB Solution
WAC1
10.1.5.1
Master
HSB channel
WAC2
10.1.5.2
Backup
⚫
VRRP hot standby (HSB) is implemented through VRRP and HSB.
⚫
VRRP virtualizes two physical WACs into one WAC. An AP can only detect
the existence of the virtual WAC and establish a CAPWAP tunnel with the
virtual WAC.
VRRP
⚫
In VRRP HSB, one WAC functions as the active WAC and the other
functions as the standby WAC. Generally, the active and standby WACs are
Virtual WAC
Switch 10.1.5.3/24
deployed in the same geographical location, and the active/standby
switchover is fast.
⚫
⚫
AP
HSB establishes a TCP-based HSB channel between the active and standby
WACs to implement data synchronization and backup.
Switch
CAPWAP tunnel
VRRP HSB supports wireless configuration synchronization. A dedicated
CAPWAP tunnel (not an HSB channel) can be established between the
active and standby WACs to synchronize wireless configuration data from
the active WAC to the standby WAC.
10
Huawei Confidential
• VRRP virtualizes the master and backup WACs into one WAC on a Layer 2
network.
• HSB backs up the following data between the active and standby WACs:
▫ AP entries
▫ AP entries
▫ CAPWAP tunnel information
▫ DHCP address allocation information
• The HSB channel can be carried by the direct physical link between two WACs or
by a switch. For example, the HSB channel can reuse the physical channel
through which VRRP packets are exchanged.
• VRRP HSB supports only the active/standby networking but not the load
balancing networking.
HSB Mechanism
⚫
Data backup between WACs is implemented through HSB. HSB ensures that session entries on the active and
standby WACs are consistent. This ensures that sessions are not interrupted during an active/standby switchover.
⚫
HSB provides two types of public services:

HSB service: establishes and maintains a TCP-based HSB channel for service exchange of service modules, and notifies the
service modules of channel connect/disconnect events.

HSP group: instructs service modules to perform batch, real-time, or periodic backup. An HSB group depends on the TCP-based
channels provided by the HSB service, and can work properly only after being bound to the HSB service. In addition, the HSB
group needs to be bound to the VRRP group. The HSB group negotiates the master/backup status of service modules based on
the VRRP status.
Physical HSB channel
Active WAC
HSB service
Bound
VRRP group
11
Bound
HSB group
TCP-based HSB channel
Standby WAC
HSB service
Bound
HSB group
Bound
VRRP group
Huawei Confidential
• HSB service module: establishes and maintains an HSB channel, and notifies the
related service modules of channel connect/disconnect events. An HSB service
establishes active and standby channels based on TCP. The TCP port number
ranges from 10240 to 49152.
• HSB group module:
▫ An HSB group is bound to a VRRP instance, and the active and standby
instances are negotiated using the VRRP mechanism.
▫ It is responsible for active/standby negotiation, batch, real-time, or periodic
backup, and instructs service modules to back up service information.
• Service module: responds to active/standby events in service modules, and
performs batch, real-time, or periodic backup.
• Currently, the WAC supports the configurations of only one HSB service and one
HSB group.
• HSB heartbeat packets are frequently exchanged between the active and standby
WACs, and directly affect the working and negotiation results of the active and
standby WACs. To ensure normal running of the HSB system and prevent backup
data loss, it is recommended that an independent physical link be planned for the
HSB channel.
Working Process of VRRP HSB
⚫
WAC1
10.1.5.1
Master
HSB channel
VRRP
Master/backup negotiation: Two WACs send VRRP packets
carrying priority information on a Layer 2 network for
WAC2
10.1.5.2
Backup
negotiation.
⚫
Data backup: VRRP HSB backs up STA entries, AP entries,
and CAPWAP link information in batch, real-time, or
Virtual WAC
Switch 10.1.5.3/24
periodic mode.
⚫
Active/standby switchover: When the master WAC, the
downlink of the master WAC, or the uplink of the master
Switch
WAC fails, an active/standby switchover is triggered.
⚫
AP
12
CAPWAP tunnel
Active/standby switchback: When the link of the original
master WAC recovers, the active/standby switchback is
triggered in preemption mode.
Huawei Confidential
• HSB supports the batch, real-time, and periodic backup modes for data
synchronization.
▫ Batch backup: When the active and standby devices are determined, the
active device synchronizes the existing session entries to the new standby
device at a time to ensure that the session entries on the active and
standby devices are the same.
▫ Real-time backup: When the active device generates new session entries or
modifies existing session entries, it synchronizes new or modified session
entries to the standby device in real time.
▫ Periodic backup: To ensure that entries on the active and standby devices
are consistent, the standby device checks whether session entries are the
same as those on the active device at an interval of 30 minutes. If session
entries are inconsistent, the session entries on the active device are updated
to the standby device.
• Active/standby switchover: Three common scenarios may trigger an
active/standby switchover.
▫ The active WAC is faulty. This causes the disconnection of the HSB channel.
By default, HSB heartbeat packets are sent at an interval of 3 seconds and
the number of detection times is 5. Therefore, after about 15 seconds, the
standby WAC takes over the work of the active WAC.
▫ The downlink of the active WAC is faulty. This causes the VRRP status
switching. After about 6 seconds, the standby WAC takes over services from
the active WAC.
▫ The uplink of the active WAC is faulty. VRRP association needs to be
configured to monitor uplink interfaces or links. When a fault is detected,
the VRRP priority of the active WAC automatically decreases. When the
preemption mode is enabled on the standby WAC, a VRRP switchover is
triggered, leading to an active/standby switchover. The switchover time
depends on the preemption delay configured for the VRRP.
Example for Configuring VRRP HSB
⚫
Requirement description:

To improve WLAN reliability, the enterprise uses VRRP HSB
networking (two WACs are located in the same
geographical location). When the master WAC is faulty,
services are automatically switched to the backup WAC.
When the master WAC recovers, services are automatically
switched back to the master WAC.

Virtual IP address of the management VRRP (mVRRP)
10.1.88.1/30
WAC1
Master
10.1.5.1
HSB channel
10.1.88.2/30
CAPWAP tunnel for wireless
configuration synchronization
VLAN 5
VRRP VRID 1
Switch
group: 10.1.5.3/24.

IP address and port number of the HSB channel on WAC1:
10.1.88.1/24 and 10241.

To reduce the configuration workload, enable wireless
configuration synchronization between the master and
backup WACs.
14
Virtual WAC
10.1.5.3
Switch
IP address and port number of the HSB channel on WAC2:
10.1.88.2/24 and 10241.

WAC2
Backup
10.1.5.2
Huawei Confidential
AP
CAPWAP tunnel
VRRP HSB Configuration Roadmap
Configuring VRRP
Configuring HSB
Configuring wireless
configuration
synchronization
Verifying the
configuration
Planning IP addresses
Configuring an HSB service
Configuring wireless
configuration synchronization
Checking the VRRP status
Configuring a VRRP group
Configuring an HSB group
Checking the HSB service
Binding services
Checking the HSB group
Enabling the HSB group
Checking wireless
configuration synchronization
15
Huawei Confidential
Configuring VRRP
⚫
# Create a mVRRP group on WAC1. Set the
⚫
Create an mVRRP group on WAC2 and retain
priority of WAC1 in the mVRRP group to 120
the default priority (100) and preemption
and the preemption delay to 300 seconds.
function.
[WAC1] interface vlan 5
[WAC2] interface vlan 5
[WAC1-Vlanif5] vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.1.5.3
[WAC2-Vlanif5] vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.1.5.3
[WAC1-Vlanif5] vrrp vrid 1 priority 120
[WAC2-Vlanif5] admin-vrrp vrid 1
[WAC1-Vlanif5] vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode timer delay 300
[WAC2-Vlanif5] quit
[WAC1-Vlanif5] admin-vrrp vrid 1
[WAC1-Vlanif5] quit
16
Huawei Confidential
Configuring an HSB Service and an HSB Group
Create an HSB service on WAC1. Configure the IP
addresses and port numbers for the HSB channels,
and set the retransmission time and interval of the
HSB service.
⚫
Create an HSB service on WAC2. Configure the IP
addresses and port numbers for the HSB channels,
and set the retransmission time and interval of the
HSB service.
⚫
[WAC1] hsb-service 0
[WAC2] hsb-service 0
[WAC1-hsb-service-0] service-ip-port local-ip 10.1.88.1 peer-ip
[WAC2-hsb-service-0] service-ip-port local-ip 10.1.88.2 peer-ip
10.1.88.2 local-data-port 10241 peer-data-port 10241
10.1.88.1 local-data-port 10241 peer-data-port 10241
[WAC1-hsb-service-0] service-keep-alive detect retransmit 5
[WAC2-hsb-service-0] service-keep-alive detect retransmit 5
interval 3
interval 3
⚫
Create an HSB group on WAC1, and bind the HSB
service and the mVRRP group to the HSB group.
⚫
Create an HSB group on WAC2, and bind the HSB
service and the mVRRP group to the HSB group.
[WAC1] hsb-group 0
[WAC2] hsb-group 0
[WAC1-hsb-group-0] bind-service 0
[WAC2-hsb-group-0] bind-service 0
[WAC1-hsb-group-0] track vrrp vrid 1 interface Vlanif 5
[WAC2-hsb-group-0] track vrrp vrid 1 interface Vlanif 5
[WAC1-hsb-group-0] quit
[WAC2-hsb-group-0] quit
17
Huawei Confidential
Binding Service Modules and Enabling the HSB Group
⚫
The HSB group can be bound to different services to provide the backup function, improving service
reliability.

On WAC1, bind the NAC, WLAN, and DHCP services to the HSB group, and enable the HSB group.
[WAC1] hsb-service-type access-user hsb-group 0
[WAC1] hsb-service-type ap hsb-group 0
[WAC1] hsb-service-type dhcp hsb-group 0
[WAC1] hsb-group 0
[WAC1-hsb-group-0] hsb enable

On WAC2, bind the NAC, WLAN, and DHCP services to the HSB group, and enable the HSB group.
[WAC2] hsb-service-type access-user hsb-group 0
[WAC2] hsb-service-type ap hsb-group 0
[WAC2] hsb-service-type dhcp hsb-group 0
[WAC2] hsb-group 0
[WAC2-hsb-group-0] hsb enable
18
Huawei Confidential
• Run the hsb-service-type ap hsb-group group-index command to bind the WLAN
service to an HSB group so that AP entries, CAPWAP link information, and STA
information can be transmitted through the HSB channel.
• Run the hsb-service-type access-user hsb-group group-index command to bind
the NAC service to the HSB group so that STA authentication information can be
transmitted through the HSB channel.
• Run the hsb-service-type dhcp hsb-group group-index command to bind the
DHCP service to the HSB group so that STA address allocation information can
be transmitted through the HSB channel (when the WAC functions as the DHCP
server).
Wireless Configuration Synchronization
⚫
Wireless configuration synchronization refers to automatic configuration synchronization between the master and
backup master WACs. After a CAPWAP tunnel is established between the master and backup master WACs, the
master WAC can automatically synchronize some configurations to the backup master WAC. This reduces the
configuration workload of the backup master WAC and prevents missing configurations of the backup master WAC.

Configure wireless configuration synchronization on WAC1.
[WAC1-wlan-view] master controller
[WAC1-master-controller] master-redundancy peer-ip ip-address 10.1.88.2 local-ip ip-address 10.1.88.1 psk Huawei@123
[WAC1-master-controller] master-redundancy track-vrrp vrid 1 interface vlanif 5

Configure wireless configuration synchronization on WAC2.
[WAC2-wlan-view] master controller
[WAC2-master-controller] master-redundancy peer-ip ip-address 10.1.88.1 local-ip ip-address 10.1.88.2 psk Huawei@123
[WAC2-master-controller] master-redundancy track-vrrp vrid 1 interface vlanif 5

Manually trigger wireless configuration synchronization on WAC1.
[WAC1-wlan-view] synchronize-configuration
19
Huawei Confidential
• The wireless configuration synchronization function classifies configurations into
two types: Configurations that must be consistent on the WACs are public
configurations, while those that can be inconsistent on the WACs are private
configurations. Public configurations can be automatically synchronized, but
private configurations cannot.
• During wireless configuration synchronization in a VRRP HSB scenario, the two
WACs are bound to the same VRRP group, and the VRRP protocol negotiates to
elect the master and backup master WACs and establishes a CAPWAP tunnel
between the WACs based on the local and peer IP addresses configured on the
WACs. Through the CAPWAP tunnel, the master WAC synchronizes wireless
configuration data to the backup master WAC.
• It is recommended that wireless configuration synchronization and VRRP HSB use
the same VRRP group. In this way, the master WAC in wireless configuration
synchronization is the the same as the master AC in VRRP. You only need to
configure public configurations on the master WAC. The configurations are
automatically synchronized to the backup master WAC.
• After the master AC and backup master AC are configured, the existing public
configurations on the two WACs are inconsistent. You need to manually trigger
wireless configuration synchronization to ensure that the existing public
configurations are consistent. Any subsequent public configuration operations on
the master AC will be automatically synchronized to the backup master AC.
Verifying the Configuration
⚫
Run the display hsb-group group-index
⚫
Run the display hsb-service service-index
command to check HSB group information.
command to check HSB service information.
[WAC1] display hsb-group 0
[WAC1] display hsb-service 0
Hot Standby Group Information:
Hot Standby Service Information:
----------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------
HSB-group ID
:0
Local IP Address
: 10.1.88.1
Vrrp Group ID
:1
Peer IP Address
: 10.1.88.2
Vrrp Interface
: Vlanif5
Source Port
: 10241
Service Index
:0
Destination Port
: 10241
Group Vrrp Status
: Master
Keep Alive Times
:5
Group Status
: Active
Keep Alive Interval
:3
Group Backup Process
: Realtime
Service State
: Connected
Peer Group Device Name
: AirEngine9700-M
Service Batch Modules
Peer Group Software Version
: V200R021C00SPC200
----------------------------------------------------------
Group Backup Modules
:-
:
---------------------------------------------------------20
Huawei Confidential
• Check the configuration parameters and status of the VRRP group.
▫ Run the display vrrp command.
• Check the configuration parameters and status of the HSB service.
▫ display hsb-service service-index
• Check the configuration parameters and status of the HSB group.
▫ Run the display hsb-group group-index command.
• Check the configuration parameters and status of wireless configuration
synchronization.
▫ Run the display sync-configuration master-redundancy command.
▫ Run the display sync-configuration status command.
Contents
21
1.
WLAN Reliability Technology Overview
2.
VRRP HSB
3.
Dual-Link HSB
4.
Dual-Link Cold Backup
5.
N+1 Backup
Huawei Confidential
Dual-Link HSB Overview
⚫
10.1.88.1/30
HSB channel
two WACs, and an HSB channel is established between the
10.1.88.2/30
WAC1
WAC2
Active WAC
Standby WAC
10.1.5.1/24
10.1.5.2/24
An AP establishes active and standby CAPWAP tunnels with
active and standby WACs to synchronize service data. This
backup mode is called dual-link HSB. In dual-link mode, an AP
has two CAPWAP links.
⚫
In dual-link HSB mode, STA information can be synchronized
from the active WAC to the standby WAC in real time through
the HSB channel. When the active WAC fails, the standby WAC
Switch
immediately switches to the active state to take over WLAN
Secondary link
Primary link
services.
⚫
Switch
The active and standby WACs can be deployed in different
places and do not need to work on the same Layer 2 network,
making deployment more flexible.
CAPWAP tunnel
AP
⚫
Dual-link HSB supports the active/standby and load balancing
networking modes.
22
Huawei Confidential
• To ensure that both WACs provide the same services, it is recommended that the
same service parameters be configured on the active and standby WACs.
Working Process of Dual-Link HSB
⚫
10.1.88.1/30
HSB channel
WAC1
selected and the primary link is established. After the active
10.1.88.2/30
WAC delivers configurations, the secondary link is established.
WAC2
Active WAC
Standby WAC
10.1.5.1/24
10.1.5.2/24
Active/Standby negotiation: The active WAC is preferentially
⚫
Data backup: The active and standby WACs back up STA
entries through the HSB channel to ensure service continuity
during an active/standby switchover or switchback.
⚫
Switch
Primary link
Active/Standby switchover: The AP determines whether to
perform an active/standby switchover. If the active WAC fails
Secondary link
or the downlink is disconnected, an active/standby switchover
is performed between the active and standby WACs to activate
the standby link. User traffic is switched to the new active
Switch
WAC.
CAPWAP tunnel
AP
⚫
Active/Standby switchback: Global switchback is enabled. After
an active/standby switchover is performed, a switchback is
triggered when the link of the original active WAC recovers.
23
Huawei Confidential
• The AP determines whether to perform an active/standby switchover. The process
is as follows:
▫ After establishing links with the active and standby WACs, the AP
periodically sends Echo packets to the WACs for CAPWAP heartbeat
detection to monitor the CAPWAP link status.
▫ When a link is faulty, the WAC cannot respond to Echo packets from the
AP. If the active WAC does not respond to the AP within a specified number
of consecutive CAPWAP heartbeat detection intervals, the AP determines
that the primary link is faulty.
▫ The AP sends an Echo Request packet carrying information about the active
WAC to the standby WAC. After receiving the packet, the standby WAC
switches to the working state. The secondary CAPWAP link also switches to
the working state. The AP sends STA data services to the new active WAC.
• Heartbeat detection is performed on CAPWAP links between the AP and WAC. By
default, heartbeat packets are sent at an interval of 25 seconds, and the number
of heartbeat packet detections is 3. That is, if the AP does not receive heartbeat
packets from the WAC for three consecutive times, the AP considers the WAC
faulty. By default, a dual-link cold backup switchover takes about 75 seconds.
After an active/standby switchover, original users on the AP need to go online
again. If you set the CAPWAP heartbeat detection interval and the number of
CAPWAP heartbeat detections smaller than the default values, CAPWAP link
reliability is degraded. Exercise caution when you set the values. The default
values are recommended.
• To configure dual-link cold backup on a mesh network, set the CAPWAP
heartbeat interval to 25 seconds and the number of heartbeat packet detections
to at least 6. If this configuration is not performed, the WAC sends heartbeat
packets three times at an interval of 25 seconds by default. This may cause
unstable mesh link status.
• The active/standby switchback process is as follows:
▫ The AP periodically sends Discovery Request messages to check whether the
original primary tunnel recovers.
▫ If the original primary link has recovered, the AP triggers switchback
waiting when detecting that this link has a higher priority than the working
one. After detecting that WAC1 recovers, STA entries are updated from
WAC2 to WAC1 through the HSB channel.
▫ To prevent frequent switchovers caused by network flapping, the AP
requests WACs to perform an active/standby switchback after 20 Echo
intervals. Then WAC1 recovers to the working state and WAC2 recovers to
the backup state. If the original primary link fails again, the switchback is
canceled. After the active/standby switchback, the AP sends STAs' data
services to WAC1.
Active/Standby Negotiation Process
⚫
In active/standby negotiation, an AP selects an active WAC and a standby WAC from multiple WACs, and then sets
up a primary and a backup CAPWAP tunnel with the active and standby WACs, respectively.

If the IP addresses of active and standby WACs have been allocated in static, DHCP, or DNS mode, the AP sends the Discovery Request packet in
unicast mode to request connections with the WACs.

If no IP addresses are allocated to WACs or there is no response to the unicast packet, the AP sends another Discovery Request packet in broadcast
mode to discover available WACs in the same network segment. If both the active and standby WACs are working properly, they respond with
Discovery Response packets. The selects the active WAC based on the parameters in the Discovery Response packets. The selection sequence is as
follows:
Is there a
primary WAC?
No
Is there a
No
backup WAC?
No
The configured primary
or backup WAC is used
as the active WAC.
25
Are the WAC
priorities the same?
No
The WAC with a smaller priority
value is used as the active WAC.
No
The WAC with the lightest load
is used as the active WAC.
Yes
Yes
Are there multiple primary
or backup WACs?
No
Yes
Are the WAC loads
the same?
Yes
Compare the IP
addresses of WACs.
The WAC with a smaller IP
address is used as the active
WAC.
Huawei Confidential
• Load comparison mode: Compare the loads of WACs, that is, the number of APs
and STAs. The WAC with the lightest load is the active WAC. The WAC with the
largest number of allowed APs is preferentially selected as the active WAC. If the
number of allowed APs is the same, the WAC with the largest number of allowed
STAs is selected as the active WAC.
• After the AP establishes an active CAPWAP tunnel with the active WAC and
delivers configurations to the AP, the AP starts standby WAC election and
establishes a standby CAPWAP tunnel. The standby WAC election process is
similar and is not described here.
Example for Configuring Dual-Link HSB
⚫
Requirement description:

To improve WLAN reliability and implement remote
disaster recovery, the enterprise uses the dual-link HSB
networking. When the active WAC is faulty, services are
automatically switched to the standby WAC. When the
active WAC recovers, services are automatically switched
10.1.88.1/30
10.1.88.2/30
HSB channel
WAC1
Active WAC
CAPWAP tunnel for wireless
configuration synchronization
WAC2
Standby WAC
10.1.5.2/24
10.1.5.1/24
back to the active WAC.

The IP address and port number of the HSB channel of
WAC1 are 10.1.88.1/30 and 10241, respectively. The IP
Switch
Secondary link
Primary link
address and port number of the HSB channel of WAC2 are
10.1.88.2/30 and 10241, respectively.

Switch
To reduce the configuration workload, enable wireless
configuration synchronization between the master and
backup WACs.
26
Huawei Confidential
CAPWAP tunnel
AP
Dual-Link HSB Configuration Roadmap
Planning the active and
standby WACs
Configuring HSB
Configuring wireless
configuration
synchronization
Verifying the
configuration
Planning IP addresses and
VLANs
Configuring dual-link
backup
Configuring wireless
configuration synchronization
Enabling dual-link backup
Planning the active and
standby WACs
Configuring an HSB service
Checking dual-link backup
Binding services
Checking the HSB service
status
Configuring the link
switchover mode
(Optional)
Checking wireless
configuration synchronization
27
Huawei Confidential
Configuring Dual-Link HSB
⚫
On WAC1, configure the IP address of the
⚫
On WAC2, configure the IP address of the
primary WAC as the source IP address of WAC1
primary WAC as the source IP address of WAC1
and the IP address of the backup WAC as the
and the IP address of the backup WAC as the
source IP address of WAC2.
source IP address of WAC2.
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC2-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] primary-access ip-address
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] primary-access ip-address
10.1.5.1
10.1.5.1
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] backup-access ip-address
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] backup-access ip-address
10.1.5.2
10.1.5.2
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] quit
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] quit
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC2-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC1-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] ap-system-profile test
[WAC2-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] ap-system-profile test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] quit
[WAC2-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] quit
[WAC1-wlan-view] ac protect enable
[WAC2-wlan-view] ac protect enable
28
Huawei Confidential
• In this example, the primary and backup WACs are configured in the AP system
profile view. Therefore, the primary WAC serves as the active WAC, and the
backup WAC serves as the standby WAC, without the need to compare WAC
priorities.
• By default, dual-link backup is disabled, and running the ac protect enable
command restarts all APs. After the APs are restarted, the dual-link backup
function takes effect.
Configuring an HSB Service
⚫
On WAC1, configure an HSB service and bind the WLAN and NAC services to the HSB service.
[WAC1] hsb-service 0
[WAC1-hsb-service-0] service-ip-port local-ip 10.1.88.1 peer-ip 10.1.88.2 local-data-port 10241 peer-data-port 10241
[WAC1-hsb-service-0] quit
[WAC1] hsb-service-type ap hsb-service 0
[WAC1] hsb-service-type access-user hsb-service 0
⚫
On WAC2, configure an HSB service and bind the WLAN and NAC services to the HSB service.
[WAC2] hsb-service 0
[WAC2-hsb-service-0] service-ip-port local-ip 10.1.88.2 peer-ip 10.1.88.1 local-data-port 10241 peer-data-port 10241
[WAC2-hsb-service-0] quit
[WAC2] hsb-service-type ap hsb-service 0
[WAC2] hsb-service-type access-user hsb-service 0
29
Huawei Confidential
(Optional) Configuring the Link Switchover Mode
⚫
Two link switchover modes are available:

Priority mode (default): An AP preferentially switches traffic to the primary link.

Network stabilization mode: An AP preferentially uses the link with high stabilization.
To change the priority mode to the network stability mode, run the following commands:
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] ac protect link-switch mode network-stabilization
Configure the number of Echo packets sent within a statistics collection interval.
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] ac protect link-switch packet-loss echo-probe-time 30
Configure the packet loss rate start and difference thresholds for an active/standby link switchover.
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] ac protect link-switch packet-loss start-threshold 25
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] ac protect link-switch packet-loss gap-threshold 20
30
Huawei Confidential
• To allow an AP to use a link with high network stabilization, set the
active/standby link switchover mode to the network stabilization mode. When
the condition for triggering an active/standby link switchover is met, the AP
preferentially switches service traffic to the link on a network with higher
network stabilization. In this case, whether an active/standby link switchover is
performed is only related to the network stabilization of links but not related to
the active and standby roles of links.
• In dual-link HSB and cold backup scenarios, the network stabilization of the
primary and secondary links is determined based on the Echo packet loss rate.
The primary/secondary link switchover is performed when the following
conditions are met:
▫ An AP collects statistics about Echo packets on the current link for a
specified number of times, and determines that the packet loss rate of the
link exceeds the packet loss rate start threshold.
▫ The packet loss rate on the current link is higher than that of the other link,
and the difference between the two links is higher than the packet loss rate
difference threshold.
Verifying the Dual-Link HSB Configuration
⚫
Run the display ac protect command on WAC1 and WAC2 to view the dual-link backup configurations.
[WAC1] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: enable
Protect AC IPv4
: 10.1.5.2
Protect AC IPv6
:Priority
:0
Protect restore
: enable
...
------------------------------------------------------------
31
[WAC2] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: enable
Protect AC IPv4
: 10.1.5.1
Protect AC IPv6
:Priority
:1
Protect restore
: enable
...
------------------------------------------------------------
Huawei Confidential
• By default, dual-link backup is disabled, and running the ac protect enable
command restarts all APs. After the APs are restarted, the dual-link backup
function takes effect.
• If dual-link backup is enabled, running the ac protect enable command does not
restart APs. You need to run the ap-reset command on the active WAC to restart
all APs and make the dual-link backup function take effect.
Configuring Wireless Configuration Synchronization
⚫
On WAC1, configure WAC1 as the master AC and specify the IP address of the local AC.
[WAC1] wlan
[WAC1-wlan-view] master controller
[WAC1-master-controller] local-controller ip-address 10.1.5.2 psk Huawei@123
[WAC1-master-controller] quit
⚫
On WAC2, configure WAC2 as the local AC and specify the IP address of the master AC.
[WAC2] wlan
[WAC2-wlan-view] master-controller ip-address 10.1.5.1 psk Huawei@123
⚫
Manually trigger wireless configuration synchronization.
[WAC1-wlan-view] synchronize-configuration
32
Huawei Confidential
• To implement wireless configuration synchronization in dual-link HSB scenarios,
you need to manually configure the master AC (active WAC) and local AC
(standby WAC) roles and specify their IP address on each other. In this manner,
the master AC and local AC can be identified correctly to establish a CAPWAP
tunnel for transmitting wireless configuration synchronization data.
• After the master AC and local AC are configured, the existing public
configurations on the two WACs are inconsistent. In this case, manually trigger
wireless configuration synchronization to ensure that the existing public
configurations are consistent. Any subsequent public configuration operations on
the master AC will be automatically synchronized to the local AC.
Verifying the Wireless Configuration Synchronization Status
⚫
Run the display sync-configuration status command on the master AC and local AC to view the wireless
configuration synchronization status. If the status is up, the wireless configuration synchronization
function is normal.
[WAC1-wlan-view] display sync-configuration status
Controller role:Master/Backup/Local
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Controller IP Role Device Type
Version
Status
Last synced
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10.1.5.2
Local
AirEngine9700-M
V200R021C00
up
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1
[WAC2-wlan-view] display sync-configuration status
Controller role:Master/Backup/Local
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Controller IP Role Device Type
Version
Status
Last synced
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10.1.5.1
Master
AirEngine9700-M
V200R021C00
up
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1
33
Huawei Confidential
Contents
34
1.
WLAN Reliability Technology Overview
2.
VRRP HSB
3.
Dual-Link HSB
4.
Dual-Link Cold Backup
5.
N+1 Backup
Huawei Confidential
Dual-Link Cold Backup Overview
⚫
10.1.5.1/24
WAC1
WAC2
Active WAC
Standby WAC
In dual-link cold backup mode, each AP sets up a primary and
a secondary CAPWAP link with the active and standby WACs,
10.1.5.2/24
respectively without an HSB channel between the active and
standby WACs.
⚫
Because there is no HSB channel between the active and
standby WACs, they do not synchronize information with each
other. When the active WAC fails, the standby WAC switches to
the working state to provide services. STAs need to go online
Switch
again, and services are interrupted for a short period of time.
Secondary link
Primary link
This mode applies to scenarios that do not require high WLAN
service reliability.
Switch
⚫
Dual-link cold backup allows active and standby WACs to be
deployed at different places, and supports the active/standby
CAPWAP tunnel
and load balancing networking modes.
AP
⚫
Dual-link cold backup does not support wireless configuration
synchronization.
35
Huawei Confidential
• To ensure that both WACs provide the same services, it is recommended that the
same service parameters be configured on the active and standby WACs.
Working Process of Dual-Link Cold Backup
10.1.5.1/24
10.1.5.2/24
WAC1
WAC2
Active WAC
Standby WAC
⚫
Active/standby negotiation: The active WAC is preferentially
selected and the primary link is established. After the active
WAC delivers configurations, the secondary link is established.
⚫
Active/Standby switchover: The AP determines whether to
perform an active/standby switchover. If the active WAC fails
or the downlink is disconnected, an active/standby switchover
Switch
Primary link
is performed between the active and standby WACs to activate
Secondary link
the standby link. Existing STAs on the APs go offline and then
online again.
Switch
⚫
Active/Standby switchback: Global switchback is enabled. After
an active/standby switchover is performed, a switchback is
CAPWAP tunnel
triggered when the link of the original active WAC recovers.
AP
36
Huawei Confidential
• The active/standby negotiation and active/standby switchover are similar to
those in dual-link HSB and are not described here.
• Active/Standby switchback:
▫ The AP periodically sends Discovery Request messages to check whether the
original primary link recovers.
▫ If the original primary link has recovered, the AP triggers switchback
waiting when detecting that this link has a higher priority than the working
one.
▫ To prevent frequent switchovers caused by network flapping, the AP
requests WACs to perform an active/standby switchback after 20 Echo
intervals. Then WAC1 recovers to the working state and WAC2 recovers to
the backup state. The original primary link recovers to the working state. If
the original primary link fails again, the switchback is canceled. After the
active/standby switchback, the AP sends STAs' data services to WAC1.
Example for Configuring Dual-Link Cold Backup
⚫
Requirement description:

An enterprise deploys two WACs in geographic redundancy
mode to improve WLAN reliability. When the active WAC is
faulty, services are automatically switched to the standby
WAC. When the active WAC recovers, services are
10.1.5.1/24
10.1.5.2/24
WAC1
WAC2
Active WAC
Standby WAC
automatically switched back to the active WAC.

The WLAN of the enterprise carries non-key enterprise
services and does not require high network reliability.
Therefore, the dual-link cold backup networking is
Switch
Secondary link
Primary link
applicable.

Management IP addresses of WAC1 and WAC2: 10.1.5.1/24
and 10.1.5.2/24, respectively (WAC1 as the active WAC;
Switch
WAC2 as the standby WAC)
CAPWAP tunnel
AP
37
Huawei Confidential
Dual-Link Cold Backup Configuration Roadmap
Planning the active and
standby WACs
Configuring dual-link cold backup
Viewing the configuration
Planning IP addresses and
VLANs
Configuring dual-link cold
backup
Checking dual-link backup
Planning the active and
standby WACs
Configuring the active/standby
switchback function
Checking the link
switchover mode
Configuring the link switchover
mode
(Optional)
Enabling dual-link backup
38
Huawei Confidential
Configuring Dual-Link HSB
⚫
On WAC1, configure the IP address of the
⚫
On WAC2, configure the IP address of the
primary WAC as the source IP address of WAC1
primary WAC as the source IP address of WAC1
and the IP address of the backup WAC as the
and the IP address of the backup WAC as the
source IP address of WAC2.
source IP address of WAC2.
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC2-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] primary-access ip-address
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] primary-access ip-address
10.1.5.1
10.1.5.1
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] backup-access ip-address
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] backup-access ip-address
10.1.5.2
10.1.5.2
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] quit
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test] quit
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC2-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC1-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] ap-system-profile test
[WAC2-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] ap-system-profile test
[WAC1-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] quit
[WAC2-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] quit
[WAC1-wlan-view] ac protect enable
[WAC2-wlan-view] ac protect enable
39
Huawei Confidential
• By default, dual-link backup is disabled, and running the ac protect enable
command restarts all APs. After the APs are restarted, the dual-link backup
function takes effect.
Verifying the Configuration
⚫
Run the display ac protect command to
check the dual-link backup status.
⚫
Run the display ap-system-profile command
to check the IP addresses of the active and
standby WACs.
[WAC1] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: enable
...
-----------------------------------------------------------[WAC2] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: enable
...
------------------------------------------------------------
40
Huawei Confidential
[WAC1] display ap-system-profile name test
-----------------------------------------------------------AC priority
:Protect AC IP address
:Primary AC
: 10.1.5.1
Backup AC
: 10.1.5.2
...
-----------------------------------------------------------[WAC2] display ap-system-profile name test
-----------------------------------------------------------AC priority
:Protect AC IP address
:Primary AC
: 10.1.5.1
Backup AC
: 10.1.5.2
...
------------------------------------------------------------
Contents
41
1.
WLAN Reliability Technology Overview
2.
VRRP HSB
3.
Dual-Link HSB
4.
Dual-Link Cold Backup
5.
N+1 Backup
Huawei Confidential
N+1 Backup Overview
CAPWAP tunnel
Enterprise HQ
Standby
WAC
⚫
In N+1 backup, multiple active WACs share one standby WAC,
and an AP joins only one active WAC and one standby WAC.
Switch
⚫
In this example, the WAC in the enterprise HQ can function as
the standby WAC for local WACs in branch 1 and branch 2.
⚫
WAN
establish CAPWAP tunnels only with their own active WACs.
⚫
Active
WAC
services from the active WAC and establishes a CAPWAP link
with the AP to manage and provide services for the AP.
Switch
⚫
The N+1 backup mode supports active/standby switchover and
switchback.
AP
42
When the active WAC is faulty or the CAPWAP link between
the active WAC and AP fails, the standby WAC takes over
Active WAC
Enterprise branch 1
When WACs and the network are working properly, APs
Enterprise branch 2
Huawei Confidential
• When the CAPWAP tunnel between an AP and the active WAC is disconnected,
the AP attempts to establish a CAPWAP tunnel with the standby WAC. After the
new CAPWAP tunnel is established, the AP restarts and obtains configurations
from the standby WAC. During this process, services are affected.
Working Process of N+1 Backup
CAPWAP tunnel
Enterprise HQ
Standby
WAC
⚫
Active/Standby negotiation: An AP selects an active
WAC based on the algorithm and establishes a
Switch
CAPWAP tunnel with the active WAC.
⚫
WAN
Active/Standby switchover: When the active WAC or
the CAPWAP link between the active WAC and AP is
faulty, the standby WAC sets up a CAPWAP link with
the AP and the AP goes online again.
Active
WAC
Active WAC
⚫
Switch
Active/Standby
switchback:
enabled.
an
After
Global
switchback
is
active/standby
switchover
is
performed, a switchback is triggered when the link of
the original active WAC recovers.
AP
Enterprise branch 1
43
Enterprise branch 2
Huawei Confidential
• Active/Standby negotiation: The process is similar to that for active WAC
selection in dual-link backup, and is not described here.
• Active/Standby switchover: When the AP detects a heartbeat packet transmission
timeout, it considers that the link between the AP and the active WAC is
disconnected and sets up a CAPWAP link with the standby WAC. The AP sets up a
CAPWAP link with the standby WAC in the following situations:
▫ If the IP address of the standby WAC is configured on the active WAC, the
AP sets up a CAPWAP link with the standby WAC directly.
▫ If the IP address of the standby WAC is not configured on the active WAC,
the AP broadcasts Discovery Request packets to discover WACs and selects
the standby WAC to establish a CAPWAP link.
• Active/Standby switchback:
▫ The AP periodically sends Primary Discovery Request packets to detect the
active WAC status.
▫ After the active WAC recovers, it returns a response packet carrying the
WAC priority to the AP. When the AP receives the response packet from the
active WAC, the AP learns that the active WAC recovers and has a higher
priority than its currently connected WAC. If the switchback function is
enabled, an active/standby switchback is triggered.
▫ To prevent frequent switchovers caused by network flapping, the WACs
perform an active/standby switchback after 20 heartbeat intervals.
Example for Configuring N+1 Backup
⚫
Requirement description:

CAPWAP tunnel
AP_1 is managed and configured by WAC1 (active) and
Standby WAC3
WAC3 (standby).

10.1.5.3/24
AP_2 is managed and configured by WAC2 (active) and
WAC3 (standby).

AP_1 is in the management VLAN 6. The switch functions
Active WAC1
Management
VLAN for WACs:
VLAN 5
Active WAC2
as the DHCP server. The WAC address lists 10.1.5.1 and
10.1.5.3 are carried through the DHCP option field.

10.1.5.1/24
Switch
10.1.5.2/24
AP_2 is in the management VLAN 7. The switch functions
as the DHCP server. The WAC address lists 10.1.5.2 and
10.1.5.3 are carried through the DHCP option field.

The AP determines the active/standby relationship based
on the configurations of the primary and backup WACs.
44
Huawei Confidential
Management
VLAN for AP_1:
VLAN 6
AP_1
Management
VLAN for AP_2:
VLAN 7
AP_2
N+1 Backup Configuration Roadmap
Planning N+1 backup
Configuring N+1 backup
Verifying the
configuration
Planning IP addresses
and VLANs
Configuring N+1 backup
Checking N+1 backup
Configuring the link
switchover mode
(Optional)
Checking the link
switchover mode
Planning WAC priorities
Configuring the
active/standby
switchback function
Enabling N+1 backup
45
Huawei Confidential
Configuring N+1 Backup (1/2)
⚫
On WAC1, configure the IP addresses of the
⚫
On WAC2, configure the IP addresses of the
active and standby WACs in the AP system
active and standby WACs in the AP system
profile and enable N+1 backup.
profile and enable N+1 backup.
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test1
[WAC2-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test2
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test1] primary-access ip-address
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test2] primary-access ip-address
10.1.5.1
10.1.5.2
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test1] backup-access ip-address
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test2] backup-access ip-address
10.1.5.3
10.1.5.3
[WAC1-wlan-ap-system-prof-test1] quit
[WAC2-wlan-ap-system-prof-test2] quit
[WAC1-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC2-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group2
[WAC1-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] ap-system-profile test1
[WAC2-wlan-ap-group-ap-group2] ap-system-profile test2
[WAC1-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] quit
[WAC2-wlan-ap-group-ap-group2] quit
[WAC1-wlan-view] undo ac protect enable
[WAC2-wlan-view] undo ac protect enable
46
Huawei Confidential
Configuring N+1 Backup (2/2)
⚫
On WAC3, configure the IP addresses of the active and standby WACs in the AP system profile and
enable N+1 backup.
[WAC3-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test1
[WAC3-wlan-ap-system-prof- test1] primary-access ip-address 10.1.5.1
[WAC3-wlan-ap-system-prof- test1] backup-access ip-address 10.1.5.3
[WAC3-wlan-ap-system-prof- test1] quit
[WAC3-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC3-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] ap-system-profile test1
[WAC3-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] quit
[WAC3-wlan-view] ap-system-profile name test2
[WAC3-wlan-ap-system-prof- test2] primary-access ip-address 10.1.5.2
[WAC3-wlan-ap-system-prof- test2] backup-access ip-address 10.1.5.3
[WAC3-wlan-ap-system-prof- test2] quit
[WAC3-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group2
[WAC3-wlan-ap-group-ap-group2] ap-system-profile test2
[WAC3-wlan-ap-group-ap-group2] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] undo ac protect enable
47
Huawei Confidential
• Note that dual-link backup (HSB or cold backup) and N+1 backup are mutually
exclusive.
• The ac protect enable command enables dual-link backup globally and disables
N+1 backup. The undo ac protect enable command enables N+1 backup and
disables dual-link backup.
• VRRP HSB and N+1 backup are mutually exclusive, but they can be configured
together. That is, VRRP HSB is configured between every two WACs to function
as one virtual WAC, and N+1 backup can be configured between different virtual
WACs.
Verifying the Configuration
⚫
Run the display ac protect command to check
N+1 backup information on the WACs.
[WAC1-wlan-view] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: disable
Protect AC IPv4
:Protect AC IPv6
:Priority
:0
Protect restore
: enable
...
-----------------------------------------------------------[WAC2-wlan-view] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: disable
Protect AC IPv4
:Protect AC IPv6
:Priority
:0
Protect restore
: enable
...
-----------------------------------------------------------48
Huawei Confidential
⚫
Run the display ap-system-profile command
to check the IP addresses of the active and
standby WACs.
[WAC1] display ap-system-profile name test1
-----------------------------------------------------------AC priority
:Protect AC IP address
:Primary AC
: 10.1.5.1
Backup AC
: 10.1.5.3
...
-----------------------------------------------------------[WAC2] display ap-system-profile name test2
-----------------------------------------------------------AC priority
:Protect AC IP address
:Primary AC
: 10.1.5.2
Backup AC
: 10.1.5.3
...
------------------------------------------------------------
Quiz
1.
(Single-answer question) An enterprise has high requirements on WLAN reliability and
requires WACs to be deployed at different places. Which of the following WAC backup
solutions is recommended? (
49
1. C
A.
VRRP HSB
B.
Dual-link cold backup
C.
Dual-link HSB
D.
N+1 backup
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This courses describes WAC reliability technologies on a WLAN, including VRRP HSB, dual-
link HSB, dual-link cold backup, and N+1 backup.
⚫
On completion of this chapter, you will be able to master the common WLAN reliability
networking architectures and independently establish reliability networking based on the
lab environment.
50
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
51
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (1/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
52
Full Name
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
BFD
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
CAPWAP
Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNS
Domain Name Server
EFM
Ethernet in the First Mile
HSB
Hot-Standby Backup
MAC
Media Access Control
NAC
Network Admission Control
STA
Station
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (2/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
53
Full Name
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright © 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors
that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Cloud Management Solution
Foreword
⚫
With the rapid development of cloud computing, the on-demand cloud service mode
becomes more popular so that the traditional network management mode also experiences
great changes. In this situation, the cloud-based network management has been a trend, as
well as a new model for enterprise network construction, operations and maintenance
(O&M).
⚫
This course describes common WLAN cloud-based management networking: cloud-based
WAC management and cloud-based AP management.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand the architecture and main functions of iMaster NCE-Campus.

Understand the cloud-based WAC management network architecture.

Understand how to configure cloud-based WAC management.

Understand the cloud-based AP management network architecture.

Understand how to configure cloud-based AP management.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. Introduction to iMaster NCE-Campus
2. Cloud-based WAC Management
3. Cloud-based AP Management
4
Huawei Confidential
Introduction to iMaster NCE-Campus
As the cloud management platform of the CloudCampus Solution, iMaster NCE-Campus provides services such as
⚫
service configuration and O&M monitoring for network devices, and can function as an authentication server to
implement access control on end users.
iMaster NCE-Campus
Device
management
service
Access
authentication
service
Performance
collection
service
Big data service
Carrier network
Cloud
WAC
AP
Cloud AP
Cloud
Cloud
Cloud AP
firewall
switch
Site 2
Site
Tenant network
Site 1
Tenant A
5
Huawei Confidential
Tenant B
iMaster NCE-Campus Functional Architecture
One-stop management
Network service planning
Device and site management
LAN service configuration
Network connectivity configuration (general configuration and service
configuration of WACs, APs, switches, and firewalls)
WAN service configuration
Network connectivity
Traffic
configuration
steering policy
ACL
Security policy
Network service monitoring
Network monitoring
Network service maintenance
File management
Access control
Campus network virtualization
WAN virtual network
configuration
6
Device plug-and-play
Topology management
WAN optimization
End user monitoring
Service alarm
Cloud security
NAT
IP address management
Log management
Underlay routing domain
automation
Virtual network management
Virtual network management
QoS
Site-to-site/Site-to-Internet/Site-to-legacy site service orchestration
Authentication
User
Guest
Terminal
Free
management management management and authorization mobility
management
Network resource
pool management
Access management
Application management
Security policy
WAN service monitoring
Device maintenance
Valueadded
service
Certificate
authentication
BGP EVPN configuration
WAN-side overlay service
QoS
Redirection
Authentication
component
management
External network or service
resource management
LAN-WAN interconnection
Huawei Confidential
• The WLAN cloud management technology mainly involves functions such as
network service planning and network service monitoring.
• This course does not describe how to install and deploy iMaster NCE-Campus. For
details, see the iMaster NCE-Campus Product Documentation.
Contents
1. Introduction to iMaster NCE-Campus
2. Cloud-based WAC Management
3. Cloud-based AP Management
7
Huawei Confidential
Cloud WAC Networking
In this architecture, iMaster NCE-Campus is used to centrally manage and configure WLAN devices,
⚫
with the WAC working in cloud mode and APs working in Fit AP mode.
⚫
Registration
query center
iMaster NCE-Campus: provides unified cloud-based
management for Huawei network devices (including WACs,
Cloud management
platform
Gateway
APs, routers, switches, and firewalls), and supports
independent service provisioning and routine O&M for
multi-tenant networks.
Cloud WAC
⚫
Registration query center: is used to query the management
mode and home cloud management platform (IP address of
the platform) of a device. The address of the registration
Fit AP
query center is preset on a WAC before delivery.
⚫
STA
8
Cloud WAC: controls and manages all APs on a WLAN.
STA
Huawei Confidential
• All WACs running V200R010C00 and later versions support cloud-based
management.
• Compared with the traditional "WAC + Fit AP" architecture, the cloud-based
management architecture has the following advantages:
▫ Automatic deployment through plug-and-play reduces network deployment
costs.
▫ All network elements (NEs) are centrally monitored and managed on the
cloud management platform.
▫ Cloud solutions usually provide various tools on the cloud, such as the
CloudCampus APP.
Switching the WAC to the Cloud Mode
A WAC must be switched to the cloud mode in one of the following ways before it can register with
⚫
iMaster NCE-Campus:
Through DHCP
Through the CLI
• The DHCP Option 148
parameter is pre-defined on a
DHCP server, carrying the
specified cloud mode and
iMaster NCE-Campus address
information.
• Switch the WAC to the cloud
mode through the CLI or the
WAC's web system.
• When obtaining an IP address
from the DHCP server, the
WAC can parse the Option
148 field in the DHCP
message and then switches to
the cloud mode.
9
• Log in to the WAC and
manually configure the
address information of
iMaster NCE-Campus.
Through the registration
query center
• After a WAC with factory
settings connects to an
enterprise network, it sends a
query request to the
registration query center
deployed on the Internet using
the preset domain name
(register.naas.huawei.com)
and port number (10020) of
the registration query center.
• If the query result is the cloud
mode, the WAC switches to
the cloud mode.
Huawei Confidential
• The requirements for configuring Option 148 on the DHCP server are as follows:
▫ To use the URL of iMaster NCE-Campus for registration, on the DHCP
server, set the Option 148 field to option 148 ascii "agilemode=agilecloud;agilemanage-mode=domain;agilemanage-domain=domainname;agilemanage-port=port-number;ap-agilemode=tradition-fit;".
▫ To use the IP address of iMaster NCE-Campus for registration, on the DHCP
server, set the Option 148 field to option 148 ascii "agilemode=agilecloud;agilemanage-mode=ip;agilemanage-domain=ipaddress;agilemanage-port=port-number;ap-agilemode=tradition-fit;".
• Log in to the WAC, manually switch the working mode, and configure the IP
address of the cloud management platform.
▫ Run the ac-mode cloud command to switch the WAC to a cloud WAC.
▫ Run the cloud-mng controller { url url-string | ip-address ip-address } port
port-number [ source-interface { LoopBack loopback-number | Vlanif vlanid } ] command to configure iMaster NCE-Campus address information on
the WAC.
• A WAC can obtain its working mode and the iMaster NCE-Campus address in
following modes in descending order of priority:
▫ Through a DHCP server
▫ Through the CLI or the web system
▫ Through the registration query center
Process for a WAC to Be Managed by the Cloud
Management Platform (Through DHCP)
⚫
When deploying a WLAN, you can deploy a WAC through plug-and-play (PnP) to simplify initial configuration operations and
accelerate WAC onboarding. A WAC can obtain the cloud mode and cloud management platform address information from the
DHCP server and register with iMaster NCE-Campus in PnP mode. The process is as follows:
Cloud management platform
(Cloud) gateway
1
NETCONF
3
2
Manage the WAC.
Perform registration and
authentication and establish
a NETCONF channel.
The WAC obtains the working
mode and registration
address and switches to the
obtained mode.
Cloud WAC
10
Huawei Confidential
• Negotiation phase:
▫ After a WAC with factory settings is connected to the local network, it
establishes a communication with the upstream device through PnP VLAN
auto-negotiation and functions as a DHCP client to broadcast a DHCP
request. After receiving the request, the DHCP server (usually the egress
gateway or a standalone device) returns a response packet. When
allocating an IP address to the WAC, the DHCP server also sends the cloud
mode and iMaster NCE-Campus address information to it through the
DHCP Option 148 field.
▫ The WAC parses the Option 148 field to obtain the cloud mode and iMaster
NCE-Campus address information and switches to the cloud mode.
• Registration and authentication phase:
▫ The WAC uses its CA certificate to register with iMaster NCE-Campus. After
the two parties authenticate each other's certificate, a secure NETCONF
channel is established between the WAC and iMaster NCE-Campus.
• Cloud management phase:
▫ After the NETCONF transmission channel is established, you can remotely
manage and maintain the WAC through iMaster NCE-Campus.
Process for a WAC to Be Managed by the Cloud Management
Platform (Through the Registration Query Center)
⚫
A WAC can obtain the cloud mode and cloud management platform address from the registration query center and
then register with iMaster NCE-Campus in PnP mode. The process is as follows:
Cloud management platform
Manage the WAC.
3
Registration query center
Synchronize
device
information.
1
Perform registration
and authentication
and establish a
NETCONF channel.
The WAC obtains the working
mode and registration address and
switches to the obtained mode.
2
(Cloud) gateway
Cloud WAC
11
Huawei Confidential
• Negotiation phase:
▫ After a network administrator adds a device ESN on iMaster NCE-Campus,
iMaster NCE-Campus automatically synchronizes the ESN to the
registration query center. The registration query center records the device
ESN and iMaster NCE-Campus address.
▫ After the WAC with factory settings is connected to the local network, it
establishes a communication with the upstream device through PnP VLAN
auto-negotiation, obtains an IP address from the DHCP server, and accesses
the Internet through the egress gateway.
▫ The WAC sends an HTTP packet to the registration query center for query
based on its own ESN as well as the preset domain name
register.naas.huawei.com and port number 10020 of the registration query
center. The WAC thereby obtains the cloud mode and iMaster NCE-Campus
address information and switches to the cloud mode.
• Registration and authentication phase:
▫ The WAC uses its CA certificate to register with iMaster NCE-Campus. After
the two parties authenticate each other's certificate, a secure NETCONF
channel is established between them.
• Cloud management phase:
▫ After the NETCONF channel is established, you can remotely manage and
maintain the WAC through iMaster NCE-Campus.
Fit AP Onboarding Process
⚫
The following figure shows how a Fit AP registers with and joins a WAC in the cloud-based WAC
management solution.
Fit AP
Cloud WAC
Cloud management platform
The WAC goes online successfully.
Deliver AP entries and license
information.
AP onboarding
process
The AP discovers the WAC
and initiates registration.
A CAPWAP tunnel is established,
and the AP goes online successfully.
Check AP entries and licenses
and allow the AP to go online.
Report AP status.
Deduct license
resources.
12
Huawei Confidential
• When a WAC goes online on iMaster NCE-Campus, iMaster NCE-Campus delivers
AP entries and corresponding license resources to the WAC based on the
association relationships between the WAC and APs.
▫ After connecting to the network, a Fit AP sends a Discovery Request packet
to the WAC, discovers the WAC based on the Discovery Response packet
replied by the WAC, and initiates registration with it. The process is the
same as that in the traditional scenario.
▫ The WAC determines whether to allow the AP to go online based on the AP
entries and licenses. If the AP matches an entry and the license for the AP
has not expired, the WAC allows the AP to go online.
▫ A CAPWAP tunnel is established between the AP and WAC, and the AP goes
online successfully.
▫ The WAC reports the AP online status to iMaster NCE-Campus.
▫ iMaster NCE-Campus deducts the corresponding license resources.
Example for Configuring Cloud-based WAC Management
⚫
Requirement description:

An enterprise hopes to deploy the cloud-based WAC
management solution on its intranet to centrally manage
and monitor the WLAN on the cloud management platform.

Core switch
Cloud WAC
An engineer manually switches the WAC's working mode
and configures the cloud management platform address, so
that the WAC can register with the cloud management
Access switch
platform.

The planned information is as follows:
◼
IP address of the cloud WAC: 192.168.200.2/24
◼
IP address and port number of the cloud management platform:
Fit AP
172.21.10.1/24 and 10020
◼
A core switch functions as the DHCP server to assign IP addresses to
Fit APs, and the assigned IP addresses and the WAC's IP address
reside on the same network segment.
13
Huawei Confidential
STA
STA
STA
Cloud
management
platform
Configuration Roadmap
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
Perform pre-configurations for WAC onboarding on
iMaster NCE-Campus:

Create a site of the WAC type and add the WAC ESN to the
site.

Import the license.
Complete network connectivity configurations to
ensure that the WAC is reachable to the cloud
management platform and Fit APs.
Switch the WAC's working mode to cloud mode.
Start
Perform pre-configurations for
WAC onboarding on NCE.
Configure network connectivity.
Switch the WAC's working mode.
Log in to the WAC and configure address information
of the cloud management platform.
Configure address information of
the cloud management platform.
Perform pre-configurations for Fit AP onboarding on
iMaster NCE-Campus:
Perform pre-configurations for Fit
AP onboarding on NCE.

Import the AP list.

Configure association relationships between APs and the
WAC.
Log in to the cloud WAC and configure Fit AP
onboarding and wireless services.
14
Huawei Confidential
Configure WAC
onboarding.
Configure Fit AP onboarding and
wireless services.
End
Configure Fit
AP onboarding.
Configuring WAC Onboarding (1/2)
⚫
Perform pre-configurations for WAC onboarding on iMaster NCE-Campus:

Log in to iMaster NCE-Campus.

Choose Design > Device Management > Add Device > Add, add a WAC as prompted, and click OK.
15
Huawei Confidential
Configuring WAC Onboarding (2/2)
⚫
Log in to the WAC and run the ac-mode cloud command to switch the WAC to the cloud mode.
[WAC3] ac-mode cloud
Warning: This operation will switch the AC mode to cloud, Continue? [Y/N] y
This operation will take several minutes, please wait...
Warning: The authentication mode is switched to SN authentication. Ensure that the APs added offline have SN information.
Otherwise, configurations of these APs may be lost..
⚫
Run the following command to configure iMaster NCE-Campus address information:
[WAC3] cloud-mng controller ip-address 172.21.10.1 port 10020 source-interface Vlanif 100
16
Huawei Confidential
Checking the WAC Online Status
⚫
Log in to iMaster NCE-Campus. On the Device Management page, verify that the WAC status is
Normal, which indicates that the WAC goes online successfully.
17
Huawei Confidential
Configuring Fit AP Onboarding
⚫
Log in to the WAC's web system through iMaster NCE-Campus and configure the CAPWAP source address.

In the device list of iMaster NCE-Campus, click the WAC name. The device details page is displayed.

Click Open Web System in the upper right corner to access the WAC's web system.

Configure the CAPWAP source address.
18
Huawei Confidential
Checking the Fit AP Online Status
⚫
Log in to iMaster NCE-Campus. On the WAC management page, verify that the AP status is Normal
and the running status is normal, which indicates that the AP goes online successfully.
19
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. Introduction to iMaster NCE-Campus
2. Cloud-based WAC Management
3. Cloud-based AP Management
20
Huawei Confidential
Cloud AP Networking
⚫
The cloud AP networking is also a cloud-based management architecture.
Different from the "cloud WAC + Fit AP" networking, the cloud AP
networking does not need a WAC.
Registration
query center
Cloud management
platform
⚫
APs in this networking work in cloud mode and are remotely managed and
configured on iMaster NCE-Campus in a unified manner.
Gateway
⚫
After a cloud AP is deployed, the network administrator does not need to go
to the site for cloud AP software commissioning. After power-on, the cloud
Access switch
AP automatically connects to the specified cloud management platform to
load specified system files such as the configuration file, software package,
and patch file. In this manner, the cloud AP can go online with zero touch
Cloud AP
configuration. The network administrator can deliver configurations to cloud
APs through the cloud management platform anytime and anywhere,
facilitating batch service configurations.
STA
STA
⚫
This networking is simple and cost-effective, and requires no WACs. It is
applicable to small- and medium-sized enterprises, such as chain stores,
shopping malls, and supermarkets.
21
Huawei Confidential
Switching an AP to the Cloud Mode
⚫
APs work in Fit mode by default, and need to be switched to the cloud mode so that they can be centrally managed
by iMaster NCE-Campus. An AP can be switched to the cloud mode in any of the following ways:
Through DHCP
Through the CLI
• On the DHCP server, the
Option 148 field is
configured to carry the
AP mode and iMaster
NCE-Campus
information, based on
which the AP restarts
and switches to the
cloud mode.
• After the command for
switching an AP to the
cloud mode is configured,
the system displays a
message, indicating that
the current configuration
will be cleared and the
AP will restart. After the
AP restarts, it switches to
the cloud mode.
• Log in to the cloud AP
and manually configure
the address information
of iMaster NCE-Campus.
22
Through the
CloudCampus APP
Through the registration
query center
• On the CloudCampus
APP, scan the barcode of
an AP or log in to the AP
through the management
SSID and then switch it to
the cloud mode.
• An AP uses the
registration query center's
URL and port number
that are preconfigured or
obtained through a
software upgrade to
access the registration
query center, obtains the
device management
mode based on its ESN,
and restarts to switch to
the cloud mode.
Huawei Confidential
• The requirements for configuring the Option 148 field of the DHCP server are as
follows:
▫ To register a cloud AP with iMaster NCE-Campus using the URL of iMaster
NCE-Campus, on the DHCP server, set the Option 148 field to option 148
ascii "agilemode=agile-cloud;agilemanage-mode=domain;agilemanagedomain=domain-name;agilemanage-port=port-number;apagilemode=agile-cloud;".
▫ To register a cloud AP with iMaster NCE-Campus using the IP address of
iMaster NCE-Campus, on the DHCP server, set the Option 148 field to
option 148 ascii "agilemode=agile-cloud;agilemanagemode=ip;agilemanage-domain=ip-address;agilemanage-port=portnumber;ap-agilemode=agile-cloud;".
• By default, an AP works in Fit mode. You can switch the AP to the cloud mode
through the CLI:
▫ Run the ap-mode-switch cloud command to switch the AP to the cloud
mode.
▫ Run the cloud-mng controller { ip-address ip-address | url url-string } port
port-number command to configure the IP address or URL of iMaster NCECampus.
Process for an AP to Be Managed by the Cloud Management
Platform (Through DHCP)
⚫
An AP is managed by iMaster NCE-Campus through NETCONF. This process involves the following phases: DHCP
phase, registration and authentication phase, and iMaster NCE-Campus unified management phase, as shown in
the following figure.
Cloud management platform
3
iMaster NCE-Campus manages
APs in a unified manner.
1
During the DHCP
phase, the AP switches
to the cloud mode.
NETCONF
Gateway
2
Perform registration and
authentication and establish
a NETCONF channel.
Cloud AP
23
Huawei Confidential
• DHCP phase:
▫ If an AP is unconfigured, the automatic address obtaining function is
enabled by default on the default management interface VLANIF 1, and the
AP initiates a DHCP request to apply for an IP address. After receiving the
request, the DHCP server replies with a DHCP response packet carrying
iMaster NCE-Campus information in the Option 148 field. After receiving
the response packet, the AP parses the Option 148 field in the packet,
restarts, and switches to the cloud mode.
▫ After the AP switches to the cloud mode, it sends a DHCP request again,
parses the Option 148 field in the response packet to obtain the IP
address/URL of iMaster NCE-Campus, and saves the information locally.
Alternatively, you can use commands to configure the IP address/URL of
iMaster NCE-Campus on the AP. If the AP obtains the IP address/URL of
iMaster NCE-Campus through both DHCP and the CLI, the information
obtained through DHCP is preferentially used.
• Registration and authentication phase:
▫ After obtaining the IP address/URL of iMaster NCE-Campus, the AP sends a
connection request carrying its own certificate. iMaster NCE-Campus
authenticates the AP certificate first. If the authentication succeeds, it
replies with a response packet carrying its CA certificate. The AP will then
authenticate the CA certificate. After the bidirectional authentication
succeeds, a NETCONF transmission channel is established.
• iMaster NCE-Campus unified management phase:
▫ After the NETCONF transmission channel is established, you can manage
and operate the AP on iMaster NCE-Campus. All the data exchanged
between iMaster NCE-Campus and the AP will be encrypted.
Process for an AP to Be Managed by the Cloud Management
Platform (Through the Registration Query Center)
⚫
Two HTTP/2 connections are established in the process where an AP is managed by the cloud management platform through the
registration query center:


iMaster NCE-Campus connects to the registration query center through HTTP/2 to synchronize information about the AP to be managed.
The AP establishes an HTTP/2 connection with the registration query center, switches the mode, and obtains the NCE address information.
AP
Registration query center
Establish an HTTP/2 bidirectional
authentication connection.
Establish an HTTP/2 bidirectional
authentication connection.
Upload the device ESN and cloud
management platform information.
Send a query packet carrying the device ESN.
Switch to the
cloud mode.
Send a response packet carrying the
cloud mode.
Establish an HTTP/2 bidirectional
authentication connection.
Send a query packet carrying the device ESN.
Send a response packet carrying cloud
management platform information.
Perform registration and authentication.
25
Huawei Confidential
Cloud management platform
Import information about
the AP to be managed.
Example for Configuring Cloud-based AP Management
⚫
Requirement description:

An enterprise hopes to deploy the cloud-based AP management
solution on its intranet to centrally manage and monitor the WLAN
Core switch
on the cloud management platform.

A core switch functions as the DHCP server to allocate IP addresses
to APs. The DHCP Option 148 field is configured with the AP cloud
mode and the IP address and port number of the cloud
Access switch
management platform.

Through DHCP, an AP automatically switches to the cloud mode and
obtains the IP address of the cloud management platform, and then
Cloud AP
registers with the cloud management platform and goes online.

The planned information is as follows:
◼
DHCP address pool for APs: 10.23.200.0/24
◼
IP address and port number of the cloud management platform:
172.21.10.1/24 and 10020
26
Huawei Confidential
STA
Cloud
management
platform
Configuration Roadmap
⚫
⚫
Perform pre-configurations for AP onboarding on iMaster NCE-Campus:

Import the ESN of the AP and the related CA certificate.

Add the AP to be imported to the site.

Import the license.
Complete network connectivity configurations to ensure that the AP
and cloud management platform are reachable to each other.
⚫
Perform pre-configurations for
AP onboarding on NCE.
Configure network connectivity.
DHCP server configuration: Configure the AP cloud mode and the IP
address and port number of the cloud management platform in the
DHCP Option 148 field.
⚫
Start
AP onboarding: An unconfigured AP connects to the network, obtains
information from the DHCP server, and goes online on the cloud
Configure the DHCP server.
Onboard the AP and configure
wireless services.
management platform.
⚫
Wireless service configuration: Log in to the cloud AP and configure
wireless services.
27
Huawei Confidential
End
Configuring iMaster NCE-Campus
⚫
Manage APs in a unified manner through iMaster NCE-Campus. The procedure is as follows:

Log in to iMaster NCE-Campus.

Choose Design > Device Management > Add Device > Add, add an AP as prompted, and click OK.
28
Huawei Confidential
Configuring the DHCP Server
⚫
Configure VLANIF 200 on the core switch to allocate an IP address to the AP, and configure the DHCP Option 148
field to carry the AP cloud mode the IP address and port number of the cloud management platform.
[SW-Core] interface Vlanif 200
[SW-Core-Vlanif200] dhcp select interface
[SW-Core-Vlanif200] dhcp server option 148 ascii "agilemode=agile-cloud;agilemanage-mode=ip;agilemanagedomain=172.21.10.1;agilemanage-port=10020;ap-agilemode=agile-cloud;"
[SW-Core-Vlanif200] quit
⚫
After the AP starts, log in to the core switch and check information obtained by the AP such as the cloud
management platform information.
[SW-Core] display ip pool interface Vlanif200 used
...
Option-value : "agilemode=agile-cloud;agilemanage-mode=ip;agilemanage-domain=172.21.10.1;agilemanageport=10020;ap-agilemode=agile-cloud;"
...
29
Huawei Confidential
Checking the AP Status
⚫
Log in to iMaster NCE-Campus, choose Design > Device Management, and verify that the AP status is
Normal, which indicates that the AP goes online successfully. In this example, AP5 is in cloud mode.
30
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) In the cloud-based AP management solution, which of the
following methods can be used to switch an AP to the cloud mode? (
A. Through DHCP
B. Through the registration query center
C. Through the CLI
D. Through the CloudCampus APP
31
Huawei Confidential
1. ABCD
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the WLAN cloud-based management architecture, including cloud-
based WAC management and cloud-based AP management.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will understand the common WLAN cloud-based
management networking and independently set up a cloud management network based on
the actual environment.
32
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
33
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (1/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
34
Full Name
ACL
Access Control List
BGP
Border Gateway Protocol
CA
Certification Authority
CAPWAP
Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
ESN
Equipment Serial Number
EVPN
Ethernet VPN
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
LAN
Local Area Network
NAT
Network Address Translation
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (2/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
35
Full Name
NETCONF
Network Configuration Protocol
PnP
Plug and Play
QoS
Quality of Service
SSID
Service Set Identifier
WAN
Wide Area Network
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
User Access and Authentication
Foreword
⚫
As wireless communication is based on open media, the security performance of a wireless
local area network (WLAN) becomes the main focus of concern.
⚫
IEEE 802.11-based WLANs provide increasingly higher wireless access bandwidth and carry
more and more services, which in turn poses higher requirements on WLAN security. How to
ensure user access security and data transmission security is a challenge for WLANs.
⚫
This course introduces you to user access authentication security policies, implementation of
STA blacklist and whitelist, and common access authentication modes. This course also
describes the implementation and configurations of 802.1X, MAC address, and Portal
authentication modes.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe the basic process for WLAN access.

Understand the implementation of the STA blacklist and whitelist.

Describe common user access security policies.

Understand how to configure different security policies.

Describe common access control technologies.

Understand how to configure different access control technologies.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
User Access Security
2.
STA Blacklist and Whitelist
3.
Security Policy
4.
Access Control
Huawei Confidential
User Access Security
A set of security measures are taken to safeguard STA access on a WLAN, and secure association is
⚫
established through authentication to ensure that all communication parties have valid identities. The
detailed process for users to access a WLAN is as follows:
Access
Scan
Link
authentication
Authentication
Association
5
Access
authentication
Key negotiation
Data encryption
Network access
Huawei Confidential
Link authentication:
• Open system authentication
• Shared key authentication
Association:
• After link authentication is complete, a
STA initiates link service negotiation using
Association frames.
• Whether a STA can associate with an AP is
determined by the maximum number of
access STAs supported by the AP and
configured user access control functions,
such as STA blacklist and whitelist and
control over the number of users.
Access authentication security policies:
• Open
• Wired equivalent privacy (WEP)
• Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
• WPA2
• WPA3
• WLAN Authentication and Privacy
Infrastructure (WAPI)
Link Authentication
To ensure wireless link security, an AP needs to authenticate STAs that attempt to access the AP. IEEE 802.11
⚫
defines two link authentication modes: open system authentication and shared key authentication.

Open system authentication: No authentication, allowing any STA to be successfully authenticated.

Shared key authentication: The same shared key is preconfigured on a STA and an AP. During link authentication, the AP checks
whether the STA has the same shared key. If so, the STA is authenticated successfully. If not, STA authentication fails.
Shared key authentication is used for link authentication only when the access authentication security policy is
⚫
static WEP. Otherwise, open system authentication is used.
STA
AP
STA
AP
Authentication Request
Authentication Request
Authentication Response
Authentication Response (Challenge)
Authentication Response (Encrypted Challenge)
Authentication Response (success)
Open system authentication process
6
Shared key authentication process
Huawei Confidential
• The shared key authentication process is as follows:
▫ The STA sends an Authentication Request frame to the AP.
▫ The AP generates a challenge and sends it to the STA.
▫ The STA uses the preconfigured key to encrypt the challenge and sends the
encrypted challenge to the AP.
▫ The AP uses the preconfigured key to decrypt the encrypted challenge and
compares the decrypted challenge with the challenge earlier sent to the
STA. If the two challenges are the same, the STA is authenticated
successfully. Otherwise, STA authentication fails.
Contents
7
1.
User Access Security
2.
STA Blacklist and Whitelist
3.
Security Policy
4.
Access Control
Huawei Confidential
Overview of the STA Blacklist and Whitelist
On a WLAN, a STA blacklist or whitelist can be configured to filter access from STAs based on specific
⚫
rules. The blacklist or whitelist allows authorized STAs to connect to the WLAN and rejects access from
unauthorized STAs.

A whitelist contains MAC addresses of STAs that are allowed to connect to a WLAN. After the STA whitelist
function is enabled, only the STAs matching the whitelist can connect to the WLAN.

A blacklist contains MAC addresses of STAs that are not allowed to connect to a WLAN. After the STA blacklist
function is enabled, STAs matching the blacklist cannot connect to the WLAN.
STA1
STA2
STA1
AP
Switch
STA2
AP
Switch
WAC
STA3
STA3
STA whitelist
8
WAC
STA blacklist
Huawei Confidential
• STA whitelist:
▫ As shown in the left figure, visiting employees often bring their laptops in
an AP's coverage area on a campus network. If only STAs of a few local
employees are allowed to connect to the WLAN, the enterprise can
configure the whitelist function on the WAC and add MAC addresses of
these STAs to the whitelist. For example, STA2 in the figure is added to the
whitelist. Then only STA2 can connect to the WLAN, and STAs not in the
whitelist (STA1 and STA3 in the figure, for example) cannot connect to the
WLAN through the AP.
• STA blacklist:
▫ As shown in the right figure, many STAs of local employees exist in an AP's
coverage area on a campus network. Guests or visiting employees
sometimes bring their laptops to this AP's coverage area. If only STAs of
guests or visiting employees are not allowed to connect to the WLAN, the
enterprise can configure the blacklist function the WAC and add MAC
addresses of these STAs to the blacklist. For example, STA3 is added to the
blacklist. Then STA3 cannot connect to the WLAN through the AP, and STAs
not in the blacklist (STA1 and STA2 in the figure, for example) can connect
to the WLAN.
Implementation of the STA Blacklist and Whitelist
The flowchart for implementing the STA blacklist
⚫
Start
and whitelist function is described as follows:

The device checks the access control mode of a STA.

If the whitelist function is enabled, the device checks
Check the access control
mode of the STA.
The whitelist
function enabled.
whether the source MAC address of the packet is in
the whitelist. If so, the device allows the STA to go
Is the whitelist
empty?
online. If not, the device rejects the STA's access
request.

If the blacklist function is enabled, the device checks
whether the source MAC address of the packet is in
the blacklist. If so, the device rejects the STA's access
request. If not, the device allows the STA to go online.

If neither the blacklist nor the whitelist function is
The blacklist and
whitelist function
is disabled.
The blacklist
function enabled.
Yes
No
No
Is the source MAC
address in the
whitelist?
Is the source MAC
address in the
blacklist?
Yes
Yes
No
STA access allowed
enabled, STAs are allowed to go online.
STA access denied
9
Huawei Confidential
• If the STA whitelist or blacklist function is enabled but the whitelist or blacklist is
empty, all STAs can connect to the WLAN.
• Multiple STA whitelist and blacklist profiles can be configured on a WLAN device
and bound to different VAP profiles or AP system profiles. In a VAP profile or an
AP system profile, either the STA whitelist profile or STA blacklist profile takes
effect at one time.
STA Whitelist Configuration
⚫
A STA whitelist profile contains MAC addresses of STAs allowed to connect to the WLAN. To allow only
a few STAs to connect to the WLAN, configure a STA whitelist profile and bind it to an AP system
profile or a VAP profile. When a STA whitelist is bound to both an AP system profile and a VAP profile,
a STA that does not match any rule cannot go online.
⚫
The effective scope of the STA whitelist profile differs according to the profiles to which it is applied.

AP system profile: The STA whitelist profile takes effect based on the AP. If an AP uses the AP system profile,
the STA whitelist profile takes effect on all STAs connected to the AP (including all its VAPs).

VAP profile: The STA whitelist profile takes effect based on the VAP. If an AP uses the VAP profile, the STA
whitelist profile takes effect on all STAs on the corresponding VAP.
[WAC-wlan-view] sta-whitelist-profile name sta-whitelist
[WAC-wlan-whitelist-prof-sta-whitelist] sta-mac mac-address
//Add the MAC address of a STA.
[WAC-wlan-whitelist-prof-sta-whitelist] oui oui
//Add the OUI of a STA.
[WAC-wlan-whitelist-prof-sta-whitelist] quit
10
Huawei Confidential
• When configuring the STA blacklist and whitelist function, note that some
mainstream smart terminals (such as Android terminals) can use random MAC
addresses to associate with a WLAN to improve privacy protection capabilities.
The MAC addresses used by terminals to associate with a WLAN may not be their
real physical MAC addresses. Therefore, MAC address-based services cannot take
effect.
STA Blacklist Configuration
⚫
A STA blacklist profile contains MAC addresses of wireless terminals forbidden to connect to the WLAN.
To forbid only a few STAs to connect to the WLAN, configure a STA blacklist profile and bind it to an
AP system profile or a VAP profile. When a STA blacklist is bound to both an AP system profile and a
VAP profile, a STA that does not match any rule cannot go online.
⚫
The effective scope of the STA blacklist profile differs according to the profiles to which it is applied.

AP system profile: The STA blacklist profile takes effect based on the AP. If an AP uses the AP system profile, the
STA blacklist profile takes effect on all STAs connected to the AP (including all its VAPs).

VAP profile: The STA blacklist profile takes effect based on the VAP. If an AP uses the VAP profile, the STA
blacklist profile takes effect on all STAs on the corresponding VAP.
[WAC-wlan-view] sta-blacklist-profile name sta-blacklist
[WAC-wlan-blacklist-prof-sta-blacklist] sta-mac mac-address
//Add the MAC address of a STA.
[WAC-wlan-whitelist-prof-sta-whitelist] quit
11
Huawei Confidential
• Note that a STA blacklist profile does not support OUI-based configuration
commands.
Contents
12
1.
User Access Security
2.
STA Blacklist and Whitelist
3.
Security Policy
4.
Access Control
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Security Policies
⚫
The following WLAN security policies are available: open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, WPA3, and WAPI. Each
security policy has a series of security mechanisms, including link authentication used to establish a
wireless link, user authentication used when users attempt to connect to a wireless network, and data
encryption used during data transmission.
13
OPEN
WEP
WPA
• Open authentication means
no authentication and no
encryption, and any one can
connect to the network
without authentication.
• WEP encryption uses a
static shared key. STAs use
the same WEP key for
encryption, resulting in low
security.
• WPA defines the Temporal
Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) encryption algorithm
based on WEP.
WPA2
WPA3
WAPI
• Subsequent to WPA, IEEE
802.11i launched WPA2,
which uses a more secure
encryption algorithm —
Counter Mode with Cipher
Block Chaining Message
Authentication Code
Protocol (CCMP).
• WPA3 introduces a variety
of new functions based on
WPA2 and leverages
Protected Management
Frames (PMF) to protect
data security on a WLAN.
• WAPI provides higher
security than WEP and WPA
and consists of WAI and
WPI.
Huawei Confidential
• Open: involves no authentication or encryption, which is not mentioned here.
Application Scenarios of WLAN Security Policies
Security policy for
home and SOHO
networks
•
•
14
Home and SOHO
networks have low
requirements on WLAN
security. Typically,
WPA/WPA2/WPA3Personal is applicable.
This scenario requires
no authentication
server.
Huawei Confidential
Security policy for
retail and hotel
industries
•
•
In the retail industry,
WPA/WPA2-PPSK
authentication can be
used for scanners. Each
scanner is configured
with a unique key and
connected to the same
SSID.
In guest access
scenarios of the hotel
industry, WPA/WPA2PPSK authentication can
be used to authenticate
and authorize guests.
Security policy for
carrier networks
Security policy for
enterprise networks
•
•
Enterprise networks
require high WLAN
security. Typically,
802.1X-based
WPA/WPA2/WPA3Enterprise is applicable.
This scenario requires
an authentication
server, involving
complex configurations.
•
•
Use security policies
unique to STAs, such as
WEP,
WPA/WPA2/WPA3, or
WAPI.
Combine security
policies and user access
authentication.
Common access
authentication modes
include 802.1X, MAC
address, and Portal
authentication.
WEP
⚫
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), defined in IEEE 802.11, is used to protect data of authorized users
from being intercepted by third parties during transmission on a WLAN.

Static WEP: uses a shared key to authenticate STAs and encrypt data. All STAs associating with the same SSID
use the same key to access the WLAN.

Dynamic WEP: works with 802.1X authentication. An 802.1X authentication server dynamically delivers different
WEP encryption keys to STAs for encryption.
STA
AP
Authentication Request
Authentication Response (Challenge)
Authentication Response (Encrypted Challenge)
Authentication Response (success)
Static WEP
15
Huawei Confidential
• Static WEP: uses the RC4 algorithm to encrypt data through a 64-bit, 128-bit, or
152-bit encryption key. Each encryption key contains a 24-bit IV generated by the
system. Therefore, the length of the key configured on the WLAN server and STA
is 40 bits, 104 bits, or 128 bits. A WEP security policy defines a link authentication
mechanism and a data encryption mechanism. Link authentication mechanisms
include open system authentication and shared key authentication.
▫ If open system authentication is used, data is not encrypted during link
authentication. After a STA goes online, service data can be encrypted by
WEP or not, depending on the configuration.
▫ If shared key authentication is used, key negotiation is completed during
link authentication. After a STA goes online, service data is encrypted using
the negotiated key.
• Dynamic WEP: Before IEEE 802.11i is launched, no unified wireless encryption
standard is available. Vendors enhance WEP encryption by leveraging 802.1X
authentication to achieve dynamic WEP encryption. The 40-bit, 104-bit, or 128-bit
dynamic WEP key is dynamically generated and delivered by the 802.1X
authentication server. In this manner, different WEP keys are used for encrypting
different STAs. In the link authentication phase of dynamic WEP, only open
system authentication is supported. After STAs go online, service data is
encrypted using the key that is dynamically generated and delivered by the
server.
• WEP keys are exchanged in clear text, which is insecure and not recommended.
WPA/WPA2
⚫
WPA still uses RC4 as the core encryption algorithm, and proposes the TKIP encryption algorithm based on WEP.
Subsequent to WPA, WPA2 uses the CCMP encryption algorithm, which is more secure.
⚫
Both WPA and WPA2 support 802.1X access authentication and the TKIP or CCMP encryption algorithm. With
almost the same security level, they mainly differ in the protocol packet format.
⚫
WPA/WPA2 is available in the enterprise and personal editions, both involving link authentication, access
authentication, key negotiation, and data encryption.
WPA/WPA2
Personal
WPA/WPA2
WPA/WPA2
Enterprise
16
• WPA/WPA2-Personal uses pre-shared keys (WPA/WPA2-PSK) for simpler implementation
and management.
• No dedicated authentication server is required, and only one PSK needs to be set in
advance on each STA and WLAN node. In this way, users only need to enter the correct
PSK on the STAs for authentication.
• WPA/WPA2-802.1X access authentication is used.
• An authentication server and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) are used for
authentication.
• Users provide credentials for authentication, such as the user name and password, and
are authenticated by a specified authentication server (typically a RADIUS server).
Huawei Confidential
• WPA/WPA2-Enterprise is typically used on large-scale enterprise networks.
WPA/WPA2-PSK (1/2)
⚫
Access authentication phase: A PSK needs to be preconfigured on each WLAN node, which is used only for authentication but not for
encryption.
⚫
Key negotiation phase: A pairwise transient key (PTK) and a group temporal key (GTK) are generated based on the pairwise master
key (PMK) generated during access authentication. The method for generating a PMK varies depending on the PSK format:

If a PSK is in hexadecimal format, it is used as the PMK.

If a PSK is a string of characters, the PMK is calculated using the hash algorithm based on the PSK and SSID.
AP
STA
AP
STA
Generates an
SNonce.
Generates a PTK.
Installs a PTK.
EAPOL-Key (ANonce)
EAPOL-Key (SNonce, MIC, RSNE)
EAPOL-Key (Key RSC, ANonce,
MIC, RSNE, GTK, IGTK)
EAPOL-Key (MIC)
PTK negotiation process
17
Generates an
ANonce.
EAPOL-Key (GNonce, Key RSC,
MIC, GTK, IGTK)
Generates a PTK.
Generates a random
number GNonce.
EAPOL-Key (GNonce, MIC)
Installs a PTK.
GTK negotiation process
Huawei Confidential
• The WPA/WPA2 security policy supports only open system authentication in the
link authentication phase, and is not mentioned here.
• Unicast key negotiation is completed through a four-way handshake by
exchanging Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)-Key frames.
▫ The AP sends an EAPOL-Key frame with an authenticator nonce (ANonce),
which is a random number, to the STA.
▫ The STA calculates the PTK based on its own MAC address, MAC address of
the AP, PMK, ANonce, and supplicant nonce (SNonce). Then the STA sends
an EAPOL-Key frame to the AP. This frame carries the SNonce, robust
security network element (RSNE), and message integrity code (MIC). The
AP then calculates the PTK using its own MAC address, MAC address of the
STA, PMK, ANonce, and SNonce, and validates the MIC to determine
whether the STA's PMK is the same as its own PMK.
▫ The AP sends an EAPOL-Key frame carrying the ANonce, RSNE, MIC, and
encrypted GTK to the STA, requesting the STA to install the PTK.
▫ The STA sends an EAPOL-Key frame to the AP, notifying the AP that the
PTK has been installed and will be used. After receiving the frame, the AP
installs the PTK.
• Group key negotiation is completed through a two-way handshake, which begins
after a PTK is generated and installed through a four-way handshake.
▫ The AP calculates the GTK, uses the unicast key to encrypt the GTK, and
sends an EAPOL-Key frame to the STA.
▫ After receiving the EAPOL-Key frame, the STA validates the MIC, decrypts
and installs the GTK, and sends an EAPOL-Key ACK frame to the AP. After
receiving the EAPOL-Key ACK frame, the AP validates the MIC and installs
the GTK.
WPA/WPA2-PSK (2/2)
⚫
Data encryption phase: WPA/WPA2 supports TKIP and CCMP algorithms for data encryption:

TKIP encryption algorithm: It is inherited from WEP and consists of data encryption and information integrity
check.
◼
Data encryption: The stream cipher mechanism is used. The encryption key is generated based on the PTK, sender's MAC
address, and packet sequence number.
◼

Information integrity check: The message integrity code (MIC) authentication and replay attack prevention are supported.
CCMP encryption algorithm: It uses the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption algorithm based on the
block cipher mechanism. AES is a more secure encryption algorithm. In addition to data encryption and integrity
check, AES can effectively defend against network attacks such as brute force cracking.
◼
Data encryption: The AES encryption algorithm is used.
◼
Information integrity check: The CBC-MAC mode is used to check data integrity.
Data encryption and decryption
STA1
19
Information integrity check
AP
Switch
WAC
Huawei Confidential
• CCMP uses the AES encryption algorithm, Counter Mode for encryption, and CBCMAC for integrity check.
• CBC-MAC is short for cipher block chaining message authentication code. It is an
algorithm used to check data integrity.
WPA/WPA2-802.1X (1/2)
⚫
Access authentication: The 802.1X authentication system consists of the client, access device, and authentication
server. EAP is used for information exchange between components in the authentication system.
802.1X client

AP
Access device (WAC)
Authentication server
The EAP packets transmitted between the client and access device are encapsulated in EAPOL format and transmitted on the
LAN.

You can determine to use the EAP termination or EAP relay authentication modes between the access device and authentication
server based on the client support and network security requirements.

Common EAP authentication methods include MD5-Challenge, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, and EAP-PEAP. When EAP termination is
used, only MD5-Challenge authentication is supported. When EAP relay is used, all the preceding authentication methods are
supported.
20
Huawei Confidential
• Compared with the EAP relay mode, in EAP termination mode, the access device
randomly generates an MD5 challenge for encrypting the user password, and
sends the user name, MD5 challenge, and password encrypted by the client to
the RADIUS server for authentication. In EAP relay mode, the challenge used to
encrypt the user password is generated by the authentication server, and the
access device is only responsible for encapsulating EAP packets into RADIUS
packets and transparently transmitting them to the authentication server. The
entire authentication process is implemented by the authentication server.
WPA/WPA2-802.1X (2/2)
⚫
⚫
Key negotiation: A PMK can be generated based on EAP-TLS or EAP-PEAP, as shown in the following figures.
Data encryption: WPA/WPA2-802.1X supports TKIP and CCMP algorithms for data encryption.
STA
AP
WAC
RADIUS server
AP
WAC
RADIUS server
Open system
authentication
Open system
authentication
Association
Association
EAP start
EAP request for user identification
EAP start
EAP request for user identification
EAP response for user identification
User identification
PEAP authentication start
PEAP authentication start
EAP response for user identification
User identification
Server certificate (public key)
Server certificate (public key)
Sends messages such as the
encryption algorithm list, TLS
protocol version, and session ID
Sends messages such as the
encryption algorithm list, TLS
protocol version, and session ID
STA certificate
STA certificate
Server certificate (public key)
Server certificate (public key)
Authentication success
Authentication success,
a PMK generated
STA certificate
STA certificate
Authentication success
Authentication success, a
PMK generated
EAP-TLS-based PMK generation process
21
STA
Huawei Confidential
EAP-PEAP-based PMK generation process
WPA/WPA2-PPSK (1/2)
⚫
In WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication, all STAs connected to a specified SSID use the same key, which may bring security risks.
⚫
WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication inherits the advantages of WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication and is easy to deploy. In addition,
WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication provides different PSKs for different STAs, improving network security.
WPA/WPA2-PSK
WPA/WPA2-PPSK
SSID = huawei
PSK = huawei123
PSK = huawei123
• In WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication, all STAs connected to
a specified SSID use the same key, which may bring
security risks.
22
SSID = huawei
PSK = huawei123
PSK = huawei456
• Multiple users connected to the same SSID can each
have a unique key.
• If a user has multiple STAs, the STAs can connect to
the network using the same PPSK account.
Huawei Confidential
• In WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication, all STAs connected to a specified SSID use the
same key, which may bring security risks. In WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication
mode, users connected to the same SSID can have different keys and be
authorized with different permissions. If a user has multiple STAs, these STAs can
connect to the network using the same PPSK account.
WPA/WPA2-PPSK (2/2)
⚫
WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication has the following characteristics:

Multiple users connected to the same SSID can each have a unique key.

The configuration and deployment are simple.

If a user has multiple STAs, the STAs can connect to the network using the same PPSK account.

A PPSK user is bound to a user group or authorization VLAN so that different authorization policies can be assigned to different
PPSK users.
⚫
WPA/WPA2-PPSK implementation: Create a PPSK user on the WAC and bind the user name, VLAN ID, STA's MAC
address, and access SSID to the user.
Create a PPSK user
(i.e. password)
Set PPSK user parameters
23
⚫
User name
⚫
Branch AP group
⚫
User group
⚫
⚫
VLAN
MAC address bound
to the user
Expiration time
⚫
⚫
SSID
⚫
Maximum number
of access users
Huawei Confidential
• Specify the PPSK user name. If user-name is not specified, the user name
ppsk_auto_user_xxx is automatically generated, in which xxx indicates a serial
number. If user-name is specified, ensure that the user name is unique.
• Specify the user group to which the PPSK user is bound. Authorization is
delivered to the PPSK user based on the user group.
• Specify the authorization VLAN to which the PPSK user is bound. Authorization is
delivered to the PPSK user based on the authorization VLAN.
• Specify the expiration time of the PPSK user. The user cannot access the network
after the specified date. If this parameter is not specified, the PPSK user is valid
until December 31, 2099.
• Specify the maximum number of access users. After this parameter is specified,
only a specified number of access users are allowed to access the network.
• Specify the branch AP group to which the PPSK user belongs. After this
parameter is specified, the PPSK user in the branch can access the network even
after the link between the headquarters and branch is disconnected.
• Specify the MAC address bound to the PPSK user. After this parameter is
specified, only the user bound to the MAC address is allowed to access the
network.
• Specify the SSID for PPSK user access.
WPA/WPA2-DPSK
⚫
Compared with WPA/WPA2-802.1X authentication and Portal authentication, WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication is
easier to deploy. However, when multiple WACs are deployed on the network, PPSK account information must be
configured on each WAC. This makes PPSK account operations complex and does not support unified management
of PPSK accounts. In this case, WPA/WPA2-DPSK authentication is a good choice to replace WPA/WPA2-PPSK.
⚫
DPSK is short for Dynamic Pre-Shared Key. In WPA/WPA2-DPSK authentication, all user accounts are configured
and managed on an authentication server. The following figure shows the authentication process.
STA
AP
Association request
4-way handshake
key negotiation
24
WAC
RADIUS server
Association request
Authorization
message delivery
MAC address
authentication request
MAC address
authentication response
Huawei Confidential
• The DPSK authentication process is as follows:
▫ A STA sends an Association Request message to the AP.
▫ The AP forwards the Association Request message to the WAC.
▫ After receiving the Association Request message, the WAC sends a MAC
address authentication request carrying the MAC address of the STA to the
RADIUS server.
▫ Upon receiving the authentication request, the RADIUS server queries local
authorization information such as the shared key, VLAN, and user group
configured for this MAC address, and sends the authorization information
to the WAC. In this case, the RADIUS server sends the HW-DPSK-Info
attribute value in cipher or plain text to the WAC based on the attribute
configuration.
▫ After receiving the response from the RADIUS server, the WAC delivers the
authorization information to the AP.
▫ The AP and STA perform a four-way handshake to negotiate the key. When
the negotiation succeeds, STA authentication succeeds.
• Ensure that user information, including the shared keys, VLANs, and user groups
for different MAC addresses, has been pre-configured on the RADIUS server
before DPSK authentication.
• WPA/WPA2-DPSK must be used together with MAC address authentication.
WPA3
⚫
WPA3 is the next-generation Wi-Fi encryption protocol released by the Wi-Fi Alliance. On the basis of
WPA2, WPA3 adds new functions to simplify Wi-Fi security assurance methods, implement more
reliable identity authentication, and improve data transmission security.
⚫
Based on application scenarios and security requirements of Wi-Fi networks, two WPA3 modes are
available: WPA3-Personal and WPA3-Enterprise, that is, WPA3-SAE and WPA3-802.1X.
⚫
WPA3 provides the Enhanced Open network authentication mode — Opportunistic Wireless Encryption
(OWE) — based on open system authentication.
Open: no
encryption
WEP: weak
encryption
• Introduced in 1999
• Cracked in 2001
WPA: strong
encryption
WPA2: strong
encryption
WPA3: strongest
encryption
• Introduced in 2003
• Replaced by WPA2 in 2004
• Introduced in 2004
• Replaced by WPA3
in 2018
• Currently the most
secure
• Meeting high security
requirements
25
Huawei Confidential
• Compared with WPA and WPA2, WPA3 has the following improvements:
▫ WPA3 introduces SAE, which is a more secure handshake protocol.
Theoretically, SAE provides forward secrecy. Even if an attacker knows the
password on a network, the attacker cannot decrypt the obtained traffic.
However, on a WPA2 network, an attacker can decrypt obtained traffic
using the password.
▫ The algorithm strength is enhanced, and the Cipher Suite B is supported.
WPA3-SAE
⚫
WPA3-Personal introduces Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE) that provides higher security.
SAE adds an SAE handshake before the four-way handshake process of WPA/WPA2-PSK to dynamically
negotiate a PMK. The PMK used in WPA/WPA2-PSK is related only to the SSID and PSK. SAE leverages
dynamic random variables to negotiate the PMK. With SAE, the PMK negotiated using SAE each time is
different, improving security.
⚫
WPA3-Personal supports only the AES encryption algorithm.
STA
Generates a PWE
encapsulated with a
random number.
Generates a PMK.
SAE Commit
Generates a PWE encapsulated
with a random number.
Generates a PMK.
SAE Commit
SAE Confirm
Verifies the PMK.
AP
Verifies the PMK.
SAE Confirm
SAE exchange process
26
Huawei Confidential
• The SAE handshake can be initiated by either the STA or AP and involves the
following phases:
▫ SAE Commit phase: In this phase, a four-way handshake PMK is generated.
The two authentication entities (AP and STA) both send a password
element of an ECC group (PWE) encapsulated by random numbers. The
PWE is a key derived from the password and the MAC address of the peer
end. Based on the encapsulated PWE, the PMK is generated through
calculation. When the SAE Commit phase is complete, both the
authentication entities generate PMKs but do not know whether their PMKs
are the same.
▫ SAE Confirm phase: The purpose of this phase is to verify that the two
entities have the same PMK. A part of the PMK is used to check the
integrity of the Commit packet sent in the previous phase. If both entities
can pass the check, they have the same PMK and can perform the four-way
handshake.
• WPA3-Personal:
▫ WPA3-Personal introduces the SAE handshake protocol. Compared with
WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication, WPA3-SAE can effectively defend against
offline dictionary attacks and increase the difficulty of brute force cracking.
In addition, the SAE handshake protocol provides forward secrecy. Even if
an attacker knows the password on the network, the attacker cannot
decrypt or obtain traffic, greatly improving the security of the WPA3Personal network.
• WPA2/WPA3 transition mode:
▫ WPA2 is still widely used. To enable WPA3-incapable STAs to access a
WPA3-configured network, the Wi-Fi Alliance defines the WPA3-Personal
transition mode. That is, WPA3 and WPA2 can coexist for a period of time
in the future. The transition mode supports only the AES encryption mode
but does not support the TKIP encryption mode.
▫ In WPA3 transition mode, the access process for WPA2 STAs is the same as
that for STAs using WPA2-PSK authentication, with PMF in optional mode.
However, for WPA3 STAs, the access process uses WPA3-SAE
authentication, with PMF in mandatory mode.
WPA3-802.1X
⚫
WPA3-Enterprise still uses the authentication system of WPA2-Enterprise and uses EAP for identity
authentication, but it enhances security.

Encryption algorithm: The 256-bit Galois/Counter Mode Protocol (GCMP-256) encryption algorithm is
supported. This algorithm also uses the AES encryption algorithm, and the key length is 256 bits.

⚫
Integrity check: The 384-bit SHA data integrity check algorithm is supported to ensure data integrity.
WPA3-Enterprise supports the Cipher Suite B, including the following algorithms:
28

TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384

TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384

TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
Huawei Confidential
OWE Authentication
⚫
In addition to WPA3-Personal and WPA3-Enterprise, WPA3 provides the Enhanced Open network
authentication mode — OWE — based on open system authentication.
⚫
OWE authentication is a Wi-Fi Enhanced Open authentication mode that allows for network access
without the need to enter the password. In OWE authentication mode, a device uses the AES
encryption algorithm to encrypt data on the network, thereby protecting data exchange between STAs
and the Wi-Fi network.
29
Access authentication
Key negotiation
Data encryption
Users can connect to
the WLAN without
entering the password.
The Diffie–Hellman
algorithm is used for
key exchange to
generate a PMK for the
subsequent four-way
handshake.
The AES encryption
algorithm is used to
encrypt data traffic on
the network.
Huawei Confidential
• OWE transition mode:
▫ The OWE transition mode provides backward compatibility with STAs that
do not support OWE authentication. That is, these STAs access the network
in open-system authentication mode, while OWE-capable STAs access the
network in OWE authentication mode.
▫ In OWE transition mode, only the AES encryption mode is supported.
WAPI
⚫
WLAN Authentication and Privacy Infrastructure (WAPI) is a Chinese national security standard for WLANs and was
developed based on IEEE 802.11. WAPI provides higher security than WEP and WPA and consists of the following
parts:

WLAN Authentication Infrastructure (WAI): authenticates user identities and manages keys.

WLAN Privacy Infrastructure (WPI): protects data transmitted on WLANs and provides the data encryption, data verification, and
anti-replay functions.
⚫
WAPI involves identity authentication and key negotiation, which begin after a STA associates with a WAC. After
the key negotiation is complete, the SMS4 algorithm is used for data encryption.
2. Identity authentication
1. STA association with the WAC
STA
AP
WAC
Authentication server
3. Key negotiation
30
Huawei Confidential
• WAPI has the following advantages:
▫ Bidirectional identity authentication: prevents access from unauthorized
STAs and protects a WLAN against attacks from unauthorized WLAN
devices.
▫ Digital certificate identity: A WAPI system has an independent certificate
server. STAs and WLAN devices use digital certificates to prove their
identities, improving network security. When a STA requests to join or leave
a network, the administrator only needs to issue a certificate to the STA or
revoke the certificate of the STA.
▫ Complete authentication protocol: WAPI uses digital certificates to identify
STAs. During identity authentication, the elliptic curve digital signature
algorithm (ECDSA) is used to verify a digital certificate. In addition, the
secure message hash algorithm is used to ensure message integrity,
preventing attackers from tampering with or forging information
transmitted during identity authentication.
Identity Authentication
⚫
WAPI provides two identity authentication modes: certificate-based mode (WAPI-CERT) and PSK-based mode
(WAPI-PSK).

WAPI-CERT: A STA and a WAC authenticate each other's certificate. The certificates must be loaded on the STA and WAC and
verified by an authentication server. After certificate authentication is complete, the STA and WAC use the temporal public key
and private key to generate a base key (BK) for key negotiation.

WAPI-PSK: A STA and a WAC authenticate each other's identities based on the PSK. The STA and WAC must be configured with
the same PSK before authentication. The PSK is converted into a BK during authentication.
STA
WAC
Authentication server
Authentication activation packet
Access authentication request
Access authentication response
Certificate
authentication request
Certificate authentication
response
WAPI certificate authentication process
31
Huawei Confidential
• The WAPI-CERT mode is applicable to large-scale enterprise networks or carrier
networks that can deploy and maintain an expensive certificate system.
• The WAPI-PSK mode does not require an expensive certificate system, so it is
applicable to individual users or small-scale enterprise networks.
• The WAPI certificate authentication process is described as follows:
▫ Authentication activation: When a STA requests to associate or re-associate
with a WAC, the WAC checks whether the STA is a WAPI STA. If so, the
WAC sends an authentication activation packet to trigger the certificate
authentication process.
▫ Access authentication request: The STA sends an access authentication
request carrying the STA's certificate and system time to the WAC. The
system time is the access authentication request time.
▫ Certificate authentication request: When the WAC receives the access
authentication request, it records the access authentication request time
and sends a certificate authentication request to the authentication server.
The certificate authentication request carries the STA's certificate, access
authentication request time, WAC's certificate, and signature generated
using the WAC's private key and the preceding information.
▫ Certificate authentication response: When the authentication server receives
the certificate authentication request, it authenticates the WAC's signature
and the STA's certificate. If the WAC's signature and certificate are invalid,
the authentication fails. If they are valid, the authentication server
authenticates the STA's certificate. After the authentication is complete, the
authentication server constructs a certificate authentication response with
the STA's certificate authentication result, WAC's certificate authentication
result, and signature generated using the authentication results, and sends
the certificate authentication response to the WAC.
▫ Access authentication response: When the WAC receives the certificate
authentication response, it checks the signature to obtain the STA's
certificate authentication result, and controls access of the STA based on
the certificate authentication result. The WAC then forwards the certificate
authentication response to the STA. The STA checks the signature
generated by the authentication server to obtain the WAC's certificate
authentication result, and determines whether to associate with the WAC
based on the result. If the certificate authentication succeeds, the WAC
accepts the access request. Otherwise, the WAC disassociates the STA.
Key Negotiation
⚫
After the WAC is authenticated by the authentication server, the WAC initiates key negotiation with the
STA. Key negotiation consists of unicast key negotiation and group key negotiation.

Unicast key negotiation: A unicast key is generated using a BK based on a specific algorithm.

Group key negotiation: Based on unicast key negotiation, the WAC advertises a multicast key to the STA after
multicast key negotiation succeeds.
STA
WAC
Unicast key negotiation request
WAC
STA
Group key advertisement
Unicast key negotiation response
Group key response
Unicast key negotiation ACK
Obtains or delivers
a unicast key.
WAPI unicast key negotiation process
33
Huawei Confidential
Obtains or delivers a
group key.
WAPI group key negotiation process
Comparison Between Different Security Policies
Security
Policy
Link Authentication
WEP
Open system authentication
or shared key authentication
WPA/WPA2Open system authentication
PSK
WPA/WPA2Open system authentication
802.1X
WPA/WPA2Open system authentication
PPSK
WPA/WPA2Open system authentication
DPSK
Access
Encryption
Authentication Algorithm
Recommended Scenario
None
This security policy is not recommended due to
its low security.
None
TKIP or AES
This security policy has higher security than
WEP. Additionally, no third-party server is
required and the cost is low.
802.1X
authentication
TKIP or AES
None
TKIP or AES
MAC Address
Authentication
TKIP or AES
Home and SMB networks
Large-scale enterprise networks This security policy provides high security and
with high security requirements requires a third-party server.
The deployment is simple, and "one password
Hotels and retail stores
for one device" can be implemented.
This security policy provides high security and
Hotels and retail stores
requires a third-party server.
This security policy provides high security and
Home and SOHO networks
does not require a third-party server.
Government and largeThis security policy is applied to scenarios that
enterprise networks
require extremely high security.
WPA3-SAE
Open system authentication
None
AES
WPA3802.1X
Open system authentication
802.1X
authentication
GCMP-256
OWE
Open system authentication
Portal or MAC
address
authentication
AES
Public places, such as airports,
stations, business centers, and
conference venues
WAPI-PSK
Open system authentication
None
SMS4
Home and SMB networks
SMS4
Large-enterprise and carrier
networks
WAPI-CERT
34
Open system authentication
Huawei Confidential
Description
No encryption Networks with low security
or RC4
requirements
None
It is more secure than open system
authentication and encrypts data.
This security policy is supported only by some
terminals.
This security policy requires an authentication
server and is supported only by some terminals.
Configuring a WLAN Security Policy (1/2)
⚫
Configure WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security { wpa | wpa2 | wpa-wpa2 } psk { pass-phrase | hex } key-value { aes | tkip | aes-tkip }
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
⚫
Configure WPA/WPA2-802.1X authentication.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security { wpa | wpa2 | wpa-wpa2 } dot1x { aes | tkip | aes-tkip }
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
⚫
Configure WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security { wpa | wpa2 | wpa-wpa2 } ppsk { aes | tkip | aes-tkip }
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] ppsk-user psk { pass-phrase | hex } key-value [ user-name user-name | user-group user-group | vlan vlanid | expire-date expire-date [ expire-hour expire-hour ] | max-device max-device-number | branch-group branch-group | macaddress mac-address ]* ssid ssid
35
Huawei Confidential
Configuring a WLAN Security Policy (2/2)
⚫
Configure WPA/WPA2-DPSK authentication.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security { wpa | wpa2 | wpa-wpa2 } dpsk { aes | tkip | aes-tkip }
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
⚫
Configure WPA3-SAE authentication.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security wpa3 sae pass-phrase key-value aes
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
⚫
Configure WAPI-PSK authentication.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security wapi psk { pass-phrase | hex } key-value
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
36
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1.
User Access Security
2.
STA Blacklist and Whitelist
3.
Security Policy
4.
Access Control
◼
Access Control Solution
▫ Access Control Configuration
37
Huawei Confidential
Overview of NAC
⚫
Network Access Control (NAC) is an end-to-end security technology that authenticates access clients
and users to ensure network security.
⚫
NAC provides three authentication modes: 802.1X authentication, MAC address authentication, and
Portal authentication.
User terminal
Network access device
Access server
•
User terminal: various terminals, such as PCs, mobile
phones, printers, and cameras.
•
Network access device: authentication control point
for terminals to access the network. A network access
device authenticates access users and executes
network security policies to implement admission
control (for example, allowing or rejecting network
access of users). The access device can be a device,
router, WAC, AP, or other network devices.
...
...
NAC system architecture
38
•
Access server: is also known as the AAA server and
implements authentication, authorization, and
accounting for users.
Huawei Confidential
• Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) provides a management
mechanism for network security.
▫ Authentication: verifies whether users are permitted to access the network.
▫ Authorization: authorizes users to use particular services.
▫ Accounting: records the network resources used by users.
• AAA can be implemented using multiple protocols. RADIUS is most frequently
used in actual scenarios.
802.1X Authentication
⚫
802.1X authentication is a port-based network access control technology. User identities are verified and network
access permissions are controlled on ports of access devices. 802.1X authentication uses EAP to exchange
authentication information between the client, access device, and authentication server.
Networking mode
• 802.1X clients are usually user terminals. A user can start the
client software to initiate 802.1X authentication.
• A network access device is usually an 802.1X-capable
network device that provides physical or logical ports for
clients to access LANs.
• An authentication server (generally, a RADIUS server) is used
to perform authentication, authorization, and accounting for
users.
802.1X client
AP
Access device
(WAC)
Authentication
server
Application scenario
• 802.1X authentication applies to enterprise users who have
high security requirements.
39
Huawei Confidential
• 802.1X is a Layer 2 protocol that requires no Layer 3 processing. It also has low
performance requirements of access devices, reducing network construction costs.
• 802.1X authentication packets and data packets are transmitted through
different logical ports, improving security.
Portal Authentication
⚫
Portal authentication is also called web authentication. Users can enter their user names and passwords on the web
authentication page for identity authentication. Two ways are available for accessing the authentication page:
⚫
Proactive authentication: A user proactively accesses the Portal authentication website through browsers.
⚫
Redirected authentication: When the access address entered by a user is not the address of the Portal authentication website,
the access device redirects the user to the Portal authentication website.
Portal server
Client
40
AP
Access device
(WAC)
RADIUS server
Huawei Confidential
• Client: In most cases, a client is a host where an HTTP/HTTPS-capable browser is
installed. Sometimes, corresponding client software (such as browsers) is
installed.
• Access device: a network device such as a switch or router, which provides the
following functions:
▫ Redirects all HTTP and HTTPS requests of users on authentication network
segments to the Portal server before authentication is performed.
▫ Interacts with the portal server and authentication server to implement user
identity authentication, authorization, and accounting during
authentication.
▫ Grants users access to the network resources authorized by the
administrator upon successful authentication.
• Portal server: a server system that receives authentication requests from clients,
provides Portal services and authentication pages, and exchanges client
authentication information with access devices.
• Authentication server: interacts with access devices to implement user
authentication, authorization, and accounting.
• Portal authentication does not require dedicated client software. Therefore, it is
typically used in access scenarios requiring no client software or guest access
scenarios.
• A Portal server can be an external Portal server or a built-in Portal server
integrated into an access device. The built-in Portal server implements basic
functions of the Portal server, including web-based login and logout. It cannot
replace the independent Portal server or extensions. For example, the built-in
Portal server does not support MAC address-prioritized Portal authentication.
• Portal authentication has the following advantages:
▫ Ease of use: In most cases, Portal authentication authenticates a user on a
web page, without any additional software required on the client.
▫ Convenient operations: Portal authentication allows for value-added
services on the web page, including advertisement push and enterprise
publicity.
▫ Mature technology: Portal authentication has been widely used on
networks of carriers, fast food chains, hotels, schools, etc.
▫ Flexible deployment: Portal authentication implements access control at the
access layer or at the ingress of key data.
▫ Flexible user management: Portal authentication can be performed on users
based on the combination of usernames and any one of VLANs, IP
addresses, and MAC addresses.
MAC Address Authentication
⚫
MAC address authentication (MAC authentication for short) controls network access permissions of
users based on ports and MAC addresses. User terminals are authenticated by the authentication server
based on their MAC addresses.
⚫
By default, the device triggers MAC address authentication on users after receiving DHCP, ARP,
DHCPv6, or ND packets.
• Terminal: refers to a terminal that attempts to access the
network.
• Access device: functions as the network access control point
Terminal
AP
Access device
(WAC)
Authentica
tion server
that enforces security policies. It permits, denies, isolates, or
restricts network access of users based on the security policies
customized for customer networks.
• Authentication server: checks whether the identities of users
who attempt to access the network are valid and assigns
network access permissions to users who have valid identities.
42
Huawei Confidential
• MAC authentication does not require users to install any client software. It
applies to scenarios where dumb terminals such as IP phones and printers need
to access the network.
• Dumb terminal: Compared with other terminals, dumb terminals have limited
functions and simple interaction modes. Its specific meaning varies according to
the scenario (context). Here, dumb terminals refer to terminals that do not
support the input of authentication information such as usernames and
passwords.
• By default, a MAC address without hyphens (-) is used as the user name and
password for MAC address authentication, for example, 0005e0112233.
Comparison Between Three Authentication Modes
⚫
The three authentication modes have different authentication principles and are applicable to different
scenarios. In actual applications, you can use a proper authentication mode or multiple authentication
modes based on scenarios.
43
Item
802.1X Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication
Application
scenario
New networks with
concentrated users and high
security requirements
Authentication of dumb
terminals such as printers
and fax machines
Scenario where users are
sparsely distributed or
move freely
Client requirement
Yes
No
No
Advantages
High security
No client required
Flexible deployment
Disadvantages
A dedicated authentication
server needs to be deployed,
which is complex.
MAC addresses need to be
registered, complicating
management.
Low security
Huawei Confidential
• Currently, the following multi-mode authentication modes are supported:
▫ MAC address-prioritized Portal authentication allows disconnected users
who have passed Portal authentication to access the network again within
a certain period of time, without having to reenter their user names and
passwords, as long as they pass MAC authentication.
▫ In this authentication mode, the device performs MAC address
authentication and 802.1X authentication on terminals in sequence. The
terminals pass authentication only when the two types of authentication
succeed.
Contents
1.
User Access Security
2.
STA Blacklist and Whitelist
3.
Security Policy
4.
Access Control
▫ Access Control Solution
◼
44
Access Control Configuration
Huawei Confidential
Access Control Solution for Wireless Users
⚫
Solution architecture

Client: terminals with wireless network adapters,
such as laptops, mobile phones, and printers, which
can wirelessly access the network.

Access device: WAC
◼
Network access control point for terminals.
◼
Implements access control (permit, deny, isolate, or
Router
Authentication
server
Aggregation
switch
WAC
Access switch
restrict) based on the security policies formulated by
customer networks.
◼

Enforcement point of authorization policies.
AP
AP
AP
AP
Authentication server: iMaster NCE-Campus
◼
Checks whether the identity of the terminal that
attempts to access the network is valid.
◼
Specifies the network access permissions that a valid
terminal can have.
45
Wireless terminal
Wireless terminal
Huawei Confidential
• With the popularization of wireless devices, we have entered the fully-wireless
office era which is wireless-centric. In the office environment, wired networks are
replaced by wireless networks. Terminals such as laptops, mobile phones, and
printers now mainly access the network in wireless mode. Therefore, this course
describes the NAC configuration solution in wireless scenarios.
NAC Configuration Process — WAC
Configuring an access profile
802.1X access profile
802.1X access control
parameters
Configuring a security
profile
Security profile
Security Policy
MAC access profile
MAC access control
parameters
Portal access profile
(external)
External Portal server
Portal access control
parameters
Portal access profile (builtin)
Built-in Portal server
Portal access control
parameters
46
Huawei Confidential
Configuring an
authentication profile
Authentication profile
Access profile
Authentication scheme
used by the user
Authorization scheme
used by the user
Accounting scheme
used by the user
...
Applying NAC
VAP profile
Security profile
Authentication
profile
NAC Configuration Process — iMaster NCE-Campus
Configuring an
authentication rule
Adding a device
Authentication mode
Configuring an
authorization result
Access mode
Device IP address
Matching rule
RADIUS interconnection
parameters
Portal interconnection
parameters
Data source selection
Authentication protocol
Default action
47
Huawei Confidential
Authorization
policy: ACL, VLAN,
security group,
user-defined
parameters, etc.
Configuring an
authorization rule
Authentication
mode
Access mode
Matching rule
Authorization
result reference
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
802.1X Authentication Configuration — WAC (1/2)
⚫
Configure a security profile.
[WAC] wlan
[WAC-wlan] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security wpa-wpa2 dot1x aes (security policy: WPA/WPA2-8021.X)
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
⚫
Configure an access profile.
[WAC] dot1x-access-profile name test
[WAC-dot1x-access-profile-test] dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap }
[WAC-dot1x-access-profile-test] quit
⚫
//Configure the 802.1X authentication mode.
Configure a RADIUS server.
[WAC] radius-server template test
[WAC-radius-test] radius-server authentication X.X.X.X (IP address of the RADIUS server) 1812
[WAC-radius-test] radius-server accounting X.X.X.X (IP address of the RADIUS server) 1813
[WAC-radius-test] radius-server shared-key cipher Huawei@123 (shared key, which must be the same as that configured on the
RADIUS server)
[WAC-radius-test] quit
[WAC] radius-server authorization X.X.X.X (IP address of the RADIUS server) shared-key cipher Huawei@123 (shared key)
48
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
802.1X Authentication Configuration — WAC (2/2)
⚫
Configure AAA schemes.
[WAC-aaa] authentication-scheme test
[WAC-aaa-authen-test] authentication-mode radius
[WAC-aaa] accounting-scheme test
[WAC-aaa-accounting-test] accounting-mode radius
[WAC-aaa] domain test
[WAC-aaa-domain-test] authentication-scheme test
[WAC-aaa-domain-test] accounting-scheme test
[WAC-aaa-domain-test] radius-server test
⚫
Configure an authentication profile.
[WAC] authentication-profile name test
[WAC-authentication-profile-test] dot1x-access-profile test
[WAC-authentication-profile-test] access-domain test
⚫
Apply the authentication profile and security profile.
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name dot1x
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-dot1x] authentication-profile test
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-dot1x] security-profile test
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-dot1x] quit
49
Huawei Confidential
MAC Authentication
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
802.1X Authentication Configuration — NCE (1/2)
⚫
Add an access device. Choose Admission > Admission Device > Admission Device Management > Create.
⚫
Add an authentication user. Choose Admission > User Management > User > Create.
50
Huawei Confidential
• If the local data source is used as the data source in the authentication rule, you
need to create an authentication user (by configuring information such as the
username and password) on iMaster NCE-Campus. You can also use an external
data source.
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
802.1X Authentication Configuration — NCE (2/2)
⚫
Configure authentication and authorization rules, which can be matched by end users based on specific conditions.
51

Choose Admission > Admission Policy > Authentication Authorization > Authentication Rules, and modify the default
authentication rule or create an authentication rule.

Choose Admission > Admission Policy > Authentication and Authorization > Authentication Rules, and bind an authorization
rule to specify resources available to users after successful authentication.
Huawei Confidential
• The default authorization result of iMaster NCE-Campus can be used. To deliver
a customized authorization result, you need to configure authorization result
rules in advance.
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Troubleshooting 802.1X Authentication Failures
⚫
Check whether the dot1x-access-profile is bound to the authentication profile.

Error-prone configuration: security wpa-wpa2 dot1x aes is configured in the security profile. However, dot1xaccess-profile is not bound to the authentication profile.

⚫
Suggestion: Bind the corresponding access profile to the authentication profile.
Check whether the service VLAN is created on the WAC.

Error-prone configuration: In 802.1X authentication scenarios, EAP packets are control packets and need to be
sent to the WAC through a CAPWAP tunnel. Therefore, the corresponding VLAN must be created on the WAC
regardless of whether direct forwarding or tunnel forwarding is used.

⚫
Suggestion: Create the corresponding service VLAN on the WAC.
802.1X authentication configurations need to be performed on different terminals. For details, see
related documents on Huawei official website.
52
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication Configuration — WAC (1/2)
⚫
Configure a security profile.
[WAC-wlan] security-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] security open
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-test] quit
⚫
Configure an access profile.
[WAC] url-template name portal
[WAC-url-template-portal] url https://X.X.X.X:19008/portal (X.X.X.X is the IP address of the Portal server.)
[WAC-url-template-portal] url-parameter redirect-url redirect-url ssid ssid user-ipaddress userip user-mac umac device-ip ac-ip
[WAC-url-template-portal] quit
[WAC] web-auth-server portal
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] server-ip X.X.X.X (IP address of the Portal server)
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] source-ip Y.Y.Y.Y (source IP address of the WAC)
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] shared-key cipher Huawei@123 (shared key, which must be the same as that configured on the
Portal server)
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] url-template portal
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] quit
[WAC] portal-access-profile name portal
[WAC-portal-access-profile-portal] web-auth-server portal direct
[WAC-portal-access-profile-portal] quit
53
Huawei Confidential
• The URL parameter names configured on the device must be the same as those
supported by the Portal authentication server. iMaster NCE-Campus supports the
following URL parameter names:
▫ redirect-url: The name can be url or redirect-url.
▫ user-ipaddress: The name can be userip.
▫ user-mac: The name can be usermac or umac.
▫ ssid: The name can be ssid.
▫ device-ip: The name can be ac-ip.
▫ ap-mac: The name can be apmac or ap-mac.
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
Portal Authentication Configuration — WAC (2/2)
⚫
Configure the RADIUS server (same as the 802.1X authentication configuration).
⚫
Configure an AAA scheme (same as the 802.1X authentication configuration).
⚫
Configure an authentication profile.
[WAC] authentication-profile name portal
[WAC-authentication-profile-portal] portal-access-profile portal
[WAC-authentication-profile-portal] access-domain test
[WAC-authentication-profile-portal] quit
⚫
Apply the authentication profile and security profile.
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name portal
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-portal] authentication-profile portal
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-portal] security-profile test
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-portal] quit
54
Huawei Confidential
MAC Authentication
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication Configuration — NCE
⚫
Add an access device. Choose Admission > Admission Device > Create and add a WAC. Both RADIUS and Portal
authentication parameters need to be configured.
⚫
For details about how to add authentication users, authentication rules, and authorization rules, see the
configuration method in 802.1X authentication.
55
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication Issue (1/3) — Authentication Failure
⚫
Check whether the shared key is configured on the WAC.

Error-prone configuration: The shared key configured on the WAC must be the same as that on the server.

Suggestion: Reconfigure the shared key and then perform the Portal user authentication test.
[WAC] web-auth-server portal
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] shared-key cipher XXX (shared key, which must be the same as that configured on the
Portal server)
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] quit
⚫
Check whether STA address learning is disabled on the WAC.

Error-prone configuration: When processing an authentication request from the Portal server, the WAC searches
for user MAC addresses based on user IP addresses. If the user IP addresses are not reported by APs, the WAC
does not record the user IP addresses. As a result, the WAC fails to find the matched user MAC addresses based
on the recorded user IP addresses, and thereby cannot process the authentication request.

Suggestion: Enable STA address learning.
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name portal
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-portal] undo learn-client-address ipv4 disable
56
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication Issue (1/3) — Authentication Failure
(Continued)
⚫
If built-in Portal authentication is used, check whether the service type for the local user is configured
correctly.

Error-prone configuration: The web service type is not configured for the local user.
<WAC> display local-user username user-a
The contents of local user(s):
Password : ****************
State : active
Service-type-mask : ...

Suggestion: Set the service type of the local user to web, and then perform the Portal user authentication test.
[WAC] aaa
[WAC-aaa] local-user user-a service-type web
[WAC-aaa] quit
57
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication Issue (2/3) — Portal Server Not
Automatically Pushing an Authentication Page
⚫
Check whether the detection function is enabled in the web-auth-server profile.

Error-prone configuration: The detection function is enabled on the WAC, but the Portal server is not enabled. In
this case, the Portal server status is displayed as Abnormal on the WAC.
[WAC] web-auth-server portal
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] server-detect
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] quit

Suggestion: If the Portal server does not support the detection function or the detection function
is not enabled, disable the detection function on the WAC.
[WAC] web-auth-server portal
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] undo server-detect
[WAC-web-auth-server-portal] quit
58
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
Portal Authentication Issue (3/3) — iOS Terminals Not
Automatically Displaying an Authentication Page
⚫
Check whether the Portal bypass function is configured on the WAC.

Error-prone configuration: The Portal bypass function is enabled on the WAC.
[WAC] portal captive-bypass enable

Suggestion: Disable the Portal bypass function and perform the test again.
[WAC] undo portal captive-bypass enable
⚫
Check whether the Portal server pushes an authentication page through HTTPS.

Error-prone configuration: If the Portal server pushes an authentication page through HTTPS, but no valid
certificate issued by the CA is installed on the Portal server, the Portal authentication page is not automatically
displayed on iOS terminals.

Suggestion: Check whether the Portal server pushes an authentication page through HTTPS. If so, you are
advised to install a valid certificate or change the protocol to HTTP for authentication page pushing.
59
Huawei Confidential
• The iOS operating system provides the Captive Network Assistant (CNA) function.
With the CNA function, the iOS terminals (including iPhone, iPad, and iMac)
automatically detects wireless network connectivity after associating with a
wireless network. If the network connection cannot be set up, the iOS terminals
ask users to enter user names and passwords. If users do not enter the user
names and passwords, the iOS terminals automatically disconnect from the
WLAN.
• However, Portal authentication allows users to access certain resources before
authentication is successful. If the iOS terminals are disconnected, users cannot
access the specified resources. The CNA bypass function addresses this problem.
If the users do not enter user names and passwords immediately, the CNA bypass
function keeps the iOS terminals online before the Portal authentication is
successful. Therefore, the iOS users are allowed to access authentication-free
resources.
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
MAC Authentication Configuration — WAC
⚫
Configure a security profile. (The security profile configuration is the same as that for Portal authentication, and the
security policy is set to open.)
⚫
Configure an access profile.
[WAC] mac-access-profile name test
[WAC-mac-access-profile-test] quit
⚫
Configure the RADIUS server (same as the 802.1X authentication configuration).
⚫
Configure an AAA scheme (same as the 802.1X authentication configuration).
⚫
Configure an authentication profile.
[WAC] authentication-profile name mac
[WAC-authentication-profile-mac] mac-access-profile mac
[WAC-authentication-profile-mac] access-domain test
[WAC-authentication-profile-mac] quit
⚫
Apply the authentication profile and security profile.
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name mac
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-mac] authentication-profile mac
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-mac] security-profile test
[WAC-wlan-vap-prof-mac] quit
60
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
MAC Authentication Configuration — NCE (1/2)
⚫
Add an access device. Choose Admission > Admission Resources > Admission Device Management > Create.
⚫
Add an authentication user. Choose Admission > User Management > MAC Account > Create.
61
Huawei Confidential
802.1X Authentication
Portal Authentication
MAC Authentication
MAC Authentication Configuration — NCE (2/2)
⚫
Configure authentication and authorization rules, which can be matched by end users based on specific conditions.
62

Choose Admission > Admission Policy > Authentication Authorization > Authentication Rules, and modify the default
authentication rule or create an authentication rule.

Choose Admission > Admission Policy > Authentication and Authorization > Authentication Rules, and bind an authorization
rule to specify resources available to users after successful authentication.
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1.
(Single-answer question) Which of the following statements about security policies is
incorrect? (
)
A. WPA/WPA2-802.1X authentication provides high security but is complex to deploy. In addition,
some clients do not support 802.1X authentication.
B. WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication requires multiple PSKs to be preconfigured on each WLAN node.
C. In WPA/WPA2-PSK authentication, all STAs connected to a specified SSID use the same key.
D. In WPA/WPA2-PPSK authentication, users connected to the same SSID can have different keys, and
different authorizations can be delivered to different users.
63
1. B
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
2.
(Single-answer question) Which of the following access control modes is recommended for
newly deployed, high-traffic enterprise networks with strict information security
requirements? (
)
A. 802.1X authentication
B. Portal authentication
C. MAC authentication
D. MAC address-prioritized Portal authentication
64
2. A
Huawei Confidential
Summary
⚫
This
course
systematically
describes
user
access
authentication
security
policies,
implementation of STA blacklist and whitelist, and common access authentication modes.
This course also describes the implementation and configurations of 802.1X, MAC address,
and Portal authentication modes.
⚫
After learning this course, you will be able to independently complete the design,
deployment, and configuration of user access and authentication, and understand the
typical deployment solution of user access and authentication.
65
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
66
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (1/4)
Acronym or Abbreviation
67
Full Name
AAA
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
CBC-MAC
Cipher-Block Chaining Message Authentication Code
CCMP
Counter Mode with CBC-MAC Protocol
DH
Diffie-Hellman
DHCPv6
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6
DPSK
Dynamic Pre-Shared Key
EAP
Extensible Authentication Protocol
EAPoL
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN
ECDHE
Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (2/4)
Acronym or Abbreviation
68
Full Name
ECDSA
Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm
GCMP
Galois Counter Mode Protocol
GTK
Group Temporal Key
MAC
Media Access Control
MD5
Message Digest Algorithm 5
MIC
Message Integrity Code
NAC
Network Access Control
ND
Neighbor Discovery
OWE
Opportunistic Wireless Encryption
PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (3/4)
Acronym or Abbreviation
69
Full Name
PMF
Protected Management Frame
PMK
Pairwise Master Key
PPSK
Private Pre-Shared Key
PSK
Pre-Shared Key
PTK
Pairwise Transient Key
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
RC4
Rivest Cipher 4
RSA
Rivest-Shamir-Adleman
SAE
Simultaneous Authentication of Equals
SHA
Secure Hash Algorithm
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (4/4)
Acronym or Abbreviation
70
Full Name
SOHO
Small Office and Home Office
SSID
Service Set Identifier
TKIP
Temporary Key Integrity Protocol
TLS
Transport Layer Security
TTLS
Tunneled Transport Layer Security
WAI
WLAN Authentication Infrastructure
WLAN Authentication and
Privacy Infrastructure (WAPI)
WLAN Authentication and Privacy Infrastructure
Wired equivalent privacy (WEP)
Wired Equivalent Privacy
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
Wi-Fi Protected Access
WPI
WLAN Privacy Infrastructure
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright © 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors
that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Roaming
Foreword
⚫
The most obvious advantage of the WLAN is that a STA can move within a WLAN without
physical media restrictions. WLAN roaming allows the STA to move within a WLAN without
service interruption.
⚫
WLAN roaming ensures that the STA's IP address remains unchanged. After roaming, the
STA can still access the initially associated network without service interruption.
⚫
This course describes basic concepts of WLAN roaming, roaming technologies, roaming
experience optimization methods, and smart roaming.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand basic concepts of roaming.

Understand the data forwarding path of a STA after roaming.

Understand common roaming optimization technologies.

Understand the implementation principles of smart roaming.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
WLAN Roaming Overview
2.
Process of Traffic Forwarding During Roaming
3.
Roaming Optimization Technologies
4.
Smart Roaming
Huawei Confidential
Background of Roaming
The most obvious advantage of the WLAN is that a STA can move within a WLAN without physical media restrictions. WLAN
⚫
roaming allows the STA to move within a WLAN without service interruption. Multiple APs are located within an extend service set
(ESS). When a STA moves from an AP to another, WLAN roaming ensures seamless transition of STA services between APs.
WLAN roaming offers the following advantages:
⚫

Retains STAs' IP addresses. After roaming, a STA can still access the initially associated network and its access permission remains unchanged.

Avoids packet loss or service interruption caused by long-time authentication.
WAC
AP1
SSID: Huawei
STA
5
AP2
Roaming
SSID: Huawei
STA
Huawei Confidential
• Extend service set (ESS): a group of BSSs that share the same service set identifier
(SSID).
Definition of Roaming
Roaming on a WLAN allows stations (STAs) to move within the coverage areas of access points (APs) belonging to
⚫
the same ESS with nonstop service transmission. As shown in the following figure, a STA moves from the coverage
area of AP1 to that of AP2 without service interruption.
The APs involved in WLAN roaming must have the same SSID, same security profile configurations (different profile
⚫
names allowed), and the same authentication mode and parameter settings in their authentication profiles.
WAC
Switch
AP1
SSID: Huawei
STA
6
Huawei Confidential
AP2
Roaming
SSID: Huawei
STA
WLAN Roaming Modes
⚫
Layer 2 roaming: The service VLAN and gateway of the APs remain unchanged before and after roaming.
⚫
Layer 3 roaming: The service VLANs of the SSIDs are different before and after roaming, and APs provide different Layer 3 service
networks with different STA gateways. In this case, to ensure that the IP address of a roaming STA remains unchanged, the STA's
traffic needs to be sent back to the AP on the initial access network segment to implement inter-VLAN Layer 3 roaming.
Layer 2 roaming
Layer 3 roaming
WAC
WAC
Switch
Switch
AP2
AP1
VLAN10
SSID: Huawei
STA
7
Roaming
VLAN10
SSID: Huawei
STA
AP2
AP1
VLAN10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Roaming
VLAN20
SSID: Huawei
STA
Huawei Confidential
• In some cases, two subnets have the same VLAN ID but belong to different
network segments. Based on the VLAN ID, the system may incorrectly consider
that STAs roaming between two subnets roam at Layer 2. To prevent such an
error, configure a roaming domain to determine whether the STAs roam within
the same subnet. STAs are considered roaming at Layer 2 only when they roam
within the same VLAN and same roaming domain; otherwise, the STAs roam at
Layer 3.
• Run the vlan-mobility-group vlan-mobility-group-id command to configure a
roaming domain in the VAP profile. The roaming domain ID ranges from 1 to
4094. By default, the roaming domain is 1.
Network Architecture of WLAN Roaming
Inter-WAC tunnel (CAPWAP
tunnel): is established using
CAPWAP to synchronize
information about STAs and APs
managed by each WAC in a
mobility group.
WAC1
Mobility group
CAPWAP tunnel
Switch
AP1
Switch
AP2
Intra-WAC
Roaming
STA
8
WAC2
Mobility group: STAs can roam
between WACs in the same
group. This group is called
mobility group.
AP3
Inter-WAC
Roaming
STA
STA
Huawei Confidential
• In this example, AP1 and AP2 are managed by WAC1, while AP3 is managed by
WAC2.
Intra-WAC Roaming
Intra-WAC roaming: A STA associates with the same WAC before and after roaming. As shown in the following
⚫
figure, intra-WAC roaming occurs when the STA roams from AP1 to AP2.
Intra-WAC roaming can be regarded as a special case of inter-WAC roaming where one WAC serves as both the
⚫
HAC (Home AC) and FAC (Foreign AC).
HAC=FAC
Switch
WAC
AP2
AP1
SSID: Huawei
STA
9
Huawei Confidential
Intra-WAC
Roaming
SSID: Huawei
STA
Inter-WAC Roaming
⚫
Inter-WAC roaming: A STA roams between APs connected to different WACs. As shown in the figure,
inter-AC roaming occurs when the STA roams from AP1 managed by WAC1 to AP2 managed by WAC2.
CAPWAP tunnel
WAC1
WAC2
AP2
AP1
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
10
Roaming
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
Huawei Confidential
• Inter-WAC tunnel: To support inter-WAC roaming, WACs in a mobility group
need to synchronize STA and AP information with each other. Therefore, two
WACs establish a tunnel between each other to synchronize data and forward
packets. An inter-WAC tunnel is established using the CAPWAP protocol. As
shown in the figure, WAC1 and WAC2 set up a CAPWAP tunnel for data
synchronization and packet forwarding.
• Note that a WAC can be added to only one roaming group.
• Mobility server: When a STA roams between WACs, a WAC is selected as the
mobility server to maintain the membership table of the mobility group and
deliver member information to other WACs in the group. In this way, WACs in
the same mobility group can identify one another and set up inter-WAC tunnels.
▫ The mobility server can be a WAC outside or inside a mobility group.
▫ A WAC can function as the mobility server for multiple mobility groups.
▫ A mobility server managing other WACs in a mobility group cannot be
managed by another mobility server. That is, if a WAC functions as a
mobility server to synchronize roaming configurations to other WACs, it
cannot be managed by another mobility server or synchronize roaming
configurations from other WACs.
▫ As a centralized configuration point, a mobility server must be able to
communicate with all managed WACs but does not need to provide a high
data forwarding capability.
Concepts of WLAN Roaming
Home WAC (HAC): WAC in a
mobility group with which a STA
associates before roaming.
WAC1
Home AP (HAP): AP in a mobility
group with which a STA
associates before roaming.
Mobility group
CAPWAP tunnel
Switch
AP1
11
WAC2
Switch
AP2
Intra-WAC
Roaming
STA
Foreign WAC (FAC): WAC with
which a STA associates after
roaming.
Foreign AP (FAP): AP with which
a STA associates after roaming.
AP3
Inter-WAC
Roaming
STA
STA
Huawei Confidential
• Home agent: a device that can communicate with the gateway on the home
network of a STA at Layer 2. To enable a STA to access the home network after
roaming, service packets of the STA need to be forwarded to the home agent
through a tunnel. The home agent then sends the packets to the home network.
The HAC or HAP takes the role of the STA's home agent. As shown in the figure,
you can configure WAC1 or AP1 as the home agent for the STA.
• By default, the HAP serves as the home agent of roaming STAs, which can be
changed manually.
Contents
12
1.
WLAN Roaming Overview
2.
Process of Traffic Forwarding During Roaming
3.
Roaming Optimization Technologies
4.
Smart Roaming
Huawei Confidential
Intra-WAC Layer 2 Roaming — Tunnel Forwarding
⚫
Before roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the HAP.

After receiving the service packets, the HAP sends
CAPWAP tunnel
3
them to the WAC through the CAPWAP tunnel.

The WAC forwards the service packets to the upper-
Switch
WAC
layer network through the switch.
⚫
2
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP sends
them to the WAC through the CAPWAP tunnel.

The WAC forwards the service packets to the upperlayer network through the switch.
13
Huawei Confidential
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Roaming
1
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Intra-WAC Layer 2 Roaming — Direct Forwarding
⚫
Before roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the HAP.

After receiving the service packets, the HAP forwards
them to the upper-layer network through the
gateway (switch).
⚫
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP forwards
them to the upper-layer network through the
gateway (switch).
Flow direction of
traffic before
roaming
VLAN 10
STA
Huawei Confidential
Flow direction of
traffic after
roaming
FAP
HAP
SSID: Huawei
14
Switch
WAC
Roaming
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Intra-WAC Layer 3 Roaming — Tunnel Forwarding
⚫
In tunnel forwarding mode, the HAP and WAC can be
considered in the same subnet. Instead of forwarding the
packets back to the HAP, the WAC directly forwards the
CAPWAP tunnel
packets to the upper-layer network.
⚫
⚫
3
Before roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the HAP.

After receiving the service packet, the HAP forwards it to the WAC.

The WAC forwards the service packet to the upper-layer network.
Switch
WAC
2
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packet, the FAP forwards it to the WAC
through a CAPWAP tunnel.

The WAC forwards the service packet to the upper-layer network.
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
15
FAP
HAP
Roaming
1
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
Huawei Confidential
• STAs move from one subnet to another during Layer 3 roaming. To allow the
STAs to access the original network after roaming, ensure that their traffic is
forwarded to the original subnet over CAPWAP tunnels.
Intra-WAC Layer 3 Roaming — Direct Forwarding
(Scenario 1)
⚫
In direct forwarding mode, after a STA roams to
another AP, the STA uses the HAP as its home agent by
CAPWAP tunnel
default. The STA's traffic is forwarded by the home
agent to ensure that the STA can still access the
original network after roaming.
⚫
WAC
Switch
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packet, the FAP forwards it to the
WAC through a CAPWAP tunnel.

The WAC sends the service packets to the HAP through a
CAPWAP tunnel.

The HAP forwards the service packets to the upper-layer
network.
16
Huawei Confidential
3
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
4
2
FAP
Roaming
1
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
Intra-WAC Layer 3 Roaming — Direct Forwarding
(Scenario 2)
⚫
If the WAC and a STA's gateway can communicate
with each other at Layer 2, the WAC can be configured
CAPWAP tunnel
as the STA's home agent. This configuration reduces
3
traffic load of the HAP and the length of the tunnel
between the FAP and home agent, improving data
WAC
Switch
forwarding efficiency.
⚫
2
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packet, the FAP forwards it to the
WAC through a CAPWAP tunnel.

The WAC forwards the service packet to the upper-layer
network.
17
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
Roaming
1
STA
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
Huawei Confidential
• If the WAC and a STA's gateway cannot communicate with each other at Layer 2,
the WAC cannot be configured as the STA's home agent. Otherwise, the service
network will be interrupted after roaming. As shown in the above figure, the
WAC needs to communicate with the gateway of VLAN 10 at Layer 2.
• The home agent takes effect only in Layer 3 roaming scenarios where user data
is transmitted in direct forwarding mode. Changing the home agent will
temporarily interrupt services of Layer 3 roaming users.
• The command line for configuring the home agent is as follows:
▫ [WAC] wlan
▫ [WAC] vap-profile name huawei
▫ [WAC-wlan-vap-prof-huawei] home-agent ac
Inter-WAC Layer 2 Roaming — Tunnel Forwarding
⚫
Before roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the HAP.

After receiving the service packets, the HAP sends
CAPWAP tunnel
3
them to the HAC through the CAPWAP tunnel.

The HAC forwards the service packets to the upper-
HAC
FAC
layer network through the switch.
⚫
2
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP sends
them to the FAC through the CAPWAP tunnel.

The FAC forwards the service packets to the upper-
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Roaming
1
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
layer network through the switch.
18
Huawei Confidential
• STAs stay in the same subnet before and after Layer 2 roaming. The FAP or FAC
forwards packets of Layer 2 roaming STAs in the same way as that it forwards
packets of new access STAs. That is, the FAP or FAC forwards the packets on the
local network, but does not send the packets back to the HAP over the interWAC tunnel.
Inter-WAC Layer 2 Roaming — Direct Forwarding
⚫
Before roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the HAP.

After receiving the service packets, the HAP
CAPWAP tunnel
forwards them to the upper-layer network
through the gateway (switch).
⚫
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP
forwards them to the upper-layer network
through the gateway (switch).
HAC
FAC
Huawei Confidential
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
19
Flow direction
of traffic after
roaming
Flow direction of
traffic before
roaming
Roaming
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Inter-WAC Layer 3 Roaming — Tunnel Forwarding
⚫
Before roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the HAP.

After receiving the service packets, the HAP sends them
CAPWAP tunnel
to the HAC through the CAPWAP tunnel.

network through the switch.
⚫
4
The HAC forwards the service packets to the upper-layer
3
HAC
FAC
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP sends them
to the FAC through the CAPWAP tunnel.

The FAC forwards the service packets to the HAC
through the inter-WAC tunnel.

2
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Roaming
1
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
The HAC forwards the service packets to the upper-layer
network through the switch.
20
Huawei Confidential
• STAs move from one subnet to another during Layer 3 roaming. To allow the
STAs to access the original network after roaming, ensure that their traffic is
forwarded to the original subnet over CAPWAP tunnels.
• In tunnel forwarding mode, service packets exchanged between the HAP and
HAC are encapsulated in the CAPWAP tunnel, and the HAP and HAC can be
considered in the same subnet. Instead of forwarding the packets back to the
HAP, the HAC directly forwards the packets to the upper-layer network.
Inter-WAC Layer 3 Roaming — Direct Forwarding
(Scenario 1)
⚫
In direct forwarding mode, after a STA roams to
another AP, the STA uses the HAP as its home agent by
CAPWAP tunnel
default.
⚫
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP forwards them
to the FAC through a CAPWAP tunnel.

The FAC forwards the service packets to the HAC through
the inter-WAC tunnel.

The HAC sends the service packets to the HAP through a
CAPWAP tunnel.

The HAP forwards the service packets to the upper-layer
3
HAC
FAC
2
5
4
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Roaming
1
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
network.
21
Huawei Confidential
• By default, the HAP functions as the home agent in direct forwarding scenarios
of Layer 3 roaming.
Inter-WAC Layer 3 Roaming — Direct Forwarding
(Scenario 2)
⚫
If the HAC and a STA's gateway can communicate with
each other at Layer 2, the HAC can be configured as the
CAPWAP tunnel
STA's home agent. This configuration reduces traffic load
4
of the HAP and the length of the tunnel between the FAP
and home agent, improving data forwarding efficiency.
⚫
3
HAC
FAC
After roaming:

The STA sends service packets to the FAP.

After receiving the service packets, the FAP forwards them to
the FAC through a CAPWAP tunnel.

The FAC forwards the service packets to the HAC through the
inter-WAC tunnel.

The HAC forwards the service packets to the upper-layer
2
FAP
HAP
VLAN 10
SSID: Huawei
STA
Roaming
1
VLAN 20
SSID: Huawei
STA
network.
22
Huawei Confidential
• In direct forwarding mode of inter-WAC Layer 3 roaming, service packets
exchanged between the HAP and HAC are not encapsulated in the CAPWAP
tunnel; therefore, whether the HAP and HAC reside in the same subnet cannot be
determined. Packets are sent back to the HAP for forwarding by default. If the
HAP and HAC reside in the same subnet, the HAC with higher performance can
be configured as the home agent. This reduces traffic load on the HAP and
improves data forwarding efficiency.
Contents
23
1.
WLAN Roaming Overview
2.
Process of Traffic Forwarding During Roaming
3.
Roaming Optimization Technologies
4.
Smart Roaming
Huawei Confidential
Roaming Duration
⚫
Compared with open system authentication, 802.1X authentication has two additional processes: STA identity authentication and key
negotiation. Compared with PSK authentication, 802.1X authentication takes a longer time in STA identity authentication and
roaming.
⚫
The impact of roaming on services lies in the roaming duration. Therefore, the roaming handover time is a key factor that affects
WLAN service experience during STA roaming.
STA
AP
WAC
RADIUS server
Link
authentication
Reassociation
STA identity authentication
The STA identity
authentication and key
exchange take a long time.
24
Key exchange
Huawei Confidential
• The roaming optimization technologies described in the following sections are
mainly used to shorten the roaming time.
Fast Roaming Using PMK Caching
⚫
Fast roaming is implemented by using pairwise master key (PMK) caching.
⚫
When the security policy is WPA2-802.1X or WPA3-802.1X, or the security policy is WPA/WPA2-802.1X and the WPA2 authentication
mode is configured on the 802.1X client, fast roaming allows STAs to perform only key negotiation during roaming, without having
to be 802.1X authenticated again and being authenticated for the access.
WAC1
Mobility group
WAC2
•
CAPWAP tunnel
•
Switch
Switch
AP1
AP2
•
•
Roaming
STA
25
Huawei Confidential
STA
When the STA accesses the network for the first time,
the STA is authenticated by WAC1 and a PMK is
generated. The WAC synchronizes the PMK information
to WAC2 through the inter-WAC tunnel.
During roaming, the STA sends AP2 a Reassociation
Request frame that carries the PMK-ID.
After receiving the Reassociation Request frame, AP2
notifies the WAC2 that the STA needs to roam from
AP1 to AP2.
The WAC2 searches the PMK caching table for the PMK
corresponding to the STA based on the PMK-ID in the
Reassociation Request frame. If the matched PMK is
found, the WAC2 considers that the STA has passed
802.1X authentication and uses the cached PMK for
key negotiation.
802.11r fast roaming
⚫
The 802.11r protocol defines the Fast BSS Transition (FT) function that reduces the number of
information exchanges in a mobility domain (MD) and does not require 802.1X authentication or key
negotiation during STA roaming. In this manner, users are unaware of any in-roaming service
interruption and experience low-latency data services during roaming, improving user experience.
⚫
According to protocol specifications, 802.11r fast roaming can be implemented in either of the
following modes:

Over-the-Air: A STA directly performs FT authentication with the FAP.

Over-the-DS: A STA communicates with a FAP for FT authentication through a HAP.
26
Huawei Confidential
Intra-WAC 802.11r Fast Roaming
AP1
STA
AP2
Associated with AP1
FT Auth Request
Generate
and install
the PTK
FT Auth Response
FT Reassociation Request
AP2
Associated with AP1
Generate
and install
the PTK
FT Auth Request
FT Auth Response
Generate
and install
the PTK
Generate
and install
the PTK
FT Reassociation Request
FT Reassociation Response
FT Reassociation Response
Roaming to AP2
Roaming to AP2
Over-the-Air
27
AP1
STA
Over-the-DS
Huawei Confidential
• Intra-WAC 802.11r fast roaming (Over-the-Air):
▫ When a STA accesses the network through AP1 for the first time, the STA is
authenticated by the WAC and a PMK is generated. If open system
authentication is used, no PMK is generated in this step.
▪ The WAC generates PMK-R0 (calculated based on the SSID, MDID,
WAC MAC address, and STA MAC address) and PMK-R1 (calculated
based on the PMK-R0, AP MAC address, and STA MAC address) of
each AP based on the PMK, and delivers the PMK-R1 to AP1.
▪ The STA and WAC generate and install the pairwise transient key
(PTK) and the group temporal key (GTK) by performing the 4-way
and 2-way handshakes.
▫ During roaming, the STA initiates an FT authentication request to AP2 and
delivers PMK-R1 to AP2.
▫ After receiving the request, AP2 generates and installs a PTK based on
PMK-R1 and information contained in the request. At the same time, AP2
starts the reassociation timer, and sends an 802.11 FT authentication
response to the STA.
▫ After receiving the response, the STA generates and installs a PTK based on
the information contained in the response. The STA sends a reassociation
request to AP2.
▫ After receiving the reassociation request, AP2 stops the reassociation timer,
and then sends a reassociation response to the STA. If a STA blacklist or
whitelist is configured on the WAC, the AP reports a reassociation response
to the STA during FT reassociation and then reports the STA's reassociation
request to the WAC for processing.
▫ After the STA receives the response, the roaming is complete.
Inter-WAC 802.11r Fast Roaming
WAC1
WAC1
WAC2
PMK update for STA
AP1
STA
PMK update for STA
AP2
STA
Associated with AP1
FT Auth Request
Generate
and
install the
PTK
FT Auth Response
FT Reassociation Request
AP1
AP2
Associated with AP1
Generate
and install
the PTK
FT Auth Request
Generate
and install
the PTK
FT Auth Response
Generate
and
install the
PTK
FT Reassociation Request
FT Reassociation Response
FT Reassociation Response
Roaming to AP2
Roaming to AP2
Over-the-Air
29
WAC2
Over-the-DS
Huawei Confidential
• Inter-WAC 802.11r fast roaming (Over-the-Air):
▫ When a STA accesses the network through AP1 for the first time, the STA is
authenticated by WAC1 and a PMK is generated. If open system
authentication is used, no PMK is generated in this step.
▪ WAC1 generates PMK-R0 (calculated based on the SSID, MDID, WAC
MAC address, and STA MAC address) and PMK-R1 (calculated based
on the PMK-R0, AP MAC address, and STA MAC address) of AP1
based on the PMK, and delivers the PMK-R1 to AP1.
▪ The STA and WAC generate and install the pairwise transient key
(PTK) and the group temporal key (GTK) by performing the 4-way
and 2-way handshakes.
▪ WAC1 synchronizes the PMK information to WAC2 through the tunnel
between them.
▪ WAC2 generates PMK-R0 and PMK-R1 of AP2 based on the PMK, and
delivers PMK-R1 to AP2.
▫ During roaming, the STA initiates an FT authentication request to AP2.
▫ After receiving the request, AP2 generates and installs a PTK based on
PMK-R1 and information contained in the request. At the same time, AP2
starts the reassociation timer, and sends an 802.11 FT authentication
response to the STA.
▫ After receiving the response, the STA generates and installs a PTK based on
the information contained in the response. The STA sends a reassociation
request to AP2.
▫ After receiving the reassociation request, AP2 stops the reassociation timer,
and then sends a reassociation response to the STA. If a STA blacklist or
whitelist is configured on the WAC, the AP reports a reassociation response
to the STA during FT reassociation and then reports the STA's reassociation
request to the WAC for processing.
▫ After the STA receives the response, the roaming is complete.
Comparison of WLAN Roaming Modes
31
Roaming Mode
Whether the STA
Support Is Required
Applied Security Policy
Description
Common roaming
N/A
All security policies
It is applicable to all scenarios and
involves easy configuration. Services may
be interrupted for a short period of time
during roaming.
Fast Roaming using
PMK caching
Yes
WPA2-802.1X
WPA3-802.1X
WPA/WPA2-802.1X (WPA2
specified on the 802.1X client)
It is applicable to only a few scenarios.
During roaming, only key negotiation is
required, without the need to perform
802.1X authentication again, therefore
reducing the roaming delay.
802.11r fast roaming
Yes
Open system authentication
WPA2-PSK-AES
WPA2-PPSK-AES
WPA2-802.1X-AES
It is applicable to multiple scenarios.
During roaming, users do not need to
perform authentication or key
negotiation. The latency is low.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
32
1.
WLAN Roaming Overview
2.
Process of Traffic Forwarding During Roaming
3.
Roaming Optimization Technologies
4.
Smart Roaming
Huawei Confidential
Sticky STAs in Mobility Scenarios
⚫
Sticky STAs: Some STAs stick to the initially connected APs regardless of the far distance to the APs, weak signals, or
low rates. The STAs that fail to roam to neighboring APs with better signals are called sticky STAs.
AP1
AP3
AP2
Short distance, low
path loss,
high-quality signal,
high speed
Short distance, low
path loss,
high-quality signal,
high speed
2
The STA is moving.
1 Before the STA moves, it connects to AP1
with the best signal quality by now.
33
AP4
3 After the STA moves, it still connects to
AP1. However, for the STA, AP4 has the
best signal quality now.
Huawei Confidential
• Sticky STAs may bring the following problems:
▫ Poor service experience: The STAs stick to weak-signal APs, causing a sharp
decrease in the data transmission speed of the radio channel.
▫ WLAN performance degradation: The STAs have poor signals or low rates,
and packet loss and retransmissions occur. As a result, the sticky STAs
occupy the wireless channels for a long time, and other good-signal STAs
cannot obtain sufficient time for using channel resources.
Smart Roaming Overview
⚫
Smart roaming solves the problem that sticky STAs cannot proactively roam to new APs. After smart
roaming is configured, the system proactively steers the STAs to neighboring APs with better signals.
⚫
Common roaming indicates that STAs actively roam from one AP to another. The roaming is initiated
by STAs. In smart roaming, an AP steers a STA to roam to another AP.
WAC
Switch
AP1
SSID: Huawei
AP2
An AP steers a
STA to roam
to another AP
STA
34
SSID: Huawei
STA
Huawei Confidential
• Smart roaming brings the following benefits:
▫ Improved performance
▪ Common coverage scenarios: Smart roaming can steer sticky STAs to
APs with better signals, improving user service experience and overall
WLAN performance.
▪ High-density coverage scenarios: STAs generally have good signals.
Smart roaming can enable STAs to associate with APs with better
signals, significantly improving WLAN performance.
▫ Traffic load balancing
▪ Smart roaming ensures that each STA is associated with the nearest
AP, achieving inter-AP load balancing.
Introduction to 802.11k/v/r
802.11k (neighbor report): enables an AP to transmit information
about its neighboring APs to STAs.
CAPWAP tunnel
WAC1
Mobility group
WAC2
802.11v (BSS Transition Management): enables an AP to steer STAs to
another AP.
802.11r (fast BSS transition): defines the FT authentication process to
shorten the STA reassociation time.
1
AP1
AP2 uses 802.11k to notify the STA of its neighboring APs (AP1 and AP3).
AP2
AP3
2
AP2 uses 802.11v to steer the STA to roam to AP3.
STA
STA
3
35
The STA quickly roams to AP3 using 802.11r.
Huawei Confidential
• The following packets are used to advertise whether an AP or STA supports
802.11k/v/r:
▫ AP capabilities: displayed in Beacon, Probe Response, or Association
Response frames;
▫ STA capabilities: displayed in Probe Request or Association Request frames.
Working Process of Smart Roaming
Collecting information
about neighboring APs
A STA supports 802.11k.
A STA does not support 802.11k.
Enable the STA to
perform 802.11k-based
measurement.
The AP enables channel
scanning to collect
neighbor information.
Identify sticky STAs.
Identifying sticky STAs
The WAC selects a
more appropriate AP
for the STA.
Selecting a roaming target
Yes
Roaming
36
Huawei Confidential
Enable the STA to
roam to the target AP
using 802.11v.
Whether
802.11v is
supported.
No
The current AP disconnects
the STA. It needs to select
and associate to another AP.
Collecting Information About Neighboring APs
802.11k-capable STA
⚫
When detecting a sticky STA, an AP proactively triggers
the STA to collect neighboring AP information based on
the 802.11k mechanism. The Beacon Report mechanism is
used to require STAs to report information about
neighboring APs.
AP
AP
802.11k-capable STA
37
802.11k-incapable STA
⚫
For 802.11k-capable STA, an AP listens on Probe frames
sent by the STAs or periodically switches channels to
scan the STAs.
AP
AP
Proactive scanning
Proactive scanning
802.11k-incapable STA
Huawei Confidential
• Sticky STAs require the network to help them select more appropriate APs.
Therefore, the network side needs to collect information about neighboring APs
of the STAs through the measurement and information collection mechanism
defined in the 802.11k protocol. This mechanism, however, is not applicable to
802.11k-incapable STAs. For them, APs discover neighboring APs of the STAs
through proactive channel scanning.
Identifying Sticky STAs
⚫
Identifying sticky STAs: When a STA associates with an AP, the AP collects the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and
access rate of the STA in real time and determines whether the STA is sticky. If the AP considers the STA as a sticky
one, the AP reports the STA information to the WAC. The WAC then determines whether to perform smart roaming.
⚫
By default, an AP determines whether a STA is sticky based on the SNR threshold of 20 dB. That is, if the SNR of a
STA is lower than 20 dB for several times in a period, the AP identifies the STA as a sticky one.
The AP periodically
checks the SNR of the
currently associated STA.
The AP determines
whether the SNR is less
than the threshold in a
period.
No
The associated STA is
not sticky.
38
Huawei Confidential
• Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR), in dB.
Yes
The associated STA is
sticky.
Selecting a Roaming Target
⚫
The WAC queries the neighboring AP list of STAs and selects neighboring APs whose received signal strength indicator (RSSI) and
received signal to noise indicator (RSNI) exceed those of the AP currently associated with the STA based on the specified threshold.
The selected neighboring APs are candidate APs to which the STA is to roam.
⚫
Among all candidate APs, the WAC selects the optimal AP based on the SNR, access rate, and load balancing information, and then
triggers STA roaming to the target AP.
⚫
The process for 802.11k-capable STAs to select the target AP to roam to is shown below.
Determine that
the STA is sticky.
Whether latencysensitive services
exist
Yes
Do not trigger smart
roaming.
No
Select APs meeting
the roaming
difference threshold
conditions
39
Filter out APs that
do not meet the CAC
requirement
Filter out APs that
do not support load
balancing
Select the AP with
the strongest signal
strength as the
target AP
Huawei Confidential
• To prevent frequent STA roaming due to STA movements or signal fluctuations,
STA roaming is triggered only when the STA is detected a sticky STA for three
consecutive times. This slide shows the process for 802.11k-capable STAs to select
the target AP to roam to.
• Check whether latency-sensitive services exist:
▫ When delay-sensitive services exist on the STA currently, Roaming may
have a great impact on the service. In this case, roaming may bring poorer
user experience than non-roaming. To ensure user experience, networkcontrolled smart roaming is not triggered for a STA that currently has a
delay-sensitive service.
• Filter out APs that do not meet the CAC requirement:
▫ On a WLAN, as the number of access STAs increases, channel preemption
among STAs becomes increasingly fierce, thereby worsening user
experience. Calling Access Control (CAC) is usually deployed to ensure
network experience of online users. CAC allows an AP to collect statistics on
the channel usage of a radio or the number of online STAs on the radio
and set thresholds to control user access.
▫ In smart roaming, the AP that meets the difference condition is checked
based on CAC. This prevents the impact on online users' and their own
experience after roaming.
• Filter out APs that do not support load balancing:
▫ When load balancing is enabled on a network, a STA initiates an
association request to an AP, the WAC connected to the AP first checks
whether the number of access STAs on the AP exceeds the start threshold
for load balancing. If not, the WAC allows the STA to go online. If so, the
WAC determines whether to allow the STA to go online based on the load
balancing algorithm.
• Select the AP with the strongest signal strength as the target AP:
▫ An optimal AP is selected from APs that meet requirements as a target AP,
and the network side steers the sticky STA to roam to the target AP in the
handover phase.
Roaming
⚫
⚫
For 802.11v-capable STA: An AP forces a STA to roam to the target AP based on the BSS transition mechanism
defined in the 802.11v protocol.
For 802.11v-incapable STA: The WAC instructs the AP that the STA is currently associated with to disconnect this
sticky STA and delivers a STA blacklist to the AP.
Beforeroaming AP
BSS Transition
Management Request
BSS Transition
Management Response
STA
Beforeroaming AP
STA
Afterroaming AP
Disassociation
Probe Request
Probe Request
Probe Request
Probe Response
Probe Response
Authentication Request
Authentication Request
Authentication Response
Authentication Response
Association Request
Association Request
Association Response
Roaming for 802.11v-capable STA
41
Afterroaming AP
Association Response
Roaming for 802.11v-incapable STA
Huawei Confidential
• For an 802.11k-capable STA:
▫ The network side specifies an AP as the target AP for the STA, and sends
the target AP information to the STA through a BSS Transition
Management Request message, which is responded by a BSS Transition
Management Response frame sent by the STA. After authentication
information has been exchanged between the STA and target AP, the STA
connects to the target AP through a reassociation message.
• For an 802.11k-incapable STA
▫ For an 802.11v-incapable STA or a STA that claims to support 802.11v but
actually does not support 802.11v, the WAC instructs the AP that the STA is
currently associated with to disconnect this sticky STA and delivers a STA
blacklist to the AP.
Review of the Smart Roaming Process
⚫
The working process of smart roaming is as follows:

3
An AP collects information about surrounding STAs,
discovers neighboring APs, and periodically reports the
information to the WAC.

WAC
When the STA associates with AP1, AP1 collects the SNR
and access rate of the STA in real time and determines
2
1
whether it is a sticky STA. If AP1 considers the STA as a
1
1
sticky one, AP1 reports the STA information to the WAC.

After receiving the reported information, the WAC selects
the optimal neighboring AP of STA (AP_2) as the target AP
information to AP1.

AP1 forces the STA to roam to AP2 through the BSS
transition mechanism defined in the 802.11v protocol or the
forced logout mode.

42
The STA roams to AP2.
Huawei Confidential
AP2
AP1
to which the STA is to roam and delivers the target AP
STA
4
5
STA
AP3
Key Configurations of Smart Roaming
⚫
Configure smart roaming.

Create an RRM profile.

Enable smart roaming.

Set the smart roaming triggering mode to check-snr.

Configure the SNR threshold for triggering smart roaming.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] smart-roam enable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] smart-roam roam-threshold check-snr
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] smart-roam roam-threshold snr snr-threshold
43
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Single-Answer Question) Which of the following helps to shorten the roaming latency in fast roaming
using PMK caching? (
)
A. Key negotiation is omitted.
B. 802.1X authentication is omitted.
C. 802.1X authentication and key negotiation are omitted.
D. STA reassociation is omitted.
2. (Single-Answer Question) Which of the following roaming technologies is used to solve the problem
that sticky STAs fail to proactively roam to another AP? (
)
A. 802.11r roaming
B. Roaming using PMK caching
C. Smart roaming
D. Layer 3 roaming
44
1. B
2. C
Huawei Confidential
Summary
⚫
This course describes the basic concepts of WLAN roaming and forwarding process of
roaming traffic in different data forwarding modes. Roaming optimization technologies,
such as PMK roaming, 802.11r roaming, and smart roaming, ensure smooth and fast
roaming and greatly reduce the packet loss rate. In this way, service data flows are
transmitted at a low latency during roaming, improving user experience.
⚫
After learning, you will have an understanding of the basic concepts of roaming
technologies and the implementation principles of different roaming technologies.
45
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
46
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym or Abbreviation
47
Full Name
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
BSS
Basic Service Set
ESS
Extended Service Set
PPSK
Private Pre-Shared Key
PSK
Pre-Shared Key
PTK
Pairwise Transient Key
RRM
Radio Resource Management
SNR
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Radio Resource Management
Foreword
⚫
WLANs use radio signals (such as 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz radio waves) as transmission media.
Radio signals are attenuated during transmission in the air, reducing WLAN stability and
thereby degrading network experience of wireless users.
⚫
Radio resource management (RRM) enables APs to automatically detect the surrounding
radio environment, dynamically adjust radio resources such as channels and transmit power,
and intelligently balance STA access loads. RRM helps adjust radio coverage, reduce radio
signal interference, enable a WLAN to quickly adapt to changes in the radio environment,
and ensure WLAN service continuity.
⚫
This course describes the main factors that affect air interface performance and the RRM
technologies such as radio calibration, STA steering, band steering, and load balancing.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe the main factors that affect air interface performance.

Describe common RRM technologies, including radio calibration, band steering, load balancing, and
user CAC.
3
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Air Interface Performance
2.
Radio Calibration
3.
STA Steering
4.
Band Steering
5.
AP-based Load Balancing
6.
User CAC
Huawei Confidential
Factors Affecting Air Interface Performance
An air interface is a virtual logical interface on an AP or STA. Wireless links can be established between
⚫
air interfaces. Air interface performance is affected by the following factors:

Link setup rate: radio mode, bandwidth, number of spatial streams, modulation and coding scheme (MCS), and
guard interval (GI) mode
5

Co-channel and adjacent-channel interference between WLAN devices

Interference from non-Wi-Fi devices

Signal strength of STAs

Number of STAs

STA capability differences (such as supported protocols and number of spatial streams)
Huawei Confidential
• MCS: modulation and coding scheme
• GI mode: During data transmission, the receive and transmit ends do not receive
or send data at all times. During data receiving or sending or multiple
transmissions, mulitipath interference can affect transmission of radio signals.
Setting a GI between data transmissions can improve the transmission effect.
Wi-Fi Interference: Co-Channel and Adjacent-Channel
Interference
Co-channel interference
AP1
Channel 1
Channel 1: 2.412
•
6
Channel 1
AP2
AP1
Channel 1 Channel 2
Channel 1: 2.412
Channel 1: 2.412
When two neighboring APs work on the same
channel, they perform backoff according to the carrier
sense multiple access with collision avoidance
(CSMA/CA) mechanism, which greatly degrades air
interface performance.
Huawei Confidential
Adjacent-channel interference
AP2
Channel 2: 2.417
•
When two neighboring APs work on overlapping
channels, the APs affect each other, leading to
adjacent-channel interference.
•
When two neighboring APs are deployed closely to
each other and have high transmit power, they affect
each other even if they work on non-overlapping
channels (for example, 2.4 GHz channels 1 and 6).
Non-Wi-Fi Interference
The 2.4 GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) frequency band is open and widely used around the world. Various wireless
⚫
products working on the 2.4 GHz frequency band, such as microwave ovens, cordless phones, and Bluetooth devices, can cause
frequency interference to 2.4 GHz WLANs.
Compared with the 2.4 GHz frequency band, the 5 GHz frequency band has less interference. Currently, radars, wireless sensors,
⚫
digital satellites, wireless ATM networks, and software-defined radio devices typically work on the 5 GHz frequency band.
These non-Wi-Fi devices can cause radio signal conflicts and severe interference to WLANs, resulting in poor network experience of
⚫
users.
Bluetooth device
7
Huawei Confidential
Satellite receiver
How the Signal Strength Affects Air Interface Performance
High signal strength is fundamental to good wireless user experience. With a low signal strength, packets can be transmitted only
⚫
Throughput (Gbps)
at low rates, and issues such as packet loss, delay, and retransmission will increase, greatly degrading air interface performance.
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
Distance (m)
Coverage performance of Huawei AirEngine
6761-21T at different distances
* Source: Tolly's report Huawei AirEngine Series Wi-Fi 6 Access Points Performance Evaluation and Feature Validation
8
Huawei Confidential
• According to the free-space signal attenuation model, the signal strength is
related to the frequency and distance. A higher frequency indicates a larger
signal attenuation. As the distance increases, the signal attenuation increases.
How the Number of STAs Affects Air Interface Performance
In case of a single STA, the maximum air interface performance can be reached because no channel contention exists. As the number
⚫
of STAs increases, however, the air interface performance deteriorates due to increased consumption of channel resources.
The following graph shows the performance test result of a Huawei AP with different numbers of STAs. As the number of STAs
⚫
Throughput (Mbps)
increases, the AP's total throughput decreases continuously.
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Multi-user performance test result of the AirEngine
8760-X1-PRO obtained from Huawei lab
9
Huawei Confidential
Number of STAs
STA Capability Differences
STA equipped with a Wi-Fi network adapter that
supports multiple spatial streams
"123456"
AP
"12" "34"
"56"
STA
When both the AP and STA support three spatial streams,
the data to be exchanged between them can be divided into
three parts for simultaneous transmission, which greatly
improves transmission efficiency.
10
Huawei Confidential
STA equipped with a Wi-Fi network adapter that
supports only one spatial stream
"123456"
AP
"12"
STA
When the AP supports three spatial streams but the STA's
Wi-Fi network adapter supports only one spatial stream, the
AP and STA can use only one spatial stream to exchange
data with each other over the air interface. This triples the
data transmission time.
Contents
11
1.
Air Interface Performance
2.
Radio Calibration
3.
STA Steering
4.
Band Steering
5.
AP-based Load Balancing
6.
User CAC
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Radio Calibration
⚫
On a WLAN, the operating performance of APs is affected by the radio environment. For example, a high-power AP
can interfere with adjacent APs if they work on overlapping channels. Radio calibration can dynamically adjust the
channels, power, and frequency bands of APs managed by the same WAC to ensure signal coverage while
minimizing interference. This ensures that the APs can work at the optimal performance.
Dynamic
channel
assignment
(DCA)
Transmit
power
control
(TPC)
Dynamic
frequency
assignment
(DFA)
Dynamic
bandwidth
selection
(DBS)
On a large-scale network, manual radio calibration is time-consuming, and therefore
automatic radio calibration is recommended.
12
Huawei Confidential
• Radio calibration is triggered when a new AP is connected to the network, an AP
is out of service, or the radio environment deteriorates.
Channel Adjustment
⚫
On a WLAN, adjacent APs must work on non-overlapping channels to avoid radio interference. The 2.4 GHz frequency band is
divided into fourteen 20 MHz channels, with adjacent channels overlapping. The 5 GHz frequency band provides more
frequency resources. In addition to 20 MHz channels, APs working on the 5 GHz frequency band support 40 MHz, 80 MHz, and
160 MHz channels.
⚫
In the following figure, before channel adjustment, both AP2 and AP4 work on channel 6, leading to co-channel interference.
After channel adjustment, AP2 is switched to channel 11 so that neighboring APs work on non-overlapping channels,
eliminating interference. Channel adjustment ensures that each AP is assigned an optimal channel to minimize interference
from co-channel or adjacent-channel APs, ensuring reliable network transmission.
AP1
Channel 1
AP3
Channel 11
AP2
Channel 6
AP4
Channel 6
Before channel adjustment
13
AP1
Channel 1
AP3
Channel 11
AP2
Channel 11
AP4
Channel 6
After channel adjustment
Huawei Confidential
• In addition to radio calibration, channel adjustment can also be used for DFS. In
some regions, radar systems work on the 5 GHz frequency band, which may
interfere with radio signals of APs working on the 5 GHz frequency band. The
DFS function enables APs to automatically switch to other channels when they
detect interference on their working channels.
Power Adjustment
An AP's transmit power determines its radio coverage area. APs with higher power have larger coverage areas. Power adjustment
⚫
enables APs to dynamically adjust their transmit power according to the real-time radio environment.
Decreasing the transmit power
Increasing the transmit power
Coverage area
AP2
AP1
AP3
•
Decreasing the
transmit power
AP2
AP2
AP1
AP4
New
AP1
AP3
After AP4 is connected to the network, neighboring APs
decrease their transmit power to minimize interference
while meeting coverage requirements.
•
AP2
AP1
AP3
AP4
Increasing the
transmit power
AP3
When AP4 leaves the network, the WLAN cannot meet
the coverage requirements. In this case, neighboring APs
increase their transmit power.
Wi-Fi signal coverage requirements of STAs
14
Huawei Confidential
• A traditional method to control the radio power is to set the transmit power to
the maximum value to maximize the radio coverage area. However, a high
transmit power level may cause interference to other wireless devices. Therefore,
the optimal power is required to balance the coverage range and signal quality.
Redundant Radio
⚫
A 2.4 GHz redundant radio (redundant radio for short) has co-channel or adjacent-channel interference with
neighboring radios. The area covered by a redundant radio is also covered by neighboring 2.4 GHz radios.
⚫
As shown in the figure, all the four APs work on the 2.4 GHz frequency band. No matter which channel AP4 works
on, co-channel or adjacent-channel interference exists between AP4 and its neighboring APs, and the area covered
by AP4 can also be covered by the other three APs. AP4 is a redundant AP on this WLAN.
Channel 6
AP2
Channel 1
AP1
AP4
Coverage area of
AP4 (redundant AP)
15
Huawei Confidential
AP3
Channel 11
Coverage area of
neighboring APs
Coverage area of the
redundant AP
DFA
⚫
Redundant radios on a WLAN not only generate co-channel interference but also waste network capacity. The
following policies are available to process a redundant radio:

Switching to the 5 GHz mode: If 5 GHz channel resources are available, a redundant radio can be switched to the 5 GHz mode,
increasing the maximum capacity of 5 GHz radios.

Switching to the monitor mode: If no more 5 GHz channel resources are available, a redundant radio can be switched to the
monitor mode and used for scanning services.

Disabling it: Disabling a redundant radio decreases co-channel interference but does not affect coverage.
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
AP2
AP1
All APs work on the 2.4
GHz frequency band and
there is a redundant radio.
16
AP4
AP2
AP1
AP3
AP4
AP3
AP4 switches to the 5
GHz frequency band.
Huawei Confidential
• Manually identifying, switching, or disabling redundant radios will greatly
increase network maintenance costs. To resolve this issue, DFA is adopted to
automatically identify, switch, or disable redundant radios, reducing co-channel
interference on the 2.4 GHz frequency band and increasing system capacity.
• DFA processes a redundant radio as follows:
▫ After identifying a redundant radio, the DCA algorithm switches the radio
to the 5 GHz or monitor mode based on the channels, bandwidth, and
interference of other radios on the network.
▫ After the redundant radio is switched to the 5 GHz mode, it works on the
default 5 GHz channel. In this case, the DCA algorithm is used to adjust the
radio channel.
▫ During this process, if a coverage hole is detected on 2.4 GHz radios, the 5
GHz radio is switched back to the 2.4 GHz mode.
▫ If the WAC restarts, the AP goes online again with the original
configurations before the WAC restart, including the channel, power,
frequency band, and radio status. If the AP goes online after a long period
of time, the WAC determines redundant radios and allocates frequency
bands to radios again.
▫ When the DFA function is disabled, the redundant radio configuration will
be restored. That is, the radio in 5 GHz or monitor mode will be restored to
the 2.4 GHz mode.
DBS
⚫
For 5 GHz networks in non-high-density indoor scenarios, adjusting the frequency bandwidth does not cause extra interference.
Therefore, the DBS algorithm can increase the frequency bandwidth of APs in hotspot areas to 40 MHz or 80 MHz based on
channel allocation to improve network throughput. If other APs interfere with APs in hotspot areas after the frequency bandwidth
is increased, the DBS algorithm reduces the frequency bandwidth of APs in hotspot areas to reduce network interference.
Hotspot area
Hotspot area
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
Channel: 11
HT20 MHz
Channel: 60
HT20 MHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
Channel: 1
HT20 MHz
Channel: 44
HT20 MHz
Channel: 6
HT20 MHz
Channel: 149
HT20 MHz
2.4 GHz Channel: 11
HT20 MHz
Channel: 36
5 GHz
HT20 MHz
Channel: 6
HT20 MHz
Channel: 149
HT20 MHz
Channel: 11
HT20 MHz
Channel: 52
HT20 MHz
Channel: 1
HT20 MHz
Channel: 44
HT20 MHz
Channel: 1
HT20 MHz
Channel: 161
HT20 MHz
Channel: 6
HT20 MHz
Channel: 60
HT20 MHz
5 GHz radios are configured to work in HT20 mode,
which limits the user bandwidth.
17
2.4 GHz Channel: 11
HT20 MHz
Channel: 60
5 GHz
HT20 MHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
Channel: 1
HT20 MHz
Channel: 44
HT40 MHz
Channel: 6
HT20 MHz
Channel: 149
HT80 MHz
2.4 GHz Channel: 11
HT20 MHz
Channel: 36
5 GHz
HT20 MHz
Channel: 6
HT20 MHz
Channel: 149
HT20 MHz
Channel: 11
HT20 MHz
Channel: 52
HT40 MHz
Channel: 1
HT20 MHz
Channel: 44
HT40 MHz
Channel: 1
HT20 MHz
Channel: 161
HT20 MHz
Channel: 6
HT20 MHz
Channel: 60
HT20 MHz
The DBS algorithm automatically increases the 5 GHz
frequency bandwidth to improve the user bandwidth.
Huawei Confidential
• From IEEE 802.11ac, Wi-Fi systems support four types of frequency bandwidth: 20
MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, and 160 MHz. Higher bandwidth brings higher
throughput. However, because the number of available channels is limited, the
single-radio frequency bandwidth of 80 MHz or 160 MHz cannot be configured
for all APs. For 5 GHz networks in non-high-density indoor scenarios (AP spacing:
10–15 m), the DBS algorithm enables WACs to automatically identify the service
priority, service throughput, and interference, and then preferentially assign more
network resources to heavily loaded areas and dynamically allocate proper
frequency bandwidth to radios of each AP, thereby improving user experience.
• The DBS algorithm takes effect in the following ways:
▫ Groups available 5 GHz channels based on the capability of forming 80
MHz or 40 MHz channels.
▫ Sorts APs by topology distance.
▫ Assigns primary channels based on factors such as the interference index,
bandwidth fulfillment degree, channel isolation degree, and channel
multiplexing index.
▫ Bond 20 MHz channels of APs into 40 MHz or 80 MHz channels according
to the channel assignment sequence.
Implementation of Radio Calibration — Global Radio Calibration
⚫
Radio calibration requires the following components for implementation:

AP: actively or passively collects radio environment information, sends the collected information to the WAC, and performs
radio calibration based on the calibration results delivered by the WAC.

WAC: maintains the AP neighbor topology based on the radio environment information reported by APs, uses calibration
algorithms to allocate channels and transmit power to APs, and delivers calibration results to APs.
⚫
WACs support global radio calibration and partial radio calibration. Global radio calibration takes effect on all
APs managed by a WAC. The WAC allocates channels and transmit power to all APs connected to it to achieve
optimal radio performance. Typically, this calibration mode is used on a newly deployed WLAN or a WLAN with
only a few services.
AP
WAC
Instruct the AP to start neighbor probe.
Report the probe result.
Allocate channels and power to the
AP based on the calibration policy.
Deliver the calibration result.
18
Huawei Confidential
• Global radio calibration is implemented as follows:
▫ After global radio calibration is enabled on a WAC, the WAC instructs each
AP to perform neighbor probe periodically.
▫ The APs perform neighbor probe periodically.
▫ All APs report probe results to the WAC.
▫ After the WAC receives neighbor information reported by all APs, it uses
global radio calibration algorithms to allocate channels and power to the
APs.
▫ The WAC delivers calibration results to the APs. After the WAC implements
global radio calibration for the first time, it starts the next global radio
calibration until it receives neighbor information from APs. The WAC
continuously implements global radio calibration to obtain optimal and
accurate calibration results.
• The global calibration algorithms include DCA, TPC, DBS, and DFA.
Implementation of Radio Calibration — Partial Radio Calibration
⚫
Partial radio calibration aims to adjust the working channels and power of some APs to optimize the radio
environment if it deteriorates in only some areas. Similar to global radio calibration, partial radio calibration uses
the DCA and TPC algorithms.
⚫
Partial radio calibration is triggered in the following scenarios:
A new AP goes online.
An AP goes offline.
When detecting that an AP goes offline, the WAC executes radio calibration algorithms to properly
increase the transmit power of its neighboring APs to compensate for coverage holes.
Interference from a rogue
AP is detected.
If a rogue AP is identified through neighbor probe, interference information is collected and used
for triggering partial radio calibration.
The radio environment
deteriorates.
19
After detecting that a new AP goes online, the WAC allocates channels and transmit power to the AP and may
re-allocate channels or transmit power to direct neighbors of the AP.
If an AP detects that the channel utilization or noise floor is too high or it cannot send Beacon frames,
the AP reports the issue to the WAC to trigger partial radio calibration.
Interference from non-Wi-Fi
devices is detected.
If the spectrum analysis module identifies interference from non-Wi-Fi devices, it outputs interference
information as the input for the calibration module and determine whether to trigger partial radio calibration
based on the interference level.
Partial radio calibration is
manually triggered.
Partial radio calibration is manually triggered for a specified AP or AP group.
Huawei Confidential
Key Configurations for Radio Calibration
⚫
Configure radio calibration.
[WAC-wlan-view] calibrate enable auto
[WAC-wlan-view] calibrate flexible-radio auto-switch
[WAC-wlan-view] ap-group name ap-group1
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] radio 0
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] calibrate auto-channel-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] calibrate auto-txpower-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] calibrate auto-bandwidth-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] undo calibrate flexible-radio disable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] calibrate auto-channel-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] calibrate auto-txpower-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] calibrate auto-bandwidth-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] undo calibrate flexible-radio disable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] quit
20
Huawei Confidential
Contents
21
1.
Air Interface Performance
2.
Radio Calibration
3.
STA Steering
4.
Band Steering
5.
AP-based Load Balancing
6.
User CAC
Huawei Confidential
Overview of STA Steering
⚫
The STA steering function allows STAs with poor service experience to associate with more suitable APs based on
the WLAN environment, improving service experience of STAs.

Before a STA is associated with an AP, the AP checks whether the STA supports dual bands. If so, the AP suppresses Probe
frames from the STA on the 2.4 GHz frequency band so that the STA preferentially accesses the 5 GHz radio. For details, see
the overview to band steering.

After a STA is associated with an AP, the target AP selection algorithm is used to measure the AP's dual-band capability, AP
load, and signal quality, steering the STA to a better AP.
Periodic load
balancing
A WAC sorts APs by
load.
Load balancing is
performed for APs in
descending order by
load.
The WAC
determines the
target AP based on
the algorithm.
Periodic identification
A WAC periodically
traverses all online
STAs.
The WAC selects the
STAs that have been
online for more than
10 minutes.
Are there any
better APs for
these STAs?
Sticky STA steering
22
Huawei Confidential
When a STA is determined as a sticky STA, it is steered
using smart roaming.
The STA is steered
to the target AP.
Yes
The WAC instructs
the APs to steer
these STAs.
Neighboring AP List of a STA
⚫
Before steering a STA, the WAC needs to determine the target AP, which is selected from the neighboring AP list
of the STA. Therefore, the WAC needs to collect, store, and maintain the neighboring AP lists of STAs.
⚫
Neighboring AP information can be obtained through Probe frame collection and Beacon Report measurement.
WAC
The WAC generates a neighboring AP list based on the STA information.
AP
AP
Send the collected
information to the
WAC.
Measurement STA
Send Probe frames to
obtain AP information
returned by other STAs.
23
APs collect STA information
through Probe frames and
management frames and
periodically report the STA
information to the WAC.
Probe frame collection
STA
Beacon Report
measurement (active)
Huawei Confidential
• Probe frame collection: APs proactively scan channels and collect STA
information (for example, through Probe frames and management frames). After
collecting STA information, APs periodically report the collected information to
the WAC. The WAC then generates a neighboring AP list based on STA
information.
• Beacon report measurement: applies only to scenarios where both APs and STAs
support 802.11k. Beacon report measurement can be performed in one of the
following modes:
▫ Active: In this mode, the measurement STA obtains AP information returned
by other STAs after sending Probe frames to other STAs.
▫ Passive: In this mode, the measurement STA only obtains AP information on
other STAs but does not send Probe frames to other STAs.
▫ Beacon table: In this mode, the measurement STA directly obtains AP
information on other STAs.
STA Steering Mode
⚫
When a STA meets the steering conditions, the AP steers the STA.
WAC
•
The STA steering mode depends on whether
the STA supports 802.11v. If so, the AP steers
Switch
the STA in BSS Transition Management (BTM)
mode. If not, the AP steers the STA in
Instruct neighboring
APs to suppress
association of the STA
AP3
AP1
BTM
STA6
STA7
STA2 STA3
STA4 STA5
Supporting 802.11v
24
deauthentication mode.
AP2
Deauthentication
To-besteered
STA
•
Before sending a BTM or deauthentication
message to steer the STA, the AP instructs
STA1
neighboring APs to suppress Probe or
Authentication frames from the STA.
Not supporting 802.11v
Huawei Confidential
• BTM mode: BTM is a STA steering mode defined in 802.11v.
• Deauthentication mode: An AP forces a STA to go offline, and the STA then
selects target AP to associate.
• STAs with voice or video services running are steered.
• After a STA goes online again or roams, it will not be steered within five minutes.
Contents
25
1.
Air Interface Performance
2.
Radio Calibration
3.
STA Steering
4.
Band Steering
5.
AP-based Load Balancing
6.
User CAC
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Band Steering
⚫
Most STAs on the live network support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands. By default, some STAs connect to the network
through APs on the 2.4 GHz frequency band. As a result, the 2.4 GHz frequency band with fewer channels is congested and has
severe interference. The 5 GHz frequency band with more channels and less interference is not well utilized.
⚫
The band steering function enables an AP to steer STAs preferentially to the 5 GHz frequency band, reducing traffic load and
interference on the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This function also implements load balancing among radios on different frequency
bands (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) of the same AP, improving user experience.
⚫
To implement band steering, an AP must have the same SSID and security policy on the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz frequency bands.
AP
Access STA on
the 5 GHz radio
Access STAs on
the 2.4 GHz radio
Uneven STA distribution among radios
26
Huawei Confidential
Implementation of Band Steering
⚫
Band steering enables STAs to preferentially connect to the 5 GHz frequency band based on the start threshold
for 5G-prior access and the percentage threshold for access STAs on 5 GHz radios.
⚫
A WAC periodically traverses APs and uses STA steering technology to steer STAs from the 2.4 GHz frequency
band to the 5 GHz frequency band based on the preceding thresholds.
A STA requests to
access an AP radio.
Is the start
threshold for 5Gprior access
reached?
No
Yes
Is the percentage
threshold for access
STAs on 5 GHz radios
reached?
Yes
27
Huawei Confidential
The AP obtains
the STA's dualband capability.
Does the STA
support dual
bands?
Yes
The STA is steered to
preferentially connect to
the 5 GHz frequency band.
No
No
The STA is allowed to
access the radio.
The STA randomly selects
the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
frequency band.
Key Configurations for Band Steering
⚫
Configure band steering.
[WAC-wlan-view] vap-profile name vap1
[WAC-wlan-vap-vap1] undo band-steer disable
[WAC-wlan-vap-vap1] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] band-steer balance start-threshold start-threshold
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] band-steer balance gap-threshold gap-threshold
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] band-steer deny-threshold deny-threshold
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] radio-2g-profile name default
[WAC-wlan-radio-2g-prof-default] rrm-profile wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-radio-2g-prof-default] quit
28
Huawei Confidential
• Only the band steering parameters configured in the 2G radio profile take effect.
Therefore, after an RRM profile is configured, it should be bound to the 2G radio
profile.
Contents
29
1.
Air Interface Performance
2.
Radio Calibration
3.
STA Steering
4.
Band Steering
5.
AP-based Load Balancing
6.
User CAC
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Load Balancing
⚫
Load balancing can evenly distribute AP traffic loads to ensure sufficient bandwidth for each STA.
⚫
After load balancing is enabled on a WAC, if some APs are heavily loaded, the WAC steers some STAs on these APs to lightly
loaded APs based on the dual-band capability of STAs, AP load, and AP signal quality, effectively utilizing AP resources.
⚫
The load balancing function applies to high-density WLANs to ensure proper access of STAs. Depending on whether a load
balancing group needs to be manually created, load balancing is classified into static load balancing and dynamic load balancing.
WAC
APs enabled with load balancing must
be connected to the same WAC.
Switch
AP1
STAs must be able to scan the SSIDs
of the APs engaged in load balancing.
30
AP2
New STA
Huawei Confidential
• Currently, load balancing cannot be implemented among APs connected to
different WACs.
Static Load Balancing
⚫
In static load balancing mode, APs providing the same services need to be manually added to a static load
balancing group. Each AP in the group periodically reports STA association information to the WAC, and the WAC
then performs load balancing based on the received information. When a STA sends an association request to an
AP, the WAC uses the load balancing algorithm to determine whether to permit access from the STA.
WAC
A radio of an AP can join only one
load balancing group.
Switch
AP1
Each load balancing group supports
a maximum of 16 members.
31
2.4 GHz
AP2
New STA
2.4 GHz
Huawei Confidential
• Static load balancing can be implemented when the following conditions are
met:
▫ A radio of an AP can join only one load balancing group. The APs in the
figure above are single-band APs. That is, each AP has only one 2.4 GHz or
5 GHz radio. For APs with multiple radios, load balancing can be
implemented among radios of the APs working on the same frequency
band. This means that a dual-band AP can join two load balancing groups.
▫ Each load balancing group supports a maximum of 16 members.
Dynamic Load Balancing
⚫
In dynamic load balancing mode, after a STA goes online, the WAC obtains the frequency bands supported by the
STA and information about neighboring APs through Probe frame collection and Beacon Report measurement.
Then the WAC uses the load balancing algorithm to determine whether to connect the STA to a lightly loaded AP.
WAC
3
2 Report the STA
information to the
WAC.
AP1
AP1 and AP2 form
a dynamic load balancing
group.
2 Report the STA
information to the
WAC.
1
AP2
Probe Request
1
New STA
32
• Before a new STA goes online, it broadcasts Probe
Request frames to scan surrounding APs.
• APs that receive the Probe Request frames report
the STA information to the WAC.
• The WAC adds all the APs that report the STA
information to a dynamic load balancing group,
and then uses the load balancing algorithm to
determine whether to permit access from the STA.
Huawei Confidential
• In static load balancing mode, a load balancing group supports a limited number
of members, and all members must be manually added to the group and on the
same frequency band. Dynamic load balancing overcomes these limitations.
Implementation of Load Balancing (1/2)
⚫
AP-based load balancing is implemented in three phases: proactive AP load advertisement, setup of a load
balancing group, and STA steering.
⚫
Proactive AP load advertisement: APs proactively advertise their loads, and STAs select and access the optimal
radios. The following figure shows the AP load advertisement process:
A STA broadcasts its capabilities,
and APs identify STA capabilities.
No
APs advertise their loads in the QBSS
Load IE field of Beacon frames and
Probe Response frames.
Does the STA support
802.11k?
Yes
When advertising their loads, the APs send
responses for Neighbor Report Request frames
sent from the STA to notify the STA of
neighboring AP information.
The STA selects and accesses the optimal radio (with
the minimum number of STAs and the minimum
channel utilization) based on the load information.
33
Huawei Confidential
• A STA broadcast its capabilities through Probe Request frames and Association
Request frames.
Implementation of Load Balancing (2/2)
Setup of a load balancing group:
⚫

Manual generation: AP radios are manually added to a static load balancing group.

Automatic generation: APs around a STA collect some management frames, control frames, and data frames of the STA and
report the AP information to the WAC. The WAC adds all APs that report the STA information to a dynamic load balancing group.
STA steering: STAs are steered from a heavily loaded radio to a lightly loaded radio in a load balancing group.
⚫
A WAC periodically traverses APs to determine whether to
steer a STA.
The STA is steered.
The STA is steered when the following conditions are met:
A STA is steered in either of the following modes:
⚫
A neighboring AP exists.
⚫
If the STA supports 802.11v, it is steered in BTM mode.
⚫
The load of the neighboring AP's radio is less than that
of the original AP.
⚫
⚫
The signal quality of the neighboring AP's radio is higher
than the lower threshold.
If the STA does not support 802.11v or fails to be
steered in BTM mode, it is steered in deauthentication
mode.
⚫
The signal quality of the neighboring AP's radio is higher
than or slightly lower than that of the original AP.
34
Huawei Confidential
Key Configurations for Load Balancing
⚫
Configure dynamic load balancing.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] undo sta-load-balance dynamic disable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] sta-load-balance dynamic sta-number start-threshold start-threshold-value
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] sta-load-balance dynamic sta-number gap-threshold { percentage percentage-value |
number number-value }
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] radio-5g-profile name default
[WAC-wlan-radio-5g-prof-default] rrm-profile wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-radio-5g-prof-default] quit
35
Huawei Confidential
Contents
36
1.
Air Interface Performance
2.
Radio Calibration
3.
STA Steering
4.
Band Steering
5.
AP-based Load Balancing
6.
User CAC
Huawei Confidential
User CAC
⚫
On WLANs where many users exist, such as in high density scenarios, users compete fiercely to occupy channels as
the number of online users increases. As a result, network quality deteriorates. To ensure network experience of
online users, the user CAC function can be configured. This function allows an AP to control user access based on
the threshold specified according to the number of online users or terminal SNR, ensuring network access quality of
online users. User CAC is implemented in either of the following modes:
Based on the number of users
No
An AP receives
an access
request from a
new user.
37
The AP allows the
user to go online.
Does the number of
online users reach the
threshold?
Yes
Based on the terminal SNR
The AP denies
access from the
new user.
No
An AP receives
an access
request from a
new user.
The AP allows the
user to go online.
Does the
terminal SNR of the
user reach the
threshold?
Yes
The AP denies
access from the
new user.
Huawei Confidential
• User CAC based on the number of users uses a simple algorithm. This mode is
recommended when most users have the same type of services and similar
service traffic volumes.
▫ When receiving an access request from a new user, an AP calculates the
current number of online users on the radio and checks whether the
number reaches the threshold. If not, the AP allows the user to go online. If
so, the AP denies access from the user.
▫ If the number of online users reaches the threshold after the new user goes
online, the AP will deny the access request from the new user and send an
alarm, and can hide its SSID. When a user roams to the AP, the AP checks
whether the number of online users reaches the threshold set for roaming
users. If so, the AP denies access from the user.
▫ When the number of online users falls below the threshold set for new
users, the AP sends a clear alarm, unhides the SSID, and allows new users
to go online.
• CAC based on the terminal SNR controls access from weak-signal users, and is
applicable to scenarios where WLANs have good signal coverage and weak
signals only at the edge of WLAN coverage areas.
▫ When receiving an access request from a new user, an AP checks whether
the terminal SNR reaches the threshold specified for new users. If not, the
AP allows the user to go online. If so, the AP denies access from the user.
Key Configurations for User CAC
⚫
Configure CAC based on the number of users.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] uac client-number enable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] uac client-number threshold access access-threshold [ roam roam-threshold ]
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] uac reach-access-threshold hide-ssid
⚫
Configure CAC based on the terminal SNR.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] uac client-snr enable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] uac client-snr threshold threshold
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] uac reach-access-threshold hide-ssid
38
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following functions are supported in the automatic radio
calibration solution? (
)
A.
Dynamic frequency assignment (DFA)
B.
Dynamic bandwidth selection (DBS)
C.
Dynamic channel assignment (DCA)
D.
Transmit power control (TPC)
2. (True or false) If radio channel switching is triggered during channel scanning, the service data delay
increases at the moment the channel switches, which may affect wireless service experience. (
39
A.
True
B.
False
Huawei Confidential
1. ABCD
2. A
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the RRM solution, including radio calibration, band steering, load
balancing, and user CAC. RRM helps dynamically adjust radio resources to adapt to changes
in the radio environment, provide high service quality for wireless network access, maintain
the optimal radio resource status, and improve user experience.
⚫
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to understand the main factors that affect
air interface performance and master the RRM technologies.
40
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
41
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym/Abbreviation
42
Full Name
BTM
BSS Transition Management
CSMA/CA
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance
DCA
Dynamic Channel Allocation
GI
Guard Interval
MCS
Modulation and Coding Scheme
SNR
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning Basics
Foreword
⚫
WLAN planning is an indispensable part before network deployment. Proper network
planning can better support customer communication and quotation and reduce risks that
may occur in subsequent delivery.
⚫
This course introduces the basic knowledge of network planning in terms of coverage and
capacity.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand the factors that affect WLAN coverage.

Understand the concepts of and relationship between power and signal strength.

Understand the factors that affect WLAN capacity.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Coverage Design
3.
WLAN Capacity Design
Huawei Confidential
Current WLAN Status
A WLAN uses radio signals to transmit data. The strength of radio signals becomes weaker as the transmission
⚫
distance increases. In addition, adjacent radio signals cause interference overlapping. All these factors reduce the
signal quality or even cause network unavailability.
During WLAN project delivery, if professional network planning and design are not performed in the early stage,
⚫
rework operations such as AP reinstallation and re-cabling may be required after the construction is complete.
WLAN planning is performed to address the following issues:
⚫
VIP
Weak signal
strength
5
Severe co-channel
interference
Slow Internet access
No obvious experience
advantage in VIP areas
Huawei Confidential
• Weak signal strength: If the actual transmit power of APs is not considered
during the wireless network coverage design, coverage holes may exist. In this
case, the signal strength is weak or even no signal is available. As a result, users
suffer from slow Internet access or even cannot access the Internet. Therefore,
the coverage area of each AP needs to be properly planned during WLAN
planning to ensure that each area is covered by strong wireless signals.
• Severe co-channel interference: Co-channel interference is generated when radios
of two neighboring APs work on the same channel. When co-channel
interference occurs, signals of the APs are interfered and delays arise when the
APs receive and send data simultaneously, which greatly reduces network
performance. Therefore, different working channels that do not interfere with
each other need to be allocated for APs with overlapping coverage areas.
• Slow Internet access: WLAN data transmission uses the Carrier Sense Multiple
Access with Collision Avoid (CSMA/CA) mechanism. The probability of wireless
packet collisions grows as the number of concurrent access users increases,
thereby slowing down the Internet access speed. For example, in high-density
scenarios such as stadium stands, a large number of wireless users connect to
each radio of APs, causing a high probability of wireless packet collisions. In these
scenarios, three-radio APs are recommended to control the number of access
users on each radio and reduce the packet collision probability.
• No obvious experience advantage in VIP areas: VIP areas require special attention
during WLAN planning. The Internet access experience of users in VIP areas
should be preferentially guaranteed.
Introduction to WLAN Planning
To improve the wireless network quality, meet the customer's network construction requirements, and avoid rework
⚫
operations such as AP redeployment due to network optimization in the subsequent delivery phase, the WLAN
needs to be planned and designed before project delivery.
Network planning
Ensure
AP models and quantity
No network
coverage holes
AP installation positions
and modes
Good signal coverage
Fast Internet access
WLAN coverage design
Country code
EIRP
Frequency band
and channel
6
Huawei Confidential
MIMO
Cabling deployment
Good network experience
WLAN capacity design
Antenna
Signal attenuation
Number of radios
Bandwidth
Spatial stream
MCS
GI mode
Channel bonding
Contents
1.
2.
WLAN Planning Overview
WLAN Coverage Design
◼
Coverage Design Overview
▫ Introduction to Coverage Design Parameters
3.
7
WLAN Capacity Design
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Coverage Design Overview
During network coverage design, you need to design and plan coverage for common, simple,
⚫
and VIP areas to ensure that the signal strength in each area meets user requirements and
to minimize interference between neighboring APs.
WLAN coverage design involves the following phases:
⚫
8
Coverage scenarios
Coverage areas
Factors affecting the
coverage effect
Determine the
coverage scenarios of
WLAN projects, such
as indoor coverage
and outdoor
coverage.
Determine the signal
coverage of WLAN
projects and the
methods of
measuring the
coverage.
Determine all factors
that affect signal
coverage, such as
obstacle materials
and thickness.
Huawei Confidential
Coverage Scenarios
Coverage scenarios are classified into indoor coverage, outdoor coverage, and backhaul scenarios.
⚫

Indoor coverage: It involves many scenarios and needs to be analyzed based on specific scenarios. Indoor signals are greatly
affected by walls, and concurrent bandwidth requirements vary greatly.

Outdoor coverage: The signal coverage in the outdoor area is typically large with diversified service types and highly mobile
STAs. The requirement for bandwidth is not high, but that for the protection level of devices is high.

Backhaul scenario: The construction is difficult and the cabling cost is high. Compared with wired transmission, the WLAN
bandwidth is limited.
Enterprise office scenario (indoor)
9
Huawei Confidential
Square scenario (outdoor)
Traffic scenario (backhaul)
Coverage Area
⚫
APs transmit radio signals using antennas. With an antenna as the center, longer distance indicates weaker signal strength.
Generally, the area where the signal strength around an antenna is greater than the edge field strength is called wireless network
coverage area. The field strength of radio signals at the edge of a network coverage area is called edge field strength.
⚫
For example, if the signal strength indicator value in a common coverage area is –65 dBm, the edge field strength must be greater
than or equal to –65 dBm during network planning and design.
Edge field strength
≥ –65 dBm
Coverage
distance
Coverage area
AP
Coverage area
Edge field strength
≥ –65 dBm
AP
Top view of an omnidirectional antenna
10
Top view of a directional antenna
Huawei Confidential
• Network indicator values refer to the recommended values of edge field strength
provided by network planning in different scenarios. The network indicator values
vary according to the coverage requirements.
Coverage Area - Measurement Modes
⚫
Omnidirectional antennas and directional antennas use different methods to measure the coverage
range. Coverage radius and coverage distance are used for omnidirectional antennas and directional
antennas respectively. To calculate the coverage range using the two methods, the maximum
transmission distance needs to be determined in addition to the height measured during site survey.
Directional antenna
Height
Maximum
transmission
distance
Antenna
height
Maximum
transmission
distance
Coverage radius
Coverage area
Measurement for an omnidirectional antenna
11
Huawei Confidential
Coverage distance
Measurement for a directional antenna
Calculating Maximum Transmission Distance
⚫
Path loss can be calculated using the final signal field strength formula. Then the maximum transmission distance
can be calculated based on its relationship with the path loss.
⚫
The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is calculated as follows (regardless of factors such as the interference
and line loss):
Final signal field strength = AP transmit power + MIMO gain + Antenna gain – Path loss – Obstacle signal attenuation
The relationship between the path loss and the maximum transmission distance is as follows (indoor semi-open scenario):2.4G: L
= 46 + 25lg(d)
12
L: path loss (dB); d: maximum transmission distance (m)
5G: L = 53 + 30lg(d)
Final signal field strength
–65 dBm
AP transmit power
20 dBm
5G antenna gain
6 dBi
Obstacle signal attenuation
8 dB
Antenna gain (mobile phone)
0
For example, to calculate the maximum transmission distance of 5
GHz signals in an indoor semi-open scenario, the known information
is listed in the left table. The calculation process is as follows:
–65 = 20 + 6 + 0 – [53 + 30lg(d)] – 8
d = 10
The maximum transmission distance of 5 GHz radio signals with the
signal field strength of –65 dBm is 10 m.
Huawei Confidential
• Formula for calculating the path loss in the indoor semi-open environment:
▫ 2.4 GHz frequency band: (attenuation factor D = 2.5; penetration factor p =
6);
▫ L = 20 x lg(f) + 10 x D x lg(d) + p – 28 = 46 + 25 x lg(d);
▫ 5 GHz frequency band: (attenuation factor D = 3; penetration factor p = 6);
▫ L = 20 x lg(f) + 10 x D x lg(d) + p – 28 = 53 + 30 x lg(d);
▫ In this formula, L indicates the path loss (dB), f indicates the working
frequency (MHz), D indicates the attenuation factor, d indicates the
distance (m), and p indicates the penetration factor.
Contents
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Coverage Design
▫ Coverage Design Overview
◼
3.
13
Introduction to Coverage Design Parameters
WLAN Capacity Design
Huawei Confidential
Antenna
⚫
⚫
An antenna is used to transmit or receive radio waves, providing three basic attributes for the wireless system:

Gain: measures the density of the energy radiated by an antenna.

Directivity: refers to the signal transmission pattern.

Polarization: refers to the radiation specification that describes the orientation of electromagnetic wave field.
Antennas are classified into the following types:
By radiation
direction
•
•
Omnidirection
14
•
Single-
al antenna
polarized
Directional
antenna
antenna
•
By polarization
•
Smart antenna
Dual-polarized
antenna
By appearance
•
Whip antenna
•
Plate-shaped
antenna
•
Panel antenna
By location
•
External
antenna
•
Built-in
antenna
Huawei Confidential
• Omnidirectional antenna:
▫ An omnidirectional antenna radiates energy with the same intensity in all
directions on the horizontal plane but with different intensities in each
direction on the vertical plane.
▫ The radiation pattern of an omnidirectional antenna is similar to that of an
incandescent lamp, which radiates visible light in all directions on the
horizontal plane.
• Directional antenna:
▫ A directional antenna radiates energy with different intensities in each
direction on both the horizontal and vertical planes.
▫ The radiation pattern of a directional antenna is similar to that of a
flashlight, which radiates visible light towards a certain direction. With the
same radio energy, a directional antenna provides a longer coverage
distance than an omnidirectional antenna in a particular direction at the
expense of coverage in other areas.
• Smart antenna:
▫ A smart antenna has multiple directional radiation patterns and one
omnidirectional radiation pattern on the horizontal plane.
▫ A smart antenna receives signals from transmitters in the omnidirectional
pattern. The smart antenna algorithm can determine the location of a
transmitter based on the received signals, and control the CPU to send
control signals to the transmitter in a directional radiation pattern with the
direction of the maximum radiation.
▫ Advantages of smart antennas:
▪ Large coverage area: Smart antennas concentrate energy more
effectively and have high gains, and therefore provide wider coverage.
A smart omnidirectional antenna's coverage scope is equivalent to a
directional antenna's coverage scope.
▪ High anti-interference capability: A smart antenna produces
directional beams in space, with the main lobe pointing to useful
signals' direction of arrival and side lobes and nulling beams point to
interference signals' direction of arrival.
▪ Low pollution to the environment: A smart antenna provides satisfied
power for STAs using low transmit power. This reduces the
electromagnetic wave pollution to the environment.
• Polarized antenna: Both single polarization and dual polarization are essentially
linear polarizations, which include horizontal polarization and vertical
polarization.
▫ Single-polarized antenna: an antenna that only transmits or receives radio
waves. Therefore, radio waves that are received or transmitted by a singlepolarized antenna are either horizontally or vertically polarized. Singlepolarized antennas require a large installation space and heavy
maintenance workload.
▫ Dual-polarized antenna: an antenna that transmits and receives radio
waves on both the horizontal and vertical planes.
• Whip antenna:
▫ Whip antennas are usually delivered with wireless devices, for example,
external antennas of indoor settled APs or Wi-Fi-capable devices. Whip
antennas have high gains, simple working mechanism, and low costs.
• Plate-shaped antenna:
▫ Plate-shaped antennas are widely used and very important. For example,
directional antennas used in outdoor scenarios are mostly plate-shaped
antennas. Plated-shape antennas have the following advantages: high
gains, good radiation pattern in the sector, small back lobe, easy control of
the downtilt in the vertical radiation pattern, reliable sealing performance,
and long service life.
• Built-in and external antennas are commonly used on indoor settled APs.
Currently, for better appearance, most APs use built-in omnidirectional antennas,
whose quantity and angles are invisible from the exterior of an AP.
Antenna Forms
16
Omnidirectional
antenna (outdoor)
Directional
antenna (outdoor)
Directional antenna
(indoor)
Backhaul antenna
(outdoor)
Ceiling-mounted
antenna
Whip antenna
Panel antenna
(built-in)
Smart antenna
Huawei Confidential
• All smart antennas are built-in antennas.
Antenna Angle
⚫
Antenna angles include the azimuth and downtilt angles, which are formed between an antenna and the north and
horizontal directions, respectively.
⚫
A small antenna angle provides a high antenna gain. However, the key to selecting an antenna gain is to meet
signal coverage requirements. The signal coverage range of an antenna can be controlled by adjusting the antenna
azimuth and downtilt angles.
Y
North
Azimuth
X
Antenna downtilt 8°
Antenna
height
Vertical beamwidth 30°
Inner radius
17
Huawei Confidential
Coverage area
Outer radius
Antenna Gain
⚫
Antenna gain is the ratio of the power density in a given direction to the power density of a reference antenna
(using an ideal radiation source) in the same direction. It is expressed in dBd or dBi, where dBi = dBd + 2.15.
⚫
Antenna gain can be used to measure the capability of an antenna to receive and send signals in a specified
direction, which is one of the most important parameters to consider when selecting an antenna. The antenna gain
is closely related to the antenna radiation pattern. The narrower main lobe indicates smaller side lobe, higher gain,
and longer propagation distance of radio waves.
⚫
In practice, select a proper antenna gain to ensure that beamwidth matches the target coverage area. If the
coverage distance is small, select low-gain antennas with wide vertical lobes to ensure the coverage effect in the
area near the antenna.
Low gain
18
High gain
Huawei Confidential
• The antenna gain is a passive phenomenon and does not increase the power of
antennas. Instead, the antenna gain enables antennas to radiate more energy in
a certain direction than omnidirectional antennas by reallocating the power. It is
a quantitative measure to describe how much input power an antenna can
radiate in a given direction.
• Basic concepts:
▫ dBd: defines the gain of an antenna compared to the symmetrical dipole.
▫ dBi: defines the gain of an antenna compared to an isotropic antenna,
which radiates energy with the same intensity in all directions.
▫ Lobe angle: defined as the angle between the points in the main lobe that
are down from the maximum gain by 3 dB.
▫ Ideal radiation source: ideal isotropic antenna, that is, a simple pointshaped radiation source that provides the same radiation performance in
all directions.
Antenna Specifications - Beamwidth
⚫
Beamwidth is the angular separation between the points in the main lobe that are down from the maximum gain
by 3 dB. It is also called main-lobe width, half-power angle, or lobe angle. The radiation pattern of an antenna
usually has two or more lobes. The lobe with the maximum radiation is the main lobe, and the other lobes are back
and side lobes.
⚫
An antenna has horizontal beamwidth and vertical beamwidth, forming a horizontal lobe angle and a vertical lobe
angle, respectively. When the beamwidth is narrow, radiation distance is long and interference is prevented.
Main lobe
-3 dB point
Side lobe
Beamwidth
Peak direction
(direction of
maximum radiation)
-3 dB point
Horizontal pattern
19
Vertical pattern
Huawei Confidential
• Main lobe: Antennas have various radiation patterns. Some of them look like
petals. The one with the strongest radiation "sticks out". It is the main lobe.
• Side lobe: lobes other than the main lobe on a radiation pattern.
• When deploying antennas, side lobes will interfere with peripheral areas.
Typically, the main-lobe radiation needs to be enhanced, and the side-lobe
radiation needs to be suppressed. However, in the areas near the antennas, we
can enhance the side-lobe radiation to eliminate coverage holes.
Antenna Directivity
⚫
Antenna directivity indicates the capability of antennas radiating electromagnetic waves to a certain direction. For
receive antennas, the directivity indicates the capability of receiving electromagnetic waves from different
directions. External antennas can be classified into omnidirectional antennas and directional antennas by direction.
Omnidirectional
antenna
The direction of maximum radiation is on the horizontal plane. An antenna has equal radiation in all
directions on the horizontal plane.
•
•
Horizontal plane
Vertical plane
Directional antenna
The reflector reflects electromagnetic waves to one side to enhance the gain.
Plane reflector
Omnidirectional radiation
(without a plane reflector)
20
Huawei Confidential
Donut-shaped
radiation pattern
An omnidirectional antenna does not have
the direction of maximum radiation on the
horizontal plane.
Omnidirectional antennas are undirectional,
so they are usually used for point-tomultipoint communication.
Directional enhancement
(with a plane reflector)
• A directional antenna has one or more directions of maximum
radiation on the horizontal plane.
• Directional antennas are suitable for long-distance
communication because of their directivity, energy
concentration, and strong anti-interference capability.
Antenna Polarization
⚫
Polarization is radiation specification that describes the orientation of electromagnetic wave field. The electric field vector in the
direction of the antenna's strongest radiation is usually used as the polarization direction of electromagnetic wave. If the receive
antenna needs to receive signals properly, ensure that the polarization direction of the electromagnetic wave is the same as that of
the receive antenna.
⚫
WLAN antennas are classified into single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas. Both of them use the linear polarization
which can be horizontal polarization or vertical polarization.
Single-polarized antenna
Dual-polarized antenna
Antenna
Electrical field direction
Vertical polarization
Horizontal polarization
+45°polarization
21
–45°polarization
Vertical and horizontal
±45°cross polarization
polarization
±45°cross polarization outperforms vertical and horizontal
polarization in terms of signal reception balance.
Huawei Confidential
• The polarization direction of the antenna is the electric field direction of the
electromagnetic field of antenna radiation.
▫ Vertical polarized wave: The electric field direction of the electromagnetic
wave is perpendicular to the ground.
▫ Horizontal polarized wave: The electric field direction of the
electromagnetic wave is parallel to the ground.
• Single-polarized antenna: transmits and receives signals separately. One antenna
contains only one polarization mode. Radio waves that are received or
transmitted by a single-polarized antenna are either horizontally or vertically
polarized.
• Dual-polarized antenna: One antenna is used for receiving and transmitting
signals. It supports vertical and horizontal polarization modes.
• Due to the characteristics of electrical waves, the horizontally polarized signals
generate current when approaching to the ground. Polarized current generates
heat due to ground impedance. As a result, electrical field signals are attenuated.
The vertically polarized signals do not generate current, so energy will not be
attenuated, and effective signal propagation is ensured. Therefore, vertical
polarization is widely used in mobile communication. For example, Huawei uses
vertically polarized antennas or ±45° dual-polarized antennas in wireless
communication systems.
• A dual-polarized antenna is a combination of vertically polarized antennas and
horizontally polarized antennas, or a combination of +45° polarized antennas
and -45° polarized antennas.
• With development of new technologies, dual-polarized antennas are widely used
now. There are two polarization modes: vertical and horizontal polarization and
±45° polarization. The ±45° polarization mode has better performance than
the vertical and horizontal polarization modes. Therefore, the ±45° polarization
mode is used in most cases. A dual-polarized antenna combines two orthogonal
antennas with polarization directions of +45° and –45° and works in duplex
mode, which greatly reduces the number of antennas in each area. In addition,
the orthogonal polarization (±45°) ensures the good effect of receive diversity.
SISO, MISO, SIMO, and MIMO
Transmit antenna
Receive antenna
Transmit antenna
Path 1
Unique path
Single-input single-output (SISO)
There is a unique path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, along which one signal is transmitted. Each signal is defined as
one spatial stream.
Receive antenna
Transmit antenna
Path 1
Receive antenna
Multiple-input single-output (MISO)
There are two paths between transmit antennas and the receive antenna.
Only one receive antenna exists, and therefore the transmit antennas can
send only the same one signal along the two paths. The effect is similar to
that of SIMO.
Transmit antenna
Path 1
Receive antenna
Path 4
Single-input multiple-output (SIMO)
There are two paths between the transmit antenna and receive antennas.
Data is sent from the same transmit antenna, and therefore only one signal
is transmitted, doubling reliability.
23
Multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO)
There are four paths between transmit and receive antennas, along which
two signals are transmitted at the same time, thereby doubling the rate.
Huawei Confidential
• SISO
▫ In SISO, there is a unique path between the transmit antenna and the
receive antenna. Apparently, such transmission is unreliable and rate
limited. To address this issue, we add more antennas on the receive end
(STA) so that two or more signals can be received concurrently, that is,
single-input multiple-output (SIMO).
• SIMO
▫ There are two paths between the transmit antenna and receive antennas.
Data is sent from the same transmit antenna, and therefore only one signal
is transmitted, doubling reliability. This mode is also known as receive
diversity.
• MISO
▫ There are two paths between transmit antennas and the receive antenna.
Only one receive antenna exists, and therefore the transmit antennas can
send only the same data along the two paths. The effect is similar to that
of SIMO. This mode is also known as transmit diversity.
• MIMO
▫ MIMO technology allows multiple antennas to send and receive spatial
streams (multiple signals) simultaneously and to differentiate the signals
sent to or received from different spaces. By leveraging technologies such
as spatial reuse (SR) and space diversity (SD), MIMO boosts system
capacity, coverage scope, and signal to noise ratio (SNR) without increasing
the occupied bandwidth.
MIMO
⚫
MIMO is a technology that can multiply the system spectrum efficiency. MIMO transmission is also
called spatial multiplexing. The technology uses multiple antennas at the transmit end and receive end
and employ certain signal processing technologies at both ends to complete data communication,
bringing power gains, multiplexing gains, diversity gains, and array gains.
TX#M
RX#N
Received signal
processing
...
Transmit signal
processing
RX#1
...
Source
TX#1
Process of MIMO
Often referred to M xN MIMO system
M and N indicate the number of transmit antennas
and receive antennas respectively.
24
Power
gain
Improves the SNR at the receive end and the signal
receiving quality.
Multiple
xing gain
Increases the signal transmission rate, throughput,
and peak capacity.
Diversity
gain
Improves the stability of the SNR at the receive end
and the reliability of signal reception.
Array
gain
Increases average SNR as a result of combining
multiple signals.
Huawei Confidential
• Power gain: In noise-limited scenarios, power gains increase the SNR at the
receive end, thereby improving the signal receiving quality and enhancing the
system capacity and coverage performance. For example, if each antenna has the
same transmit power, M antennas bring a power gain of 10lg(M) dB compared
with one antenna.
• Multiplexing gain: Multiplexing gains are derived from the theoretical
multiplexing orders of spatial channels. Theoretically, the capacity of an MxN
MIMO system is min(M,N) times that of a SISO system. For example, assuming
that the theoretical peak rate is 75 Mbps in 1x1 SISO mode, 150 Mbps can be
achieved in 2x2 MIMO mode, and approximately 300 Mbps in 4x4 MIMO mode.
• Diversity gain: a performance gain achieved by reducing the fluctuation of the
SNR of the combined signals based on the independence of spatial channel
fading. If channels between transmit and receive antennas are mutually
independent and signals from all transmit antennas are the same, the theoretical
diversity order of an MxN MIMO system is MxN times that of a SISO system.
• Array gain: performance gain achieved by increasing the average SNR of the
combined signals based on the correlation between signals and the noncorrelation between noises on different antennas. Compared with a SISO system,
a 1xN SIMO system and an Mx1 MISO system bring array gains of 10lg(N) dB
and 10lg(M) dB, respectively.
MU-MIMO
⚫
MIMO can be classified into single-user MIMO (SU-MIMO) and multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) by the
number of users.

SU-MIMO: Multiple parallel spatial streams that occupy the same time-frequency resource are transmitted to
the same user, improving the throughput of a single user.

MU-MIMO: Multiple parallel spatial streams that occupy the same time-frequency resources are transmitted to
different users, improving the throughput and capacity of multiple users.
User 1
AP
SU-MIMO
The AP sends data to a single user at a time.
25
User 1
User 2
AP
MU-MIMO
The AP sends data to three users at a time.
User 3
Huawei Confidential
• The time-frequency resources combine time domain resources and frequency
domain resources.
• A wireless device that supports MU-MIMO technology can transmit data
simultaneously with multiple STAs, which changes serial to parallel transmission
mode and shortens the waiting time for STAs to obtain data from the wireless
device. Additionally, the bandwidth resources obtained by each STA are not
compromised. Therefore, this technology maximizes the resource utilization and
thereby increases the capacity of the wireless device and the Internet access
speed of STAs.
Country Code
⚫
During WLAN planning, network planning engineers need to determine the country code first. WLANs in different
countries or regions comply with different laws and regulations, and can use different channels and maximum
transmit power of radios.
⚫
Different country codes correspond to different channels and maximum transmit power, which cannot exceed the
ranges supported by the country codes. Otherwise, the network planning solution cannot be applied to actual
situations.
Country/
Region
Country Code
People's
Republic of
China
CN
Macao,
China
MO
26
Applicable
AP Type
2.4 GHz Maximum Transmit
Channel
Power of 2.4 GHz
(20 MHz)
Channel (dBm)
Indoor AP
20
36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
149, 153, 157, 161, 165
27
149, 153, 157, 161, 165
23
36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120,
124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 144,
149, 153, 157, 161, 165
1–13
Outdoor AP
All AP
models
1–13
5 GHz Channel (20 MHz)
Maximum Transmit Power of 5 GHz Channel
(dBm)
Channels: 36–
48 and 52–64
Channels:
100–144
Channels:
149–165
23
N/A
33
23
30
30
Huawei Confidential
• For details about the supported channels and maximum transmit power of radios
in different countries or regions, see WLAN Country Codes and Channels
Compliance.
Frequency Band and Channel
⚫
Radio signals are transmitted using electromagnetic waves (also called radios) at 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, or 6 GHz. The frequency range of
a radio is referred to as a frequency band, for example, 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands. Frequency ranges divided based on a
frequency band are called channels, which are classified into overlapping channels (for example, 1 and 2) and non-overlapping
channels (for example, 1 and 5). To avoid signal interference, information is exchanged through non-overlapping channels on the
live network.
Channels on the 5 GHz frequency band
(non-overlapping)
Channels on the 2.4 GHz frequency band
Channel:
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
Center
2.412 2.422 2.432 2.442 2.452 2.462 2.472
frequency
2
4
6
8
10
12
(GHz):
2.417 2.427 2.437 2.447 2.457 2.467
14
2.484
5730 5735
5170
5330 5490
5835
5250
Frequency
(MHz):
UNII-2
UNII-3
UNII-2
UNII-1
Extend
153
Channel: 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64
Frequency
bandwidth
20 MHz
27
The 2.4 GHz frequency band is divided into 14
channels, each with 20 MHz frequency
bandwidth (except 802.11b). Some of them
overlap with each other. Non-overlapping
channels 1, 5, 9, and 13 are typically used on the
live network.
100 ... ... 144
149
161
157 165
Gray channels are unavailable in China.
For the 5 GHz frequency band, frequency resources are richer, and a
large number of non-overlapping channels are available. 5 GHz channels
that can be used vary slightly in different countries. In China, 13 nonoverlapping channels can be used.
Huawei Confidential
• UNII is short for Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure.
• The 5 GHz Wi-Fi frequency band is much higher than the 2.4 GHz frequency
band in terms of frequency, speed, and anti-interference. However, as this band
has a higher frequency and therefore a shorter wavelength than its 2.4 GHz
counterpart, it delivers poor penetration capabilities and shorter transmission
distances. While 5 GHz frequency band ranges vary from country to country, its
wide frequency bandwidth and reduced interference make it suitable for highspeed transmission.
EIRP
⚫
Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP) is the power radiated by an antenna in a specific
direction, in dBm. The maximum EIRP values vary with countries, frequency bands, and channels,
thereby imposing great restrictions on outdoor signal coverage. Therefore, the maximum EIRP values of
the corresponding countries need to be determined before network planning and design.
⚫
The EIRP is usually calculated based on the conducted power.

The relationship between EIRP, transmit power, and antenna gain is shown as the following:
EIRP ≤ AP transmit power + MIMO gain + Antenna gain

The power of a product usually refers to the combined power. The relationship is as follows:
Combined power = AP transmit power + MIMO gain

28
MIMO gains are provided based on the following specifications when a STA supports a single spatial stream:
MIMO Specification
2×2
4×4
8×8
MIMO gain
3 dBm
6 dBm
9 dBm
Huawei Confidential
Signal Attenuation
⚫
Signal attenuation mainly includes path loss and obstacle attenuation. The signal strength of a radio signal
gradually attenuates during transmission. When the signal attenuation is too large, the receive end cannot identify
the radio signal. Therefore, unnecessary signal attenuation should be minimized during WLAN coverage design.
⚫
Common factors that cause signal attenuation are as follows:

Obstacles: They are commonly seen in wireless network environments, such as walls, glass, and doors.

Transmission distance: It refers to the path loss, which cannot be avoided and can be calculated using the formula.

Frequency: Shorter wavelength of an electromagnetic wave indicates more severe attenuation.
2.4 GHz
Mobile phone
5 GHz
AP
Transmission distance (path loss)
29
Huawei Confidential
Laptop
Obstacle (wall)
Signal Interference
⚫
Signal interference mainly refers to the interference and noise in the environment. Generally, the SNR or the signal
to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) is used to measure the impact of interference and noise on radio signals. SNR
and SINR are main technical indicators for measuring the communication quality and reliability of a
communications system. A larger SNR or SINR indicates higher communication quality and reliability.

SNR: refers to the ratio of signals to noises.

SINR: refers to the ratio of the strength of signals to the strength of interference and noise.
The SNR is calculated
using the following
formula:
The SINR is calculated
using the following
formula:
SINR = 10lg [PS/(PI + PN)]
SNR = 10lg (PS/PN)
•
SINR: in dB
•
SNR: in dB
•
PS: effective power of signals
•
PS: effective power of signals
•
PI: effective power of interference
•
PN: effective power of noise signals
signals
•
30
PN: effective power of noise signals
Huawei Confidential
• Interference refers to the interference caused by the system and other systems,
such as co-channel interference and adjacent-channel interference.
• Noise refers to irregular extra signals that do not exist in original signals
generated by a device. Noise signals are related to the environment and do not
change as the original signals change.
• If there is no special requirement for the SNR or SINR during the WLAN planning
and design, you do not need to consider the SNR or SINR. If there are
requirements for the SNR or SINR, perform field signal simulation and SINR
simulation during the WLAN planning and design.
Contents
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Coverage Design
3.
WLAN Capacity Design
◼
Capacity Design Overview
▫ Parameters Related to AP Performance
31
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Capacity Design Overview
⚫
During network capacity design, you need to design the number of APs required based on the bandwidth
requirements, the number of STAs, concurrency rate, and per-AP performance. This ensures that the WLAN
performance can meet the Internet access requirements of all STAs.

The bandwidth requirement, number of STAs, and concurrency rate are estimated based on user requirements and site survey.

The performance of a single AP is the bandwidth of a single STA multiplied by the number of concurrent STAs supported by a
single AP. Different single-STA bandwidths correspond to different number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP.
⚫
In network capacity design, the number of required APs is calculated using the following formula:
Number of STAs x Concurrency rate x
Bandwidth of a single STA
Number of required APs =
Bandwidth of a single STA x Number of
concurrent STAs supported a single AP
32
Huawei Confidential
• Different types of STAs or STAs of the same type but with different services
require different bandwidths. For example, STAs of the same type require
different bandwidths for watching videos and browsing web pages. Network
planning engineers should calculate the currently required bandwidth for a single
STA based on its service and type.
Formula for Calculating the Theoretical WLAN Rate
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by a single AP refers to the maximum number of concurrent
STAs supported by the single AP which meets user bandwidth requirements. The main factors include
the Wi-Fi standards, number of spatial streams, and number of radios supported by the AP as well as
working frequency bandwidth.
⚫
Different Wi-Fi standards correspond to different theoretical WLAN rates. The theoretical WLAN rate
refers to the link setup rate over the air interface. It is determined by the number of spatial streams,
symbol, guard interval (GI) length, modulation mode, bit rate, and number of valid subcarriers.
⚫
The formula for calculating the theoretical WLAN rate is as follows:
Theoretical WLAN rate =
33
Number of spatial streams x Number of encoded bits per
subcarrier x Bit rate x Number of valid subcarriers
Symbol length + Short GI or GI
Huawei Confidential
• The theoretical WLAN rate refers to the maximum transmission rate theoretically
calculated based on a protocol standard. For example, the theoretical rate of
802.11ac Wave 2 can reach 6.9 Gbps.
• The implementation rate refers to the maximum rate that a product developed
by a vendor based on a standard can reach.
• The actual rate refers to the rate at which the AP forwards data after a STA is
connected to the AP.
• The difference between the actual rate and the theoretical rate is caused by the
following reasons:
▫ Distance: The distance from an AP and any physical obstacles (such as
walls, signal barriers, or reflection materials) affects signal transmission and
reduces the transmission speed.
▫ Interference: Devices on other wireless networks with the same frequency in
the same area affect network performance.
▫ Shared bandwidth: The available bandwidth is shared by all users on the
same wireless network.
Formula for Calculating the Theoretical WLAN Rate (Example)
Number of spatial streams x Number of encoded bits per subcarrier x Bit rate x Number of
valid subcarriers/(Symbol length + Short GI or GI)
Symbol and GI Length
Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)
802.11
Standard
Modulation
Scheme
802.11ac
256-QAM
8
5/6
802.11ax
1024-QAM
10
5/6
Number of Spatial Streams
802.11ac
802.11ax
4
8
Subcarrier Bit Rate
11ac
11ax
Subcarrier
bandwidth
312.5 KHz
78.125 KHz
12.8 us
Symbol
3.2 us
Short GI
0.4 us
/
GI
0.8 us
0.8 us
Number of Valid Subcarriers
160 MHz
802.11ac
802.11ax
468
1960
Wi-Fi 6: 8 x 10 bits per subcarrier x 5/6 x 1960/(12.8 + 0.8) us = 9607 Mbps
Wi-Fi 5 Wave 2: 4 x 8 bits per subcarrier x 5/6 x 468/(3.2 + 0.4) us = 3466 Mbps
34
Huawei Confidential
• Number of spatial streams: It equals to the number of antennas of an AP. A
larger number of antennas indicate higher throughput of the entire system.
Similar to lanes on a highway, an 8-lane expressway carries more traffic than a
4-lane one.
• Symbol and GI: Symbol is the transmission signal in the time domain. There must
be a GI between two adjacent symbols to avoid interference between each other.
Take high-speed trains as an example. Each train is equivalent to a symbol. There
must be a time interval between the two trains departing from the same station.
Otherwise, the two trains may collide. The GI varies depending on Wi-Fi
standards. In most cases, a large GI is required when the transmission speed is
high. For example, the time interval between two 350 km/h high-speed trains
running on the same lane is larger than that of two 250 km/h high-speed trains.
• Encoding scheme: It is a modulation technology, that is, the number of bits that
can be carried in a symbol.
• Bit rate: Theoretically, lossless transmission is supported based on the encoding
scheme. During actual transmission, some information codes used for error
correction need to be added. Redundancy is used for achieving high reliability.
The bit rate is the ratio of the actually transmitted data code with the error
correction code excluded to the theoretical value.
• Valid subcarrier: A carrier is a symbol in the frequency domain. One subcarrier
carries one symbol, and the number of subcarriers varies according to the
modulation mode and frequency bandwidth.
Contents
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Coverage Design
3.
WLAN Capacity Design
▫ Capacity Design Overview
◼
35
Parameters Related to AP Performance
Huawei Confidential
Wi-Fi Standards
⚫
Different Wi-Fi standards have different parameters such as frequency bands, encoding schemes,
number of spatial streams, channel bandwidth, and theoretical rate.
Standard
Released In
Frequency Band
Encoding
Scheme
Number of
Spatial
Streams
Channel
Bandwidth (MHz)
Theoretical Rate
-
802.11
1997
2.4 GHz
-
-
20
2 Mbps
-
802.11b
1999
2.4 GHz
-
-
22
11 Mbps
-
802.11a
1999
5 GHz
-
-
20
54 Mbps
-
802.11g
2003
2.4 GHz
64-QAM
-
20
Wi-Fi 4
Wi-Fi 5
Wi-Fi 6
54 Mbps
2.4 GHz: 450 Mbps
802.11n
2009
2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
64-QAM
4
20 and 40
802.11ac Wave1
2013
5 GHz
64-QAM
4+4
20 and 40
3.74 Gbps
802.11ac Wave2
2015
5 GHz
256-QAM
8
20, 40, 80, 160, and
80+80
6.9 Gbps
802.11ax
2019
2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
1024-QAM
4+8
20, 40, 80, 160, and
80+80
5 GHz: 600 Mbps
2.4 GHz: 1.15 Gbps
5 GHz: 9.6 Gbps
*In October 2018, the Wi-Fi Alliance has renamed different Wi-Fi standards, and 80.11ax was named as Wi-Fi 6. Standards before Wi-Fi 4 were not
renamed.
36
Huawei Confidential
Spatial Stream
⚫
A radio system sends multiple radio signals at the same time. Each of these signals is called a spatial stream. Spatial streams are
transmitted using antennas at the transmit end, and each spatial stream reaches the receive end through different paths. One spatial
stream can be created between one transmit antenna and one receive antenna.
⚫
A MIMO system is generally written as MxN MIMO, with M and N indicating the number of antennas at the transmit end and
receive end, respectively. The number of spatial streams in MIMO is generally less than or equal to the number of antennas at the
transmit or receive end. If the number of receive antennas is different from that of transmit antennas, the number of spatial streams
is smaller than or equal to the minimum number of antennas on the receive or transmit end. For example, a 4x4 MIMO system can
transmit four or less spatial streams, whereas a 3x2 MIMO system can transmit two or fewer spatial streams.
⚫
According to 802.11ac and 802.11ax, a radio supports a maximum of eight spatial streams. Therefore, even if an AP has 12 antennas,
the AP supports a maximum of eight spatial streams.
Wireless
network
adapter
AP
Antenna
37
Huawei Confidential
Spatial stream
Laptop
Transmission path
Number of Radios
A radio is a radio electromagnetic wave that can be transmitted and received by antennas. One radio
⚫
module can use multiple antennas to exchange data between an AP and a STA through multiple
spatial streams, improving the transmission rate. The number of radios depends on the AP models.
Common AP models support one, two, or three radios. Users can select AP models as required.
Single-radio AP
Dual-radio AP
2.4 GHz
or
5 GHz
Three-radio AP
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
⚫
⚫
⚫
38
The radio works at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz.
APs are applicable to the scenario where
STAs of the same type are used.
⚫
⚫
The radios work at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
APs are applicable to various WLAN
scenarios.
5 GHz
⚫
Two radios work at 5 GHz, and one works
at 2.4 GHz.
APs are applicable to electronic classrooms,
high-density scenarios, and shopping malls
and supermarkets.
Huawei Confidential
• Compared with a single-band AP, a dual-band AP allows more STAs to connect
to a network while ensuring STA performance. For example, in a bandwidthdemanding scenario, a single RF module can connect to 20 to 25 STAs. However,
if an AP can work on both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands, it can
connect to 40 to 50 STAs. That is, the number of STAs connected to the AP can
be doubled in the same physical space. Therefore, dual-band APs can be used in
high-density scenarios, such as libraries, conference rooms, academic lecture
halls, and student dormitories.
• Compared with a dual-radio AP, a three-radio AP provides one more radio. The
radio can be used for spectrum monitoring, air interface scanning, wireless
location, as well as service coverage to improve STA access capabilities. The radio
effectively solves problems such as difficult STA access and data congestion in
high-density scenarios.
• Dual-radio and three-radio APs are typically used on live networks.
Symbol and GI
⚫
The 802.11 protocols transmit the data modulated on each channel together. The data transmitted at a
time is called a symbol. The unit of symbols is us, indicating a duration.
⚫
During data transmission, the front end of the next symbol may arrive at the receive end earlier than
the tail end of the previous symbol. As a result, inter-symbol interference occurs. Guard interval (GI)
can be configured to reduce the impact of interference. GI can be classified into common GI and short
GI. Short GI has a shorter interval. A smaller GI indicates higher transmission efficiency. A larger GI
Symbol
GI
Symbol
GI
...
Symbol
GI
GI
Symbol
GI
...
Symbol
GI
GI
Symbol
GI
...
Symbol
GI
...
Frequency domain
indicates a higher anti-interference capability.
Symbol
Symbol
Time domain
39
Huawei Confidential
• Short GI is recommended when the interference is light. Common GI is
recommended when the interference is strong.
Encoding Scheme
⚫
The encoding scheme is the modulation technology, that is, the number of bits that can be carried in a symbol. During actual
transmission, some information codes used for error correction need to be added. Redundancy is used for achieving high reliability.
The bit rate is the ratio of the actually transmitted data code with the error correction code excluded to the theoretical value. The
following table lists the coding schemes and bit rates corresponding to different standards.
40
802.11a/g
802.11n
Negotiation
Mode
Modulation
Scheme
Coding Bit Rate
MCS0
BPSK
1
1/2
MCS1
QPSK
2
MCS2
QPSK
MCS3
Bit Rate Coding Bit Rate
802.11ac
802.11ax
Bit Rate
Coding Bit Rate
Bit Rate
Coding Bit Rate
Bit Rate
1
1/2
1
1/2
1
1/2
1/2
2
1/2
2
1/2
2
1/2
2
3/4
2
3/4
2
3/4
2
3/4
16-QAM
4
1/2
4
1/2
4
1/2
4
1/2
MCS4
16-QAM
4
3/4
4
3/4
4
3/4
4
3/4
MCS5
64-QAM
6
2/3
6
2/3
6
2/3
6
2/3
MCS6
64-QAM
6
3/4
6
3/4
6
3/4
6
3/4
MCS7
64-QAM
6
5/6
6
5/6
6
5/6
6
5/6
VMCS8
256-QAM
-
-
8
3/4
8
3/4
VMCS9
256-QAM
-
-
8
5/6
8
5/6
VMCS10
1024-QAM
-
-
-
10
3/4
VMCS11
1024-QAM
-
-
-
10
5/6
Huawei Confidential
• A larger Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) value indicates a higher
transmission rate.
Channel Bonding
⚫
The number of valid subcarriers varies according to the frequency bandwidth. A larger frequency bandwidth indicates a larger
number of valid subcarriers. For wireless technologies, you can increase the channel bandwidth of a radio to improve the
transmission rate of a STA. Two or more adjacent non-overlapping channels are bonded to a channel. Theoretically, if the bandwidth
of the data transmission channel is doubled, the transmission rate is also doubled.
⚫
By default, an AP works at the 20 MHz channels. Two adjacent 20 MHz channels can be bonded to a 40 MHz channel. According to
different channel bonding methods, the operating channel bandwidth can be categorized as 40 MHz plus, 40 MHz minus, 80 MHz,
80+80 MHz, or 160 MHz.
149
149
153
153
Bonded channel
157
161
165
41
Channel
Huawei Confidential
• Channel types:
▫ 40 MHz plus and 40 MHz minus: Two adjacent 20 MHz channels that do
not interfere with each other are bonded into a 40 MHz channel. One 20
MHz channel is the primary channel, and the other is the auxiliary channel.
The primary channel and auxiliary channel have different center
frequencies, which determine the minus or plus state of the 40 MHz
channel. If the center frequency of the former is higher, the channel
bandwidth is 40 MHz minus; if that of the latter is higher, the channel
bandwidth is 40 MHz plus. For example, channels 36 and 40 are bonded
into a 40 MHz channel. If channel 40 is deployed as the primary channel, 40
MHz minus is configured; if channel 36 is deployed as the primary channel,
40 MHz plus is configured.
▫ 80 MHz: Two contiguous 40 MHz channels can be bonded into an 80 MHz
channel. Any of the four 20 MHz channels in the 80 MHz channel can be
selected as the primary channel. For example, channel 36, 40, 44, and 48
can be bonded into an 80 MHz channel.
▫ 80+80 MHz: Two non-contiguous 80 MHz channels can be bonded into an
80+80 MHz channel. For example, channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 100, 104, 108,
and 112 can be bonded into an 80+80 MHz channel.
▫ 160 MHz: Two contiguous 80 MHz channels can be bonded into a 160 MHz
channel. Any of the eight 20 MHz channels can be selected as the primary
channel. For example, channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64 can be
bonded into a 160 MHz channel.
• Since 802.11ac, eight channels can be bonded into 160 MHz, achieving a
transmission rate of over 1000 Mbps.
Quiz
1.
(True or False) An antenna has horizontal beamwidth and vertical beamwidth, forming a
horizontal lobe angle and a vertical lobe angle, respectively. A wider beamwidth indicates
better directionality, larger coverage, and stronger anti-interference capabilities. (
A. True
B. False
42
1. B
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the basic knowledge of WLAN planning, including network coverage
design and network capacity design. In the network coverage design, the coverage areas are
classified into indoor areas and outdoor areas that user different types of antennas. The
network capacity design part describes how to estimate the AP capacity based on customer
requirements and Wi-Fi standards.
⚫
After learning this course, you will have a basic understanding of WLAN planning and the
formula for calculating the theoretical WLAN rate.
43
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
44
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym/Abbreviation
45
Full Name
MISO
Multiple-Input Single-Output
MU-MIMO
Multi-User MIMO
SIMO
Single-Input Multi-ple-Output
SISO
Single-Input Single-Output
SU-MIMO
Single-User MIMO
UNII
Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright © 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors
that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning Tools
Foreword
⚫
With the popularity of wireless networks in governments, enterprises, finance sectors, and
campuses, there are increasingly higher requirements on wireless network experience, which
poses challenges to Wi-Fi builders. Strict pre-sales network planning and delivery
acceptance are important processes for ensuring and evaluating wireless network quality.
⚫
This course will introduce how to use the WLAN Planner and CloudCampus APP to conduct
network planning and delivery acceptance.
2
Huawei Confidential
• This course mainly introduces Huawei software WLAN Planner (V1.0.0) and
CloudCampus APP (V3.22.9.1).
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Master skills of using the WLAN Planner.

Use the WLAN Planner for indoor 3D simulation.

Use the network planning functions of the CloudCampus APP.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Planner
◼
Product Overview
▫
Product GUI Introduction
▫
Network Planning in Five Steps
▫
3D Simulation
2. CloudCampus APP
4
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planner Introduction
The WLAN Planner is a cloud architecture–based wireless network planning tool that provides onsite environment
⚫
planning, AP deployment, network signal simulation, and report generation functions. It helps engineers efficiently
plan wireless networks.
5
Huawei Confidential
• The WLAN Planner is applicable to the pre-sales and after-sales phases of WLAN
projects. For example, the signal simulation function of the WLAN Planner allows
you to determine whether the AP models and quantity meet the requirements in
the pre-sales phase, and determine AP installation positions and signal coverage
effect during high level design (HLD) in the after-sales phase.
Logging In to ServiceTurbo Cloud
The WLAN Planner is hosted on the ServiceTurbo Cloud platform and can be used only after you log in to the
⚫
platform.
Login and account application
⚫

Visit ServiceTurbo Cloud at https://serviceturbo-cloud.huawei.com (available only on Google Chrome).

Click Log In in the upper right corner of the page, and use an account to log in. If you do not have an account, click Register and
register one.
6
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planner Usage Permission
⚫
After successful login, click Tool Application Market and search for WLAN Planner.
⚫
By default, Huawei engineers and channel partner (ASP/CSP) engineers have the permission to use the WLAN
Planner.
If you do not have the permission, click the WLAN Planner card and fill in the application information as prompted
⚫
to unlock the tool. After the application is submitted, you can choose My WorkSpace > My Application > Permission
Application to view the approval progress.
7
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Planner
▫
Product Overview
◼
Product GUI Introduction
▫
Network Planning in Five Steps
▫
3D Simulation
2. CloudCampus APP
8
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planner Home Page
The WLAN Planner home page consists of two parts: the upper part shows the Running, Merge, Import, and Export
⚫
buttons and the tool contact information, while the lower part mainly shows the task list and WLAN Planner usage
guide.
9
Huawei Confidential
Project Creation – Running
⚫
Click Running. In the dialog box that is displayed, select I have read and agree to the Customer Network Data
Security Management Regulations and click Confirm. The Project Info page is displayed.
⚫
Select Create Project or Existing Project for Project Type, and set project information as required. If you select
Create Project, the country code corresponding to the value of Country/Region regulates available channels and
equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) requirements.
10
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Set Customer Network Data Involved to No. If you use the default value
Yes, you need to click Create Authorization and apply for customer privacy data
authorization.
▫ Before designing a solution, Huawei and ASP engineers need to submit
customer authorization information. For details about customer network
management authorization information, log in to
https://eplus.huawei.com/eRight#/ and click Operation Guide for customer
authorization in STC under Operation Guide to download and view this
document.
▫ Other users must obtain explicit authorization from the network data
subjects before uploading third-party network data to ServiceTurbo Cloud.
Project Management – Merge
⚫
Click Merge to merge a baseline project and one or more involved projects in the task list. Then, you
can export these projects as a new one.

Baseline Project: Select an existing project from the drop-down list box to be the baseline project of the projects
to be merged. The task name of this project will be used as the name of the new project after merging.

Involved Projects: Select one or more existing projects from the drop-down list box to merge with the baseline
project.
11
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Only projects with the same country code can be merged.
Project Management – Import
⚫
Click Import to import an existing or a shared project file (a package whose name starts with wpt). The name of
the imported project file will be displayed in the task list. You can view and edit the network planning and design in
the project.
⚫
An imported shared project is independent of its source project. You can edit the network planning and design in
the shared project without affecting the source project.
12
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Only one project file can be imported at a time.
Project Management – Export
⚫
Click Export. In the dialog box that is displayed, select one or more project files to be exported and click
Confirm. You can share an exported project file with other users so that they can import this file to the
WLAN Planner to view or edit the corresponding network planning and design.
13
Huawei Confidential
• Note: A maximum of 10 records can be exported at a time.
Task List – Edit
⚫
The task list displays information (such as the task name, task creator, and last update time) about the latest five
edited projects. Click a task name to enter the project for network planning and design. Click the edit icon in the
Operation column. In the dialog box that is displayed, view or edit the basic information about the project, for
example, change the task name and add or delete shared users.
14
Huawei Confidential
Task List – Share
⚫
Click the share icon in the Operation column of a project in the task list. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter
the full employee ID or email address to share the project with other engineers. Then, those who obtain the shared
project file can import this project file to view or edit the corresponding network planning and design.
15
Huawei Confidential
• Unlike the import function, the sharing function shares the source project. The
edit operation performed by any user that shares the project will be updated to
the project, and only one user is allowed to edit the project at a time. Only the
creator of a project has the permission to delete and share the project. Other
users that share the project can only edit the project.
WLAN Planner Main Page
⚫
After you create a project, the WLAN Planner main page is displayed for network planning and design. You can also
click the task name on the home page to open this page.
⚫
The left column lists three phases by function: survey, planning, and test. This chapter mainly describes the PLAN
page.
16
Huawei Confidential
SETTING – Template Settings
⚫
Choose SETTING. On the Template settings page that is displayed, you can view the default template, custom
templates (if you have created any), and the New button for creating a custom template.

Default template: The settings modified in the default template take effect only in the current project. The settings will be reset
for a new project.

17
Custom template: You can set parameters for a custom template and apply the settings to all the projects under your account.
Huawei Confidential
• After you click any template, different setting pages are available. The Basic
Settings page contains the parameters that are frequently adjusted during
network planning and design.
▫ Multiple Floor Emulation: If this parameter is set to Yes, the tool analyzes
interference between APs on adjacent floors.
▫ Propagation Model: This parameter allows you to switch between the path
loss and ray tracing algorithms for heat map calculation.
▫ EIRP Compliance: If this parameter is set to Yes, the tool automatically
adjusts the sum of the AP power, MIMO gain, and antenna gain to be less
than or equal to the EIRP.
▫ Antenna Separation: If this parameter is set to Yes, external antennas and
APs are displayed separately.
PLAN – Creating a Floor
⚫
On the PLAN page, the selected node is displayed in the upper left corner. When you hover the mouse pointer
over the node, the structure view of the entire project is displayed. A project can contain one or more buildings
and regions.
⚫
There are four icons under the project name. Their functions are as follows:
: creates an outdoor area. You can import an image, a PDF drawing, or a map file, but not a
CAD drawing.
: creates a building. You can import an image and one or more PDF or CAD drawings. If you
import N drawings, N floors will be generated.
: creates a floor. You can import an image, a PDF drawing, or a CAD drawing. If no building is
selected, the icon is dimmed, indicating that floors cannot be created.
: deletes the selected node (building/floor/region). If the node is a project, the icon is dimmed,
indicating that the node cannot be deleted.
18
Huawei Confidential
• Note: You can also right-click a node and choose an option from the shortcut
menu to complete the corresponding operation. In addition, before importing a
drawing, ensure that the drawing name contains no special character. Otherwise,
it will fail to be imported.
PLAN – Toolbar
When you select a floor or an outdoor area on the main planning page, a toolbar is displayed in the upper left
Measures the distance
between any two
points on a drawing
to control the distance
between AP
deployment locations.
19
Huawei Confidential
Corrects the scale of
an imported drawing.
Modifies attributes for
all obstacles or APs of
the same type on a
selected floor.
Displays network
planning and design
rules and AP
deployment
suggestions dedicated
to the current
scenario.
Checks the network
planning and design
of the current floor
for common basic
problems.
Hide
AutoCheck
Scenario-specific
network planning
Replace
3D building
3D floor
Restore
Undo
Sort AP
Anticlockwise
rotation
Clockwise rotation
Select
Drag drawing
Modify scale
corner of the page. The toolbar provides the following functions (corresponding to the icons from left to right):
Ranging
⚫
PLAN – Function Panel
⚫
The upper part of the main planning page displays the five steps of network planning and design. The function panel on the right
displays the modules that assist the current network planning step, and therefore it varies according to the step you select. To hide
the panel, click Hide Right Panel.
Network planning
in five steps
Function panel
20
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Planner
▫
Product Overview
▫
Product GUI Introduction
◼
Network Planning in Five Steps
▫
3D Simulation
2. CloudCampus APP
21
Huawei Confidential
Network Planning Procedure
⚫
You need to import a drawing first and then perform five steps to quickly and effectively complete the network
planning and design in a WLAN project. The WLAN Planner supports automatic obstacle identification, automatic
AP deployment, professional signal simulation, and 3D simulation, which are easy to use and improve network
planning efficiency.
Network Planning in
Five Steps
Import drawings
22
Import a drawing that contains the scale, and perform the
following steps on the drawing:
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy devices
Simulate signals
Export reports
Manually draw
obstacles or
enable
automatic
obstacle
identification.
Draw regions
with different
field strength
and capacity
requirements.
Deploy APs
manually or
automatically,
calculate
channels, and
calibrate power.
View simulation
diagrams by
field strength or
SINR.
Export reports
in Word format
and the
material list in
Excel format.
Huawei Confidential
• Note: The preceding five-step network planning procedure is applicable to indoor
network planning using the WLAN Planner. For outdoor network planning, the
WLAN Planner does not support obstacle drawing, region setting, or automatic
AP deployment.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Import Drawings
⚫
After creating a building or region for the project on the network planning page, determine the scenario and sub
scenario, and then import a drawing, which can be a PDF, PNG, JPG, or DWG file. If a CAD drawing (DWG file) is
imported, the WLAN Planner can quickly identify obstacles and mark them on the drawing.
23
Huawei Confidential
Import drawings
Import Drawings – Example
24
Huawei Confidential
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Set Up the Environment
⚫
Setting up the environment is to draw the layout structure of various types of walls on the imported floor plan drawing to restore
the site environment, ensuring the signal simulation effect.
⚫
To set up the environment, perform the following steps:

Set the scale. If you import a CAD drawing, the tool automatically generates a scale. If you import a drawing of another type, you need to manually set
the scale.

Set obstacles. If you import a CAD drawing, you can identify obstacles with one click or manually draw obstacles. If you import a drawing of another
type, you can enable automatic obstacle identification and then manually adjust the obstacles.

25
Deploy interference sources on the drawing based on the site survey result.
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Generally, a floor plan drawing has a scale. If no scale is available, you can
select some common objects in daily life as reference objects, for example, 0.8 m
to 1 m wide for a single door.
• If a desired wall type is unavailable when you set obstacles, click User-Defined
under Type, and add the wall type on the Obstacle Preset page that is displayed.
• In indoor scenarios, you are advised to use insulation boundaries to mark the
building periphery to prevent signal overflow from affecting the overall
simulation effect.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Set Up the Environment – Toolbar
⚫
Automatic Identification: The tool automatically identifies walls and draws obstacles
based on the imported drawing. (This function does not apply to CAD drawings.)
⚫
Manually: You can manually draw obstacles after selecting an obstacle shape and type.

Shape: The shape of an obstacle can be a rectangle, line, or slope.

Type: You can add preset obstacles, such as walls, windows, and doors, to the drawing. If the
preset obstacles do not meet the scenario requirements, click User-Defined under Type and
customize obstacles.
⚫
Auto-adsorption: When this function is enabled, end points of adjacent obstacles will be
automatically connected.
⚫
Interfere Deployment: Deploy interference sources based on the site survey result. For
example, a microwave oven occupies the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band.
26
Huawei Confidential
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Deploy
devices
Set regions
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
CAD Drawing – Automatic Identification
⚫
If a CAD drawing (DWG file) is imported, the WLAN Planner can quickly identify obstacles and mark them
27
Tip
Black
background
Adjust
resolution
One-click
identification
Redo
Undo
Drag
Select
on the drawing.
Huawei Confidential
• Select: After a CAD drawing is imported, you can select one or more target
regions. If you select multiple target regions, the tool automatically generates
multiple floors accordingly.
• Note: Obstacles on a CAD drawing can be automatically drawn only on the Floor
Image Extract page. After the drawing is submitted, you can only manually draw
obstacles. The tool automatically obtains the scale of the CAD drawing. The scale
can be modified after the drawing is submitted.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Set Up the Environment – Procedure
⚫
The procedure for setting up the environment varies according to the drawing type (CAD or non-CAD).
Non-CAD drawing
CAD drawing
28
Set obstacle types.
Manually draw
obstacles.
Set the scale.
Identify obstacles by
one click.
(Optional) Change
the scale.
(Optional) Automatically
identify obstacles.
Select target regions.
Submit the drawing.
Manually draw
obstacles.
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Tips for manual drawing.
▫ Scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in or out on the drawing.
▫ Press and hold the space bar and move the mouse to move the drawing.
▫ When drawing an obstacle, hold down Shift to draw a straight line.
▫ Press Ctrl+Z to undo an operation.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set Up the Environment – Example
29
Huawei Confidential
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Set Regions
⚫
Region setting is to mark each region on the floor plan drawing based on the actual requirements.
⚫
Regions must be set before automatic AP deployment. You can use the automatic identification function or
manually draw a region, set basic properties such as the name, type, coverage type, and concurrency rate of the
target region, and then determine the terminal status.

When manually drawing a region, you can use shapes and types in the toolbar.
✓ Automatic Identification: The coverage area is automatically drawn based on the edge of
an obstacle.
✓ Shape: Select a shape (polygon or rectangle), click to draw, and right-click to end the
drawing.
✓ Type: If you do not select AP Area, this parameter uses the default value Signal Area.
30
Huawei Confidential
•
Signal Area: area with signal coverage
•
AP Area: area with APs deployed
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Set Regions – Basic Properties
⚫
You can select one or more target regions as required, and set the
following basic properties for them:

Region: region name that marks and distinguishes a coverage area.

Region Type Select: The options include Signal Area and AP Area.

Cover Type: The options include VIP Coverage(>=-60 dBm), Common
Coverage(>=-65 dBm), and Location Coverage(>=-70 dBm), which are
represented by green, red, and gray, respectively.
⚫
Terminal Situation: capacity requirement of a coverage area. The tool
calculates the value based on the number of selected terminals, the
terminal type, and the service type.
31
Huawei Confidential
• Note: By default, the field strength threshold is set based on 5 GHz signals, and
this method is recommended. You can modify the setting on the SETTING > Basic
Settings page.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Set Regions – Example
Location
coverage area
VIP coverage
area
Common
coverage area
32
Huawei Confidential
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Deploy Devices
⚫
Device deployment includes AP deployment, channel calculation, and power calibration.

AP deployment: The tool supports automatic and manual AP deployment. It is recommended that you manually deploy APs in
most scenarios, and use automatic deployment only in the scenarios with simple network structures.

Channel calculation and power calibration: Use these functions to increase the signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) as
much as possible and minimize the signal interference between APs. After AP deployment is complete, it is recommended that
you calculate channels and then calibrate power.
⚫
The number of APs deployed on the current node is displayed in the lower left corner of the WLAN Planner main
page. After selecting a floor, you can click View Resources in the lower right corner to view detailed settings of
deployed APs, such as AP types, channels, power, and installation modes.
33
Huawei Confidential
• Click Set Display in the lower right corner of the WLAN Planner main page, and
adjust the AP icons or obstacles on the drawing. For example:
▫ Display or hide obstacles, AP channels, AP types, or antenna information.
▫ Adjust the size of AP icons and thickness of obstacle lines.
▫ Change the color of the label under an AP icon.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Deploy Devices – Toolbar
⚫
Automatic deployment:

Automatic deployment: Based on the region settings, the tool automatically calculates the
number of needed APs and deploys APs. (This function supports only APs with omnidirectional
antennas in indoor scenarios.)

W-shaped/Equal spacing deployment: Draw a region or a line and configure AP parameters.
Then, the tool automatically calculates the number of needed APs and deploys APs.
⚫
Equipment deployment (manual): Select a proper AP model and deploy APs on the
drawing according to the network construction standards in various scenarios. After
all APs are deployed, calculate channels and calibrate power. (If the desired AP model
is not displayed on the toolbar, click Choose Other AP and add the model.)
⚫
Channel calculation/Power calibration: These functions can take effect on the current
floor or multiple floors. Select floors as required.
⚫
Equipment recording: Enter device information (such as the SN, MAC address, and
name) in a template, and import the template.
34
Huawei Confidential
• Note: After APs are deployed, you can double-click an AP icon, or right-click an
AP icon and choose Property from the shortcut menu to open the properties
panel where you can edit properties, such as the model, icon information,
antenna, power, and channel of the AP.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Deploy
devices
Set regions
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Deploy Devices – Procedure
The procedure for automatic deployment is the same as that for manual deployment. Both of them have four steps:
⚫
select areas, select APs, configure channels, and configure power.
1
2
35
3
Huawei Confidential
4
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Deploy Devices – Example
W-shaped
deployment
Manual
deployment
36
Huawei Confidential
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Simulate Signals
⚫
In this step, the WLAN Planner simulates and renders signals in the planned indoor or outdoor regions on the drawing based on the
signal propagation model, and displays signal strengths in different colors, allowing you to intuitively view the current coverage
effect.
⚫
The WLAN Planner supports the path loss and ray tracing algorithms (which can be switched through parameter setting). Compared
with the path loss algorithm, the ray tracing algorithm contains reflection and refraction, improving the simulation precision but
taking a longer time.
37
Huawei Confidential
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Simulate Signals – Toolbar
⚫
Open/Refresh simulation: These functions are implemented on all APs. To view the
simulation effect of APs in a desired region, select these APs, right-click them, and
choose Simulation from the shortcut menu.
⚫
Coverage satisfaction: View the signal strength proportion statistics under the current
simulation.
⚫
Simulation terminal: You can deploy mobile phones, laptops, and tablets to simulate
signal access, and double-click a deployed STA to view the simulation result. The result
contains the signal strength of the signal source near the STA, SINR after the optimal AP
is associated with, and the rates at the physical and application layers.
⚫
Simulation map settings: You can set the frequency band to 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, or 6 GHz,
and select an option from the Type drop-down list box.
⚫
Simulation diagram: Set the boundary value of the simulation diagram. You can click the
drop-down arrow to switch the color or customize it.
38
Huawei Confidential
• If the simulation effect is unsatisfactory, you need to repeat step 3 (deploy
devices) to adjust or add/delete APs, and then simulate signals to verify the effect
until the wireless coverage meets the requirement.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Simulate Signals – Example (1/2)
Global simulation
View signal strength proportion statistics.
Partial simulation
39
Huawei Confidential
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Simulate Signals – Example (2/2)
Connect the
simulation terminal.
40
Huawei Confidential
• The simulation terminal is a laptop and the height is set to 1.5 m.
Export
reports
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Export Reports
⚫
After the preceding network planning steps are complete, you can export a network planning report, which contains the number of
materials used for the project, AP position diagram, signal simulation diagram, and product introduction.
⚫
Before exporting the report, you can set the report content, such as the report language, customized logo, company name, and
simulation diagram parameters. If you have imported a CAD drawing for the network planning and design, you can also export the
CAD drawing with AP positions together with the network planning report.
✓ Before exporting a report, you can check the network
planning result to avoid errors. The tool provides 11
check items in five categories, including environment
settings, deployment, AP settings, antenna settings,
and delivery effect.
✓ The check results include:
41
Huawei Confidential
•
: Passed
•
: Failed
•
: One-click repair
•
: Click this button to ignore an error result.
Import drawings
Set up the
environment
Set regions
Deploy
devices
Simulate
signals
Export
reports
Export Reports – Example
⚫
Use the following process to export a report on the WLAN Planner:
1
Select the
building or floor
for which the
network planning
report is to be
exported.
2
Set report
parameters.
42
Huawei Confidential
3
Export the network
planning report and
material list in oneclick mode. (Before
performing the export
operation, ensure that
automatic review of
network planning has
been completed.)
Contents
1. WLAN Planner
▫
Product Overview
▫
Product GUI Introduction
▫
Network Planning in Five Steps
◼
3D Simulation
2. CloudCampus APP
43
Huawei Confidential
3D Simulation
⚫
In indoor scenarios, the WLAN Planner provides the 3D simulation function. This function converts an original two-dimensional (2D)
floor plan into a three-dimensional (3D) structural diagram based on the obstacles drawn by users and AP positions, clearly
displaying the layout of each floor and the AP positions.
⚫
The 3D simulation function is displayed on the toolbar in the upper left corner of the WLAN Planner main page. This function
involves 3D Floor and 3D Building. A 3D floor is a 3D display of a single floor, while a 3D building is a 3D display of multiple floors.
These two 3D functions have different operation modes.
3D simulation
3D floor
44
Free walking
Automatic
walking
Walking
mode
Orbit
mode
3D
building
✓ Orbit mode: You can use the mouse to rotate, flip, zoom in, and
zoom out the 3D model to view the floor layout and AP
positions.
✓ Walking mode: This mode simulates the roaming effect through
automatic walking or free walking. During 3D simulation in
walking mode, the WLAN Planner displays real-time Wi-Fi
information about the STA.
• Automatic walking: Draw a traveling route for the STA and
click Start. The tool will move the STA along the route to
simulate the 3D effect.
• Free walking: Also called manual walking, free walking
allows you to control the movement using the keyboard.
Huawei Confidential
• During 3D simulation in walking mode, the WLAN Planner displays real-time WiFi information (such as the associated AP, RSSI, and current rate) about the STA.
• After 3D simulation in either walking mode is complete, you can click the
roaming record button in the upper right corner to view the roaming status of
the STA during movement, or export the roaming report on the report export
page.
3D Floor – Orbit Mode
45
Huawei Confidential
3D Floor – Automatic Walking Mode (1/3)
Step 1
Switch to the
walking mode.
Step 2
Click OK to
enter the
automatic
walking mode.
Step 3
Draw a route.
46
Huawei Confidential
3D Floor – Automatic Walking Mode (2/3)
Step 4
Simulate the
3D effect in
walking mode.
47
Huawei Confidential
• In the upper right corner of the walking page, a thumbnail is displayed to locate
the STA and corresponding APs.
3D Floor – Automatic Walking Mode (3/3)
Check
point
Step 5
View the
roaming result.
48
Huawei Confidential
3D Floor – Free Walking Mode
Step 1
Click Cancel in the
dialog box that is
displayed to enter the
free walking mode.
Step 2
Use the mouse and the
W/S/A/D keys to control
the up, down, left, and
right directions in
manual walking mode.
49
Huawei Confidential
3D Building
⚫
The 3D Building function supports only the orbit mode. You can select the image display information on the left as
required to simulate the desired 3D effect.
50
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. WLAN Planner
2. CloudCampus APP
51
Huawei Confidential
CloudCampus APP Overview
⚫
The CloudCampus APP is a mobile app that integrates field strength and interference testing, and can
be used for test acceptance after network deployment. It reduces the workload for WLAN O&M
personnel and simplifies O&M.
⚫
How to obtain:

Scan the QR code below.

Search for CloudCampus APP on AppGallery
52
Huawei Confidential
CloudCampus APP – Toolkit
⚫
The CloudCampus APP provides a variety of utility tools. The Tool screen
contains project delivery, coverage test, business test, scene test, and
manufacturer customization.
⚫
This course describes the tools related to network planning, that is, AP
Calculator and Site Survey in the Project Delivery area.
✓ AP Calculator: quickly generates a material list based on project scenarios and capacity
requirements.
✓ Site Survey: allows you to perform site surveys, record environment information, test
attenuation, and synchronize site survey information to WLAN Planner.
✓ WLAN Planner: provides engineering information to the APP, which allows you to view
AP positions and heat map information at any time.
✓ WLAN Tester: performs quality acceptance on the network environment. The APP
allows you to perform dotting tests. After data is uploaded, you can view and export
the acceptance report on the WLAN Planner.
53
Huawei Confidential
• The WLAN Planner and WLAN Tester in the Project Delivery area need to be used
together with actual WLAN Planner projects, which are not detailed in this
course. For more information about them, see the product documentation.
CloudCampus APP – Login Methods
⚫
Project delivery tools except the AP Calculator are available only after you log in to WLAN Planner
using an account and enter a project. The login method is as follows.
54
Huawei Confidential
• Note: The user name and password of the Uniportal account are those for
logging in to the WLAN Planner. If you do not have an account, apply for one.
AP Calculator
⚫
After you set basic parameters in the tool as required, the AP Calculator quickly calculates the number of APs required in the
selected scenario.
Step 1
Step 2
Set parameters as
required.
View the calculation
result.
Currently, the tool supports
the following five scenarios:
55
Huawei Confidential
•
Office,Supermarket
•
Hotel,Dormitory,Hospital
•
Electronic learning classroom
•
Wireless positioning
•
High-density coverage
Site Survey
⚫
After successful login, obtain the WLAN Planner project list in the current environment, and select a project to perform site survey.
⚫
Add survey points on the project drawing to test the signal strength at the current position. Touch an obstacle on the drawing and
choose Attenuation test. Touch Display detail to view the current attenuation value of the obstacle.
Step 3
Touch an obstacle
and choose
Attenuation test.
56
Huawei Confidential
Step 1
Step 2
Select a project
for site survey.
Add survey points.
(Both images and
texts are supported.)
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following types of drawings can be imported to
the WLAN Planner for creating an indoor region? (
)
A. PDF
B. DWG
C. PNG
D. JPG
2. (True or false) The CloudCampus APP allows users to export site survey reports. (
A. True
B. False
57
Huawei Confidential
1. ABCD
2. A
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes two network planning tools: WLAN Planner (used for network
planning and design) and CloudCampus APP (used for site survey and project acceptance).
You can use the WLAN Planner to plan indoor or outdoor networks, and use its 3D
simulation function to check whether the current network planning and design meet
coverage requirements. During the project acceptance phase, you can use the WLAN Tester
function of the CloudCampus APP to perform quality acceptance on the network
environment.
⚫
After learning this course, you can understand the operation procedures of the WLAN
Planner and CloudCampus APP and use them to quickly and easily complete network
planning and design.
58
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
59
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning Process
Foreword
⚫
On the journey to digital transformation, the efficiency and reliability of a WLAN are critical
to improving network performance and user experience. As the WLAN scale expands and
the number of access terminals on the network increases exponentially, the WLAN
environment becomes more complex and it is difficult to guarantee the network quality. As
such, planning and designing a WLAN is now an indispensable part in WLAN construction.
⚫
Proper network planning and design can greatly reduce the possible WLAN signal coverage
holes, signal interference, and network congestion, delivering better network experience.
⚫
2
This course describes the WLAN planning process.
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand the WLAN planning process.

Understand requirements collection and site survey in WLAN planning.

Understand device selection, coverage analysis, and capacity design in WLAN planning.

Understand the channel planning, power supply cabling design, and AP installation mode design in
WLAN planning.
3
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Planning Process
3.
WLAN Planning Case
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Overview
WLAN planning consists of four phases: preparation, planning and design, deployment design, and delivery.
⚫

Preparation: focuses on onsite information collection, including requirements collection and site survey.

Planning and design: focuses on AP deployment, including device selection, coverage design, and capacity design.

Deployment design: focuses on optimization and installation, including power supply and cabling design and installation mode
design.

5
Delivery: involves installation, construction, acceptance, and delivery according to design results.
Preparation
Planning and design
Deployment design
Delivery
Requirements
collection
Signal coverage
analysis
Channel planning
Installation and
construction
Site survey
Capacity design
Power supply and
cabling design
Acceptance and
delivery
Device selection
Installation mode
design
Huawei Confidential
• Installation and construction: Install devices at the planned positions based on
WLAN planning and design results.
• Acceptance and delivery: Use the CloudCampus APP that has built-in acceptance
function on a mobile phone to perform project acceptance.
• (Note: This course does not detail the installation and construction or acceptance
and delivery.)
Contents
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Planning Process
◼
Preparation
▫ Planning and Design
▫ Deployment Design
3.
6
WLAN Planning Case
Huawei Confidential
Preparation
Preparation for WLAN planning consists of requirements collection and site survey. Requirements
⚫
collection is the first step for WLAN planning. Communicate with the customer to collect complete and
comprehensive project and requirement information. Then, use auxiliary tools to perform site survey
and collect more detailed information on site.
Requirements collection
7
Huawei Confidential
Site survey
Requirements Collection
Requirements collection is the first as well as a critical step in WLAN planning. Engineers design the planning
⚫
solution based on user requirements. If complete and valid information is not obtained in the requirements
collection phase, the subsequent WLAN planning may fail or even needs to be redesigned.
The information to be obtained in the requirement collection phase is classified into the following types:
⚫
Basic requirements
•
•
•
8
Laws and regulations
Building drawings with
scale information
Coverage mode
Huawei Confidential
Service requirements
•
•
•
•
•
Coverage area
Field strength
Number of access STAs
STA type
Bandwidth requirements
Installation requirements
•
•
Power supply mode
Switch location
Requirements Collection — Basic Requirements
Laws and
regulations
Check the restrictions of local laws and
regulations on network deployment.
Building
drawing
Obtain complete floor plans that contain
scale information from the customer.
Coverage
mode
Determine whether the customer has
specific requirements on coverage
scenarios.
•
•
•
•
9
Huawei Confidential
•
•
•
•
Country code
Equivalent isotropic
radiated power (EIRP)
Available channels
Building drawings with
scale information
Drawing format
(CAD/PDF/PNG/JPG)
Indoor coverage
Outdoor coverage
Agile distributed
coverage
Requirements Collection — Service Requirements
10
Coverage
area
Determine the key coverage areas (such as office areas and conference rooms) and
common coverage areas (such as staircases and restrooms) required by the customer.
Field strength
Determine whether the customer has requirements on the signal field strength in the
coverage area. Generally, the signal field strength in key coverage areas (VIP areas) is
greater than –60 dBm, and that in common coverage areas is greater than –65 dBm.
Number of
access users
Calculate the total number of access STAs in a coverage area, and estimate the
number of concurrent access users in a coverage area.
STA type
Determine the types of STAs and the proportion of MIMO types supported by these
STAs to estimate AP performance.
Bandwidth
Determine the main types of network services and per-user bandwidth requirement in
target areas.
Huawei Confidential
• Among the STA types, common STAs include mobile phones, tablets, and
notebook computers, and special STAs include scanners and cash registers.
Determine the proportion of MIMO types supported by STAs based on the
customer's technical capability. Collect the MIMO types from the customer. If the
customer cannot provide the MIMO types, assume 2x2 MIMO for calculation.
Requirements Collection — Installation Requirements
Power supply
mode
Switch
location
11
Huawei Confidential
Determine the power supply mode
required by the customer and the
available power supply areas and
facilities on site.
Determine the locations of upstream
switches. Check whether the PoE power
supply distance meets the requirements.
•
•
PoE power supply
Power supply by a power
adapter
•
•
PoE power supply: < 80 m
PoE++ power supply: <
200 m
Site Survey — Tools
⚫
⚫
A site survey is conducted to obtain site environment information, such as interference sources, signal attenuation
caused by obstacles, floor height, new obstacles, and extra-low voltage (ELV) room locations. Determine AP models,
installation positions and modes, and power supply and cabling design based on the construction drawings.
The site survey is typically completed using auxiliary tools, helping ensure the completeness and accuracy of site
survey information. Site survey tools are categorized as software tools, hardware tools, and other tools (building
drawings).
Software
tools
CloudCampus APP
WLAN Planner
Hardware
tools
Indoor rangefinder
Camera
Test AP
Other tools
Building drawing
12
Huawei Confidential
• Software tools:
▫ The WLAN Planner developed by Huawei is a professional WLAN planning
tool used to set up the WLAN planning environment, deploy devices,
simulate radio signals, and export WLAN planning reports, helping users
easily complete WLAN planning and design.
▫ The CloudCampus APP provides a built-in site survey module that supports
multiple functions such as AP locating, terminal query, and interference
check.
• Hardware tools:
▫ Indoor rangefinder: is used to measure the AP installation height, distance
between APs and obstacles, and the length, width, and height of a venue
when an indoor WLAN is deployed.
▫ Camera: is used to record information about the site environment, such as
the AP installation environment and obstacle information in WDS
networking scenarios.
▫ Test AP (including the matching power supply and bracket): works with the
CloudCampus APP to test obstacle attenuation in indoor scenarios. It is
recommended that the test AP be carried during site survey.
Site Survey — Information Collection Process
⚫
Information collected during the site survey is critical to the network planning and design phase as well as the final
network display effect. The site survey collection items vary according to the WLAN planning scenario, and need to
be adjusted as required. The process of collecting site survey information is as follows:
Determining
drawing
information
Verify that
drawing
information is
consistent with
the onsite
situation.
13
Determining
interference
sources
Determining AP
parameters
Determining switch
positions
Determining
special
requirements
Check
interference
sources on site
and record them
using tools.
Determine the AP
models,
installation
mode, and
installation
positions based
on site
requirements.
Check the
location of the
ELV room, verify
the switch
deployment in
the ELV room,
and check
whether power
supply and
cabling meet the
requirements.
Confirm with the
customer about
other
requirements.
Huawei Confidential
• Before starting a site survey, use the WLAN Planner to design a draft WLAN
planning solution, which can provide guidance during the site survey. The design
idea of this WLAN planning draft should be the same as that of the WLAN
planning, except that the data collected during the site survey is not available as
a reference.
Site Survey Information Collection (1/5)
Determining drawing
information
Determining
interference sources
Determining AP
parameters
Determining switch
positions
Site Survey Item
Record (Example)
Description
Common indoor floor height: 3 m
If there are atriums, halls, or lecture
halls, use a rangefinder to measure the
floor height and record the value.
Building materials
and signal
attenuation
240 mm brick wall (attenuation of 15 dB
@ 2.4 GHz and 25 dB @ 5 GHz)
80 mm colored thick glass (attenuation
of 8 dB @ 2.4 GHz and 10 dB @ 5 GHz)
Obtain the thickness and signal
attenuation values of the building
materials on site. If possible, test the
signal attenuation values on site.
New obstacles
New obstacles whose positions and signal
attenuation values have been marked on
the drawing
Check whether the site is consistent with
that on the drawing. If not, mark the
inconsistent areas and take photos.
Floor height
Determining special
requirements
* Note: The enterprise office scenario is used as an example.
14
Huawei Confidential
Site Survey Information Collection (2/5)
Determining drawing
information
Determining
interference sources
Determining AP
parameters
Determining switch
positions
Site Survey
Item
Interference
source
Record (Example)
Description
Wi-Fi interference is detected.
The interference sources have
been marked on the drawing.
Check whether there are interference
sources, for example, mobile
hotspots, Wi-Fi devices of other
vendors, and non-Wi-Fi devices (such
as Bluetooth devices and microwave
ovens).
The CloudCampus APP can be used
to record interference source
information.
Determining special
requirements
* Note: The enterprise office scenario is used as an example.
15
Huawei Confidential
Site Survey Information Collection (3/5)
Determining drawing
information
Site Survey Item
Record (Example)
Description
AP selection
Indoor APs with
omnidirectional antennas
Select indoor APs with
omnidirectional antennas, agile
distributed APs, outdoor APs, or
high-density APs based on scenarios.
AP installation
Ceiling or wall mounting
mode and position
Check whether APs can be mounted
on the ceiling. If not, mount APs on
the walls or junction boxes.
Determining
interference sources
Determining AP
parameters
Determining switch
positions
Determining special
requirements
16
Huawei Confidential
* Note: The enterprise office scenario is used as an example.
Site Survey Information Collection (4/5)
Determining drawing
information
Site Survey Item
Record (Example)
Description
Determining
interference sources
ELV room location
ELV room locations marked
on the drawing.
Mark the locations of ELV rooms
where switches are to be deployed
on the drawing.
Determining AP
parameters
Power supply
cabling
Network cables to be
routed have been marked
on the drawing.
Mark PoE power supply cables to be
routed on the drawing. It is
recommended that the length of a
PoE cable be no more than 80 m.
Implementation
feasibility
Check whether APs can be
Check whether there is a fireproof
deployed, distance to
switches, distance to power door or whether it is difficult to drill
holes on the concrete bearing wall.
supply, and whether the
cabling is feasible.
Determining switch
positions
Determining special
requirements
* Note: The enterprise office scenario is used as an example.
17
Huawei Confidential
Site Survey Information Collection (5/5)
Determining drawing
information
Determining
interference sources
Site Survey Item
Record (Example)
Description
Special
requirements
In-roaming packet loss rate:
< 1%; latency: < 20 ms
Record special requirements of the
customer.
Other information
Collect and record other information
if any.
Determining AP
parameters
Other
Determining switch
positions
Determining special
requirements
18
Huawei Confidential
* Note: The enterprise office scenario is used as an example.
Site Survey — Obstacle Attenuation Testing
⚫
⚫
Obstacles cause strong attenuation of radio signals. If the attenuation data is inaccurate, network planning, design,
and deployment will be greatly affected. Therefore, you can obtain accurate attenuation data by using the obstacle
attenuation test method during site survey.
Generally, the attenuation of obstacles is tested on typical indoor obstacles or obstacles with uncertain materials,
such as ceilings or decorative walls.
Test procedure
Test point 1
Test AP
(Fat AP)
About 4–5 m
Test point 2
Obstacle to
be tested
1.
Test AP deployment: Ensure that the AP and the obstacle to be
tested are not blocked and the distance between them is 4 m to 5
m. Do not place the AP close to the obstacle to be tested, because
the field strength near the signal source fluctuates greatly, which
affects the test accuracy.
2.
Signal field strength test: Test the signal field strength at test
points 1 and 2, as shown in the figure.
3.
Attenuation calculation method:
Signal attenuation of the obstacle to be tested = Field strength
tested at test point 1 – Field strength tested at test point 2
19
Huawei Confidential
• When using a signal scanning tool (CloudCampus APP installed on a mobile
phone) to connect to a Fat AP WLAN to test the signal field strength, you are
advised to measure several groups of data to reduce the error. Note that the
attenuation values of signals on each frequency band need to be tested
separately. For example, if the 2.4 GHz field strength values on both sides of an
obstacle are –60 dBm and –65 dBm, respectively, the signal attenuation caused
by the obstacle is 5 dB.
Contents
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Planning Process
▫ Preparation
◼
Planning and Design
▫ Deployment Design
3.
20
WLAN Planning Case
Huawei Confidential
Planning and Design
⚫
In the planning and design phase, the device model and device performance are determined based on
the data collected in the preparation phase to ensure the WLAN coverage and to meet the Internet
access service requirements of all terminals.
⚫
The planning and design phase includes signal coverage analysis, capacity design, and device selection.
Signal coverage analysis
•
•
•
•
•
21
Coverage area
Field strength
Coverage area of a single
AP
Signal attenuation caused
by obstacles
AP antenna selection
Huawei Confidential
Device selection
Capacity design
•
•
•
•
Per-user bandwidth
Number of access STAs
Concurrency rate
Per-AP performance
•
•
•
•
•
MIMO
Antenna selection or gain
Combined power
Power supply mode
Wi-Fi standard
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Signal Coverage Design Rules
⚫
During signal coverage design, you need to design and plan coverage for different areas to ensure that the signal
strength in each area meets user requirements and to minimize co-channel interference between neighboring APs.
⚫
The signal coverage effect can be simply understood as the number of Wi-Fi signal bars on a mobile phone. The
field strength of no less than –65 dBm is an empirical value obtained in engineering practice. Different projects may
have special requirements.
Objective
Factors to be
considered
Acceptance
criteria
22
Huawei Confidential
Good coverage (good signal)
Coverage of a single
AP
Signal attenuation
caused by obstacles
AP installation
positions
Field strength in all areas ≥ –65 dBm
AP antenna
selection
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Coverage Area
⚫
Before network planning, communicate with the customer to determine the WLAN coverage areas
based on the onsite environment and drawing. For example, offices are key coverage areas, and
corridors are common coverage areas. After confirmation, mark the information on the drawing for
future planning.
Office 1
Office 2
Lounge
Lecture hall
Corridor
Restroom
23
Restroom
Coverage Area
Field Strength
Key coverage area (VIP)
–40 dBm to –60 dBm
Common coverage area
≥ –65 dBm
Special coverage area
N/A
Huawei Confidential
Key coverage area
Common coverage
area
Meeting room
Typical Scenarios in Common Projects
Dorm room, classroom, hotel room, office, meeting room, etc.
Lobby, exhibition hall, library, corridor, etc.
Areas where coverage or installation is limited or not allowed, for
the sake of service security or property management.
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Signal Attenuation Caused by Obstacles
Signal attenuation caused by common obstacles
Obstacle
Thickness (mm)
2.4 GHz Signal Attenuation (dB)
5 GHz Signal Attenuation (dB)
Synthetic material
20
2
3
Asbestos
8
3
4
Wooden door
40
3
4
Glass window
50
4
7
Thick colored glass
80
8
10
Brick wall
120
10
20
Brick wall
240
15
25
Armored glass
120
25
35
Concrete
240
25
30
Metal
80
30
35
Relationship between the signal attenuation and transmission distance
Distance
1m
2m
5m
10 m
20 m
40 m
80 m
2.4 GHz attenuation
46 dB
53.5 dB
63.5 dB
71 dB
78.5 dB
86 dB
93.6 dB
96 dB
5.8 GHz attenuation
53 dB
62 dB
74 dB
83 dB
92 dB
101 dB
110.1 dB
113 dB
24
Huawei Confidential
100 m
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Single AP Coverage
⚫
A single AP provides limited wireless coverage. Therefore, multiple APs need to be deployed to offer full network
coverage in a WLAN project. To determine the number of APs, you need to calculate the coverage area of each AP.
⚫
The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is calculated as follows (regardless of factors such as the interference
and line loss):
Final signal field strength = AP transmit power + MIMO gain + Antenna gain – Path loss – Obstacle
signal attenuation
Relationship between the path loss and signal transmission distance
(Indoor coverage scenario) 2.4 GHz: L = 46 + 25lg(d); 5 GHz: L = 53 + 30lg(d)
(Outdoor coverage scenario) 2.4 GHz/5 GHz: L = 42.6 + 26lg(d) + 20lg(f)
(Backhaul scenario) 5 GHz: L = 32.4 + 26lg(d) + 20lg(f)
* L indicates the path loss (dB), f indicates the working frequency (MHz), and
d indicates the signal transmission distance (m).
25
Huawei Confidential
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Signal Attenuation Analysis (Example)
Requirements analysis
•
•
APs cannot be installed in
lounges.
APs in the lecture hall are used
to provide signal coverage (with
–75 dBm field strength).
Site survey
Coverage analysis
•
•
The signal attenuation of the
wooden partition wall is 5 dB.
Calculate the signal field
strength of the mobile phone
based on the final signal field
strength formula, as shown in
the following figure.
Signal field strength at the position of the mobile phone shown in the figure = 20 (recommended AP transmit power) + 3 (antenna
gain) – 60 (transmission attenuation) – 5 (signal attenuation caused by obstacles) = –42 dBm.
This meets network planning requirements. If the field strength cannot reach this value, deploy more APs as needed.
Office 1
Office 2
Lounge
Lecture hall
Corridor
Restroom
26
Restroom
Meeting room
Wooden
partition wall
Huawei Confidential
• Note: During the calculation of built-in antennas, the transmit power and
antenna gain are often calculated together to simplify memory.
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Key Points for Indoor AP Coverage Design
⚫
Pay attention to the following key points when designing indoor AP coverage:

Reduce the number of obstacles that signals pass through. It is not recommended that signals penetrate a 240 mm thick brick
wall, concrete wall, or metal wall.

Deploy APs separately in key areas and areas with special requirements to ensure user experience.

Deploy APs separately at intersections or corners to ensure signal coverage continuity (≥ –65 dBm) and that neighboring APs
can establish neighbor relationship tables for good roaming experience.

Install APs at least 3 m away from bearing pillars.

Deploy APs in equal-triangle (W-shaped) or equal-spacing mode based on site requirements.
2
2
1
1
Improper location: Signals penetrate several walls.
27
Proper location: Signals penetrate only one wall.
Huawei Confidential
• Minimize the number of obstacles that signals pass through. Generally, it is
recommended that signals pass through a single-layer wall (120 mm brick wall).
In some special scenarios (such as gypsum walls and glass walls), signals can
pass through two layers of walls.
• It is not recommended that signals penetrate a 240 mm thick brick wall, concrete
wall, or metal wall. If the AP penetration coverage solution is used without
meeting the specified constraints, weak signals and discontinuous roaming may
occur after signals penetrate the wall. In this case, to ensure good coverage and
roaming, add APs based on the wall structure during network planning.
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Key Points for Outdoor AP Coverage Design
⚫
Pay attention to the following key points when designing outdoor AP coverage:

Select a proper antenna coverage mode based on WLAN scenarios. For example, omnidirectional antennas are recommended in
open areas such as squares and parks.

It is recommended that outdoor directional and omnidirectional antennas be installed at a height of 3 m to 5 m. Outdoor
omnidirectional antennas must be installed vertically.

Directional APs or antennas are recommended for roads around buildings to reduce interference to indoor signals and provide
codirectional coverage.

Due to obstacles such as trees, it is recommended that devices be installed on the monitoring pole. Avoid strong electromagnetic
interference and other signal interference near the site.
Antenna
Teaching building
3–5 m
Lab building
Example of installing outdoor directional
and omnidirectional antennas
28
Example of installing APs with
directional antennas around a building
Huawei Confidential
• APs with built-in directional antennas are recommended for coverage in narrow
and long areas such as roads. APs with external small-angle directional antennas
are recommended for coverage in high-density, backhaul, and ultra-longdistance coverage scenarios.
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Capacity Design Rules
⚫
During network capacity design, you need to design the number of APs required based on the bandwidth
requirements, the number of STAs, concurrency rate, and per-AP performance. This ensures that the WLAN
performance can meet the Internet access requirements of all STAs.
⚫
User bandwidth can be simply understood as the network bandwidth required by a STA to use a service. User
concurrency and bandwidth requirements vary depending on specific areas. Therefore, the capacity design must be
performed based on different scenarios and areas.
Objective
29
Meeting users' bandwidth requirements (concurrent scenario)
Factors to be
considered
Per-user bandwidth
Acceptance
criteria
The bandwidth of key services meets the multi-user concurrent requirements in the
target area.
Huawei Confidential
Number of access STAs
Number of
concurrent STAs
Capacity of a single AP
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Requirements of a Single User (Office Scenario
as an Example)
⚫
After the signal coverage design is determined, analyze and evaluate the average bandwidth of each area based on
the specified service bandwidth requirements, actual scenarios, and concurrency. If no bandwidth requirement in a
scenario is specified, evaluate the required bandwidth based on the typical scenario.
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline
Rate (Mbps)
Excellent
Good
4K video
50
30
1080p video
16
12
720p video
8
4
E-whiteboard (wireless
32
16
projection)
Email
32
16
Web browsing
8
4
Gaming
2
1
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
VoIP (voice)
0.256
0.128
Average single-user bandwidth (Mbps) —
excellent
Proportion of Services in Office Scenarios
Conference
Room
10%
10%
10%
High-Density
Office Area
10%
10%
10%
Common Office
Area
10%
10%
10%
Leisure
Area
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
30%
0%
10%
10%
16
Exhibition
Canteen Parking Lot Restroom
Hall
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
10%
20%
5%
5%
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
0%
30%
10%
20%
10%
0%
30%
0%
30%
10%
0%
30%
10%
20%
10%
0%
10%
10%
30%
20%
0%
30%
10%
20%
10%
19
13
10
10
10
9
10
*Data comes from Huawei labs.
30
Huawei Confidential
• Bandwidth requirements vary depending on STA types and network services
running on STAs. For example, the bandwidth required by a STA used for
watching HD videos is higher than that required by a STA used only for browsing
web pages. Therefore, plan sufficient bandwidth based on STA services and types
to avoid bandwidth insufficiency or waste.
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by a single AP refers to the maximum number of concurrent STAs
supported by the single AP which meets user bandwidth requirements. The main factors include the user access
bandwidth, number of AP spatial streams, number of AP radios, and frequency bandwidth.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP at different access
bandwidths.
Wi-Fi 6 AP (20 MHz @ 2.4 GHz; 40 MHz @ 5 GHz)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Single Radio
(5 GHz)
Dual Radios
(2.4 GHz + 5 GHz)
Triple Radios
(2.4 GHz + 5 GHz-1 + 5 GHz-2)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
7 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
* Note: The number of concurrent STAs varies depending on the AP model. The preceding data is obtained from Huawei labs.
31
Huawei Confidential
• The user access bandwidth in the table refers to the rate at the application layer.
The rate at the application layer refers to the actual effective rate excluding
various overheads over the air interface. The rate at the application layer is lower
than that the PHY rate.
• Note: All test STAs in the table support the corresponding wireless technology
and work with dual spatial streams.
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
WLAN Capacity Design (Example)
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs at Different Bandwidths (Dual Spatial
Streams, 802.11ax Supported)
STA Access
Bandwidth
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs (Dual-Radio)
Prerequisites
...
...
...
Scenario: Conference room
Number of access STAs: 300
16 Mbps
12
18
Access concurrency rate: 30%
...
...
...
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Service Type
Percentage
Excellent
Good
Conference
Room
4K video
50
30
10%
1080p video
16
12
10%
720p video
8
4
10%
E-whiteboard
(wireless projection)
32
16
10%
Email
32
16
10%
Web browsing
8
4
30%
Gaming
2
1
0%
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
10%
VoIP (voice)
0.256
0.128
10%
Average single-user bandwidth (Mbps) — excellent
32
Huawei Confidential
16 Mbps
Bandwidth required by a single STA (Excellent): 16 Mbps
Number of concurrent STAs supported by a single AP
(dual-band, 16 Mbps): 18
Calculation result
Number of APs required to meet capacity
requirements in this area =
Number of access STAs x Access concurrency rate
Number of concurrent STAs on a single AP
300 x 30%
18
=5
Signal Coverage Analysis
Capacity Design
Device Selection
Device Selection Factors
⚫
Select proper AP models based on customer requirements and the following factors:
33
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger access
capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support
omnidirectional and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be
installed at high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer
to the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country
Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain
based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply mode depends on the deployment scenario. Currently, in most scenarios, PoE power supply is used, or both
PoE and power supply are used for mutual backup. Pay attention to the power consumption of the AP and the power supply
capability of the PoE switch.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6
standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example, the Internet of Things (IoT) feature may be required. As the IoT comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT
network independently will cause repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment.
Therefore, it is recommended that IoT scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
Huawei Confidential
• In addition to the scenarios described in the table, antenna selection also includes
the following:
▫ Indoor scenario: Omnidirectional antennas are applicable when there is no
high capacity requirement and dense deployment is not involved in the
target coverage area.
▫ Outdoor scenario: Directional antennas are used for long-distance signal
coverage and wireless backhaul, while omnidirectional antennas are used
for short-distance signal coverage. (For example, in China, when the
coverage distance is greater than 80 m, use directional antennas; when the
coverage distance is less than 80 m, use omnidirectional antennas. The
actual coverage distance is subject to the local EIRP limit.)
Contents
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Planning Process
▫ Preparation
▫ Planning and Design
◼
3.
34
Deployment Design
WLAN Planning Case
Huawei Confidential
Deployment Design
⚫
In the deployment design phase, after determining the WLAN coverage area, AP model, and number of APs, design
the AP deployment location, deployment mode, and power supply cabling mode based on the actual situation.
⚫
The deployment design phase includes channel planning, power supply cabling design, and installation mode
design. The work contents are as follows:
Power supply and cabling
design
Channel planning
35
•
Horizontal
•
AP power supply mode
•
Vertical
•
AP cabling mode
Huawei Confidential
Installation mode design
•
Installation of indoor APs
with omnidirectional
antennas
•
Installation of agile
distributed APs
•
Installation of outdoor APs
and external directional
antennas
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
Channel Design Rules
⚫
To avoid coverage holes or poor roaming experience, multiple APs are used to provide complete network coverage.
Therefore, channel selection and channel planning are involved. Before channel design, comply with the following
rules:
Determine the local available channels.
•
Available channels vary with countries or regions, and some channels may be reserved in some regions. Therefore, confirm
the channels before network planning to avoid duplicate channels.
•
For example, in China, 40 MHz channels 36, 44, 52, 60, 149, and 157 can be used on the indoor 5 GHz frequency band. In
common scenarios, 40 MHz networking is recommended by default.
Avoid co-channel interference.
•
Properly plan channels to ensure the reuse distance of intra-frequency channels.
•
On the premise of ensuring coverage, lower the power to reduce co-channel interference.
•
AP channels need to be staggered in multiple dimensions (for example, the horizontal and vertical directions) when APs are
deployed on multiple floors.
•
36
If channels cannot be staggered, disable some radios to reduce interference.
Huawei Confidential
• WLAN Country Codes and Channels Compliance:
https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/doc/EDOC1000014876/82579c28?idPat
h=24030814|21782164|21782201|22318529|22039827
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
Channel Planning
⚫
In WLAN planning, overlapping coverage areas are inevitable between neighboring APs. Generally, 10% to 15%
overlapping buffer areas need to be reserved. This area may cause co-channel interference.
⚫
To address this, you can plan channels horizontally or vertically based on site requirements. In the horizontal
direction, neighboring APs must use radio frequency bands that do not interfere with each other. When a WLAN is
deployed across multiple floors, ensure that channels do not interfere with each other in the vertical direction.
Horizontal
Vertical
11
1
11
1
149
11
44
6
1
2.4 GHz cellular
coverage
37
Floor
36
Huawei Confidential
64
157
165
52
5 GHz cellular
coverage
Planned Channels
5th floor
1
6
11
4th floor
3rd floor
11
1
6
6
11
1
2nd floor
1
6
11
1st floor
11
1
6
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
AP Power Supply Design
⚫
When designing the AP power supply mode, select a proper power supply mode based on customer requirements and onsite
conditions. AP power supply modes include:

Power supply using a PoE switch: PoE switches forward data of and supply power to APs (through Ethernet cables or hybrid cables).

Power supply using a DC power adapter (supported only by indoor APs): An independent DC power adapter is used to supply power to APs.

Power supply using a PoE adapter: PoE adapters are used for data transmission and power supply of APs. Alternatively, use optical fibers for data
transmission of AP and PoE adapters only for power supply.
Fiber mechanical splicer
AC power supply
Data port
connecting
to a switch
RJ45 power
connector
Power indicator
PoE port connecting
to an AP
PoE switch
38
Huawei Confidential
PoE power supply
over a hybrid cable
DC power adapter
PoE adapter
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
AP Cabling Rules
⚫
Observe the following rules when routing cables:

Reserve a length of around 5 meters for Ethernet cables and hybrid cables for fine-tuning AP positions to reduce interference or
optimize signal coverage.

It is recommended that the length of an Ethernet cable between an AP and a PoE switch be less than or equal to 80 m.

Hybrid cables can only be used indoors and cannot be connected to outdoor APs. It is recommended that the length of a hybrid
cable between an AP and a switch be less than or equal to 300 m.

The WLAN must be kept far away from strong electric and magnetic fields.

Before deployment, confirm with the customer about the network cable deployment scheme to ensure that project construction
will not be affected due to property and aesthetics reasons.
< 80 m
AP
PoE switch
Power supply over an
Ethernet cable
39
Huawei Confidential
< 300 m
AP
PoE switch
Power supply over a
hybrid cable
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
Indoor Settled AP Installation
⚫
When designing indoor AP installation, select a proper installation mode based on site conditions and customer
requirements. Indoor settled APs can be installed in the following modes:

Ceiling mounting: If the installation height is smaller than 6 m, use APs with omnidirectional antennas. If the installation height is
greater than 6 m, use APs with directional antennas.

Wall mounting: If ceiling mounting is not allowed, wall mounting can be used. The recommended installation height is 3 m.

Support mounting: This mode can be temporarily used when APs cannot be mounted on the ceiling or walls, applying to
temporary exhibition scenarios.

Threaded rod installation: This mode is recommended when the ceiling is high or there are many obstacles on the ceiling.
Ceiling mounting
40
Huawei Confidential
Wall mounting
Support mounting
Threaded rod
mounting
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
Agile Distributed AP Installation
⚫
Wall plate APs and agile distributed RUs can be installed on walls, junction boxes, or ceilings.
Wall mounting
41
Junction box (86
mm) mounting
Ceiling mounting
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Some AP models, such as the AirEngine 5760-22W, do not support ceiling
mounting. Therefore, before mounting an AP on the ceiling, check whether the
AP supports this installation mode.
Channel Planning
Power Supply and Cabling Design
Installation Mode Design
Installation Modes of Outdoor APs and Antennas
⚫
Outdoor APs can be mounted on poles or walls. Pay attention to the following points during the installation:

Outdoor APs and antennas are equipped with mounting brackets that allow you to adjust the azimuth and downtilt in a range of
±30°.

If the antenna angle does not need to be adjusted, APs can be directly installed on the wall.

The recommended installation height of outdoor omnidirectional and directional antennas is 3–5 m.
Pole mounting
Installation diagram
42
Huawei Confidential
Wall mounting
Installation diagram
Contents
43
1.
WLAN Planning Overview
2.
WLAN Planning Process
3.
WLAN Planning Case
Huawei Confidential
Project Background
⚫
A company plans to construct a WLAN in its indoor office area. The following figure shows the floor plan of the
building. To meet the mobile office requirements of employees and Internet access requirements of guests, the
indoor WLAN design and planning are performed to ensure that the WLAN covers all areas required by the
customer and meets service requirements.
44
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Roadmap
⚫
The detailed WLAN planning procedure is as follows:

Analyze requirements based on the existing information.

Select devices based on requirements and calculate the
number of APs.

Log in to the WLAN Planner and import the building drawing.

Set the environment and draw obstacles.

Deploy APs.

Adjust AP parameters and antenna angles.

Lay out switches and cables.

Perform signal simulation.

Adjust the AP positions and repeatedly perform signal
simulation until the signal coverage is complete.

45
Export the network planning report.
Huawei Confidential
Requirements
collection
Site survey
Environment
setting
Requirements
analysis
Region setting
Creating a project
Importing a
drawing
Network planning
in five steps
AP deployment
Signal simulation
Report export
Requirements Collection (1/2)
⚫
The information to be obtained in the requirements collection phase includes basic requirements, service
requirements, and installation requirements.
⚫
After thorough communication with the customer, the collected basic requirements and installation requirements
are listed as follows:
Basic requirements collection checklist
Requirement Type
Laws and regulations
46
Collection Result
Country code: CN
Floor plan
JPG scale drawing (building length:
100 m)
Coverage mode
Indoor APs with omnidirectional
antennas
Huawei Confidential
Installation requirements collection checklist
Requirement Type
Collection Result
Power supply mode
PoE switch
AP installation mode
Ceiling mounting
Switch location
Acceptance items and criteria
ELV rooms
No special requirements
Requirements Collection (2/2)
⚫
After thorough communication with the customer, the collected service requirements are listed as follows:
Requirement Type
Coverage area
VIP coverage areas: exhibition hall, reception room, and manager's office
Common coverage areas: open office areas, meeting rooms, printing room, and leisure areas
Simple coverage areas: restrooms
Areas not covered: ELV rooms, storage rooms, staircases, and elevators
Field strength
•
•
•
•
VIP coverage area: ≥ –60 dBm
Common coverage area: ≥ –65 dBm
Simple coverage area: ≥ –70 dBm
Leakage field strength: no requirement
Number of access
STAs
•
•
•
Open office area: 250 office cubes in each area, with two STAs in each office cube
Conference room: 40 seats, with one STA at each seat
Meeting room and exhibition hall: 10 seats in each room or hall, with two STAs at each seat
STA type
Bandwidth
requirements (per-user
bandwidth)
47
Collection Result
•
•
•
•
Huawei Confidential
Laptops, mobile phones, and tablets that support 2x2 MIMO and 40 MHz frequency bandwidth @ 5 GHz
•
•
•
Open office area: 8 Mbps, with a concurrency rate of 72%
Conference room: 16 Mbps, with a concurrency rate of 90%
Meeting room and exhibition hall: 16 Mbps, with a concurrency rate of 90%
Site Survey
⚫
A site survey is conducted to obtain site environment information, such as interference sources, signal attenuation caused by
obstacles, floor height, new obstacles, and ELV room locations. Determine AP models, installation positions and modes, and power
supply and cabling design based on the construction drawings.
Collection Item
Survey Result
Drawing information
• The onsite building information is consistent with that on the floor plan provided by the customer.
• The floor height is 2.6 m.
• Inside the building, tables and chairs are at normal heights and have little interference to signals. Therefore, they
can be ignored.
Building materials and signal
attenuation
Interference sources
• There is a microwave oven in both the left and right leisure areas.
• There are four load-bearing pillars (length x width: about 1 m x 1 m) in each of the greening areas, which have
been marked on the drawing.
• There are potted plants (half-meter high) in greening areas, which have little impact on signals and can be
ignored.
Switch location
Either of the left or right ELV room
Cabling rules
Network cables between switches and APs are routed above the ceiling. Hidden cabling is required, and hole
drilling is allowed.
Installation admission
48
• The external walls are 240 mm concrete walls.
• The walls of meeting rooms, offices, and reception room are 240 mm thick brick walls.
• The leisure area walls are 12 mm thickened glass.
Huawei Confidential
Approved
Calculating the Number of APs
Single-AP concurrency specifications
⚫
Calculate the number of APs required in each area based on
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs at Different
Bandwidths (Dual Spatial Streams, 802.11ax Supported)
the average STA bandwidth requirements in each scenario and
STA Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs
(Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs
(Dual-Radio)
AP provided by the customer. The calculation formula is as
4 Mbps
39
56
8 Mbps
21
30
16 Mbps
12
18
...
...
...
the concurrent number of STAs on the 5 GHz radio of a single
follows:
Number of
required APs =
Number of access STAs x
Access concurrency rate
Number of concurrent
STAs on a single AP
Average per-STA bandwidth in each scenario
Scenario
Number of
STAs
Per-STA
Bandwidth
Concurrency
Rate
Open office area
500
8 Mbps
72%
Conference room
40
16 Mbps
90%
Meeting room and
exhibition hall
20
16 Mbps
90%
Leisure area
20
8 Mbps
60%
Restroom
10
4 Mbps
90%
49
Calculation results:
•
Open office area = 500 x 72%/30 = 12
•
Conference room = 40 x 90%/18 = 2
•
Meeting room = 20 x 90%/18 = 1
•
Leisure area = 20 x 60%/30 ≈ 1
•
Restroom = 10 x 90%/56 ≈ 1
Huawei Confidential
• In other rooms with a small number of STAs, only one AP needs to be deployed.
Creating a Project
⚫
Log in to the WLAN Planner, click Running, read the Security Management Regulations on Customer
Network Data, and fill in the project information.
1
4
5
2
3
6
50
Huawei Confidential
• WLAN Planner address: https://serviceturbo-cloudcn.huawei.com/serviceturbocloud/#/toolsummary?entityId=d59de9ac-e4ef-409ebbdc-eff3d0346b42
Creating a Floor
⚫
Create a region, select Indoor, set the building name to HCIP-WLAN, and click Select File.
1
2
3
51
Huawei Confidential
Selecting a Scenario
Select a WLAN scenario. For this project, select Office and click Next. You can specify a built-in network
⚫
construction standard as required. For this project, select Other and click OK.
1
3
2
52
Huawei Confidential
4
Importing a Drawing
⚫
Select the drawing file and click OK.
53
Huawei Confidential
Setting the Scale
⚫
Click Click here to set the scale in the middle of the drawing, draw a straight line from left to right
anywhere on the drawing, set the length to 100 meters, and click OK.
2
1
3
4
54
Huawei Confidential
Setting the Environment
⚫
Draw obstacles on the drawing. Use insulation boundaries to draw drawing frames. Draw 240 mm thick brick walls
as indoor walls, 240 mm concrete as ELV rooms, and 12 mm thick glass as leisure areas.
Microwave
oven
Load-bearing
pillar
55
Huawei Confidential
Setting Regions
⚫
Drag-select VIP coverage areas, common coverage areas, and simple coverage areas based on customer
requirements, and set basic attributes for these areas.
Open office
area A
56
Manager's
office
Huawei Confidential
• This slide shows the settings of basic attribute parameters for open office area A
and manager's office. For other areas, set the parameters based on customer
requirements.
Deploying APs (1/4)
⚫
Click Automatic deployment, select Current Floor in Auto Place Config, and click Next.
1
2
3
57
Huawei Confidential
Deploying APs (2/4)
⚫
In Auto Place Config, select a proper AP model and channel calculation mode, enable the power calibration
function, and click Place AP.
3
1
4
2
58
Huawei Confidential
Deploying APs (3/4)
⚫
After automatic deployment, the number and positions of APs may be insufficient to meet service requirements. In
this case, manually adjust the number and positions of APs. In open office areas, you can deploy APs in equal
triangle mode and set the distance between APs to 15–18 m.
Effect after automatic deployment
59
Huawei Confidential
Effect after manual adjustment
Deploying APs (4/4)
⚫
After APs are deployed, set AP parameters, such as
the installation mode, height, and working mode.
If directional antennas are used, you need to set
the antenna downtilt and azimuth.
⚫
Right-click an AP in the activity area and choose
Property from the shortcut menu. (You can dragselect all APs and right-click them for the setting).
The AP Attributes page is displayed, allowing you
to configure AP parameters based on customer
requirements.

The customer requires ceiling mounting for APs. As
such, retain the default installation mode T-rail, set the
height to 2.6 m, set the working mode to dual-radio
mode, and retain the default values for other
parameters. The attribute configurations of APs in
other areas are the same.
60
Huawei Confidential
Deploying Switches
⚫
Select a switch model (S5731-S24P4X switch in this project). Place switches in the ELV rooms on both sides.
61
Huawei Confidential
Drawing Network Cables
⚫
Network cables can be routed above the ceilings to directly connect APs and switches.
62
Huawei Confidential
• Note: You can hide network cables by clicking the Set Display button on the
bottom of the page.
Simulating Signals (1/2)
Adjust the bar in the simulation diagram to –65 dBm, and then click Open simulation to view the coverage of common areas.
⚫
2
1
63
Huawei Confidential
• To view the coverage of VIP areas and simple areas, set the signal strength in the
simulation diagram to –60 dBm and –70 dBm, respectively.
Simulating Signals (2/2)
⚫
If the signal coverage is poor, adjust the number and positions of repeatedly to ensure normal signal
simulation. View the coverage satisfaction to check whether any area has only poor signal coverage.
64
Huawei Confidential
Exporting the Report (1/2)
⚫
You can set the parameters to be included in the report, and then click Export to export the WLAN planning report.
65
Huawei Confidential
Exporting the Report (2/2)
⚫
Before the report is exported, you need to review the network planning. The report can be exported only after all
items are correct.
1
66
Huawei Confidential
2
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following obstacles causes the largest attenuation of 2.4 GHz
signals when materials have the same thickness? (
A.
Metal
B.
Asbestos
C.
Wooden door
D.
Colored glass
)
2. (Single-answer question) Which of the following are rules for AP deployment? (
67
A.
When installing an AP, try to reduce the number of obstacles that signals traverse.
B.
Ensure that the front side of an AP faces the target coverage area.
C.
Deploy APs in concealed places.
D.
Deploy APs far away from interference sources.
Huawei Confidential
1. A
2. ABD
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the importance of WLAN planning. If WLAN planning is not properly
performed in the early stage, rework may occur during WLAN project delivery due to a
failure to meet customer requirements. Additionally, this course introduces you to the
WLAN planning process, including preparation, planning and design, deployment design,
and construction and delivery. Before WLAN planning, fully communicate with the customer
to understand the customer's requirements and expectations. During the site survey,
carefully check onsite conditions against the drawing to facilitate subsequent WLAN
planning and design.
⚫
After learning this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the methods of WLAN planning and design.
68
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
69
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors
that could cause actual results and developments to differ
materially from those expressed or implied in the predictive
statements. Therefore, such information is provided for reference
purpose only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance.
Huawei may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Enterprise Office Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
The enterprise office scenario refers to the office area of an enterprise, including the
centralized office area, conference room, and manager's office. WLAN planning for this
scenario instructs you to plan a WLAN before deployment to meet Internet access
requirements for enterprise office. With a high user density, this scenario has a high
requirement for network capacity and is sensitive to network quality.
⚫
This course introduces you to the WLAN service characteristics of enterprise office scenarios
as well as methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common WLAN service types in enterprise office scenarios.

Describe WLAN planning methods in enterprise office scenarios.

Describe WLAN deployment solutions in enterprise office scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Enterprise Office Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Enterprise Office Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Enterprise Office Scenarios
•
Space: In most cases, the height does not exceed 4 m. The specific area greatly varies from several square meters to thousands of
square meters.
•
Blocking: Obstacles are common in offices, such as gypsum boards and glass walls, causing little signal attenuation.
•
Interference: The interference is low in independent office areas. However, if several companies lease offices on the same floor, the
WLANs of the companies may be severely interfered.
•
Capacity: Office scenarios require high bandwidth. Some enterprises use fully-wireless office, and some enterprises use wired and
wireless office.
Office
5
Huawei Confidential
Meeting room
Service Types in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Office personal service
Non-office personal service
Enterprise IoT service
Services running on mobile
Services running on mobile
Asset management, energy
phones, office laptops, and
devices such as mobile phones,
efficiency control (air
tablets, for example, office
for example, video, gaming, and
conditioners and lighting
software, email, file transfer,
social networking.
system), etc.
desktop sharing, and desktop
cloud.
Requirements on WLANs differ for these services.
6
Huawei Confidential
• Note: This course does not assume IoT services on a WLAN.
Development of Enterprise Office Networks
2000
2009
Today
Mobile 1.0
Mobile 2.0
Mobile 3.0
4K
VR/AR
Fully-wireless era
BYOD
Wireless office era
Basic mobile office
Fixed office
Desktop computer
• Data service
7
Laptop:
• Voice and data services
• Wi-Fi 3
Mobile phone, tablet, and
Ultrabook:
• Video, voice, and data services
• A large number of real-time
services
• Wi-Fi 4 -> Wi-Fi 5
Diversified terminals:
• Refined online service
• AR/VR, 4K video, etc.
• Wi-Fi 6 -> Wi-Fi 7
Huawei Confidential
• Phase 1: In the era of basic mobile office, wireless network was a supplement to
wired network.
▫ The application of WaveLAN technology can be considered as the earliest
form of enterprise WLAN. The early Wi-Fi technology was mainly used on
IoT devices such as wireless radios. However, with the introduction of
802.11a/b/g, the advantages of wireless connectivity become obvious.
Enterprises and consumers began to realize the potential of Wi-Fi, and
wireless hotspots emerged in coffee shops, airports, and hotels.
▫ This was the first phase of WLAN application, mostly focused on solving the
wireless access problem. Its key value is that it broke away from the
constraints of wired networks so that devices can move within a certain
range, and wired networks were extended by wireless networks. However,
in this phase, there were no requirements on WLAN's security, capacity, and
roaming performance. An AP was used independently for networking
coverage. Such an AP is called a Fat AP.
• Phase 2: In the wireless office era, wired and wireless were integrated.
▫ With the widespread adoption of wireless devices, the WLAN developed
from a supplement to wired networks into a network as indispensable as
wired networks, hence the second phase.
▫ In this phase, as part of the network, the WLAN also needed to provide
network access for enterprise guests.
▫ In office scenario, there are many services that require high bandwidth,
such as video and voice. Since 2012, 802.11ac standard became mature,
which included many improvements on frequency bands, channel
bandwidth, modulation and encoding. Compared with previous Wi-Fi
standards, 802.11ac standard offers higher throughput, less interference,
and more connections.
• Phase 3: All wireless office era, with wireless network at the center.
▫ Now, the WLAN has entered the third phase. In office environments, Wi-Fi
networks have fully replaced wired networks. Offices now are fully covered
by Wi-Fi. No wired network ports are provided by desks anymore. The office
environment is more open and intelligent.
▫ In the future, high-bandwidth services, such as cloud desktop, video
conference, and 4K video, will be migrated from wired to wireless networks.
New technologies such as VR/AR will be directly deployed on wireless
networks. These new application scenarios raise the requirements on WLAN
design and planning.
Challenges in Enterprise Office Scenarios
High-density access
9
•
In some scenarios (such as conference rooms and high-density
office areas), the number of access STAs is large, the
concurrency rate is high, and high bandwidth is required.
•
The WLAN may be congested, causing the bandwidth to
decrease sharply.
•
Other uncertain Wi-Fi interference such as personal Wi-Fi
hotspots may exist.
Video conferencing
•
Video conference rooms and office areas have increasing
requirements for video conferencing access.
•
The video conferencing service is characterized by burst traffic,
high bandwidth, large concurrency, and latency sensitivity.
Therefore, the service has high requirements on the bandwidth,
latency, and stability for WLANs.
Huawei Confidential
• In video conferencing scenarios, 12–16 Mbps bandwidth is required for 1080p
videos, and 30–50 Mbps bandwidth is required for 4K videos. The burst traffic of
video conferencing is three to five times or even higher than the average traffic.
Contents
10
1.
Introduction to Enterprise Office Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Enterprise Office Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in Enterprise Office Scenarios
⚫
Requirements collection

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide basis
Requirements collection
for WLAN design.
⚫
Site survey

Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height,
Site survey
interference sources, and obstacles.
⚫
Device selection

⚫
Device selection
Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Coverage design

Determine the coverage range and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
Coverage design
positions.
⚫
Capacity design

11
Estimate the number of APs based on the number of access STAs and service requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Coverage area
Determine the VIP coverage areas (such as office areas and meeting rooms), common coverage areas (such as leisure areas, break
rooms, and activity areas), and simple coverage areas (such as corridors, stairs, and restrooms), and areas that do not need to be
covered (such as storage rooms and equipment rooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls, 240 mm concrete walls, and 12 mm glass walls.
Access STAs
Determine the types and number of access STAs in the coverage area. In wireless office scenarios, a single user usually has a mobile
phone and a laptop; therefore, the number of access STAs is twice the number of access users.
Bandwidth
Determine the main service types and bandwidth requirements of access STAs.
Switch location
Determine the locations of upstream switches and check whether the PoE power supply distance meets the requirements.
Power supply mode
Determine the power supply mode as well as the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Interference source
Determine whether there are interference sources such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and external Wi-Fi devices.
Other
12
Huawei Confidential
Check whether there are special requirements in some scenarios, such as the aesthetic requirements for AP deployment in the
exhibition hall.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Description
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Floor height
Measure the floor height. The common indoor floor height is 3 m to 5 m. If an atrium or large exhibition
hall exists, use a rangefinder to measure the floor height and record the result.
Interference source
Check whether there are interference sources, for example, mobile hotspots, Wi-Fi devices of other vendors,
and non-Wi-Fi devices (such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether obstacles at the site are consistent with those on the drawings. If not, mark the inconsistent
areas and take photos. For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation
values of the partitions on the drawings.
Site photos
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
AP installation mode
and position
Determine the AP installation modes (ceiling mounting, wall mounting, etc.) and positions.
ELV room locations
Mark the locations of ELV rooms where switches are to be deployed on the drawings.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE cables to be routed on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be less
than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on latency, in-roaming packet loss rate,
and concurrency rate in special areas.
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger access
capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support omnidirectional and
directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be installed at
high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer to
the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country Codes
and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain based
on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply modes vary according to the deployment scenarios. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other scenarios,
the DC power supply can be used, or both power supply modes can be used together for mutual backup. Ensure that the power
consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6
standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example: As the Internet of Things (IoT) comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT network independently will cause
repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment. Therefore, it is recommended that IoT
scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
14
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Enterprise Office Scenarios (1/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 8760-X1-PRO
AirEngine 6760-X1/X1E
AirEngine 6761-21/21E
4+12/4+4+8/
4+8+independent scanning
4+8/4+4+4/
4+6+independent scanning
4+4
Antenna
Built-in dual-radio or triple-radio
omnidirectional antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas (AirEngine 6760-X1) or
external antennas (AirEngine 6760X1E)
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas (AirEngine 6761-21) or
external antennas (AirEngine 676121E)
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/26 dBm
Appearance
MIMO
Antenna Gain
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
4.5 dBi/5.5 dBi
Maximum Power Consumption
50 W (excluding USB)
48 W (excluding USB)
22.6 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3bt)
DC: 48 V
PoE (802.3bt)
DC: 48 V
PoE (802.3at)
DC: 48 V
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna (AirEngine
6760-X1), USB, IoT, and BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Recommended Scenario
VIP areas and important offices
Office, conference room, and lecture
hall
Meeting room, live streaming studio,
and lecture hall
15
Huawei Confidential
• The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Enterprise Office Scenarios (2/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 5761-21
AirEngine 5761-11
Appearance
MIMO
2+4
2+2
Antenna
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
25 dBm/28 dBm
27 dBm/27 dBm
Antenna Gain
4 dBi/5 dBi
4 dBi/5 dBi
Maximum Power Consumption
17.9 W (excluding USB)
15.3 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
DC: 12 V
PoE (802.3at/af)
DC: 12 V
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Office, meeting room, and live streaming studio
Small office, corridor, and parking lot
16
Huawei Confidential
• The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27011172
27012545
27013720
Model
ANTDG0304A1SR
ANTDG0404D4SR
ANTDG0808D4NR
Antenna Type
Omnidirectional
Omnidirectional
Directional
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
3 dBi/4 dBi
4 dBi/5 dBi
8 dBi/8 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
360°/360°
360°/360°
70°/70°
Vertical Beamwidth (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
90°/60°
110°/110°
70°/70°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
20 mm x 149 mm x 20 mm
20 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm
40 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm
Connector Type
1 x RP-SMA-J (single-polarized)
4 x RP-SMA-J (single-polarized)
4 x Type N female connector
(dual-polarized)
Remarks
Used in scenarios where the floor
height is high and the bandwidth
requirement is not high
Used in elevators or areas with
high aesthetic requirements
Used in scenarios with high floor
heights and common coverage
requirements
Note: The antenna models above can be used by the outdoor APs mentioned on the previous page.
17
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Coverage Design Rules
⚫
Minimize the number of obstacles that signals pass through. Generally, it is recommended that signals pass through a single-layer
wall (120 mm brick wall). In some special scenarios (such as gypsum walls and glass walls), signals can pass through two layers of
walls.
⚫
It is not recommended that APs be deployed to transmit signals to penetrate a 240 mm thick brick wall, concrete wall, or metal wall.
If the AP penetration coverage solution is used without meeting the specified constraints, weak signals and discontinuous roaming
may occur after signals penetrate the wall. In this case, to ensure good coverage and roaming, add APs based on the wall structure
during WLAN planning.
⚫
Deploy APs separately in key areas and VIP areas to ensure user experience.
⚫
Deploy APs separately at intersections or corners to ensure signal coverage continuity (≥ –65 dBm) and that neighboring APs can
establish neighbor relationship tables for good roaming experience.
⚫
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing pillars.
2
2
1
1
Improper location: Signals penetrate several walls.
18
Huawei Confidential
Proper location: Signals penetrate only one wall.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
AP supporting external
directional antennas
AP with omnidirectional
antennas
Precautions for Coverage Design in Enterprise Office
Scenarios
19
Huawei Confidential
⚫
APs can be mounted on the ceiling (at a height of no more than 6 m) or on walls (at a height of
about 3 m).
⚫
Indoor office is a semi-open scenario. Assuming that the edge field strength is –65 dBm, the
maximum coverage distance at 2.4 GHz is 35 m, and that at 5 GHz is 15 m.
⚫
When planning APs in a sub-scenario, consider factors such as obstacles and the number of access
STAs. For details about the AP deployment spacing, see the WLAN construction standards.
⚫
When an AP is installed on a load-bearing pillar or wall, assume that signals at the rear of the AP
are completely blocked.
⚫
Recommended AP model: AirEngine 6760-X1E or AirEngine 6761-21E.
⚫
It is mainly used in high ceiling scenarios such as exhibition halls. It is recommended that APs with
external directional antennas be installed on the ceiling at a height of 6 m to 12 m.
⚫
The 70° directional antennas (27013720) are recommended, and APs are deployed at an equal
spacing of 18 m to 20 m.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in Enterprise
Office Scenarios
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline
Rate (Mbps)
Proportion of Services in Office Scenarios
Excellent
Good
Conference
Room
High-Density
Office Area
Common
Office Area
Leisure
Area
Exhibition
Hall
Canteen
Parking
Lot
4K video
50
30
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
Restroom
10%
1080p video
16
12
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
720p video
8
4
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
E-whiteboard
32
16
10%
20%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Email
32
16
10%
10%
10%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Web browsing
8
4
30%
20%
20%
30%
30%
30%
10%
30%
Gaming
2
1
0%
5%
10%
10%
0%
10%
10%
10%
Instant
messaging
0.512
0.256
10%
5%
20%
20%
30%
20%
30%
20%
VoIP
0.256
0.128
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
16
19
13
10
10
10
9
10
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario
(Excellent, in Mbps)
Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
20
Huawei Confidential
• If the bandwidth requirement in a specific scenario is not specified, evaluate the
required bandwidth based on the table above.
• The average bandwidth required in different scenarios is the sum of the singleservice baseline rates of different service types multiplied by their proportions.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

Two hundred STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, services are running on only 60 STAs concurrently. When
both APs and STAs comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30
STAs (2x2 MIMO). Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs
(Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs
(Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
21
Huawei Confidential
• The access bandwidth in the table above is the rate at the application layer, and
is an actual rate calculated by subtracting various overheads from the air
interface rate. Therefore, the rate at the application layer is lower than the PHY
rate.
Contents
22
1.
Introduction to Enterprise Office Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Enterprise Office Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Enterprise Office Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Enterprise Office Sub-scenarios
23
Common office area
High-density office area
Meeting room
Exhibition hall
Canteen
Leisure area
Parking lot
Restroom
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Office Areas
Scenario description
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, email, video conferencing, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 20
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 1 per 4–5 m2
⚫
Capacity KPI: 40 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 4 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Common
office area
High
Medium
High
24
Recommended AP Type
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal spacing of 15 m to 18 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
Huawei Confidential
• Experience rate: perceived data rate under a light network load
▫ An experience rate is the target rate that can be achieved in 95% of areas
according to SpeedTest on a light-loaded network where the channel
utilization is less than 20%. The rate is typically considered as the peak rate.
• Service-assured rate: guaranteed rate under a heavy network load
▫ A service-assured rate is the target rate that can be achieved in 90% of
time according to SpeedTest in a multi-user concurrency scenario where the
network load is less than 80%. The rate is typically considered as the
guaranteed rate.
• HE20 @ 2.4 GHz indicates that the 2.4 GHz frequency band uses 20 MHz
bandwidth, and HE40 @ 5 GHz indicates that the 5 GHz frequency band uses 40
MHz bandwidth.
WLAN Deployment Solution for Office Areas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Mount indoor APs with omnidirectional antennas on T-rails. It is recommended that APs be deployed in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 15 m to 18 m.
⚫
Considering limited available 2.4 GHz channels, disable some 2.4 GHz radios to reduce co-channel interference.
⚫
Due to hardware restrictions, the distance between APs with omnidirectional antennas cannot be less than 6 m. Otherwise,
adjacent-channel interference occurs, affecting throughput performance.
15–18 m
15–18 m
25
Huawei Confidential
15–18 m
Network Construction Standards for Meeting Rooms
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, email, video conferencing, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
User distribution:
⚫
⚫
⚫
Capacity KPI: 40 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate

Typical meeting room: 20 per 50 m2
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm

Typical conference room: 60 per 200 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 20
Mbps
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for 802.1X access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Meeting
room
26
Aesthetics
High
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
High
Coverage
High
Recommended AP Type
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs evenly in a room and
far away from the door.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Meeting Rooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Mount APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling to cover the entire room.

⚫
If the area of a room is less than 60 square meters and partition walls between rooms are made of gypsum boards or other materials that
signals can easily penetrate, deploy one AP for two rooms, as shown in solution A.

If the area of a single room is 60–120 square meters, deploy one AP in each room, as shown in solution B.

If the area of a single room is 120–240 square meters, deploy two APs in each room, as shown in solution C.
Install APs in a room evenly and far away from the door. Keep a specified distance between an AP in the corridor and the
exterior walls of rooms. Depending on the wall material, at least a distance of 3 m is required for solid walls (brick or
concrete) and 6 m is required for non-solid walls (gypsum or glass walls).
Single room < 60 m2
Single room: 60–120 m2
Single room: 120–240 m2
Gypsum
board
Single room < 60 m2
Corridor
Spacing
Solution A: area < 60 m2
27
Huawei Confidential
Corridor
Spacing
Solution B: area of 60–120 m2
Corridor
Spacing
Solution C: 120–240 m2
WLAN Construction Standards for Exhibition Halls
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 9–10 m2
⚫
Floor height:


Common exhibition hall: 3–6 m
⚫
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
Large exhibition hall: > 6 m
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Common
exhibition hall
(floor height <
6 m)
High
Medium
High
Large
exhibition hall
(floor height >
6 m)
High
Medium
High
28
Huawei Confidential
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode
at an equal distance of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas
connected
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode
at an equal distance of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Exhibition Halls
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
⚫
At a floor height of less than 6 m, deploy indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas in W-shaped mode at an equal
spacing of 20–25 m.
At a floor height of higher than 6 m, deploy indoor APs with external directional antennas (70 °) connected in W-shaped
mode at equal spacing of 20–25 m.
Considering limited available 2.4 GHz channels, disable some 2.4 GHz radios to reduce co-channel interference.
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
Solution A: Use APs with omnidirectional antennas
at a floor height of less than 6 m
29
Huawei Confidential
20–25 m
20–25 m
Solution B: Use APs with directional antennas at a
floor height of higher than 6 m
WLAN Construction Standards for Leisure Areas
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, HD video, gaming, email, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 1 per 4–9 m2
⚫
Capacity KPI: 40 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height:
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm


Indoor leisure area: 3–5 m
⚫
Outdoor leisure area: N/A (because it is typically an open-air
scenario)
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Indoor
leisure
area
High
Medium
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs with a coverage radius of
18 m to 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
Outdoor
leisure
area
High
Low
High
Outdoor AP with built-in
directional antennas
Wall mounting or pole
mounting
Deploy APs on one side of the leisure
area to cover the seat area.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
30
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Leisure Areas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
For indoor leisure areas, deploy indoor APs with omnidirectional antennas on T-rails with a coverage radius of 18 m to 20 m.
⚫
For outdoor leisure areas, deploy outdoor APs with built-in directional antennas on one side of an area to provide coverage to
the seat area. The coverage range is 15 m to 20 m on both sides of an AP.
Seat area
18–20 m
15–20 m
Indoor leisure area
31
Huawei Confidential
Outdoor
leisure area
Coffee making table
WLAN Construction Standards for Enterprise Canteens
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 3–5 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Enterprise
canteen
Low
High
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
32
Huawei Confidential
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal spacing of 15 m to 18 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Enterprise Canteens
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Mount APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at equal spacing of 15–18 m.
⚫
Considering limited available 2.4 GHz channels, disable some 2.4 GHz radios to reduce co-channel interference.
15–18 m
15–18 m
33
Huawei Confidential
15–18 m
WLAN Construction Standards for Parking Lots
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, email, video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 15–20 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Parking lot
34
Aesthetics
Low
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
Low
Coverage
Medium
Recommended AP Type
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+2 or higher
spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal distance of 35–40 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Parking Lots
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Install APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling with equal spacing of 35 m to 40 m in W-shaped mode.
⚫
Deploy APs above lanes and independent APs at entrances and exits to ensure continuous signal coverage and good roaming
experience.
35–40 m
Parking area
Lane
35
Huawei Confidential
35–40 m
35–40 m
Lane
WLAN Construction Standards for Restrooms
Scenario description
⚫
Service type: web browsing, video, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 3 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 4 m
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 20
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 10 STAs on a single AP, 80% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Restroom
Low
Low
Medium
36
Huawei Confidential
Recommended AP Type
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+2 or higher
spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Ceiling-mount APs in the middle
of the restroom.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Restrooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
The walls between adjacent restrooms are thick. Therefore, it is not recommended that signals penetrate such walls. As such,
deploy one AP in each restroom.
37
Huawei Confidential
Basin
table
In scenarios with aesthetic requirements, take corresponding aesthetic measures for AP installation.
⚫
Basin
table
Mount indoor APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling.
⚫
Basin
table
⚫
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) An enterprise has about 280 employees. Daily office work requires
8 Mbps bandwidth, and the concurrent rate is 50%. The enterprise plans to provide wireless
coverage for office areas using dual-band APs. Assuming that a single AP can connect to 30
STAs, how many APs are required at least to meet wireless office requirements? (
A. 8
B. 6
C. 5
D. 4
38
1. C
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of enterprise office sub-scenarios, including
conference rooms, exhibition halls, and open offices. WLAN construction standards and
planning rules vary according to sub-scenarios and relevant WLAN planning solutions are
different as well. This course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and deployment
for common enterprise office sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in WLAN
projects relating to enterprise office scenarios.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods for each sub-scenario.
39
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
40
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym/Abbreviation
41
Full Name
BYOD
Bring Your Own Device
IoT
Internet of Things
KPI
Key Performance Indicator
VoIP
Voice over IP
VR/AR
Virtual Reality/Augmented Reality
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Education Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
Evolving information technologies have made life easier and transformed the way education
is delivered — boring textbooks replaced by multimedia teaching aids, and heavy
schoolbags replaced by thin, electronic ones. All these changes require the support of a
mature and stable network.
⚫
Typical education scenarios include classrooms, auditoriums, libraries, and labs, where
students are densely distributed. Such a scenario is usually characterized by high user
density, a large number of concurrent users, a high volume of burst traffic, and sensitivity to
network quality.
⚫
This course describes WLAN service characteristics of education scenarios, as well as
methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common service types and challenges in education scenarios.

Describe WLAN planning methods in education scenarios.

Describe WLAN deployment solutions in education scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Education Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Education Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Education Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Education Scenarios
•
Space: large area, diversified building structures, and many sub-scenarios
•
Blocking: many types of obstacles, such as 240 mm brick walls and 240 mm concrete walls, causing signal
attenuation
•
Interference: severe interference, such as that caused by students' hotspots and school electronic devices
•
Capacity: high concurrency and certain WLAN quality requirements
Classroom
5
Huawei Confidential
Playground
Service Types in Education Scenarios
Learning in classroom
After-class entertainment
Enterprise IoT service
The services include office,
The services include video,
The services include asset
online learning, instant
gaming, and social networking.
management and energy
messaging, email, file transfer,
These services are mainly
efficiency control (air
online live broadcast, desktop
carried on mobile terminals
conditioners and lighting
sharing, and desktop cloud.
such as laptops, mobile phones,
system).
These services are mainly
and tablets.
carried on office laptops, eschoolbags, and tablets.
Requirements on WLANs differ for these services.
6
Huawei Confidential
• Note: This course does not assume IoT services on a WLAN.
Typical Services in Education Scenarios — E-schoolbag
Scenario description
⚫
With the rapid development of the Internet, online
teaching resources are increasingly abundant. More
teaching activities are carried out based on Internet
resources, and e-schoolbags are gradually put into use.
⚫
E-schoolbags are mobile digital classrooms: Students
can use electronic terminals carrying learning resources
in pre-study, class, homework, tutoring, and evaluation
phases.
Service description
7
⚫
An e-schoolbag is a complete teaching application
system. The core elements are mobile terminals,
teaching contents, and service platforms (servers that
provide education resources).
⚫
Students' terminals connect to the WLAN and request
resources. Teachers' terminals connect to the WLAN or
the wired network to deliver instructions.
IP network
Router
Switch B
Resource
server
WAC
Switch A
E-classroom
AP
Management VLAN 100
Service VLAN: VLAN 101
PC
E-whiteboard
Teacher terminal
Student terminal
Huawei Confidential
• Networking description:
▫ A resource server stores resources such as courseware and videos for eschoolbags and can be deployed on the public network (more common) or
school network.
▫ Generally, WACs are centrally deployed in the core equipment room of a
district/county education bureau. APs are deployed in schools and connect
to the WACs through private lines.
▫ Switch A supplies PoE power to APs, and Switch B functions as the DHCP
server and gateway for wireless users.
▫ Generally, teachers use laptops or desktop computers and access the
network through wired ports (recommended). If teachers use STAs such as
tablets, it is recommended that an independent SSID be planned for
teachers' STAs to guarantee bandwidth.
Characteristics and Challenges of Education Scenarios
8
•
Open or semi-open
•
Aesthetic requirements
•
80–300 people in a single room
•
Concealed antennas
•
Large number of concurrent users
•
High concurrency, large number of
access users
•
High ceiling: many restrictions and
difficult installation
•
High bandwidth requirements
•
•
Densely distributed walls
•
Severe signal attenuation
High dustproof and waterproof
requirements in outdoor
environments
•
High concurrency during peak hours
•
Large coverage area
•
High bandwidth requirements
•
Trees and buildings affecting signals
•
Inconvenient and expensive fiber
deployment
Huawei Confidential
Classroom
Dormitory
Auditorium
Playground
Contents
9
1.
Introduction to Education Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Education Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Education Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in Education Scenarios
⚫
Requirements collection

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide basis
Requirements collection
for design.
⚫
Site survey

Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height,
Site survey
interference sources, and obstacles.
⚫
Device selection

⚫
Device selection
Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Coverage design

Determine the coverage range and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
Coverage design
positions.
⚫
Capacity design

10
Estimate the number of APs based on the number of access STAs and service requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in Education Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Coverage area
Determine the VIP coverage areas (such as classrooms, conference rooms, and offices), common coverage
areas (such as canteens and student dormitories), and simple coverage areas (such as corridors, stairs, and
bathrooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are
as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Number of access STAs
Determine the total number of access STAs in a coverage area. Generally, this number can be determined
based on the number of seats. Assuming that each person uses one mobile phone and one laptop, the number
of access STAs is twice the number of seats.
Bandwidth
Determine the main types of network services and per-user bandwidth requirement.
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls and 240 mm concrete walls.
Power supply mode
Determine the power supply mode and confirm the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Switch location
Determine the locations of switches upstream to the WLAN and confirm whether the PoE power supply
distance meets the requirements.
Interference source
11
Huawei Confidential
Determine whether there are interference sources such as lab instruments, Bluetooth devices, and external WiFi devices.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Education Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Floor height
Description
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Measure the floor height. The common indoor floor height is 3 m to 5 m. If there are atriums, halls, or
lecture halls, use a rangefinder to measure the floor height and record the result.
Interference source
Check whether there is interference caused by, for example, mobile hotspots, third-party Wi-Fi devices, and
non-Wi-Fi devices (such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether obstacles at the site are consistent with those on the drawings. If not, mark the inconsistent
areas and take photos. For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation
values of the partitions on the drawings.
Site photos
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
AP installation mode
and position
Determine the AP installation modes (ceiling mounting, wall mounting, etc.) and locations.
ELV room locations
On the drawings, mark the locations of extra-low voltage (ELV) rooms where switches are to be deployed.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE power supply cable routes on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be
less than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on delay, in-roaming packet loss rate, and
concurrency rate in special areas.
12
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput
and larger access capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the
application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support
omnidirectional and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need
to be installed at high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit
power gets closer to the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is
longer. For details, see the Country Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a
proper gain based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply mode varies with the deployment scenario. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other
scenarios, a power supply can be used, or both PoE and a power supply can be used for mutual backup. Ensure
that the power consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The
latest Wi-Fi 6 standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example: As the Internet of Things (IoT) comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT network independently
will cause repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment.
Therefore, it is recommended that IoT scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Indoor APs Commonly Used in Education Scenarios (1/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 8760-X1-PRO
AirEngine 6760-X1E
AirEngine 6761-21E
MIMO
4+12/4+4+8/
4+8+independent scanning
4+8/4+4+4/
4+6+independent scanning
4+4
Antenna
Built-in dual-radio or triple-radio
omnidirectional antennas
External antennas
External antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/26 dBm
Antenna Gain
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
N/A
N/A
Maximum Power
Consumption
55 W (excluding USB)
39.9 W (excluding USB)
22.6 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3bt)
PoE (802.3bt)
PoE (802.3at/af)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
VIP areas and important offices
Scenarios with uncommon floor
heights, such as auditoriums, lecture
halls, and stadiums
Scenarios with uncommon floor
heights, such as auditoriums, lecture
halls, and stadiums
Appearance
Recommended Scenario
14
Huawei Confidential
• This page lists some common indoor AP models. For details about other models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Indoor APs Commonly Used in Education Scenarios (2/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 6761-21T
AirEngine 5761-11
AirEngine 5761-11W
Appearance
MIMO
2+2+4
2+2
2+2
Antenna
Built-in triple-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
25 dBm/23 dBm
/26 dBm
27 dBm/27 dBm
23 dBm/23 dBm
Antenna Gain
4 dBi/5 dBi
4 dBi/5 dBi
2.5 dBi/3 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
21.2 W (excluding USB)
15.3 W (excluding USB)
12.7 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at)
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3af)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
High-bandwidth and high-concurrency
scenarios such as classrooms and large
conference rooms
Common coverage scenarios, such as
labs, offices, conference rooms,
corridors, and parking lots
Dormitories and small offices
15
Huawei Confidential
• This page lists some common indoor AP models. For details about other models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Outdoor APs Commonly Used in Education Scenarios
AP Model
AirEngine 5761R-11
AirEngine 5761R-11E
AirEngine 6760R-51
AirEngine 6760R-51E
MIMO
2+2
Antenna
Built-in directional antennas
2.4 GHz: 65°_40°
5 GHz: 65°_20°
2+2
4+4
4+4
External antennas
Built-in directional antennas
2.4 GHz: 60°_40°
5 GHz: 60°_20°
External antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
Antenna Gain
28 dBm/27 dBm
28 dBm/27 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
10 dBi/11 dBi
N/A
10 dBi/11 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
N/A
17.7 W
19.6 W
35.3 W
35.3 W
PoE (802.3at/bt)
Appearance
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/bt)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, flexible radio
switching, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Roads, squares, play fields,
playgrounds, and parking
lots
Roads, squares, play fields,
parking lots, and playground
stands
Roads, squares, play fields,
playgrounds, and parking
lots
Roads, squares, play fields,
parking lots, and playground
stands
16
Huawei Confidential
• This page lists some common outdoor AP models. For details about other
models, see the product documentation.
• 2.4 GHz: 65°_40° indicates that the 2.4 GHz horizontal beamwidth and vertical
beamwidth are 65° and 40°, respectively. The rest can be deduced by analogy.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in Education Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27013720
27012565
Model
ANTDG0808D4NR
ANTDG1211D4NR
Antenna Type
Directional
Directional
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
8 dBi/8 dBi
12 dBi/11 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Vertical Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
40 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm
40 mm x 450 mm x 420 mm
Connector Type
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
Remarks
Used in uncommon floor height scenarios
requiring wireless coverage
Used in uncommon floor height scenarios with
high-density access requirements
Note: The antenna models above can be used by the outdoor APs mentioned on the previous page.
17
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Coverage Design Rules
⚫
Minimize the number of obstacles that signals pass through. Generally, it is recommended that signals pass through a single-layer wall (120 mm brick
wall). In some special scenarios (such as gypsum walls and glass walls), signals can pass through two layers of walls.
⚫
It is not recommended that signals penetrate a 240 mm thick brick wall, concrete wall, or metal wall. If the AP penetration coverage solution is used
without meeting the specified constraints, weak signals and discontinuous roaming may occur after signals penetrate the wall. In this case, to ensure good
coverage and roaming, add APs based on the wall structure during network planning.
⚫
Deploy APs separately in key areas and VIP areas to ensure user experience.
⚫
Deploy APs separately at intersections or corners to ensure signal coverage continuity (≥ –65 dBm) and that neighboring APs can establish neighbor
relationship tables for good roaming experience.
⚫
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing columns.
2
2
1
1
Improper location: Signals penetrate several walls.
18
Huawei Confidential
Proper location: Signals penetrate only one wall.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
AP supporting external
directional antennas
AP with omnidirectional
antennas
Precautions for Coverage Design in Education Scenarios
19
Huawei Confidential
⚫
APs can be mounted on the ceiling (at a height of no more than 6 m) or on walls (at a height of
about 3 m).
⚫
Indoor office is a semi-open scenario. Assuming that the edge field strength is –65 dBm, the
maximum coverage distance at 2.4 GHz is 35 m, and that at 5 GHz is 15 m.
⚫
Before deploying APs in a sub-scenario, consider factors such as obstacles and the number of
access STAs. For details about the AP deployment spacing, see the WLAN construction standards.
⚫
When an AP is installed on a load-bearing column or wall, assume that signals at the rear of the
AP are completely blocked.
⚫
Recommended AP model: AirEngine 6760-X1E or AirEngine 6761-21E.
⚫
It is mainly used in high ceiling scenarios such as auditoriums and lecture halls. It is recommended
that APs with external directional antennas be installed on the ceiling at a height of 6 m to 12 m.
⚫
⚫
Common coverage: 70° directional antennas are recommended. APs are installed on the ceiling
in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 15 m to 20 m.
High-density coverage: 35° directional antennas are recommended. APs are installed on the
ceiling or walls at an equal spacing of about 12 m.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in Education Scenarios
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline
Rate (Mbps)
Proportion of Services in Education Scenarios
Excellent
Good
4K video
50
30
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
1080p video
16
12
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
720p video
8
4
10%
10%
10%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
E-whiteboard
32
16
10%
0%
10%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Email
32
16
0%
10%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Web browsing
8
4
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
10%
20%
Gaming
2
1
10%
0%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
Instant
messaging
0.512
0.256
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
10%
20%
VoIP
0.256
0.128
10%
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
13
12
13
10
10
10
10
11
10
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario
(Excellent, in Mbps)
Classroom Office
Lab
Library Auditorium Stadium Canteen Dormitory Playground
Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
20
Huawei Confidential
• If the bandwidth requirement in a specific scenario is not specified, evaluate the
required bandwidth based on the table above.
• The average bandwidth required in different scenarios is the sum of the singleservice baseline rates of different service types multiplied by their proportions.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

200 STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, only 60 STAs run services concurrently. When both APs and STAs
comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30 STAs (2x2 MIMO).
Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP in 4x4 MIMO HE40 Mode (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
21
Huawei Confidential
• The access bandwidth in the table above is the rate at the application layer, and
is an actual rate calculated by subtracting various overheads from the air
interface rate. Therefore, the rate at the application layer is lower than the PHY
rate.
Contents
22
1.
Introduction to Education Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Education Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Education Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Education Sub-scenarios
23
Classroom
Lab
Library
Auditorium
Stadium
Canteen
Dormitory
Playground
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Classrooms
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, e-whiteboard, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 16
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 2 per m2 during class
⚫
Capacity KPI: 100 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 5 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP
Type
Common
classroom
Medium
High
High
Indoor triple-radio AP with
built-in omnidirectional
antennas
Ceiling
mounting
Deploy at least one AP in each classroom, with each
AP covering 100 users.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Lecture
hall
Medium
High
High
Indoor triple-radio AP with
built-in omnidirectional
antennas
Ceiling
mounting
Deploy APs at a spacing of 10 m to 12 m, with each
AP covering 100 users.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
24
Huawei Confidential
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
WLAN Deployment Solution for Classrooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Common classroom: Install APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling, with one AP covering 100 users.
⚫
Lecture hall: Install APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling at a spacing of 10 m to 12 m, with one AP covering 100 users.
10–12 m
6–10 m
Common classroom
25
Huawei Confidential
10–12 m
Lecture hall
WLAN Construction Standards for Offices
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, e-whiteboard, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 16
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 2 per m2 in peak hours
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 5 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Open office
Medium
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas, supporting
2+4 or higher spatial streams
Ceiling
mounting
Deploy APs evenly in an office and
far away from the door.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
Independent
office
High
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas, supporting
2+2 or higher spatial streams
Ceiling
mounting
Deploy one AP in an office.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
26
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Offices
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
Open office:

Deploy one AP in an office with an area < 120 m 2.

Deploy two APs in an office with an area of 120–240 m2.
Independent office: Deploy one AP in an office with an area < 30 m 2.
Open office area
Single room: 30–120 m2
27
Huawei Confidential
Single room: 120–240 m2
Independent office area
Single room < 30 m2
Single room < 30 m2
WLAN Construction Standards for Libraries
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, e-whiteboard, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 1 per 2 m2 in peak hours
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 5 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Bookshelf
area
Medium
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Self-study
area
Medium
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
28
Huawei Confidential
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
a spacing of about 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
a spacing of 15 m to 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Libraries
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Bookshelf area: Install APs on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at a spacing of about 20 m. If there are seats around, install APs
close to the seats.
⚫
Self-study area: Install APs on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at a spacing of 15 m to 20 m, with each AP covering 100 users.
⚫
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing columns.
20 m
15–20 m
15–20 m
15–20 m
20 m
Bookshelf area
29
Huawei Confidential
Self-study area
WLAN Construction Standards for Auditoriums
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, e-whiteboard, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 2 per m2 in peak hours
⚫
Capacity KPI: 50 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 6 m to 10 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Floor height
<6m
High
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 4+4 or higher
spatial streams
Floor height
>6m
High
High
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas,
supporting 4+4 or higher
spatial streams
30
Huawei Confidential
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Ceiling or wall
mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at a
spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Auditoriums
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
If the floor height is smaller than 6 m, use solution A: Install indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
⚫
If the floor height is greater than 6 m, use solution A or B. In solution B, install indoor APs with 35° external directional antennas on the ceiling or walls
at a spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
⚫
Considering limited available 2.4 GHz channels, disable some 2.4 GHz radios to reduce co-channel interference when a large number of APs are deployed.
⚫
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
Solution A: ceiling mounting
31
Huawei Confidential
Solution B: wall mounting
WLAN Construction Standards for Stadiums
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 2 per m2 in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 10 m to 12 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 100 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling or wall
mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of 20
m to 25 m (optional: W-shaped mode).
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
Ceiling or wall
mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of
about 15 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
Stadium
field
Medium
Medium
Medium
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
Stand area
Medium
Medium
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
32
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Stadiums (1/2): Stadium Field
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
⚫
Solution A uses the ceiling mounting mode: Install indoor APs with 70° external directional antennas at a spacing of 20 m to 25 m.
Solution B uses the wall mounting mode: Install indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas at a spacing of 20 m to 25 m and a height of 3
m to 5 m.
Considering limited available 2.4 GHz channels, disable some 2.4 GHz radios to reduce co-channel interference when a large number of APs are
deployed.
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
30–50 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
Solution A: ceiling mounting
33
Huawei Confidential
20–25 m
20–25 m
Solution B: wall mounting
WLAN Deployment Solution for Stadiums (2/2): Stand Area
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
If there are fewer than 10 rows of seats, use solution A: Install indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas on walls at
an equal spacing of about 15 m.
If there are more than 10 rows of seats, use solution A or B. In solution B, install indoor APs with 35 ° external directional
antennas on the ceiling or walls at a spacing of 10 m to 12 m.
15 m
15 m
10–12 m
10–12 m
15 m
15 m
10–12 m
10–12 m
Solution A: wall mounting (using APs
with omnidirectional antennas)
34
Huawei Confidential
Solution B: ceiling mounting (using APs
with directional antennas)
WLAN Construction Standards for Playgrounds
Scenario description
⚫
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 4 Mbps
User density: about 2 per m2 in peak hours
⚫
Capacity KPI: 100 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP
Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Playground
stand
Medium
High
High
Outdoor AP with
external directional
antennas
Pole mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Playground
field
Low
Medium
Medium
Outdoor AP with builtin directional antennas
Pole mounting
Deploy APs on the edge to ensure full coverage.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
35
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Playgrounds
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
For the stand area, install outdoor APs with 35 ° external directional antennas on poles at an equal spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
⚫
For the field area, install outdoor APs with built-in directional antennas on poles at an equal spacing of about 30 m.
Playground
12–15 m
12–15 m
Stand
12–15 m
12–15 m
Stand
Rostrum
Field
30 m
36
Huawei Confidential
30 m
30 m
30 m
WLAN Construction Standards for Canteens
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 2 m2 in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 50 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Canteen
Medium
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
Ceiling mounting
37
Huawei Confidential
Deployment Solution
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at a
spacing of 15 m to 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Canteens
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Install indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 15 m to 20 m.
⚫
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing columns.
15–20 m
15–20 m
15–20 m
15–20 m
Canteen
38
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Dormitory Rooms
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, gaming, instant messaging,
etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 16
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 6–12 per room in peak hours
⚫
Capacity KPI: 8–12 STAs on a single AP, 100% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 5 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Student
dormitory
Medium
Medium
High
Wall plate AP
Wall mounting
39
Huawei Confidential
Deployment Solution
Deploy one AP in each
dormitory room.
Channel planning: HE20 @
2.4 GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Dormitory Rooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Install one wall plate AP on the wall for each dormitory room.
⚫
Generally, an AP is installed on the wall above the door. Determine the installation position based on the actual environment.
Dormitory
room 1
Dormitory
room 2
Dormitory
room 3
Corridor
40
Huawei Confidential
Dormitory
room 4
Dormitory
room 5
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) During WLAN construction, it is recommended that an indoor AP
with omnidirectional antennas be installed at a height of no more than (
A. 4
B.
6
C.
8
D. 10
41
1. B
Huawei Confidential
) m.
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of education sub-scenarios, including auditoriums,
lecture halls, stadiums, and playgrounds. Different sub-scenarios use different WLAN
construction standards and planning rules and thereby have different WLAN planning
solutions. This course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and deployment in
common education sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in education WLAN
projects.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods of each sub-scenario.
42
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
43
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Hotel Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
The rapid development of the mobile Internet promotes hotels to provide convenient
network services for increasing customer flows, improving service quality, and implementing
intelligent management. This leads to increased WLAN requirements in hotels. However,
hotels have densely distributed rooms and many partitions, which restricts radio signal
transmission and causes high deployment costs if common indoor networking modes are
used. Therefore, WLAN deployment has been a pain point in hotels.
⚫
This course describes the service characteristics and WLAN requirements in hotel scenarios,
and details the rules of and precautions for designing the WLAN deployment solution in this
scenario.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common service types and challenges in hotel scenarios.

Describe WLAN planning methods in hotel scenarios.

Understand WLAN deployment solutions in hotel scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Hotel Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Hotel Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Hotel Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Hotel Scenario Overview
⚫
Space: Guest rooms, hotel lobbies, restaurants, and banquet halls have various heights.
⚫
Blocking: Rooms are densely distributed. Many walls exist and usually cause high signal attenuation.
⚫
Appearance: Hotels have high aesthetic requirements and generally hope that the decoration is not
damaged during AP deployment and cabling.
Capacity: Scenarios such as restaurants and banquet halls have a large number of concurrent users.
⚫
Hotel guest room
5
Huawei Confidential
Hotel lobby
Hotel restaurant
Banquet hall
Service Types in Hotel Scenarios
Hotel guest service
Hotel staff service
The services provided for hotel
The services provided for hotel
The services include asset
guests include video, gaming,
staff include office software,
management and energy
and social software services,
instant messaging software,
efficiency control (air
which are the major services in
and email services, which
conditioners and lighting
a hotel and have certain
require high network stability.
system).
Enterprise IoT service
requirements on network
bandwidth and stability.
Requirements on WLANs differ for these services.
6
Huawei Confidential
• Note: This course does not assume IoT services on a WLAN.
• Diversified services are involved in hotel guest rooms, lobbies, and restaurants.
Entertainment services such as 4K video service require high bandwidth. Most
STAs are mobile phones, laptops, and tablets, with low mobility.
Challenges in Hotel Scenarios
Many walls, restricting signal
transmission
Network congestion due to a
large number of users
APs with omnidirectional
antennas in rooms provide poor
coverage for corridors.
7
...
240 mm brick walls are mostly
used, causing severe signal
attenuation.
•
50–100 mobile
phones
50–100 APs
AP
Obstacle (wall)
•
...
AP
Complex management of a
large number of APs
Huawei Confidential
•
High-density user access in
lecture halls or banquet halls
causes network congestion and
sharp decrease in wireless
network bandwidth.
•
Configuration and management
on a single-AP basis; too many
nodes to be managed.
Contents
8
1.
Introduction to Hotel Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Hotel Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Hotel Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in Hotel Scenarios
Requirements collection
⚫

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide basis
Requirements collection
for design.
Site survey
⚫

Site survey
Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height,
interference sources, and obstacles.
Device selection
⚫

Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Coverage design
⚫

Device selection
Coverage design
Determine the coverage range and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
positions.
Capacity design
⚫

9
Estimate the number of APs based on the number of access STAs and service requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in Hotel Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Coverage area
Determine VIP coverage areas (such as guest rooms and hotel lobbies), common coverage areas (such as
banquet halls, restaurants, and corridors), and simple coverage areas (such as staircases and storage rooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are
as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls, 240 mm concrete walls,
and 12 mm glass walls.
Access STA
Determine the types and number of access STAs in a coverage area. Generally, the number of access STAs can
be estimated based on the number of access users.
Bandwidth
Determine the main service types and bandwidth requirements of access users.
Switch location
Determine the locations of switches upstream to the WLAN and confirm whether the PoE power supply
distance meets the requirements.
Power supply mode
Determine the power supply mode and confirm the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Interference source
Determine whether there are interference sources such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and external
Wi-Fi devices.
Other
10
Huawei Confidential
Determine whether there are special requirements in some scenarios.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Hotel Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Description
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Floor height
Measure the floor height. The common indoor floor height is 3 m to 5 m. If there are atriums, hotel
lobbies, or banquet halls, use a rangefinder to measure the floor height and record the result.
Interference source
Check whether there is interference caused by, for example, mobile hotspots, third-party Wi-Fi devices,
and non-Wi-Fi devices (such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether the site is consistent with that on the floor plans. If not, mark the inconsistent areas and
take photos. For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation values of
the partitions on the drawings.
Site photos
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
AP installation mode
and position
Record the layout of guest rooms and determine the AP installation mode (ceiling mounting, wall
mounting, etc.) and locations.
ELV room location
Mark the locations of ELV rooms where switches are to be deployed on the floor plans.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE power supply cable routes on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable
be less than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on delay, in-roaming packet loss rate,
and concurrency rate in special areas.
11
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger access
capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support omnidirectional
and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be installed
at high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer to
the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country
Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain
based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply mode varies with the deployment scenario. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other scenarios, a
power supply can be used, or both PoE and a power supply can be used for mutual backup. Ensure that the power consumption
of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6
standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example: As the Internet of Things (IoT) comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT network independently will cause
repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment. Therefore, it is recommended that
IoT scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
12
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Hotel Scenarios (1/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 5762-12SW
AirEngine 5762-15HW
AirEngine 5761-12W
Appearance
MIMO
2+2
2+2
2+2
Antenna
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
20 dBm/20 dBm
23 dBm/23 dBm
23 dBm/23 dBm
Antenna Gain
2 dBi/3 dBi
2.5 dBi/3 dBi
2.5 dBi/3 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
12 W (excluding USB)
12.7 W (excluding USB)
12.7 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3af)
PoE (802.3af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Common guest rooms and hotel
offices
Common guest rooms and hotel
offices
Common guest rooms and hotel
offices
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Hotel Scenarios (2/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 5761-11WD
AirEngine 6760-X1/X1E
MIMO
2+2
4+8/4+4+4/
4+6+independent scanning
Antenna
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional antennas (AirEngine
6760-X1) or external antennas (AirEngine 6760-X1E)
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
23 dBm/23 dBm
26 dBm/29 dBm
Appearance
Antenna Gain
3.5 dBi/5 dBi
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
12.7 W (excluding USB)
48 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3bt)
DC: 48 V
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna (AirEngine 6760-X1), USB, IoT, and
BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Common guest rooms and hotel offices
Hotel offices, restaurants, and banquet halls
14
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in Hotel Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27013720
27012565
Model
ANTDG0808D4NR
ANTDG1211D4NR
Antenna Type
Directional
Directional
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
8 dBi/8 dBi
12 dBi/11 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Vertical Beamwidth (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
40 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm
40 mm x 450 mm x 420 mm
Connector Type
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
Remarks
Used in uncommon floor height scenarios
requiring wireless coverage
Used in uncommon floor height scenarios with
high-density access requirements
* Note: The external directional antennas above can be used in high ceiling scenarios such as banquet halls.
15
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Agile Distributed Networking
⚫
Agile distributed networking is recommended for WLAN deployment in guest rooms.
⚫
A central AP can supply PoE power to remote units (RUs). If the power supply distance exceeds 80 m or
more than 24 RUs are deployed, a switch can be used for extension. Each central AP can connect to a
maximum of 48 RUs.
Central AP: AirEngine 9700D-M1
Switch
RU
16
RU
RU
RU
RU
RU
Huawei Confidential
• The central AP model AirEngine 9700D-M1 usually works with RU models such
as the AirEngine 5761-11WD.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Precautions for Coverage Design in Hotel Scenarios
AP with omnidirectional antennas
⚫
⚫
APs can be mounted on the ceiling (recommended,
AP supporting external directional antennas
⚫
hotel lobbies and banquet halls. It is recommended
height of about 3 m).
that APs with directional antennas be installed on
Hotels are indoor semi-open scenarios. Assuming
the ceiling at a height of 6 m to 12 m.
that the edge field strength is –65 dBm, the
⚫
maximum coverage distance at 2.4 GHz is 35 m, and
⚫
When an AP is installed on a load-bearing column
shaped mode at an equal spacing of 15 m to 20 m.
⚫
High-density coverage: 35° directional antennas
or wall, assume that signals at the rear of the AP
are recommended. APs are installed on the ceiling
are completely blocked.
or walls at an equal spacing of about 12 m
Deploy a wall plate AP or an agile distributed RU in
a guest room.
17
Common coverage: 70° directional antennas are
recommended. APs are installed on the ceiling in W-
that at 5 GHz is 15 m.
⚫
It is mainly used in high ceiling scenarios such as
at a height of no more than 6 m) or on walls (at a
Huawei Confidential
(optional: W-shaped mode).
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in Hotel
Scenarios
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Service Type
Proportion of Services in Hotel Scenarios
Excellent
Good
Guest
Room Area
Hotel
Lobby
Restaurant
Banquet
Hall
Restroom
Streaming media (4K)
50
25
10%
0%
0%
0%
0%
E-whiteboard
32
16
5%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Email
32
16
3%
0%
0%
0%
0%
File transfer
32
16
2%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Streaming media (1080p)
16
12
0%
10%
10%
10%
20%
Web browsing
8
4
20%
70%
80%
70%
60%
Desktop sharing
2.5
1.2
10%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Gaming
2
1
0%
20%
0%
0%
0%
Instant messaging
0.5
0.25
30%
0%
10%
20%
20%
VoIP (voice)
0.25
0.125
20%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario (Excellent, in Mbps)
11
11
8
8
8
Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
18
Huawei Confidential
• If the bandwidth requirement in a specific scenario is not specified, evaluate the
required bandwidth based on the table above.
• The average bandwidth required in different scenarios is the sum of the singleservice baseline rates of different service types multiplied by their proportions.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

200 STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, only 60 STAs run services concurrently. When both APs and STAs
comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30 STAs (2x2 MIMO).
Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP in 4x4 MIMO HE40 Mode (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
19
Huawei Confidential
• The access bandwidth in the table above is the rate at the application layer, and
is an actual rate calculated by subtracting various overheads from the air
interface rate. Therefore, the rate at the application layer is lower than the PHY
rate.
Contents
20
1.
Introduction to Hotel Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Hotel Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Hotel Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Hotel Sub-scenarios
21
Huawei Confidential
Hotel guest room
Banquet hall
Hotel lobby
Restaurant
WLAN Construction Standards for Guest Rooms
Scenario description
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service type: web browsing, HD video, gaming, instant messaging,
etc.
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 20
Mbps
⚫
User density: 1 or 2 per room
⚫
Capacity KPI: 4 STAs on a single RU, 100% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 4 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Deploy one RU or wall plate AP to cover
one room.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
Deploy one wall plate AP to cover one or
two rooms based on wall materials.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
Common
guest room
Low
High
Medium
Agile distributed RU or wall
plate AP
Junction box (86
mm) or wall
mounting
Deluxe
suite
Low
High
Medium
Wall plate AP supporting
2+2 or higher spatial
streams
Ceiling or wall
mounting
22
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Guest Rooms (1/2):
Common Guest Rooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Common guest rooms are typically partitioned by solid walls (brick walls or concrete walls). It is recommended that one RU or
wall plate AP be deployed in each guest room. The RU or wall plate AP is usually installed under a desk and on a junction box
(86 mm) or the wall. Keep the RU or wall plate AP away from metal obstacles during installation.
⚫
Deploy APs in corridors and away from the doors of guest rooms to avoid interference to the RUs or APs in the rooms.
Desk
23
Desk
Desk
Desk
Desk
Desk
Bed
Bed
Bed
Bed
Bed
Bed
Bathroom
Bathroom
Bathroom
Bathroom
Bathroom
Bathroom
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Guest Rooms (2/2): Deluxe
Suites
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
Generally, a deluxe suite consists of two or more rooms. Before deploying APs, determine the material of walls between the rooms.


If the wall between two rooms is made of wooden or gypsum boards, use solution A: Install one AP on the ceiling and close to the partition wall to
cover the two rooms.
If the wall between two rooms is made of bricks or concrete, use solution B: Install one AP on the ceiling or wall in each room.
Desk
Bed
Bed
Solution B: One AP
covers one room.
Sofa
Gypsum board wall
Sofa
Solution A: One AP
covers two rooms.
Desk
Concrete wall
⚫
Desk
Desk
Bathroom
24
Huawei Confidential
Bathroom
WLAN Construction Standards for Lobbies
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 8–10 m2
⚫
Floor height: 5 m to 9 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 20
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Lobby floor
height < 6 m
High
Medium
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Lobby floor
height > 6 m
High
Medium
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
25
Huawei Confidential
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal spacing of 18 m to 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
Wall mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of
18 m to 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Lobbies
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
If the floor height of a hotel lobby is smaller than 6 m, use solution A: Install indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional
antennas in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 18 m to 20 m.
If the floor height of a hotel lobby is greater than 6 m, use solution B: Install indoor APs with 70 ° external directional
antennas on walls at a spacing of 18 m to 20 m and a height of 3 m to 5 m.
18–20 m
18–20 m
18–20 m
18–20 m
18–20 m
18–20 m
Solution A: Mount APs with omnidirectional
antennas on the ceiling.
26
Huawei Confidential
Solution B: Mount APs with directional
antennas on walls.
WLAN Construction Standards for Banquet Halls
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 2 m2 in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 4 m to 9 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an equal
spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40
@ 5 GHz
Ceiling or wall
mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of 12 m to
15 m (optional: W-shaped mode).
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40
@ 5 GHz
Banquet hall
(floor height
< 6 m)
High
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 4+4 or higher
spatial streams
Banquet hall
(floor height
> 6 m)
High
High
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas,
supporting 4+4 or higher
spatial streams
27
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Banquet Halls
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
If the floor height of a banquet hall is smaller than 6 m, deploy indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas according to solution A.
⚫
If the floor height of a banquet hall is greater than 6 m, deploy indoor APs with 35° external directional antennas according to solution A or B.
⚫
Considering limited available 2.4 GHz channels, disable some 2.4 GHz radios to reduce co-channel interference when a large number of APs are
deployed.
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
12–15 m
Solution A: Install APs on the ceiling in W-shaped mode
at an equal spacing of 12 m to 15 m.
28
Huawei Confidential
Solution B: Install APs on walls at an equal spacing of
12 m to 15 m.
WLAN Construction Standards for Restaurants
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 4–5 m2 during meal periods
⚫
Floor height: 3 m to 5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Restaurant
Low
High
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling mounting
29
Huawei Confidential
Deployment Solution
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 15 m to 18 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Restaurants
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Install indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 15 m to 18 m.
⚫
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing columns.
15–18 m
15–18 m
15–18 m
15–18 m
AP deployment positions in a restaurant (ceiling mounting)
30
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Multi-answer question) Which of the following methods can be used to install an agile
distributed RU? (
)
A. Wall mounting
B. Junction box (86 mm) mounting
C. Ceiling mounting
D. Pole mounting
31
Huawei Confidential
1. ABC
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of hotel sub-scenarios, including hotel guest rooms,
restaurants, and banquet halls. Different sub-scenarios use different WLAN construction
standards and planning rules and thereby have different WLAN planning solutions. This
course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and deployment in common hotel subscenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in hotel WLAN projects.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods of each sub-scenario.
32
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
33
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Healthcare Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
Mobile healthcare is becoming a hot topic in hospitals' informatization construction. It is
transforming the traditional wired applications of hospitals into wireless and mobile
applications. The wireless local area network (WLAN) is typically the basis for carrying
mobile healthcare services.
⚫
This course describes WLAN service characteristics of healthcare scenarios, as well as
methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common WLAN service types in healthcare scenarios.

Describe WLAN planning methods in healthcare scenarios.

Understand WLAN deployment solutions in healthcare scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Healthcare Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Healthcare Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Healthcare Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Healthcare Scenarios
Space: The structure is complex in healthcare scenarios. The wall structure varies greatly in different functional areas. Most of the
⚫
scenarios involve only common floor heights, and the atrium structure in the hall may exceed 6 m.
Roaming: Service continuity is required when medical personnel are moving, ensuring no information loss and guaranteeing work
⚫
experience of medical personnel.
Networking: Hospital WLANs are divided into the intranet for medical personnel and the extranet for patients and family members.
⚫
Ward
5
Huawei Confidential
Consulting room
Hall
Service Characteristics of Healthcare Scenarios
Medical personal service
Patient personal service
Healthcare IoT service
Services running on handheld
Services running on mobile
Infant abduction prevention,
PDAs and office laptops,
phones of patients and family
infusion monitoring, asset
including mobile ward-round,
members, for example, video,
management, personnel
wireless infusion, web browsing,
gaming, and social media
positioning, etc.
instant messaging, etc.
Requirements on WLANs differ for these services.
6
Huawei Confidential
• Note: This course does not assume IoT services on a WLAN.
Service Requirements in Healthcare Scenarios
Security
• Ensures WLAN
security.
• Isolates the intranet
and extranet.
• Avoids mutual
interference between
WLAN devices and
various medical
devices.
7
Huawei Confidential
Quality
Experience
Coverage
Management
• In healthcare
scenarios, a large
number of images in
the picture archiving
and communication
system (PACS) need
to be transmitted.
Therefore, high
bandwidth is the
prerequisite for
normal medical
work.
• Medical personnel,
patients, and visitors
have high
requirements on
WLAN roaming.
• Full coverage is
required for all
scenarios such as the
registration hall,
consulting rooms,
wards, and operating
rooms, meeting
service requirements
such as ward round
and Internet access.
• The deployment of
numerous APs and
the subsequent
upgrade and
maintenance bring
new pressure to
O&M personnel.
Therefore, WLANs
must be manageable
and easy to maintain.
Challenges in Healthcare Scenarios
Dense small rooms
8
High roaming requirements
•
There are many wards, with complex wall structures
and high wall penetration loss.
•
High requirements are imposed on WLAN roaming to
ensure normal services for medical personnel.
•
The WLAN may be congested, causing the bandwidth
to decrease sharply.
•
Medical devices are sensitive to in-roaming packet
loss. Therefore, the packet loss rate must be low.
•
Other uncertain Wi-Fi interference such as personal
Wi-Fi hotspots may exist.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
9
1.
Introduction to Healthcare Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Healthcare Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Healthcare Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in Healthcare Scenarios
⚫
Requirements collection

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide basis
Requirements collection
for WLAN design.
⚫
Site survey

Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height,
Site survey
interference sources, and obstacles.
⚫
Device selection

⚫
Device selection
Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Coverage design

Determine the coverage range and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
Coverage design
positions.
⚫
Capacity design

10
Estimate the number of APs based on the number of access STAs and service requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in Healthcare Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Coverage area
Determine the VIP coverage areas (such as wards, consulting areas, and office areas), common coverage areas (such as the
registration hall and leisure areas), and simple coverage areas (such as corridors, stairs, and restrooms), and areas that do not
need to be covered (such as storage rooms and equipment rooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls, 240 mm concrete walls, and 12 mm glass walls.
Access STAs
Determine the types and number of access STAs in the coverage area, such as handheld medical devices, mobile phones, and
laptops.
IoT requirements
Determine whether there are IoT requirements.
Switch location
Determine the locations of upstream switches and check whether the PoE power supply distance meets the requirements.
Power supply mode
Determine the power supply mode as well as the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Interference source
Determine whether there are interference sources such as medical instruments, Bluetooth devices, and external Wi-Fi devices.
Other
11
Huawei Confidential
Check whether medical devices have requirements on WLAN roaming and whether there are specific requirements for AP
installation positions.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Healthcare Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Description
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Floor height
Measure the floor height. The common indoor floor height is 3 m to 5 m. If an atrium or hall exists, use a rangefinder to measure
the floor height and record the result.
Interference source
Check whether there are interference sources, for example, mobile hotspots, Wi-Fi devices of other vendors, and non-Wi-Fi devices
(such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether obstacles at the site are consistent with those on the drawings. If not, mark the inconsistent areas and take photos.
For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation values of the partitions on the drawings.
Site photos
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
AP installation mode
and position
Determine the AP installation modes (ceiling mounting, wall mounting, etc.) and positions. Check whether there are special
requirements in consulting rooms and wards.
ELV room locations
Mark the locations of ELV rooms where switches are to be deployed on the drawings.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE cables to be routed on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be less than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on latency, in-roaming packet loss rate, and concurrency rate in
special areas.
12
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger access
capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support omnidirectional
and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be installed at
high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer to
the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country Codes
and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain based
on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply modes vary according to the deployment scenarios. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other scenarios,
the DC power supply can be used, or both power supply modes can be used together for mutual backup. Ensure that the power
consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6
standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example: As the Internet of Things (IoT) comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT network independently will cause
repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment. Therefore, it is recommended that
IoT scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Healthcare Scenarios (1/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 5761-21
AirEngine 6760-X1/X1E
MIMO
2+4
4+8/4+4+4
4+6+independent scanning
Appearance
Antenna
Built-in smart antennas
Built-in smart antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/29 dBm
Antenna Gain
4.5 dBi/5.5 dBi
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
17.9 W (excluding USB)
39.9 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3bt/at)
Installation Mode
T-rail and wall mounting
T-rail and wall mounting
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, IoT via USB, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, IoT via USB, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Waiting area and infusion area
Conference room and office
* The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models, see the product documentation.
14
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Healthcare Scenarios (2/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 5761-11W
AirEngine 5761-12W
AirEngine 5761-11WD
Appearance
MIMO
2+2
2+2
2+2
Antenna
Built-in smart antennas
Built-in smart antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
23 dBm/23 dBm
20 dBm/20 dBm
23 dBm/23 dBm
Antenna Gain
3.5 dBi/5 dBi
2 dBi/3 dBi
3.5 dBi/5 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
12.7 W (excluding USB)
13.1 W (excluding USB and PoE OUT)
12.7 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
Installation Mode
Junction box (86 mm), wall, and
ceiling mounting
Junction box (86 mm), wall, and
ceiling mounting
Junction box (86 mm), wall, and
ceiling mounting
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, IoT via USB, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, IoT via USB, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, IoT via USB,
BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Ward and consulting room
Ward and consulting room
Ward and consulting room
* The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models, see the product documentation.
15
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in Healthcare Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27013720
27012565
Model
ANTDG0808D4NR
ANTDG1211D4NR
Antenna Type
Directional
Directional
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
8 dBi/8 dBi
12 dBi/11 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Vertical Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
40 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm
40 mm x 450 mm x 420 mm
Connector Type
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
Remarks
Used in uncommon floor height scenarios requiring
wireless coverage
Used in uncommon floor height scenarios with highdensity access requirements
* Note: The external directional antennas above can be used in atrium scenarios such as halls.
16
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Agile Distributed Networking in Healthcare Scenarios
⚫
Agile distributed networking is recommended for WLAN deployment in wards.
⚫
A central AP can supply PoE power to remote units (RUs). If the power supply distance exceeds 80 m or more than
24 RUs are deployed, a switch can be used for extension. Each central AP can connect to a maximum of 48 RUs.
Central AP: AirEngine 9700D-M1
Switch
RU
17
RU
RU
RU
RU
RU
Huawei Confidential
• The central AP model AirEngine 9700D-M1 usually works with RU models such
as the AirEngine 5761-11WD.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Coverage Design Rules
⚫
Minimize the number of obstacles that signals pass through. Generally, it is recommended that signals pass through a single-layer wall (120 mm brick
wall). In some special scenarios (such as gypsum walls and glass walls), signals can pass through two layers of walls.
⚫
It is not recommended that APs be deployed to transmit signals to penetrate a 240 mm thick brick wall, concrete wall, or metal wall. If the AP penetration
coverage solution is used without meeting the specified constraints, weak signals and discontinuous roaming may occur after signals penetrate the wall. In
this case, to ensure good coverage and roaming, add APs based on the wall structure during WLAN planning.
⚫
Deploy APs separately in key areas and VIP areas to ensure user experience.
⚫
Deploy APs separately at intersections or corners to ensure signal coverage continuity (≥ –65 dBm) and that neighboring APs can establish neighbor
relationship tables for good roaming experience.
⚫
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing pillars.
2
2
1
1
Improper location: Signals penetrate several walls.
18
Huawei Confidential
Proper location: Signals penetrate only one wall.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Agile distributed AP
AP with omnidirectional
antennas
Precautions for Coverage Design in Healthcare Scenarios
19
Huawei Confidential
⚫
APs can be mounted on the ceiling (recommended, at a height of no more than 6 m) or on walls
(at a height of about 3 m).
⚫
Healthcare scenarios are indoor semi-open scenarios. Assuming that the edge field strength is –
65 dBm, the maximum coverage distance at 2.4 GHz is 35 m, and that at 5 GHz is 15 m.
⚫
When planning APs in a sub-scenario, consider factors such as obstacles and the number of
access STAs. For details about the AP deployment spacing, see the WLAN construction standards.
⚫
When an AP is installed on a load-bearing pillar or wall, assume that signals at the rear of the
AP are completely blocked.
⚫
Deploy agile distributed APs in areas consisting of multiple independent rooms that are isolated
from each other, such as wards and consulting rooms.
⚫
It is recommended that a wall plate AP or agile distributed RU be deployed in each room.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in Healthcare
Scenarios
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline Rate
(Mbps)
Proportion of Services in Healthcare Scenarios
Excellent
Good
Ward/Consulting
Room
Waiting Area/
Infusion Room
Hall
Nurse
Station
Office/Conference
Room
Canteen
Parking
Lot
5%
4K video
50
30
10%
5%
5%
5%
10%
10%
1080p video
16
12
10%
5%
5%
5%
10%
10%
5%
720p video
8
4
10%
10%
10%
20%
20%
20%
10%
Mobile ward round
8
4
10%
10%
0%
20%
0%
0%
0%
Web browsing
8
4
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
Gaming
2
1
10%
10%
10%
0%
10%
10%
10%
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
20%
20%
30%
20%
20%
20%
30%
VoIP
0.256
0.128
10%
20%
20%
10%
10%
10%
20%
10
7
6
8
10
10
6
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario (Excellent, in
Mbps)
* Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
20
Huawei Confidential
• If the bandwidth requirement in a scenario is not specified, evaluate the required
bandwidth based on the table above.
• The average bandwidth required in different scenarios is the sum of the singleservice baseline rates of different service types multiplied by their proportions.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

Two hundred STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, services are running on only 60 STAs concurrently. When
both APs and STAs comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30
STAs (2x2 MIMO). Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
21
Huawei Confidential
• The access bandwidth in the table above is the rate at the application layer, and
is an actual rate calculated by subtracting various overheads from the air
interface rate. Therefore, the rate at the application layer is lower than the PHY
rate.
Contents
22
1.
Introduction to Healthcare Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Healthcare Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Healthcare Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Healthcare Sub-scenarios
23
Ward
Consulting room
Parking lot
Hospital hall
Nurse station
Corridor
Huawei Confidential
• In healthcare scenarios, common sub-scenarios also include the waiting area,
infusion room, and other areas with high user density.
WLAN Construction Standards for Wards and Consulting
Rooms
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service types: mobile ward round, web browsing, HD video, instant
messaging, etc.
⚫
User distribution: 1–3 three beds in a ward, with 1 or 2 users per
bed; 2–6 users in a consulting room
⚫
⚫
⚫
Capacity KPI: 12 STAs on a single AP, 50% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
2
Area: about 60 m (max)
⚫
⚫
Similar scenarios: Duty room, leader's office, treatment room, etc.
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 16
Mbps
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Ward and
consulting
room
24
Aesthetics
Medium
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
Medium
Coverage
High
Recommended AP Type
Wall plate AP or agile
distributed RU supporting 2+2
or higher spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Junction box (86 mm),
ceiling, or wall
mounting
Deploy APs evenly in a room and
far away from the door.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Wards and Consulting
Rooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
It is recommended that wall plate APs or distributed RUs be installed on walls or ceilings. If ceiling mounting is used, additional
mounting brackets are required.
⚫
If the walls between rooms are brick walls, deploy one wall plate AP or RU in each room by referring to solution A. If the walls
between rooms are made of gypsum boards or foam materials, use one AP or RU to cover two rooms by referring to solution B.
⚫
Deploy APs or RUs in the rooms evenly far away from the doors. Keep APs or RUs in the corridor at least 3 m away from the
doors of rooms.
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Single room
< 60 m2
Solid wall
Solid wall
Solid wall
Solid wall
Gypsum
board
Gypsum
board
Gypsum
board
Gypsum
board
Solution A: wall mounting
25
Huawei Confidential
Solution B: ceiling mounting
WLAN Construction Standards for Waiting Areas and
Infusion Rooms
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, gaming, video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: 1 per 2 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
Similar scenarios: Hospital pharmacy, rest area, and registration
area
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Waiting area
and infusion
room
26
Aesthetics
Low
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
High
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling or wall
mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing
of 15 m to 18 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Waiting Areas and Infusion
Rooms
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Mount indoor APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling.
⚫
Deploy APs at spacing of 15–18 m based on the area size.
⚫
Deploy APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing pillars.
15–18 m
15–18 m
27
Huawei Confidential
15–18 m
WLAN Construction Standards for Hospital Halls
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 4–5 m2
⚫
Floor height:

Common structure: 3–6 m

Unconventional structure: > 6 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 20% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs evenly on the ceiling.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Wall mounting
Deploy APs evenly on the walls of
the hall.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
Hospital hall
(floor height
< 6 m)
Medium
Medium
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Hospital hall
(floor height
> 6 m)
Medium
Medium
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
28
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Hospital Halls
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Hall with a floor height of 3–6 m: Deploy APs at an equal spacing of 15 m to 20 m and keep them at least 3 m away from
load-bearing pillars.
⚫
Hall with a floor height of greater than 6 m: Mount APs with external directional antennas evenly on the walls of the hall at
an equal spacing of 15 m to 20 m. If there is a suspended ceiling with a common floor height around the hall, APs can also be
mounted on the suspended ceiling.
Solution A: Ceiling mounting (3–6 m floor height)
29
Huawei Confidential
15–20 m
15–20 m
15–20 m
Hall edge
15–20 m
15–20 m
Hall edge
15–20 m
Hall edge
Hall edge
15–20 m
Solution B: Wall mounting (> 6 m floor height)
WLAN Construction Standards for Nurse Stations and
Corridors
Scenario description
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: Smart healthcare devices, web browsing, gaming,
video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 8–10 m
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
2
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 16
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 20 STAs on a single AP, 50% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Nurse station
and corridor
30
Aesthetics
Low
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
Medium
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs at an equal
spacing of 20 m to 30 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Nurse Stations and
Corridors
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Deploy one AP in the nurse station, and deploy APs in the corridor at a spacing of 20–30 m.
⚫
Deploy APs in corridors to ensure continuous coverage of radio signals and good roaming experience during mobile ward
rounds.
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Nurse
station
20–30 m
20–30 m
20–30 m
Corridor
Ward
31
Huawei Confidential
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
Ward
WLAN Construction Standards for Parking Lots
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, email, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 15–20 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Parking lot
32
Aesthetics
Low
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
Low
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+2 or higher
spatial streams
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 35–40 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Parking Lots
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Install APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling with an equal spacing of 35 m to 40 m in W-shaped mode.
⚫
Deploy APs above lanes and independent APs at entrances and exits to ensure continuous signal coverage and good roaming
experience.
35–40 m
Parking area
Lane
33
Huawei Confidential
35–40 m
35–40 m
Lane
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) On an agile distributed network, how many RUs can a central AP
manage at most? (
A. 12
B. 24
C. 36
D. 48
34
1. D
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the service characteristics of each healthcare sub-scenario, including
wards, consulting rooms, nurse stations, and hospital halls. WLAN construction standards
and planning rules vary according to sub-scenarios and relevant WLAN planning solutions
are different as well. This course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and
deployment for common healthcare sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in
WLAN projects relating to healthcare scenarios.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods for each sub-scenario.
35
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
36
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Retail Scenarios (Shopping
Malls and Supermarkets)
Foreword
⚫
With the rapid development of the mobile Internet, people have more and more requirements for
WLANs, and the requirements become increasingly strict. Wireless networks in shopping malls and
supermarkets are typically provided for free to attract customers, increase customer traffic, and
increase revenues.
⚫
In shopping malls and supermarkets, WLANs provide a wide coverage with a large number of access
STAs and strong signal interference. In addition, Users of different identities need to access the WLANs
and move frequently, posing great challenges to WLAN deployment in shopping malls and
supermarkets.
⚫
This course describes the service characteristics of and WLAN requirements for the shopping mall and
supermarket scenario, and describes the design rules and precautions of WLAN planning solutions in
the scenario.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand common service types and challenges in the shopping mall and supermarket scenarios.

Understand the WLAN planning process in shopping mall and supermarket scenarios.

Understand WLAN construction standards and deployment solutions in shopping mall and
supermarket scenarios.
3
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Shopping malls and supermarkets, also called commodity supermarkets, typically refer to large shopping malls that
⚫
gather a large number of merchants with the following features:

Space: Functional areas are divided by floor, including shopping areas, food courts, and entertainment areas.

Obstacles: Many obstacles exist in shopping malls, including partition walls between stores and load-bearing pillars. In addition,
store decoration may block signals.

Interference: There are many Wi-Fi hotspots deployed by merchants, leading to severe interference.
Outside a shopping mall
5
Huawei Confidential
Inside a shopping mall
Characteristics of WLAN Services in Shopping Mall and
Supermarket Scenarios
Consumer services
Office services in shopping malls
Services of stores
Services running on users'
Daily office services in
Operations-related services
STAs, such as web browsing,
shopping malls running on
running on dedicated PCs, TVs,
instant messaging, email,
office laptops, such as web
large screens, POS terminals,
online music, HD videos, and
browsing, instant messaging,
and tablets, such as the
online gaming.
email, file transfer, desktop
commodity management
sharing, video conferencing,
system, cashier system,
and service data transmission.
advertising services, and
ordering services.
Requirements on WLANs differ for these services.
6
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Challenges in Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Sharp increase in the
number of users
•
7
During holidays and
marketplace activities,
the user concurrency
rate is high, which may
cause network
congestion, web page
freezing, and even WiFi access failures.
Huawei Confidential
Weak signals or
coverage holes
•
Different shopping
malls have different
building structures and
may have coverage
holes or some areas
with weak Wi-Fi signal
coverage. These "blind
spots" will lead to poor
user experience.
Signal disconnections
during roaming
•
In shopping malls, the
roaming path of a user
is uncertain. When the
user moves, the signal
may be blocked or the
user may walk to a
blind spot. As a result,
the roaming is
interrupted, affecting
user experience.
Much interference
•
Some store owners set
up Wi-Fi hotspots by
themselves or
customers temporarily
enable personal
hotspots, thereby
interfering WLANs in
shopping malls and
reducing the WLAN
quality.
Contents
8
1.
Introduction to Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in the Shopping Mall and
Supermarket Scenarios
Requirements collection
⚫

Site survey
⚫


Site survey
Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height,
interference sources, and obstacles.
Device selection
⚫
Requirements collection
Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide
basis for design.
Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Device selection
Coverage design
⚫

Determine the coverage area and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
positions.
Coverage design
Capacity design
⚫

9
Estimate the number of needed APs based on the number of access STAs and service
requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in Shopping Mall and Supermarket
Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Coverage area
Determine VIP coverage areas (such as stores and catering areas), common coverage areas (such as public areas and
corridors), and simple coverage areas (such as staircases and bathrooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls, 12 mm glass, and 240 mm concrete walls.
Access STAs
Determine the types and number of access STAs in the coverage area, such as mobile phones, tablets, and laptops.
Bandwidth
Determine the main service types and bandwidth requirements of access STAs.
Switch positions
Determine the locations of the uplink wired-side switches on the WLANs and check whether the PoE power supply distance
meets the requirements.
Power supply mode
Determine the power supply mode as well as the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Interference sources
Check whether interference sources exist, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and external Wi-Fi devices.
Others
10
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Huawei Confidential
Check whether there are special requirements in some scenarios. High aesthetic requirements are typically exerted on stores
and catering areas. If APs can be installed only above the ceiling, focus on the ceiling, ventilation pipes, and fire shutter doors
that block signals.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Description
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Floor height
Measure the floor height. The common indoor floor height is 3 m to 5 m. If an atrium exists, use a
rangefinder to measure the floor height and record the result.
Interference sources
Check whether there is interference caused by, for example, mobile hotspots, third-party Wi-Fi devices, and
non-Wi-Fi devices (such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether the site is consistent with that on the floor plans. If not, mark the inconsistent areas and
take photos. For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation values of
the partitions on the drawings.
Site photos
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
AP installation modes
and positions
Determine the AP installation modes (ceiling-mounted, wall-mounted, etc.) and locations.
ELV room location
Mark the locations of ELV rooms where switches are to be deployed on the floor plans.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE cables to be routed on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be less
than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on latency, in-roaming packet loss rate,
and concurrency rate in special areas.
11
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Model Selection Factors
12
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger
access capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access
density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support
omnidirectional and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be
installed at high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer
to the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country
Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain
based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply modes vary according to the deployment scenarios. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other
scenarios, the DC power supply can be used, or both power supply modes can be used together for mutual backup. Ensure
that the power consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi
6 standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example: As the Internet of Things (IoT) comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT network independently will cause
repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment. Therefore, it is recommended
that IoT scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
AP Model
AirEngine6761-21T
AirEngine6760-X1
AirEngine5760-51
AirEngine5761-21
MIMO
2+2+4
4+6+independent scanning
2+4+independent scanning
2+4
Antenna
Built-in triple-radio
omnidirectional antennas
Built-in dual-radio
omnidirectional antennas
Built-in dual-radio
omnidirectional antennas
Built-in dual-radio
omnidirectional antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
25 dBm/23 dBm/26 dBm
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/26 dBm
25 dBm/28 dBm
Antenna Gain
4 dBi/5 dBi
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
4.5 dBi/5.5 dBi
4 dBi/5 dBi
21.2 W (excluding USB)
48 W (excluding USB and
PoE_OUT)
30 W (excluding USB and
PoE_OUT)
17.9 W (excluding USB)
Image
Maximum Power
Consumption
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at)
PoE (802.3bt)
PoE (802.3at/bt)
PoE (802.3at/af)
Other Features
Smart antenna, USB, and
Bluetooth 5.0
Smart antenna, USB, IoT,
BLE 5.0
Smart antenna, USB, IoT,
BLE 5.0
Smart antenna, USB, and
Bluetooth 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Important flagship stores
and high-end stores
Important flagship stores
and high-end stores
Public areas such as stores
and corridors
Public areas such as stores
and corridors
13
Huawei Confidential
• The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Coverage Design Rules
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
Minimize the number of obstacles that signals pass through. Generally, it is recommended that signals pass through a single-layer wall (120 mm brick
wall). In some special scenarios (such as gypsum walls and glass walls), signals can pass through two layers of walls.
It is not recommended that APs be deployed to transmit signals to penetrate a 240 mm thick brick wall, concrete wall, or metal wall. If the AP penetration
coverage solution is used without meeting the specified constraints, weak signals and discontinuous roaming may occur after signals penetrate the wall. In
this case, to ensure good coverage and roaming, add APs based on the wall structure during WLAN planning.
Deploy APs separately in key areas and VIP areas to ensure user experience.
Deploy APs separately at intersections or corners to ensure signal coverage continuity (≥ –65 dBm) and that neighboring APs can establish neighbor
relationship tables for good roaming experience.
Install APs at least 3 m away from load-bearing pillars.
2
2
1
1
Improper location: Signals penetrate several walls.
14
Huawei Confidential
Proper location: Signals penetrate only one wall.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Precautions for Coverage Design in Shopping Mall and
Supermarket Scenarios
In shopping malls and supermarkets, indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas are used in most cases. Note the following
points:



APs can be installed on ceilings or walls. The height for ceiling-mounted installation is less than or equal to 6 m, and that for the wall-mounted
installation is about 3 m.
Shopping malls and supermarkets are semi-open. At the edge field strength of –65 dBm, the maximum coverage distance at 2.4 GHz is 35 m, and that
at 5 GHz is 15 m.
When planning APs in a sub-scenario, consider factors such as obstacles and the number of access STAs. For details about the AP deployment spacing,
see the WLAN construction standards.
When an AP is installed on a load-bearing pillar or wall, signals at the rear of the AP are considered to be completely blocked.
Height: ≤ 6 m
Maximum
transmission
distance
Coverage radius
15
Huawei Confidential
Wall mounting

Ceiling mounting
⚫
Height: about 3 m
Maximum
transmission
distance
Coverage radius
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Consumer Services and Average Bandwidth in
Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline Rate
(Mbps)
Proportion of Services
Excellent
Good
Corridor
Catering
Store
Supermarket
Cinema
Parking Lot
Web browsing
8
4
60%
50%
50%
60%
60%
60%
Streaming media (1080p)
16
12
10%
20%
20%
10%
0%
10%
VoIP
0.25
0.125
10%
10%
0%
10%
10%
10%
Gaming
2
1
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
Instant messaging
0.5
0.25
10%
10%
20%
10%
20%
10%
7
8
8
7
6
7
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario (Excellent, in Mbps)
Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
16
Huawei Confidential
• If the bandwidth requirement in a specific scenario is not specified, evaluate the
required bandwidth based on the table above.
• The average bandwidth required in different scenarios is the sum of the singleservice baseline rates of different service types multiplied by their proportions.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

Two hundred STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, services are running on only 60 STAs concurrently. When
both APs and STAs comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30
STAs (2x2 MIMO). Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
17
Huawei Confidential
• The access bandwidth in the table above is the rate at the application layer, and
is an actual rate calculated by subtracting various overheads from the air
interface rate. Therefore, the rate at the application layer is lower than the PHY
rate.
Contents
18
1.
Introduction to Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Shopping Mall and Supermarket Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Sub-scenarios in the Shopping Mall and
Supermarket Scenarios
19
Corridor
Store
Catering
Supermarket
Cinema
Parking lot
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Public Areas and Corridors
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 6–8 square meters in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Public
area/Passageway
High
Medium
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling
mounting
It is recommended that APs be
deployed near the store entrances
at a spacing of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE40 @ 5 GHz
20
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Public Areas and Corridors
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Mount indoor APs with omnidirectional antennas on the T-rails of the ceiling. For areas near store doors (far from the atrium
area), deploy the APs at a spacing of 20–25 m.
Store
Corridor
AP
Store
Store
20–25 m
Store
Store
AP
Store
Store
20–25 m
Store
AP
Fence
(glass)
Atrium area
21
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Store Scenarios
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 3–4 square meters in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP
Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Store
Medium
Low
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling
mounting
APs are deployed far away from corridors
at an equal distance of 15 m in stores.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40
@ 5 GHz
22
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Store Scenarios
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
For a store with an area of less than 60 m2 and the stores are separated by plasterboard walls, deploy APs by referring to
solution A.
For a store with an area of 60 m2 to 150 m2, deploy one AP in each store by referring to solution B.
For a store with an area of greater than 150 m2, deploy APs at an interval of 15 m to 20 m in W-shaped mode by referring to
solution C.
For counters without partitions, deploying APs above aisles by referring to solution C as well.
Area < 60 m2
Area < 60 m2
60–150 m2
Area > 150 m2
60–150 m2
15–20 m
Plasterboard wall
15–20 m
15–20 m
15–20 m
Solution A
23
Huawei Confidential
Solution B
Solution C
WLAN Construction Standards for Catering Scenarios
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 2–3 square meters in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Catering
High
Medium
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling
mounting
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of 15 m
(optional: W-shaped mode).
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40
@ 5 GHz
24
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Catering Scenarios
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Food court: Mount APs on the ceiling at equal spacing of 15 m over the aisles.
⚫
Catering stores: Mount APs on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at equal spacing of 15 m.
Seat
area
Seat
area
Seat
area
15 m
Aisle
Seat
area
Aisle
Huawei Confidential
15 m
15 m
Seat
area
Seat
area
Seat
area
15 m
15 m
15 m
Food court
25
Seat
area
Catering store
WLAN Construction Standards for Supermarkets
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, music, HD video, instant messaging,
etc.
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
User density: about 1 per 3–4 square meters in peak hours
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP
Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Supermarket
Medium
Low
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling
mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an equal
spacing of 20 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40 @
5 GHz
26
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Super Market Scenarios
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Mount indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 20 m.
20 m
20 m
20 m
20 m
Supermarket
27
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Cinemas
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 2 square meters in peak hours
⚫
Floor height: 3–7 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 15% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Cinema
Medium
Low
28
Huawei Confidential
Coverage Recommended AP Type
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Installation
Mode
WLAN Planning Solution
Ceiling
mounting
Small projection hall: Only one AP needs to be
deployed in each hall.
Large projection hall: APs are deployed at an
interval of 15 m to 20 m in W-shaped mode.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Cinemas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Small projection hall (with an area of less than 200 m2): Only one AP needs to be installed on the ceiling in each projection hall.
⚫
Large projection hall (with an area of more than 200 m2): APs are installed at equal spacing of 15 m to 20 m on the ceiling.
Area < 200 m2
Area < 200 m2
Area < 200 m2
Area > 200 m2
15–20 m
Small projection hall
29
Huawei Confidential
Large projection hall
WLAN Construction Standards for Parking Lots
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, email, video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 15–20 m2
⚫
Floor height: 3–5 m
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 10
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 30 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Parking lot
Low
Low
Medium
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+2 or higher
spatial streams
30
Huawei Confidential
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal distance of 35–40 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for Parking Lots
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Install APs with omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling with equal spacing of 35 m to 40 m in W-shaped mode.
⚫
Deploy APs above lanes and independent APs at entrances and exits to ensure continuous signal coverage and good roaming
experience.
35–40 m
Parking area
Lane
31
Huawei Confidential
35–40 m
35–40 m
Lane
Quiz
1. (Multiple-Answer Question) Which of the following statements about sub-scenario
deployment solutions in shopping mall and supermarket scenarios are correct? (
)
A. In stores, APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas are usually mounted on the ceiling. The
specific solution varies according to the store size.
B. In food courts, it is recommended that APs be deployed at equal intervals over aisles to ensure
user experience.
C. In cinema scenarios, the number of APs to be deployed depends on the size of the cinemas.
D. In supermarket scenarios, it is recommended that APs be mounted on the ceiling in W-shaped
mode.
32
Huawei Confidential
1. ABCD
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of each sub-scenario in the shopping mall and
supermarket scenarios, including stores, catering areas, and cinemas. WLAN construction
standards and planning rules vary according to sub-scenarios and relevant WLAN planning
solutions are different as well. This course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and
deployment for common shopping mall and supermarket sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN
solution design in WLAN projects relating to shopping mall and supermarket scenarios.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods for each sub-scenario.
33
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
34
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Shop Floor and Warehouse
Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
With the introduction of Industry 4.0 and Made in China 2025, more and more data-based,
intelligent application innovations are emerging, and the manufacturing industry is also
going automated and intelligent. All these changes require the support of a mature and
stable network.
⚫
Shop floors and warehouses are characterized by large area, high floor height, severe
blocking by obstacles, and difficult deployment. In addition, some terminals in these
scenarios are sensitive to network quality, such as automated guided vehicles (AGVs).
⚫
This course describes WLAN service characteristics of shop floor and warehouse scenarios,
as well as methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common service types and challenges in shop floor and warehouse scenarios.

Describe WLAN planning methods in shop floor and warehouse scenarios.

Understand WLAN deployment solutions in shop floor and warehouse scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Space: The floor height of a warehouse is high and even exceeds 10 m in some areas. Additionally, areas in the warehouse are large
⚫
and can be categorized as high or low shelf areas by shelf height.
Blocking: There are many obstacles in shop floors and warehouses, such as production devices, cable trays, load-bearing pillars,
⚫
shelves, and goods on the shelves. All these obstacles block Wi-Fi signals to some extent.
Service type: The main service types of workshops and warehouses include handheld personal digital assistants (PDAs), barcode
⚫
scanners, sensor data backhaul, AGVs, and programmable logic controller (PLC) devices.
Roaming: AGVs in shop floors and warehouses move frequently and are sensitive to packet loss and latency during roaming.
⚫
Shop floor
5
Warehouse
Huawei Confidential
• The PLC is an electronic device designed for digital operation in industrial
environments.
• The AGV is a wheeled mobile robot that can move along the conducting wires,
marking blocks, and magnetic stripes on the floor. It is mainly used in industrial
production scenarios to transport goods in shop floors and warehouses.
• After receiving dispatch instructions, AGVs automatically move to the shelves
where the goods are stacked based on the QR codes on the ground or image
identification, lift the goods to the shelves, and then transport the shelves to the
pickers. After the goods picking is complete, the AGVs carry the shelves to the
shelf area for storage.
Warehousing Industry Development Trend
The modern warehousing industry is gradually developing from manual, mechanized, to automated, intelligent
⚫
warehousing.
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 4
Intelligent
warehousing
Manual warehousing
The transportation,
storage, regulation,
and control of goods
are performed
manually.
6
Huawei Confidential
Mechanized
warehousing
Mechanical equipment
(such as transport
vehicles, robotic arms,
and lifters) is manually
operated to transport,
store, and manage
goods.
Automated
warehousing
AGVs, automatic
shelves, and automatic
identification and
sorting technologies
are widely applied to
transport and manage
goods.
On the basis of
automated
warehousing, modern
application software,
Internet, and IoT
technologies are used
for intelligent
warehousing control.
Challenges of Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Complex environments
•
•
•
In shop floor and warehouse
•
The number of PLC-based
AGV roaming
•
AGVs are widely used in shop
scenarios, the floor height is
smart devices and sensors is
floor and warehouse
high, making WLAN
greatly increasing in pace
scenarios. High requirements
deployment difficult.
with the Industry 4.0 era. As
are imposed on WLAN
Production device, shelves,
such, WLANs need to support
quality (such as latency and
and goods severely block
concurrent access of a large
packet loss rate) to prevent
signals.
number of terminals while
Some production devices
ensuring reliability.
may interfere with Wi-Fi
signals.
7
IoT device access
Huawei Confidential
•
AGV suspension or stop.
•
AGVs frequently roam when
There are various types of
they are moving, which has
terminals and high
high requirements on
compatibility requirements.
roaming quality.
Contents
8
1.
Introduction to Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in Shop Floor and Warehouse
Scenarios
Requirements collection
⚫

Requirements collection
Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide basis
for WLAN design.
Site survey
⚫

Site survey
Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height, shelf
height, interference sources, and obstacles.
Device selection
⚫

Device selection
Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Coverage design
⚫

Determine the coverage range and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
Coverage design
positions.
Capacity design
⚫

9
Estimate the number of APs based on the number of access STAs and service requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in Shop Floor and Warehouse
Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Coverage area
Determine the VIP coverage areas (such as shop floors, shelf areas of warehouses, and AGV areas), common coverage areas
(such as office areas and goods acceptance areas), and simple coverage areas (such as corridors and restrooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls, 12 mm glass, and 240 mm concrete walls.
Device and shelf heights
Collect device and shelf heights, distribution, and goods stacking types.
Types and number of STAs
Determine the types and number of access STAs in a coverage area.
Bandwidth
Power supply mode
Switch location
Interference source
10
Huawei Confidential
Determine the main service types and per-user bandwidth requirement.
Determine the power supply mode as well as the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Determine the locations of upstream switches and check whether the PoE power supply distance meets the requirements.
Check whether there are interference sources such as Bluetooth devices and external Wi-Fi devices.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Description
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Floor height
The floor height of a shop floor or warehouse ranges from 3 m to 12 m. Use a rangefinder to measure the
floor height and record the result. In a warehouse scenario, you also need to measure the heights of shelves.
Interference source
Check whether there are interference sources, for example, mobile hotspots, Wi-Fi devices of other vendors,
and non-Wi-Fi devices (such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether obstacles at the site are consistent with those on the drawings. If not, mark the inconsistent
areas and take photos. For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation
values of the partitions on the drawings.
Site photos
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
AP installation mode
and position
Determine the AP installation modes (ceiling mounting, wall mounting, etc.) and positions.
ELV room locations
Mark the locations of ELV rooms where switches are to be deployed on the drawings.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE cables to be routed on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be less
than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on latency, in-roaming packet loss rate,
and concurrency rate in special areas.
11
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger access
capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support omnidirectional
and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be installed
at high places.
Maximum transmit
power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer to
the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country
Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain
based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply modes vary according to the deployment scenarios. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other scenarios,
the DC power supply can be used, or both power supply modes can be used together for mutual backup. Ensure that the power
consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6
standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example: As the Internet of Things (IoT) comes into widespread use, deploying an IoT network independently will cause
repeated cabling, separate management and O&M, and high hardware and O&M investment. Therefore, it is recommended that
IoT scalability be considered when you select Wi-Fi APs.
12
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios (1/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 6760-X1E
AirEngine 6760-X1
MIMO
4+8/4+4+4/
4+6+independent scanning
4+8/4+4+4/
4+6+independent scanning
Appearance
Antenna
External antennas
Built-in dual-radio or triple-radio omnidirectional antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
26 dBm/29 dBm
26 dBm/29 dBm
Antenna Gain
/
4.5 dBi/6 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
39.9 W (excluding USB)
39.9 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3bt)
PoE (802.3bt)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Shop floors, warehouses, or AGV areas with a floor height
of more than 6 m
Shop floors, warehouses, or AGV areas with a floor height
of less than 6 m
13
Huawei Confidential
• The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios (2/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 6761-21E
AirEngine 6761-21
AirEngine 5761-21
Appearance
MIMO
4+4
4+4
2+4
Antenna
External antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Built-in dual-radio omnidirectional
antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
26 dBm/26 dBm
26 dBm/26 dBm
25 dBm/28 dBm
Antenna Gain
/
4.5 dBi/5.5 dBi
4 dBi/5 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
22.6 W (excluding USB)
22.6 W (excluding USB)
17.9 W (excluding USB)
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, USB, IoT, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, USB, IoT, BLE
5.0
Recommended Scenario
Shop floors, warehouses, or AGV areas
with a floor height of more than 6 m
Shop floors, warehouses, or AGV areas
with a floor height of less than 6 m
Shop floors, warehouses, or AGV areas
with a floor height of less than 6 m
14
Huawei Confidential
• The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
APs in Shop Floors and Warehouses with Harsh Environments
AP Model
AirEngine 5761R-11
AirEngine 5761R-11E
AirEngine 6760R-51
AirEngine 6760R-51E
MIMO
2+2
Antenna
Built-in directional antennas
2.4 GHz: 65°_40°
5 GHz: 65°_20°
2+2
4+4
4+4
External antennas
Built-in directional antennas
2.4 GHz: 60°_40°
5 GHz: 60°_20°
External antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
28 dBm/27 dBm
28 dBm/27 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
Antenna Gain
Maximum Power
Consumption
10 dBi/11 dBi
/
10 dBi/11 dBi
/
17.7 W
19.6 W
35.3 W
35.3 W
PoE (802.3at/bt)
Appearance
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/af)
PoE (802.3at/bt)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, flexible radio
switching, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE
5.0
Wi-Fi 6, BLE 5.0
Recommended Scenario
Scenarios with high
requirements on AP
protection, such as high- and
low-temperature scenarios
and corrosion-prone scenarios
Scenarios with high
requirements on AP
protection, such as high- and
low-temperature scenarios
and corrosion-prone scenarios
Scenarios with high
requirements on AP
protection, such as high- and
low-temperature scenarios
and corrosion-prone scenarios
Scenarios with high
requirements on AP
protection, such as high- and
low-temperature scenarios
and corrosion-prone scenarios
15
Huawei Confidential
• The table lists only some common AP models. For details about other AP models,
see the product documentation.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27013720
27012565
Model
ANTDG0808D4NR
ANTDG1211D4NR
Antenna Type
Directional
Directional
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
8 dBi/8 dBi
12 dBi/11 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Vertical Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
70°/70°
35°/26°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
40 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm
40 mm x 450 mm x 420 mm
Connector Type
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
Remarks
AGV area with a floor height of higher than 6 m
Passageways between shelves
Note: The antenna models above can be used by the APs with external directional antennas mentioned on the previous page.
16
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
AP supporting external
directional antennas
AP with omnidirectional
antennas
Precautions for Coverage Design in Shop Floor and
Warehouse Scenarios
17
Huawei Confidential
⚫
APs can be mounted on the ceiling (at a height of no more than 6 m) or on walls (at a height of
about 3 m).
⚫
Shop floors and warehouses are semi-open scenarios. Assuming that the edge field strength is –
65 dBm, the maximum coverage distance at 2.4 GHz is 35 m, and that at 5 GHz is 15 m.
⚫
When planning APs in a sub-scenario, consider factors such as obstacles and the number of access
STAs. For details about the AP deployment spacing, see the WLAN construction standards.
⚫
When an AP is installed on a load-bearing pillar or wall, assume that signals at the rear of the AP
are completely blocked.
⚫
Recommended AP model: AirEngine 6760-X1E or AirEngine 6761-21E
⚫
⚫
In shop floors and AGV areas with a floor height of more than 6 m, 70 ° directional antennas are
recommended. Install antennas vertically to provide downward coverage at a height ranging from
6 m to 12 m, with a coverage radius ranging from 10 m to 15 m.
It is recommended that 35° directional antennas be used for covering passageways between
shelves. The installation height ranges from 3 m to 5 m, and the coverage length is 70 m.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in Shop Floor and
Warehouse Scenarios
Service Type
PLC
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Proportion of Services
in Shop Floor Scenarios
Proportion of Services in Warehouse Scenarios
Excellent
Good
Shop Floor
Shelf Area
AGV Area
0.512
0.256
30%
0%
0%
Handheld PDA
8
4
20%
0%
0%
AGV
0.512
0.256
10%
0%
50%
Barcode scanner
0.512
0.256
20%
70%
20%
Web browsing
8
4
10%
10%
10%
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
5%
10%
10%
VoIP
0.256
0.128
5%
10%
10%
3
2
2
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario (Excellent, in Mbps)
* Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
18
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

Two hundred STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, services are running on only 60 STAs concurrently. When
both APs and STAs comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30
STAs (2x2 MIMO). Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
19
Huawei Confidential
Contents
20
1.
Introduction to Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Shop Floor and Warehouse Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Sub-scenarios of Shop Floors and Warehouses
21
Shop floor
High-shelf area in a warehouse
Low-shelf area in a warehouse
AGV area
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for Shop Floors
Scenario description
⚫
⚫
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: handheld PDA, PLC, barcode scanner, AGV, etc.
Floor height: < 6 m for a common shop floor; 6–12 m for an
atrium shop floor
Service characteristics: low bandwidth, frequent roamings, and
sensitivity to delay and packet loss
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 4
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 50 STAs on a single AP, 40% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
WLAN Planning Solution
Rod mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
Beam mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
Common shop
floor (floor
height < 6 m)
Low
Low
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Atrium shop
floor (floor
height: 6–12 m)
Low
Low
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas
connected, supporting 2+4
or higher spatial streams
22
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Shop Floors
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
⚫
If the height of a floor shop is less than 6 m, deploy indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas along passageways at a
spacing of 20 m to 25 m. The rod mounting mode is recommended to reduce the installation height and reduce signal
blocking caused by cable trays.
If the height of a floor shop ranges from 6 m to 12 m, deploy indoor APs with external 70 ° directional antennas connected in
W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 20 m to 25 m. The beam mounting mode is recommended.
Keep APs more than 2 m away from load-bearing pillars.
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
Production
line
20–25 m
Solution A: APs with omnidirectional antennas
(floor height < 6 m)
23
Huawei Confidential
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
Solution B: APs with directional antennas
(floor height: 6–12 m)
WLAN Construction Standards for High-Shelf Areas
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service types: barcode scanning using handheld PDAs or barcode
scanners
⚫
Shelf height: 3–12 m
⚫
Service characteristics: low bandwidth, frequent roamings, and
sensitivity to latency and packet loss
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 2
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 50 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario and
Solution
Aesthetics
Capacity
Solution A for
high-shelf
scenarios
Low
Solution B for
high-shelf
scenarios
Low
24
Huawei Confidential
Coverage
Recommended AP
Type
Installation
Mode
WLAN Planning Solution
Low
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional
antennas
Ceiling
mounting or
rod mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing
of around 45 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE20 @ 5 GHz
Low
High
Indoor AP with
external directional
antennas connected
Wall
mounting or
rod mounting
Deploy APs and antennas at both ends of a
passageway to provide coverage for the
passageway.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE20 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for High-Shelf Areas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Solution A: Mount APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas on the ceiling. The AP height is less than 12 m, and the spacing
between APs in a single passageway is about 45 m.
⚫
Solution B: Install APs with external directional antennas at both ends of a passageway. It is recommended that the APs be
installed at a height of 3 m to 5 m. A single AP can cover one or two passageways, depending on the AP model.
AP
Antenna
45 m
45 m
45 m
High-shelf solution A: APs with
omnidirectional antennas
25
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
70 m
High-shelf solution B: APs with directional antennas
Huawei Confidential
• You can select either of the preceding solutions based on the site requirements.
WLAN Construction Standards for Low-Shelf Areas
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
Service types: barcode scanning using handheld PDAs or barcode
scanners
⚫
Shelf height: around 2 m
⚫
Service characteristics: low bandwidth, frequent roamings, and
sensitivity to latency and packet loss
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 2
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 50 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
WLAN Planning Solution
Low-shelf
area
Low
Low
High
AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
Ceiling or rod
mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at
an equal spacing of around 30 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE40 @ 5 GHz
26
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Low-Shelf Areas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
The height of a low shelf is about 2 m, and the height of an AP is less than 6 m. Deploy APs with built-in omnidirectional
antennas in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 30 m on the ceiling.
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
Low-shelf scenario (APs with omnidirectional
antennas mounted on the ceiling)
27
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for AGV Areas
Scenario description
⚫
Service type: AGV data transmission
⚫
Floor height: 3–12 m
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service characteristics: low bandwidth, frequent roamings, and
sensitivity to latency and packet loss
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
WLAN Planning Solution
AP height <
6m
Low
Low
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
AP height:
6–12 m
Low
Low
High
Indoor AP with external
directional antennas
connected
Ceiling or rod
mounting
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an
equal spacing of 20–25 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
28
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for AGV Areas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
At an AP height of less than 6 m, deploy APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of
20–25 m on the ceiling.
⚫
At an AP height of 6–12 m, deploy AirEngine 6761-21E APs with external 70° directional antennas connected in W-shaped
mode at an equal spacing of 20–25 m on the ceiling.
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
Production
line
20–25 m
Solution A: AP with omnidirectional antennas
(at a height of less than 6 m)
29
Huawei Confidential
20–25 m
20–25 m
20–25 m
Solution B: AP with directional antennas
(at a height of 6–12 m)
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following statements are true about WLAN
planning for a warehouse scenario? (
)
A. APs with omnidirectional antennas can be used for coverage in the low-shelf area of the
warehouse.
B. APs with directional antennas can be used for coverage in the high-shelf area of the warehouse.
C. AGVs in the warehouse do not have high requirements on the WLAN packet loss rate.
D. AGVs in the warehouse have high requirements on the WLAN roaming delay.
30
Huawei Confidential
1. ABD
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of each sub-scenario in the shop floor and
warehouse scenario, including the shop floor, high-/low-shelf area, and AGV area. WLAN
construction standards and planning rules vary according to sub-scenarios and relevant
WLAN planning solutions are different as well. This course also provides suggestions on
WLAN planning and deployment for common shop floor and warehouse sub-scenarios,
facilitating WLAN solution design in WLAN projects relating to these scenarios.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods for each sub-scenario.
31
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
32
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Outdoor Coverage
Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
The development of wireless communications has made interconnections between smart
terminals and people closer than ever. As indoor wireless coverage only cannot meet user
requirements, outdoor wireless coverage is also required more and more.
⚫
This course describes WLAN service characteristics of outdoor coverage scenarios, as well as
methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand common service types and challenges in outdoor coverage scenarios.

Master WLAN planning methods for outdoor coverage scenarios.

Master WLAN deployment solutions for outdoor coverage scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
The outdoor coverage environment is complex. Therefore, a proper network planning solution needs to be formulated based on the
⚫
actual situation. The outdoor coverage has the following characteristics:

STAs: STAs mainly include mobile phones, tablets, and laptops which feature diversity and high mobility, and require high compatibility.

Space: Outdoor scenarios typically involve large WLAN coverage areas, including squares and streets.

Obstacles: Major obstacles in outdoor scenarios include buildings and trees.

Other: In some areas, the operating environment for devices is harsh. Therefore, waterproof, dustproof, surge protection, and high and low
temperature resistance requirements must be considered.
Outdoor square
5
Huawei Confidential
Outdoor street
Challenges to WLANs in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Large coverage area
•
•
In outdoor scenarios, WLANs
typically provide large signal
Complex environments
•
Environments in outdoor
scenarios are complex with
•
Many uncontrollable factors exist
in outdoor scenarios, such as
coverage and a single AP is
different building layouts, and
non-Wi-Fi interference,
connected to a great number of
STAs, thereby imposing high
various obstacles, such as trees
and large billboards. AP
temporary personal hotspots, and
weather. These factors cause
requirements on AP performance.
deployment positions are critical
interference to WLANs, thereby
In addition, if a temporary
and need to be determined based
on local conditions. As a result,
reducing WLAN stability and
performance.
outdoor activity is held, burst
WLAN planning and design are
difficult.
traffic is generated. In this case,
additional APs need to be added
temporarily to the existing WLAN
to improve the concurrency
capability.
•
Outdoor APs with external
directional antennas are typically
used, which increases the
difficulty in AP installation.
6
Much interference
Huawei Confidential
Contents
7
1.
Introduction to Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process for Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Requirements collection
⚫

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement
Requirements collection
information to provide basis for WLAN design.
Site survey
⚫

Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such
Site survey
as the floor height, interference sources, and obstacles.
Device selection
⚫

Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the
Device selection
collected information.
Coverage design
⚫

Determine the coverage area and field strength requirements, and
plan AP deployment positions.
Coverage design
Capacity design
⚫

Estimate the number of needed APs based on the number of access
STAs and service requirements.
8
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Collecting Requirements for Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Requirement Type
Description
Drawing information
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format, and learn
about the general environment of the coverage area in advance.
Coverage area
Determine the VIP coverage areas (such as pedestrian streets and squares) and common coverage
areas (such as passages between buildings) required by the customer.
Field strength
Determine requirements for the signal field strength in the coverage area. Generally, the signal field
strength in outdoor VIP coverage areas is greater than or equal to –65 dBm, and that in common areas
is greater than or equal to –70 dBm.
Access STAs
Determine the types and number of access STAs in the coverage area.
Bandwidth requirements
Buildings and trees
Determine the main types of network services and per-user bandwidth requirement.
Determine and record the layout of buildings and trees in the coverage area.
Installation positions and
power supply modes
Determine the positions where APs can be installed, such as lamp poles or walls, and determine the
available power supply facilities and areas.
Switch positions
Determine the locations of the uplink wired-side switches on the WLANs and check whether the PoE
power supply distance meets the requirements.
Interference sources
Check whether interference sources such as city monitoring based on wireless backhaul and microwave
stations exist.
9
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Environment
Description
Obtain the environment information of the coverage area, such as the layout of surrounding buildings,
trees, obstacles, and streets.
AP installation position
Check the installation positions of APs, such as high buildings, street lamp poles, and surveillance poles.
Measure the height of the installation positions to check whether optical cables and power supplies can be
connected.
If proper installation positions do not exist, consider whether poles can be erected for AP installation.
Interference sources
Check whether there is interference caused by, for example, wireless backhaul, third-party Wi-Fi devices,
and non-Wi-Fi devices.
New obstacles
Check whether the site is consistent with that on the floor plans and maps. If not, mark the inconsistent
areas and take photos. For example, if there are obstacles such as trees onsite, mark the positions on the
drawings.
Site photos
AP installation methods
Switch positions
Power supply cabling
10
Huawei Confidential
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
Outdoor APs are usually installed on poles or walls.
Determine the positions of the uplink switches and mark them on the drawings.
Mark PoE cables to be routed on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be less
than or equal to 80 m.
It is recommended that the PoE adapter be used for power supply when the outdoor distance is too long.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Model Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher
throughput and larger access capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams
based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Outdoor APs support omnidirectional and directional antennas.
APs with omnidirectional antennas are recommended for coverage in open areas such as squares and
parks. APs with directional antennas are recommended for coverage in narrow areas such as streets.
Maximum transmit power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the
transmit power gets closer to the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the
coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country Codes and Channels Compliance in the product
documentation.
Antenna gain
11
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select
antennas with a proper gain based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply mode depends on the deployment scenario. It is recommended that the PoE adapter
be used for power supply when the outdoor distance is long.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier
ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6 standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs
are recommended.
Other features
In outdoor scenarios, pay attention to special requirements for APs, such as waterproof and dustproof
capabilities, operating temperature range, and surge protection.
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
AP Model
AirEngine 8760R-X1 AirEngine 8760R-X1E AirEngine 6760R-51 AirEngine 6760R-51E AirEngine 5761R-11 AirEngine 5761R-11E
Appearance
Antenna
Built-in directional
antennas
External antennas
Built-in directional
antennas
External antennas
Built-in directional
antennas
External antennas
MIMO
4+12/8+8/
4+8+independent
scanning
4+12/8+8/
4+8+independent
scanning
4+4
4+4
2+2
2+2
2.4 GHz Beamwidth
(H/V)
180°/40°
/
60°/40°
/
65°/40°
/
5 GHz Beamwidth (H/V)
180°/20°
/
60°/20°
/
65°/20°
/
Maximum Power
Consumption
53.2 W (excluding
PoE_OUT)
53.2 W (excluding
PoE_OUT)
35.3 W
35.3 W
17.7 W
19.6 W
RF port
/
Type N female
connector
/
Type N female
connector
/
Type N female
connector
Installation Mode
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Other Features
IP68 waterproof and
IP68 waterproof and IP68 waterproof and IP68 waterproof and IP68 waterproof and IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, smart
dustproof, BLE 5.0
dustproof, BLE 5.0
dustproof, BLE 5.0
dustproof, BLE 5.0
dustproof, BLE 5.0
antenna, and BLE 5.0
Note: The table lists some AP models. For details about other models, see the product documentation.
12
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27013721
27012565
27013720
27010904
27011145
Model
ANTDG0407A1NS
ANTDG1211D4NR
ANTDG0808D4NR
AD24145D00
AD5G1915
Antenna Type
Omnidirectional
Directional
Directional
Directional
Directional
Radio
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
2.4G
5G
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz, dBi)
4/7
12/11
8/8
14
19
Horizontal Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
360/360
35/35
70/70
30/-
-/15
Vertical Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
30/15
26/26
70/70
30/-
-/15
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Diameter x Length:
23.8 mm x 235 mm
40 mm x 450 mm x
420 mm
40 mm x 220 mm x
220 mm
25 mm x 250 mm x
250 mm
30 mm x 450 mm x
245 mm
Connector Type
1 x Type N female
connector (vertically
polarized)
4 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
4 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
2 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
2 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
Note: The antennas listed on the table are used for AP models with external antennas.
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Precautions for Coverage Design in Outdoor Scenarios
⚫
In outdoor scenarios, APs are usually installed on poles or walls. It is recommended that APs and antennas be installed at a height of
3 m to 5 m.
⚫
In typical outdoor open areas (such as squares and parks), APs with external omnidirectional antennas connected are recommended.
The coverage radius of a single AP ranges from 60 m to 80 m, and the distance between APs ranges from 100 m to 120 m equally in
W-shaped mode.
⚫
APs with built-in directional antennas or APs with external directional antennas connected are recommended in typical long and
narrow outdoor areas (such as pedestrian streets and long parking lots). The coverage distance of 120 m is recommended, and the
maximum coverage distance cannot exceed 150 m. In single-side deployment, the coverage width of about 20 m is recommended,
and the maximum coverage width cannot exceed 35 m for common APs. If AirEngine8760R-X1 is used, the coverage width of about
35 m is recommended and the maximum coverage width cannot exceed 60 m. (without EIRP restriction by default)
Coverage width
Coverage distance: 120 m
AP with directional antennas
14
Huawei Confidential
• Outdoor APs are used only for outdoor coverage and indoor APs are required for
indoor coverage.
• Outdoor omnidirectional whip antennas must be installed vertically (the
antennas must be vertical to the ground).
• Directional APs or directional antennas are recommended for roads around
buildings, and coverage in the same direction is recommended.
• Outdoor APs must not be blocked by obstacles such as trees, buildings, and
billboards, and must be far away from interference sources.
• Signals along the roads may be blocked by trees. It is recommended that the APs
be installed on the surveillance poles.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in Outdoor
Coverage Scenarios
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Proportion of Services
Service Type
Excellent
Good
Square
Street
Outdoor Parking Lot
Web browsing
8
4
50%
60%
35%
Streaming media
(1080p)
16
12
10%
10%
20%
VoIP
0.25
0.125
10%
10%
0%
Gaming
2
1
10%
0%
30%
Instant messaging
0.5
0.25
20%
20%
15%
6
8
8
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario (Excellent, in Mbps)
Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
15
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise that the
coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

Two hundred STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, services are running on only 60 STAs concurrently. When
both APs and STAs comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4 MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30
STAs (2x2 MIMO). Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at different
bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of
Concurrent STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
16
Huawei Confidential
Contents
17
1.
Introduction to Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Sub-scenarios in Outdoor Coverage Scenarios
18
Huawei Confidential
Square
Park
Street
Parking lot
WLAN Construction Standards for Square and Park Scenarios
Scenario description
⚫
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
User density: about 1 per 50–100 square meters in peak hours
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 6
Mbps
Capacity KPI: 120 STAs on a single AP, 25% concurrency rate
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –70 dBm
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Recommended AP Type
Installation
Mode
Deployment Solution
Large
Outdoor AP with
external
omnidirectional
antennas
Polemounted
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an equal spacing of 120 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE20 or HE40 @ 5 GHz
Large
Outdoor APs with builtin directional antennas
or with external
directional antennas
Polemounted
Common APs are deployed at an equal distance of 20-30 m.
AirEngine8760R-X1 APs are deployed at an equal spacing of
35 m to 50 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE20 or HE40 @ 5 GHz
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Squares and
parks (planeshaped
deployment)
Medium
Medium
Squares and
parks
(single-side
deployment)
Medium
Medium
19
Huawei Confidential
Deployment Solutions for Squares and Parks
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
In squares and parks with large areas and many available locations, outdoor APs with external omnidirectional antennas connected can be used
with a distance of no more than 120 m.
⚫
When squares and parks are rectangular (width < 120 m), APs can be deployed on one side. When APs with built-in directional antennas are used,
the distance between APs is 20 m to 30 m. When AirEngine 8760R-X1 models are used, the distance between APs is 35 m to 50 m. In single-side
deployment mode, it is recommended that the AP coverage distance be within 120 m.
⚫
If there are EIRP restrictions, evaluate the coverage distance based on the local restrictions of different country or region codes.
120 m
120 m
120 m
120 m
Solution A: Plane-shaped deployment
20
Huawei Confidential
Width < 120 m
35–50 m
35–50 m
Solution B: Single-side deployment (AirEngine 8760R-X1)
WLAN Construction Standards for Street Scenarios
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
User density: about 1 per 10–20 square meters in peak hours
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 6
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 100 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –70 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
21
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Street
Medium
Medium
Large
Outdoor APs with built-in
directional antennas or
with external directional
antennas
Pole-mounted or
wall-mounted
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of
100 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 or HE40 @ 5 GHz
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Street Scenarios
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
APs with directional antennas are used to cover streets to reduce radio interference to buildings on both sides of the streets.
The distance between APs is about 100 m. Adjust the antenna angle to cover streets.
⚫
APs with built-in directional antennas are aesthetically pleasing and easy to deploy. The antennas do not need to be installed
but cannot be replaced and be used in complex scenarios. APs with external directional antennas connected can be flexibly
used in various complex scenarios.
100 m
100 m
100 m
Coverage area
Street
Street scenario
22
Huawei Confidential
100 m
WLAN Construction Standards for Outdoor Parking Lot
Scenarios
Scenario description
⚫
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
User density: about 1 per 100–200 square meters in peak hours
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 8
Mbps
Capacity KPI: 60 STAs on a single AP, 50% concurrency rate
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –70 dBm
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Deploy APs in W-shaped mode at an equal
spacing of 120 m.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE20
or HE40 @ 5 GHz
Parking lot without
surrounding
buildings
Low
Medium
Medium
Outdoor AP with external
omnidirectional antennas
Pole-mounted
Parking lot with
surrounding
buildings
Low
Medium
Medium
Outdoor APs with built-in
directional antennas or with
external directional antennas
Deploy APs at an equal spacing of 100 m.
Pole-mounted or
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz, HE20
wall-mounted
or HE40 @ 5 GHz
23
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Outdoor Parking Lots
Without Surrounding Buildings
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
If there are no buildings around an outdoor parking lot, outdoor APs with external omnidirectional antennas connected can be
installed on poles with an equal spacing of about 120 m in W-shaped mode.
⚫
APs must be installed away from obstacles, such as trees and walls. Existing street lamp poles and surveillance poles, or new
erected poles can be used for AP installation.
120 m
120 m
120 m
24
Huawei Confidential
...
...
120 m
120 m
120 m
120 m
WLAN Deployment Solution for Outdoor Parking Lots With
Surrounding Buildings
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
If there are buildings around an outdoor parking lot, APs with directional antennas can be installed on poles with an equal
spacing of 100 m to reduce interference to indoor areas.
⚫
APs must be installed away from obstacles, such as trees and walls. Existing street lamp poles and surveillance poles, or new
erected poles can be used for AP installation. APs can also be installed on walls if conditions permit.
100 m
Coverage area
Building
Coverage area
100 m
25
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1.
(Multiple-Answer Question) Which of the following types of antennas are recommended
for wireless coverage in long and narrow outdoor areas (such as pedestrian streets and
long parking lots)? (
)
A. Built-in directional antennas
B. External directional antennas
C. Built-in omnidirectional antennas
D. External omnidirectional antennas
26
1. AB
Huawei Confidential
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of each sub-scenario in outdoor coverage scenarios,
including squares, parks, streets, and parking lots. WLAN construction standards and
planning rules vary according to sub-scenarios and relevant WLAN planning solutions are
different as well. This course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and deployment
for common outdoor coverage sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in WLAN
projects relating to outdoor coverage scenarios.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods for each sub-scenario.
27
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
28
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright © 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
In some harsh environments facing difficult wired network construction and high costs,
wireless backhaul becomes the optimal choice for fast network connectivity. Among wireless
solutions, Wi-Fi has advantages such as proper bandwidth, long backhaul distance, and low
costs. These make Wi-Fi the best way to carry the last mile of the video security network.
⚫
This course describes WLAN service characteristics of outdoor backhaul scenarios, as well as
methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common services, characteristics, and challenges in outdoor backhaul scenarios.

Understand AP and antenna selection policies in outdoor backhaul scenarios.

Understand how to calculate the mesh link bandwidth in outdoor backhaul scenarios.

Describe the WLAN planning process in outdoor backhaul scenarios.

Master WLAN deployment solutions for outdoor backhaul scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Wireless backhaul refers to the wireless bridging between APs in mesh networking. It allows wireless local area
⚫
networks (WLANs) to be constructed in places where optical fibers and network cables are unavailable.
Outdoor backhaul scenarios have the following characteristics:
⚫

In open outdoor scenarios, bridge APs can reach each other in line of sight (LOS) mode without obstacles between.

The networking is flexible. You can select the point-to-point (P2P) or point-to-multipoint (P2MP) networking scheme based on
the site requirements.
Port
5
Huawei Confidential
Oil field
Challenges in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
High network quality
requirements
Complex environments
•
•
Outdoor backhaul can be used in
multiple industries, involving
backhaul. As the number and
difficult deployment.
definition of cameras increase,
higher bandwidth is required for
There may be irresistible
backhaul links.
•
Outdoor backhaul uses the mesh
networking architecture, which is
flexible and has high technical
requirements.
•
Due to the complex environment,
Services such as voice and real-
high requirements are imposed
on engineers in terms of
links, affecting the backhaul
time control also have high
device/antenna selection and
function.
requirements on network quality,
such as low delay and low jitter.
antenna alignment.
Uncontrollable interference
factors may exist in outdoor
environments, affecting backhaul
signals.
6
A common type of service in
outdoor backhaul is video
complex environments and
obstacles (such as buildings and
mountains) on the backhaul
•
•
High deployment requirements
Huawei Confidential
•
Contents
7
1.
Introduction to Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Requirements collection
⚫

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide
Requirements collection
basis for WLAN design.
Site survey
⚫

Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the backhaul
Site survey
distance, AP positions, and obstacles.
Link design
⚫

Link design
Determine the mesh network topology, such as P2P or P2MP.
Device selection
⚫

Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Device selection
Bandwidth design
⚫

Determine the backhaul link bandwidth based on the device model, coverage distance,
and service requirements.
8
Huawei Confidential
Bandwidth design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Requirements Collection in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Requirement Type
Description
Drawing information
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format. Learn
about the general environment of the coverage area and deployment area in advance.
Coverage area
Determine the coverage area required by the current scenario.
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in the coverage area.
Access STAs
Determine the types and number of access STAs in the coverage area.
Bandwidth
Determine the main types of network services and per-user bandwidth requirement.
Buildings and trees
Determine and record the layout of buildings and trees in the coverage area, and check whether
there are obvious obstacles in the signal propagation path.
Installation position and
power supply mode
Determine the positions where APs can be installed, and determine the available power supply
facilities and areas.
Switch location
Determine the locations of upstream switches and check whether the PoE power supply distance
meets the requirements.
Interference source
Other
9
Huawei Confidential
Check whether there are other interference sources.
Check whether there are restrictions on outdoor site construction, for example, whether outdoor
sites can be deployed on the rooftop of a building.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Site Survey in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Description
Environment
Check whether there are obvious obstacles on the propagation path between the MPP and MP, such as
high-rise buildings, mountains, and trees. Mark the location and size information on the drawing.
AP installation position
Check the installation positions of APs, such as high buildings, street lamp poles, and monitoring poles.
Measure the heights of these positions and check whether optical cables and power supplies can be
connected.
If no installation condition is available, check whether new poles can be installed.
Interference source
Check whether there are interference sources, for example, wireless backhaul, Wi-Fi devices of other
vendors, and non-Wi-Fi devices.
New obstacles
Site photos
AP installation mode
Switch location
10
Check whether the site is consistent with that on the floor plans and maps. If not, mark the inconsistent
areas and take photos. For example, if there are new obstacles onsite (such as trees), mark the
positions of the obstacles on the drawings.
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
Outdoor APs are usually installed on poles or walls.
Determine the locations of uplink switches and mark them on the drawings.
Power supply cabling
Mark the PoE power supply cabling on the drawings. A PoE adapter is recommended for power supply
if the outdoor distance is long.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as network delay requirements, packet loss rate
requirements, and site construction restrictions.
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Site Construction Rules
⚫
Install APs (also called sites) far away from strong-current and strong-magnetic areas, such as radar stations and
high-voltage substations.
⚫
Scan Wi-Fi interference channels near a site. Do not configure backhaul channels the same as interference
channels, or disable interference sources through coordination.
⚫
If obstacles exist on the backhaul path, the AP pole height equals the obstacle height plus the Fresnel radius.
AP1
Fresnel zone
Backhaul distance (d)
AP2
Backhaul Distance d (km)
1
2
3
4
5
Fresnel Radius r (m)
(Rounded Up)
4
6
7
8
9
Fresnel radius (r)
Obstacle height
* Take the 5 GHz frequency band as an example.
11
Huawei Confidential
• If the Fresnel zone is blocked by obstacles, the actual bandwidth is calculated as
follows: Actual bandwidth = Theoretical bandwidth without obstacles x [1 –
(Blocked length of the Fresnel zone/2r)], where r indicates the radius of the
Fresnel zone.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Backhaul Link Design
P2P backhaul
•
P2MP backhaul
Each mesh point portal (MPP) establishes a backhaul link with
only one mesh point (MP).
•
One MP exclusively uses backhaul link bandwidth, providing
high throughput.
•
The P2P transmission distance should not exceed 5 km.
•
Each MPP establishes backhaul links with multiple MPs.
•
Multiple MPs share backhaul link bandwidth, providing low
throughput.
•
If the MPP-MP distance is less than or equal to 1 km, it is
recommended that an MPP connect to six MPs at most.
•
If the MPP-MP distance ranges from 1 km to 3 km, it is
recommended that an MPP connect to three MPs at most.
•
If the MPP-MP distance exceeds 3 km, P2MP transmission is
not recommended.
MP1
Backhaul link 1
MPP
Backhaul link
MP
MPP
MP2
Backhaul link 2
P2P backhaul
12
P2MP backhaul
Huawei Confidential
• The backhaul distance varies according to the version, model, and antenna
model. During project implementation, select the P2P or P2MP backhaul mode
based on the site requirements.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Channel Planning for Backhaul Links
⚫
Channel planning in outdoor backhaul scenarios must comply with local laws and regulations. Do not use radar channels.
⚫
The 2.4 GHz channels suffer from great interference. Therefore, the 5 GHz frequency band is recommended in backhaul scenarios.
⚫
In backhaul scenarios, the backhaul channels of the MPP and MP must be the same. For example, if the MPP uses channel 149, an
MP connected to the MPP must also use channel 149.
MP
Mesh link 1
Channel 149
MPP
Channel 149
Mesh link 2
MP
Channel 149
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput
and larger access capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the
application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Directional antennas are used for long-distance wireless backhaul. The main lobes of antennas on the MPP must
cover all MPs' antennas.
Omnidirectional antennas are used for short-distance wireless backhaul.
Maximum
transmit power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit
power gets closer to the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is
longer. For details, see the Country Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A larger antenna gain indicates stronger signals and a longer backhaul distance. However, a larger antenna gain
also indicates a smaller antenna angle and fewer MPs that can be covered by an MPP. Therefore, select proper
antennas based on specific scenarios.
Power supply
mode
The power supply modes vary according to the deployment scenarios. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In
other scenarios, the DC power supply can be used, or both power supply modes can be used together for mutual
backup. Ensure that the power consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The
latest Wi-Fi 6 standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
14
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Common APs in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios (1/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 8760R-X1
AirEngine 6760R-51
AirEngine 5761R-11
Appearance
MIMO
4+8
4+4
2+2
Antenna
Built-in directional antennas
Built-in directional antennas
Built-in directional antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
33 dBm/33 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
28 dBm/27 dBm
Antenna Gain
10 dBi/11 dBi
10 dBi/11 dBi
10 dBi/11 dBi
Maximum Power
Consumption
53.2 W (excluding PoE OUT)
35.3 W
17.7 W
Power Supply Mode
PoE (802.3bt)
PoE (802.3at/bt)
PoE (802.3at/af)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, smart antenna, BLE 5.0
* Note: The table lists some AP models. For details about other models, see the product documentation.
15
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Common APs in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios (2/2)
AP Model
AirEngine 8760R-X1E
AirEngine 6760R-51E
AirEngine 5761R-11E
8+8/4+4+4
4+4
2.4 GHz (2x2) + 5 GHz (2x2)
Or 5 GHz (2x2) + 5 GHz (2x2)
Antenna
External antennas
External antennas
External antennas
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
33 dBm/33 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
28 dBm/27 dBm
Antenna Gain
Depending on the antenna
Depending on the antenna
Depending on the antenna
Maximum Power
Consumption
53.2 W (excluding PoE OUT)
35.3 W
19.6 W
Appearance
MIMO
Power Supply Mode
PoE++ (802.3bt)
PoE++ (802.3bt)
PoE+ (802.3at)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, Ethernet port surge
protection, antenna surge protection,
BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, Ethernet port surge
protection, antenna surge protection,
BLE 5.0
Wi-Fi 6, IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, Ethernet port surge
protection, antenna surge protection,
BLE 5.0
* Note: The table lists some AP models. For details about other models, see the product documentation.
16
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Common Antennas in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27013721
27010904
27010906
27010889
27010890
Model
ANTDG0407A1NS
AD24145D00
AD515145D00
ASB115G00
ASB185G00
Antenna Type
External directional
antenna
External directional
antenna
External directional
antenna
External directional
antenna
Directional antenna
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
5 GHz
5 GHz
5 GHz
5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
12 dBi/7 dBi
-/14 dBi
-/14 dBi
-/11.5 dBi
-/19 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
360°/360°
-/30°
-/32°
-/60°
-/15°
Vertical Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
35°/15°
-/30°
-/32°
-/30°
-/15°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Diameter x Height:
23.8 mm x 235 mm
25 mm x 250 mm x
250 mm
25 mm x 220 mm x
120 mm
55 mm x 230 mm x
145 mm
25 mm x 250 mm x
250 mm
Connector Type
1 x Type N male
connector (singlepolarized)
2 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
2 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
2 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
2 x Type N female
connector (dualpolarized)
Remarks
Directly installed on
the AP
Pole mounting
Pole mounting
Pole mounting
Pole mounting
* Note: The antennas listed on the table are used for AP models with external antennas.
17
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Backhaul Antenna Selection Rules
⚫
If the MPP-MP distance is less than 500 m, the number of MPs is large, and the distribution angle is large, use omnidirectional
antennas for the MPP.
⚫
If the MPP-MP distance is greater than 500 m, the number of MPs is small, and the angles and directions are centralized, use
directional antennas for the MPP.
⚫
When directional antennas are used for the MPP, ensure that the main lobes of antennas on the MPP cover all MPs' antennas.
⚫
High-gain antennas are recommended for MPs to improve the signal strength. You only need to align MPs' antennas with the MPP's
antennas during installation.
MP1
MP2
MPP
MPP
Directional antennas
for the MPP
Omnidirectional
antennas for the MPP
MP3
18
Huawei Confidential
MP1
MP4
Long distance and centralized
MP distribution
MP2
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Antenna Alignment Method
Antenna azimuth measurement
•
•
•
19
Import a floor plan drawing to the
WLAN Planner. Use the ranging
function of the tool to measure the
azimuths from the MPP to MPs and
from the MPs to the MPP. (Note:
Ensure that the top of the drawing
directs to the due north.)
When there is only one MP, the
measurement result can be used as
the azimuth of the MPP and MP.
When there are multiple MPs, the
azimuth of the MPP is calculated as
follows:

Measure the azimuth from the
MPP to each MP and record the
maximum angle (X) and minimum
angle (Y).

When the difference between X
and Y is less than 180°: MPP
antenna angle = (X + Y)/2

When the difference between X
and Y is greater than 180°: MPP
antenna angle = (X + Y)/2 + 180°
Huawei Confidential
Preliminary alignment
•
•
Use a compass tool to adjust the MPP
antenna to the corresponding angle
based on the obtained MPP antenna
angle.
Based on the obtained MP antenna
angle, use the compass tool to adjust
the MP antenna to the corresponding
angle to align it with the MPP.
Fine-tuning
•
•
•
MP1
antenna
MPP
antenna
Lobe
MP2
antenna
Lobe
Lobe
Use the antenna alignment function of
the CloudCampus APP to fine-tune the
antenna angle.
Start the CloudCampus APP, connect
to the MP, fine-tune the MP antenna
angle, and observe the signal strength
change to find the angle when the
optimal signal is received.
In most cases, you only need to slightly
adjust the angle of the MP antenna to
align it with the MPP.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Bandwidth Design — P2P Scenario
⚫
In P2P scenarios, the actual bandwidth of a mesh link is related to the MIMO capability, antenna gain, backhaul
distance, frequency bandwidth, interference, and environment. Determine the backhaul link bandwidth based on
the device model, coverage distance, and service requirements.
Throughput Reference for P2P Backhaul Links (Wi-Fi 6, 5 GHz Backhaul, AirEngine 8700R or 6700R Series, 21 dBm)
MIMO
Antenna Gain
MPP
MP
7 dBi-360 deg 16 dBi-18 deg
4x4
11 dBi-60 deg 16 dBi-18 deg
16 dBi-18 deg 16 dBi-18 deg
HE40 RSSI & Throughput (Mbps)
HE80 RSSI & Throughput (Mbps)
100 m
200 m
500 m
1 km
100 m
200 m
500 m
1 km
–38 dBm
–46 dBm
–56 dBm
–64 dBm
–38 dBm
–46 dBm
–56 dBm
–64 dBm
270
240
200
160
550
500
380
250
–34 dBm
–42 dBm
–52 dBm
–60 dBm
–34 dBm
–42 dBm
–52 dBm
–60 dBm
270
250
240
180
550
500
420
380
–29 dBm
–37 dBm
–47 dBm
–55 dBm
–29 dBm
–37 dBm
–47 dBm
–55 dBm
270
270
240
240
550
550
500
420
* The preceding data is the bandwidth reference values for the AirEngine 8700R and AirEngine 6700R series working at the 21 dBm power in suburban
and rural areas. The EIRP restriction is not considered.
20
Huawei Confidential
• To estimate bandwidth at a transmission distance between two distance values
listed in the table, refer to the bandwidth value of the larger distance. For
example, to estimate bandwidth value at a distance of 400 m, refer to the
bandwidth value at a transmission distance of 500 m.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Link Design
Device Selection
Bandwidth Design
Bandwidth Design — P2MP Scenario
⚫
The throughput of P2MP transmission is multiplied by the throughput impact factor based on the P2P
transmission performance. The throughput impact factor is related to the MPP:MP ratio. The following table lists
the specific ratios.
Throughput Impact Factor
⚫
The following is an example of bandwidth calculation
in the P2MP scenario:
MPP:MP
MPP
MP
1:1
1
1
1:2
0.8
0.40
1:3
0.75
0.25

A video backhaul scenario uses the P2MP networking
topology, where one MPP sets up backhaul links with three
MPs. Assuming that the bandwidth of a P2P backhaul link is
320 Mbps, the P2MP bandwidth is calculated as follows:
⚫
1:4
0.7
0.18
1:5
0.65
0.13
1:6
0.6
0.10

MPP's total bandwidth = 320 x 0.75 = 240 Mbps

Bandwidth of each MP = 320 x 0.25 = 80 Mbps
If the bandwidth does not meet service requirements,
use high-bandwidth channels, shorten the mesh
backhaul distance, use high-gain antennas, or reduce
the MPP:MP ratio to increase the backhaul link
21
Huawei Confidential
bandwidth.
Contents
22
1.
Introduction to Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Sub-scenarios in Outdoor Backhaul Scenarios
23
Port (Quay crane)
Metal mine haulageway
Steel plant (Bridge crane)
Wind farm (Engineering vehicle inspection)
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Port Backhaul Scenarios (1/2)
Scenario description
Scenario
Typical Backhaul
Distance
Port (Quay
crane)
0.1–3 km
Service on the Mesh Network
Bandwidth
(Mbps)
2.4 GHz Number of STAs
Coverage Per Bridge Crane
Video security (720p and 1080p)
4–8
No
4
SMS (non-real-time control)
2
Yes
1
Bandwidth per
Number of
Bridge Crane Bridge Cranes
About 35 Mbps
≤ 20
Networking
Topology
P2MP
Recommended solution
Node
Type
Device Type
AP
MPP
Backhaul antenna
AP
MP
Product Model
Frequency
Bandwidth
Backhaul Throughput
MPP:MP = 1:3
MPP:MP = 1:6
187.5 Mbps
150 Mbps
62.5 Mbps
25 Mbps
Latency
Packet Loss
Rate
< 20 ms
< 0.1%
AirEngine 5761R-11E
27010906 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized directional
antenna (H32 V32 G14)
AirEngine 5761R-11E
Backhaul antenna
27010890 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized directional
antenna (H15 V15 G19)
Coverage antenna
27013721 outdoor 2.4 GHz & 5 GHz single-polarized
omnidirectional antenna (H360 V30 G4 & H360 V15 G7)
80 MHz
* The backhaul throughput in the table is calculated based on the P2P rate of 250 Mbps. The actual backhaul throughput is subject to the measurement result.
24
Huawei Confidential
• The quay crane is also called container crane on the shore. It is a professional
device for loading and unloading container ships and is usually installed on the
shore of a container terminal.
WLAN Deployment Solution for Port Backhaul Scenarios (2/2)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
In a port (quay crane) backhaul scenario, the MPP-MP distance is usually less than 3 km, and the P2MP networking topology is used.
⚫
An MPP is installed on a lamp pole and connects to an uplink switch through optical fibers or network cables. MPs are installed on the quay cranes to
provide wireless data backhaul and Internet access services for STAs.
⚫
Backhaul channel: HE80 @ 5 GHz; coverage channel: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz. Small-angle high-gain directional antennas are used as backhaul antennas, and
omnidirectional antennas are used as coverage antennas.
MP1
MPP
5 GHz backhaul antenna
2.4 GHz & 5 GHz
coverage antenna
25
Huawei Confidential
Distance ≤ 3 km, frequency bandwidth ≤ 80 MHz
MP2
MP3
Port (quay crane) backhaul deployment solution (P2MP)
WLAN Deployment Solution for Metal Mine Haulageway
Backhaul Scenarios (1/2)
Scenario description
Scenario
Typical Backhaul
Distance
Service on the Mesh Network
Metal mine
haulageway
10–200 m
Video backhaul of dashcams
Bandwidth 2.4 GHz Number of STAs
(Mbps)
Coverage
on Each Node
4
Yes
2
Bandwidth per
Node
Number of
Mining Vehicles
Networking
Topology
About 10 Mbps
≤ 20
P2MP
Recommended solution
Node Type
Device Type
AP
MPP
Backhaul antenna
AP
MP
Product Model
Frequency
Bandwidth
Backhaul Throughput
MPP:MP = 1:3
MPP:MP = 1:6
412.5 Mbps
330 Mbps
137.5 Mbps
55 Mbps
Latency
Packet Loss
Rate
< 20 ms
< 0.1%
AirEngine 5761R-11E
27010906 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized
directional antenna (H32 V32 G14)
AirEngine 5761R-11E
Backhaul antenna
27010890 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized
directional antenna (H15 V15 G19)
Coverage antenna
27010904 outdoor 2.4 GHz dual-polarized
directional antenna (H30 V30 G14)
80 MHz
* The backhaul throughput in the table is calculated based on the P2P rate of 550 Mbps. The actual backhaul throughput is subject to the measurement result.
26
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Metal Mine Haulageway
Backhaul Scenarios (2/2)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
⚫
In a metal mine haulageway backhaul scenario, the MPP-MP distance is generally less than 200 m, and the P2MP networking topology is used.
An MPP is installed on a wall and connects to an uplink switch through optical fibers or network cables. MPs are installed on the wall of the drivage
drift to provide wireless data backhaul and Internet access services for STAs.
Backhaul channel: HE80 @ 5 GHz; coverage channel: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz. Directional antennas are used for backhaul and coverage considering that the
haulageway space is narrow.
MP1
MPP
5 GHz backhaul antenna
2.4 GHz & 5 GHz
coverage antenna
27
Distance ≤ 200 m, frequency
bandwidth ≤ 80 MHz
MP2
MP3
Metal mine haulageway backhaul deployment solution (P2MP)
Huawei Confidential
• In haulageway scenarios, mesh backhaul must be available in LOS. When signals
are blocked by curves, relay nodes need to be added, which must be supported
by the AP version (V200R022 recommended).
WLAN Deployment Solution for Steel Plant Backhaul
Scenarios (1/2)
Scenario description
Scenario
Typical Backhaul
Distance
Steel plant
(Bridge crane)
10–500 m
Service on the Mesh Network
Bandwidth 2.4 GHz Number of STAs
(Mbps)
Coverage on Each Node
Video security (720p and 1080p)
4–8
No
4
SMS (non-real-time control)
2
Yes
1
Bandwidth per
Node
Number of Networking
Bridge Cranes Topology
About 35 Mbps
1
P2P
Recommended solution
Node Type
Device Type
AP
MPP
Backhaul antenna
AP
MP
Product Model
Frequency
Bandwidth
Backhaul Throughput
MPP:MP = 1:1
Latency
Packet
Loss Rate
< 20 ms
< 0.1%
AirEngine 5761R-11E
420 Mbps
27010889 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized directional antenna
(H60 V30 G11.5)
AirEngine 5761R-11E
Backhaul antenna
27010890 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized directional antenna
(H15 V15 G19)
Coverage antenna
27013721 outdoor 2.4 GHz & 5 GHz single-polarized
omnidirectional antenna (H360 V30 G4 & H360 V15 G7)
80 MHz
420 Mbps
* The backhaul throughput in the table is calculated based on the P2P rate of 420 Mbps. The actual backhaul throughput is subject to the measurement result.
28
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Steel Plant Backhaul
Scenarios (2/2)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
In a steel plant (bridge crane) backhaul scenario, the MPP-MP distance is usually no more than 500 m, and the P2P
networking topology is recommended.
⚫
An MPP is installed on the wall of a shop floor and connects to an uplink switch through optical fibers or network cables. An
MP is installed on a bridge crane to provide wireless data backhaul and Internet access services for STAs.
⚫
The bridge crane moves along the driving track. Because the moving distance is relatively short, roaming does not need to be
considered.
⚫
Backhaul channel: HE80 @ 5 GHz; coverage channel: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz.
MPP
Distance ≤ 500 m, frequency
bandwidth ≤ 80 MHz
MP
Steel plant (bridge crane) backhaul deployment solution (P2P)
29
Huawei Confidential
5 GHz backhaul antenna
2.4 GHz & 5 GHz
coverage antenna
WLAN Deployment Solution for Wind Farm Backhaul
Scenarios (1/2)
Scenario description
Scenario
Typical
Backhaul
Distance
Wind farm (Engineering
vehicle inspection)
0.1–1 km
Service on the Mesh Network
Bandwidth
(Mbps)
2.4 GHz
Coverage
Number of
STAs on
Each Node
O&M inspection (voice call, video, etc.)
4
Yes
2
O&M inspection (text, image, etc.)
2
Yes
2
Bandwidth
per Node
Number of
Inspection
Vehicles
Networking
Topology
About 12
Mbps
1
P2P
Recommended solution
Node Type
Device Type
AP
MPP
Backhaul antenna
AP
MP
Product Model
Backhaul Throughput
Frequency
Bandwidth MPP:MP = 1:1 MPP:MP = 1:2
Latency
Packet
Loss Rate
< 20 ms
< 0.1%
AirEngine 5761R-11E
27010889 outdoor 5 GHz dual-polarized directional
antenna (H60 V30 G11.5)
AirEngine 5761R-11E
Backhaul antenna
27013721 outdoor 2.4 GHz & 5 GHz single-polarized
omnidirectional antenna (H360 V30 G4 & H360 V15 G7)
Coverage antenna
27013721 outdoor 2.4 GHz & 5 GHz single-polarized
omnidirectional antenna (H360 V30 G4 & H360 V15 G7)
80 Mbps
64 Mbps
80 Mbps
32 Mbps
80 MHz
* The backhaul throughput in the table is calculated based on the P2P rate of 80 Mbps. The actual backhaul throughput is subject to the measurement result.
30
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Wind Farm Backhaul
Scenarios (2/2)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
In a wind farm (engineering vehicle inspection) backhaul scenario, the P2P backhaul distance between the MPP and MP does
not exceed 1 km, and the P2P networking topology is used.
⚫
An MPP is installed at the bottom of a wind turbine tower and connects to an uplink switch through optical fibers or network
cables. An MP is installed on an engineering vehicle to provide wireless data backhaul and Internet access services for STAs.
⚫
Backhaul channel: HE80 @ 5 GHz; coverage channel: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz. The MP uses omnidirectional antennas for backhaul.
⚫
The engineering vehicle inspects the entire wind farm area along the road. During the process, the MP switches between
different MPP nodes (disconnection and reconnection).
MPP
Distance ≤ 1 km, frequency
bandwidth ≤ 80 MHz
MP
Wind farm (engineering vehicle inspection) backhaul deployment solution (P2P)
5 GHz backhaul antenna
2.4 GHz & 5 GHz
backhaul/coverage antenna
31
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) In outdoor backhaul scenarios, if the P2MP networking topology
is used, with how many MPs should an MPP set up backhaul links at most? (
A. 2
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8
32
1. C
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of outdoor backhaul scenarios, including ports,
metal mine haulageways, steel plants, and wind farms. WLAN construction standards and
planning rules vary according to sub-scenarios and relevant WLAN planning solutions are
different as well. This course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and deployment
for common outdoor backhaul sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in WLAN
projects relating to outdoor backhaul scenarios.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods for each sub-scenario.
33
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
34
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Planning for High-Density Scenarios
Foreword
⚫
With the popularization of Wi-Fi, more and more public places (such as stadiums and
venues) provide Wi-Fi hotspot coverage, facilitating people's access to Wi-Fi networks
anytime and anywhere. However, the access of a large number of users poses great
challenges to Wi-Fi builders, and how to provide good service experience in high-density
and high-concurrency scenarios becomes the key to high-density scenario coverage.
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of WLAN services in high-density scenarios, as well
as methods, rules, and precautions for WLAN planning in these scenarios.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe common service types and challenges in high-density scenarios.

Describe the WLAN planning process in high-density scenarios.

Understand WLAN deployment solutions in high-density scenarios.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Introduction to High-Density Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in High-Density Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for High-Density Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
High-Density Scenario Overview
If a large number of users gather in an area, the user density (number of users per unit area) is high, and all these
⚫
users need to access the WLAN, this scenario is a high-density scenario.
To meet the access requirements of a large number of users in high-density scenarios, you need to deploy a large
⚫
number of APs. That means the distance between APs is much smaller than that in common scenarios.
Typical high-density scenarios include stadiums, exhibition centers, and concerts. This course uses stadiums as an
⚫
example.
Stadium
5
Huawei Confidential
Concert
Challenges in High-Density Scenarios
High-density access
•
•
A large number of access
•
Complex scenarios, involving
terminals, distributed in high
multiple industries with
density
different service
High concurrency rate and
requirements
•
Complex policies
•
Various types of terminals
and high compatibility
requirements
•
Frequent multi-user
Complex physical
contention for resources,
Short distance between APs,
environments, and restricted
resulting in poor user
generating severe
device installation
high capacity
•
Complex scenarios
interference
•
Multiple interference factors
experience
•
Possible sticky STAs during
roaming, causing load
imbalance
6
Huawei Confidential
Contents
7
1.
Introduction to High-Density Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in High-Density Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for High-Density Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Planning Process in High-Density Scenarios
Requirements collection
⚫

Collect complete and comprehensive project and requirement information to provide basis
Requirements collection
for WLAN design.
Site survey
⚫

Site survey
Carry out a site survey and record more detailed information, such as the floor height,
interference sources, and obstacles.
Device selection
⚫

Device selection
Determine the models of devices and antennas based on the collected information.
Coverage design
⚫

Determine the coverage range and field strength requirements, and plan AP deployment
Coverage design
positions.
Capacity design
⚫

8
Estimate the number of APs based on the number of access STAs and service requirements.
Huawei Confidential
Capacity design
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Requirements Collection in High-Density Scenarios
Requirement Type
Drawing information
Coverage area
Determine the VIP coverage areas (such as stands and boxes) and common coverage areas (such as stairs and restrooms).
Field strength
Determine the signal field strength requirements in coverage areas. Generally, the coverage requirements are as follows:
VIP coverage area ≥ –60 dBm, common coverage area ≥ –65 dBm, and simple coverage area ≥ –70 dBm
Wall type
Determine the material and thickness of indoor walls, such as 240 mm brick walls, 240 mm concrete walls, and 12 mm glass
walls.
Access STAs
Determine the types, number, and concurrency rate of access STAs in the coverage area.
Bandwidth
Determine the main service types and bandwidth requirements of access STAs.
Channel and EIRP
restrictions
Determine the local available channels and EIRP restrictions.
Switch location
Determine the locations of upstream switches and check whether the PoE power supply distance meets the requirements.
AP installation position
Determine the installation positions of APs (side, overhead, or under seats).
Power supply mode
Determine the power supply mode as well as the available power supply areas and facilities on site.
Interference source
Determine whether there are interference sources such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and external Wi-Fi devices.
Others
9
Description
Collect complete drawings that contain scale information in CAD, PDF, PNG, or JPG format.
Huawei Confidential
Determine whether there are special requirements in some scenarios.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Site Survey in High-Density Scenarios
Site Survey Item
Building materials and
signal attenuation
Floor height
Description
Obtain the thickness and attenuation of building materials. If possible, test the attenuation onsite.
Measure the floor height. The common indoor floor height is 3 m to 5 m. If an atrium, large exhibition hall, or stand area exists,
use a rangefinder to measure the floor height and record the result.
Interference source
Check whether there are interference sources, for example, mobile hotspots, Wi-Fi devices of other vendors, and non-Wi-Fi
devices (such as Bluetooth devices and microwave ovens).
New obstacles
Check whether obstacles at the site are consistent with those on the drawings. If not, mark the inconsistent areas and take
photos. For example, if there are new partitions onsite, mark the positions and attenuation values of the partitions on the
drawings.
Site photos
AP installation mode and
position
Take photos of the site to record the environment and convey survey information.
Determine the AP installation modes (ceiling mounting, wall mounting, etc.) and positions.
ELV room locations
Mark the locations of ELV rooms where switches are to be deployed on the drawings.
Power supply cabling
Mark PoE cables to be routed on the drawings. It is recommended that the length of a PoE cable be less than or equal to 80 m.
Special requirements
Record the customer's special requirements, such as requirements on latency, in-roaming packet loss rate, and concurrency rate
in special areas.
10
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Device Selection Factors
Factor
Description
MIMO
An AP typically supports 4 to 12 spatial streams. An AP with more spatial streams supports higher throughput and larger access
capacity. Therefore, select APs with a proper number of spatial streams based on the application scenario and access density.
Antenna
Indoor APs have three types of antennas: omnidirectional, directional, and smart antennas. Outdoor APs support omnidirectional
and directional antennas.
APs with smart antennas are recommended for indoor scenarios. Select APs with directional antennas if APs need to be installed
at high places.
Maximum transmit power
(combined power)
Limitations over the Wi-Fi transmit power vary depending on the country or region code. When the transmit power gets closer to
the specified upper limit, the transmitted signal is stronger and the coverage distance is longer. For details, see the Country
Codes and Channels Compliance in the product documentation.
Antenna gain
A higher antenna gain indicates a stronger signal strength and longer coverage distance. Select antennas with a proper gain
based on site requirements.
Power supply mode
The power supply modes vary according to the deployment scenarios. Currently, PoE is used in most scenarios. In other scenarios,
the DC power supply can be used, or both power supply modes can be used together for mutual backup. Ensure that the power
consumption of APs matches the power supply capability of PoE switches.
Wi-Fi standard
The Wi-Fi standard has evolved to the sixth generation, and each generation is compatible with earlier ones. The latest Wi-Fi 6
standard greatly improves the Wi-Fi speed and capacity. Therefore, Wi-Fi 6 APs are recommended.
Other features
For example, in outdoor scenarios, pay attention to special requirements for APs, such as waterproof and dustproof capabilities,
operating temperature range, and surge protection.
11
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common APs in High-Density Scenarios
AP Model
AirEngine 8760R-X1E
AirEngine 6761-21E
AirEngine 6760R-51E
AirEngine 5761R-11E
MIMO
8+8/4+4+4
4+4
4+4
2.4 GHz (2x2) + 5 GHz (2x2)
Or
5 GHz (2x2) + 5 GHz (2x2)
Antenna
Maximum Transmit Power
(Combined Power)
Antenna Gain
Maximum Power
Consumption
Power Supply Mode
External antennas
External antennas
External antennas
External antennas
33 dBm/33 dBm
26 dBm/26 dBm
30 dBm/30 dBm
28 dBm/27 dBm
Depending on the antenna
Depending on the antenna
Depending on the antenna
Depending on the antenna
53.2 W (excluding PoE OUT)
22.6 W (excluding USB)
35.3 W
19.6 W
PoE++ (802.3bt)
PoE+ (802.3at)
PoE++ (802.3bt)
PoE+ (802.3at)
Other Features
Wi-Fi 6, IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, Ethernet port
surge protection, antenna
surge protection, Bluetooth
Wi-Fi 6, USB, and
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi 6, IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, Ethernet port
surge protection, antenna
surge protection, Bluetooth
Wi-Fi 6, IP68 waterproof and
dustproof, Ethernet port
surge protection, antenna
surge protection, Bluetooth
Recommended Scenario
Outdoor stand
Indoor stand and site
Outdoor stand
Outdoor stand
Appearnce
Note: The table lists some AP models with external antennas. For details about other models, see the product documentation.
12
Huawei Confidential
• The AirEngine 6760-X1E supports the triple-radio mode, which is also applicable
to indoor stands and conference sites. For details about the parameters, see the
product manual.
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Antennas in High-Density Scenarios
Antenna Part Number
27012565
27010890
Model
ANTDG1211D4NR
ASB185G00
Antenna Type
Directional
Directional
Radios
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
5 GHz
Gain (2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
12 dBi/11 dBi
19 dBi
Horizontal Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
35°/26°
15°
Vertical Beamwidth
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz)
35°/26°
15°
Dimensions (H x W x D)
40 mm x 450 mm x 420 mm
25 mm x 250 mm x 250 mm
Connector Type
4 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
2 x Type N female connector (dual-polarized)
Remarks
Wall mounting or pole mounting
Pole mounting
* Note: The antennas listed on the table are used for AP models with external antennas.
13
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Installation Modes in High-Density Scenarios (1/2)
Side mode
14
Huawei Confidential
Overhead mode
Under seats
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Installation Modes in High-Density Scenarios (2/2)
Installation
Mode
Description
Advantage
Side mode
Deployed on
the wall in
the back row
of the stand
area
1. Line of sight (LOS) transmission between STAs and APs,
and controllable transmission attenuation.
2. APs are deployed in a line, and co-channel APs are far away
from each other, ensuring good anti-interference effect.
3. The installation height is proper, making it easy to install
and maintain devices.
1. When the installation position of APs is low, the APs
are easy to reach, with poor aesthetics.
2. For a stand with a large row depth, supplementary
coverage is required.
Overhead
mode
Deployed on
the ceiling
above the
stand area
1. LOS transmission between STAs and APs, and controllable
transmission attenuation.
2. Devices are easy to install if there is a catwalk in the
stadium.
3. Devices are inaccessible to people, providing high safety
and better aesthetics.
1. APs are difficult to install if the ceiling has a simple
structure and high height. The construction costs are
high and maintenance is difficult.
2. During channel planning, both the interference from
left and right APs and the interference from front and
back APs need to be considered. The anti-interference
effect is not as good as that in the side coverage mode.
Deployed
under seats
in the stand
area
1. Through signal attenuation by obstacles such as chairs,
crowds, and stands, the coverage of a single AP can be
effectively controlled. This increases the AP deployment
density and allows more users to access the network.
2. It can be used as a supplement to the other two coverage
modes.
3. APs are installed under seats and are not easy to find,
ensuring good aesthetics.
1. The AP coverage is small, and therefore a larger
number of APs are required.
2. The existing building surface will be damaged,
including the deployment of steel pipes for cabling and
auxiliary materials such as AP protection boxes or
camouflage boxes.
3. The signal coverage model varies with the number of
STAs. Interference is uncontrollable compared with the
other two modes.
Under seats
15
Huawei Confidential
Disadvantage
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Common Services and Average Bandwidth in High-Density
Scenarios
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Proportion of Each Service in High-Density Scenarios
(Stadium as an Example)
Excellent
Good
Stand Area
VIP Box
Hall
Outdoor Area
4K video
50
30
0%
20%
10%
5%
1080p video
16
12
5%
20%
10%
5%
720p video
8
4
5%
10%
10%
10%
Web browsing
8
4
30%
20%
20%
20%
Gaming
2
1
10%
10%
10%
10%
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
30%
10%
20%
30%
VoIP
0.256
0.128
20%
10%
20%
20%
4
16
9
6
Average Bandwidth in Each Scenario (Excellent, in Mbps)
* Note: The data above is based on experience and can be adjusted according to user bandwidth requirements.
16
Huawei Confidential
Requirements Collection
Site Survey
Device Selection
Coverage Design
Capacity Design
Number of Concurrent STAs on a Single AP
⚫
The number of concurrent STAs supported by an AP is used to calculate the number of required APs on the premise
that the coverage and capacity requirements are met. For example:

Two hundred STAs are connected to the network, with the concurrency rate of 30%. That is, services are running on only 60 STAs
concurrently. When both APs and STAs comply with Wi-Fi 6, a single STA requires 8 Mbps bandwidth and a dual-band AP (4x4
MIMO) supports concurrent access of 30 STAs (2x2 MIMO). Therefore, two APs are required to meet the capacity requirement.
⚫
The following table lists the maximum number of concurrent STAs supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40) at
different bandwidths.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
* Note: The maximum number of concurrent STAs varies according to the AP model.
17
Huawei Confidential
Contents
18
1.
Introduction to High-Density Scenarios
2.
WLAN Planning Process in High-Density Scenarios
3.
WLAN Planning Solutions for High-Density Scenarios
Huawei Confidential
Common Sub-scenarios in High-Density Scenarios
19
Huawei Confidential
Stand
VIP box
Hall
Outdoor area
WLAN Construction Standards for the Stand Area
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service type: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
⚫
User distribution: 2 per m2 (in the stand area)
⚫
Location distribution: The stands of a large- and medium-sized
stadium are divided into two to three floors and distributed in a
ladder shape.
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 2 Mbps
Capacity KPI: 360 seats covered by a single AP, 70% access rate,
20% concurrency rate
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Side mode
Overhead mode
Deploy APs at equal spacings.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
Under seats
Install APs in the protection boxes
under the seats.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
Stand area
Low
High
High
AP with external directional
antennas connected
Stand area
Low
High
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 4+4 or higher
spatial streams
20
Huawei Confidential
Edge Coverage Mode for the Stand Area Scenario (1/3)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
In side coverage mode, it is recommended that the coverage distance of APs be 20 rows and the maximum coverage distance be 30 rows. In
addition, you need to adjust the antenna downtilt to ensure that the antenna coverage direction is aligned with the middle of the seat.
⚫
When the antenna is installed on a wall or pole, the downtilt adjustment range is ±30°. The gradient of the outer ring stand is large, and the
downtilt adjustment may exceed 30°. Therefore, it is recommended that the antenna be installed on a horizontal pole or steel beam.
Ceiling
It is recommended
that 20 rows of
seats be covered.
It is recommended
that 20 rows of
seats be covered.
21
Huawei Confidential
Stadium
Ground
Edge Coverage Mode for the Stand Area Scenario (2/3)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
In solution A, all APs work in dual-radio mode. The 2.4 GHz radio needs to be disabled for some APs. APs are deployed at an equal spacing of 6 m.
⚫
In solution B, blue APs work in dual-radio mode, and yellow APs work in dual-5G mode. APs are deployed at an equal spacing of 9 m.
⚫
Ensure that the horizontal spacing between 5 GHz radios is greater than 6 m and that between 2.4 GHz radios is greater than 18 m. The bandwidth of
all channels is 20 MHz.
AP
6m
6m
6m
Antenna
Antenna
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
5 GHz
5 GHz 2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
Back
row
Stand seats
Solution A: Dual-radio mode
22
9m
AP
6m
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
9m
6m
5 GHz
6m
5 GHz
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
Back
row
Stand seats
Front row
Front row
Antenna feeder
Antenna feeder
Solution B: Dual-radio mode + Dual-5G mode
Huawei Confidential
• Note: Not all dual-radio APs support the dual-5G mode. When selecting solution
B, ensure that the yellow APs support the dual-5G mode.
Edge Coverage Mode for the Stand Area Scenario (3/3)
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
In solution C, all APs need to be configured to work in three-radio mode (two antennas are connected and the antenna spacing is
⚫
6 m). The APs are deployed at an equal spacing of 12 m.
Ensure that the horizontal spacing between 5 GHz radios is greater than 6 m and that between 2.4 GHz radios is greater than 12
⚫
m. The bandwidth of all channels is 20 MHz.
12 m
12 m
AP
Antenna
6m
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
6m
5 GHz
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
5 GHz
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
5 GHz
Back row
Stand seats
Front row
Solution C: Triple-radio mode
23
Huawei Confidential
Antenna feeder
Ceiling Installation Mode for the Stand Area Scenario
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
⚫
When APs are installed on the ceiling, it is recommended that a single AP cover 20 rows. The maximum number of rows is 30. For details about the
AP deployment solution, see the edge installation solution (solutions A, B, and C).
If the AP installation height is less than 20 m, the minimum horizontal spacing between 5 GHz radios is 6 m. If the AP installation height is greater
than 20 m but less than 30 m, the minimum horizontal spacing between 5 GHz radios is 8 m.
If the ceiling height is greater than 30 m, the ceiling installation mode is not recommended. It is recommended that the ceiling be installed on the
edge or seat.
20 rows
1 Installation height < 20 m
20 rows
AP
Ceiling
Antenna
Minimum: 6 m
No more than 30 m
2 Installation height: 20–30 m
Antenna
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
* Only AP positions are shown in the figure.
24
Huawei Confidential
Ground
Antenna
5 GHz
2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
AP
Minimum: 8 m
Antenna
5 GHz
Horizontal spacing between antennas
(solution C is used as an example) Antenna feeder
Seat Installation Mode for the Stand Area Scenario
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Indoor APs with built-in omnidirectional antennas are installed in non-metal protection boxes under seats.
⚫
The horizontal distance between APs is 6 m. One AP is deployed every four rows of seats in the vertical direction. The
following figure shows the staggered AP deployment positions. Each AP covers three rows to its front and one row to its rear.
6m
6m
6m
9F
Back row
8F
7F
6F
Vertical coverage: 5 rows
5F
4F
3F
2F
Front row
1F
Stadium
25
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Construction Standards for VIP Boxes
Scenario description
⚫
⚫
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, HD video, game, instant messaging,
etc.
User distribution: 6–10 persons per 20 m2 for a small VIP box or
30–40 persons per 100 m2 for a large VIP box
Location distribution: Generally, VIP boxes are located right below
the stand on the second floor.
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 100 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 20
Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 20 STAs on a single AP, 50% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
VIP box
26
Aesthetics
High
Huawei Confidential
Capacity
High
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling mounting
Deploy APs at equal spacings.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4 GHz,
HE20 @ 5 GHz
WLAN Deployment Solution for VIP Boxes
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
⚫
If the area of a single room is less than 50 m2, deploy one AP in each room by referring to solution A.
If the area of a single room is greater than 50 m2, deploy APs are deployed at an equal spacing of about 15 m near the wall
by referring to solution B.
Stadium
Stadium
Glass
Glass
Room area < 50 m2
Room area > 50 m2
15 m
One side of the wall
Solution A
27
Huawei Confidential
One side of the wall
Solution B
WLAN Construction Standards for Hall Scenarios
Scenario description
⚫
⚫
⚫
WLAN construction standards
Service types: web browsing, file transfer, HD video, instant
messaging, etc.
User distribution: one user per 4–5 m2
Floor height: 3 m to 6 m in common areas; depending on the
actual situation in atrium areas
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 6 Mbps
⚫
Capacity KPI: 40 STAs on a single AP, 30% concurrency rate
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Hall
Medium
Medium
High
Indoor AP with built-in
omnidirectional antennas,
supporting 2+4 or higher
spatial streams
Ceiling or wall mounting
Deploy APs at equal spacings.
Channel planning: HE20 @ 2.4
GHz, HE20 @ 5 GHz
28
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Hall Scenarios
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
For areas with a floor height of 3 m to 6 m, install APs on the ceiling at an equal spacing of 18 m to 25 m by referring to
solution A.
⚫
For areas with a floor height of more than 6 m, install APs on load-bearing pillars or other existing buildings at an equal
spacing of 18 m to 25 m by referring to solution B.
⚫
Deploy APs far away from the seat areas of the stadium.
Stadium seats
Stadium seats
Entrance
Entrance
Entrance
Entrance
Floor height < 6 m
18–25 m
18–25 m
Load-bearing
pillar
29
Huawei Confidential
Entrance
Floor height > 6 m
18–25 m
Solution A: Ceiling mounting
Entrance
18–25 m
Load-bearing pillar
Solution B: Wall mounting
Load-bearing
pillar
WLAN Construction Standards for Outdoor Areas
Scenario description
WLAN construction standards
⚫
Service types: web browsing, HD video, instant messaging, etc.
⚫
Rate KPI: experience rate ≥ 50 Mbps, service-assured rate ≥ 4 Mbps
⚫
User distribution: about one user per 20–30 m2
⚫
Capacity KPI: 80 STAs on a single AP, 20% concurrency rate
⚫
Floor height: not involved in outdoor open areas
⚫
Coverage KPI: RSSI @ 95% area ≥ –65 dBm
⚫
⚫
⚫
Stability KPI: delay @ 95% area < 20 ms, packet loss rate @ 95%
area < 1%
Access KPI: average time required for access < 3s
Roaming KPI: roaming success rate > 97%, average roaming delay
< 100 ms, in-roaming packet loss rate < 0.1%
Recommended solution
Scenario
Aesthetics
Capacity
Coverage
Recommended AP Type
Installation Mode
Deployment Solution
Outdoor
area
Low
Low
High
Outdoor AP with built-in antennas,
supporting 2+2 or more spatial
streams
Wall mounting
Deploy APs at an equal
spacing of 40 m.
Channel planning: HE20
@ 2.4 GHz, HE20 @ 5 GHz
30
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Deployment Solution for Outdoor Areas
Suggestions for WLAN planning and deployment
⚫
Outdoor APs with built-in directional antennas are recommended in outdoor areas (such as stadiums and the periphery).
⚫
Deploy APs along the exterior wall at a height of 3 m to 6 m and at a spacing of 40 m. The maximum coverage distance of a
single AP is about 180 m (without considering EIRP restrictions).
Exterior wall
Distance between APs: 40 m
Stadium
31
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. In high-density scenarios, what is the recommended minimum horizontal distance between
5 GHz radios? (
A. 4 m
B. 6 m
C. 8 m
D. 10 m
32
1. B
Huawei Confidential
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the characteristics of high-density sub-scenarios, including the stand,
VIP box, hall, and outdoor area. Different sub-scenarios use different WLAN construction
standards and planning rules and thereby have different WLAN planning solutions. This
course also provides suggestions on WLAN planning and deployment in common highdensity sub-scenarios, facilitating WLAN solution design in high-density WLAN projects.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will have a basic understanding of the WLAN planning
process and master the WLAN design methods of each high-density sub-scenario.
33
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
34
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Optimization Solution
Foreword
⚫
With the rapid development of wireless local area networks (WLANs), more and more
enterprises have entered the fully-wireless office era and are replacing wired networks with
WLANs. As such, WLAN optimization becomes an important process in WLAN construction,
optimization, and maintenance, and is also the most important guarantee for network
quality and user experience.
⚫
This course introduces you to the overall WLAN optimization process, adjustment in each
optimization phase, and how to use related tools.
2
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe the WLAN optimization process.

Describe the contents of WLAN optimization.

Understand how to use WLAN optimization tools.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Overview of WLAN Optimization
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
4.
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Background of WLAN Optimization
Increasing Wi-Fi nodes make planning, deployment, and maintenance difficult.
1
Difficult planning, lack of professional planning
2
Difficult to evaluate the signal strength and radio
interference
Complex WLAN deployment
SSID, security, authentication, traffic, and
application configurations
OA
network
No professional evaluation and design,
and ransom site selection
Improper channel design
⚫ Insufficient consideration for network
security
⚫
Production
network
Surveillance
network
⚫
AP
3
Difficult to ensure network reliability
Problems such as wireless intrusion, wireless
interference, and reliability technology faults
Network coverage holes, causing
access failures in some areas
⚫ Severe radio interference and
increased network loss
⚫ Security risks, vulnerable to attacks
⚫ Weak disaster recovery (DR)
capability
?
4
Huawei Confidential
AP
Increased O&M costs
Complex network, deteriorated overall
network quality
Poor network quality, increasing
O&M costs
No consideration for reuse, and
repeated construction
⚫ Imbalance between coverage,
capacity, and costs
⚫
⚫
5
AP
Sharp increase in AP
quantity
⚫ Doubling parameters
⚫ Two sets of wired and
wireless networks
⚫
⚫
WAC Web
Introduction to WLAN Optimization
WLAN optimization involves site survey on customers' requirements, network evaluation, and a series
⚫
of optimization actions to resolve problems such as poor wireless service experience, high O&M costs,
and difficult fault locating.
Evaluation
and
optimization
Low level
design (LLD)
High level
design (HLD)
Site
survey
Deployment
and
acceptance
WLAN optimization is an indispensable part of WLAN construction.
6
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Optimization Panorama
Modules
WLAN optimization
Network solution
implementation, optimization,
and acceptance
Network
information
collection
Network
evaluation
Optimization solution design
Customer requirement
checklist
Service test
Networking
optimization
Configuration
optimization
Performance acceptance test
User questionnaire
Version and
configuration analysis
Coverage
optimization
Capacity
optimization
Function acceptance test
Channel
optimization
Client
Optimization
Tools
GPS
WLAN Tester 2.0
eDesk
Ranging instrument
CloudCampus APP
WLAN Planner
iPerf
Optimization solution report
Network implementation,
optimization, & acceptance report
Telescope
Reports
WLAN Tester 2.0
7
Network survey
report
Huawei Confidential
Network quality
evaluation report
Contents
8
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
4.
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Functions of the CloudCampus APP
The CloudCampus APP is a mobile app that integrates functions such as field strength detection and interference
test. It is used for actual test and acceptance for a deployed WLAN, reducing the workload of wireless O&M
personnel and simplifying maintenance. The CloudCampus APP consists of the following functional modules:
⚫

Network: displays basic information about the currently connected network. The title displays the SSID name (including the
frequency band and Wi-Fi protocol). Other information includes the BSSID, RSSI, channel, MAC address, negotiated link rate, and
IP address. It also provides functions such as Wi-Fi experience and speed test.

Tool: includes various tools, including project delivery, coverage test, business test, scene test, and manufacturer customization.
Network
9
Tool
Huawei Confidential
• This course uses the CloudCampus APP 3.22.9.1 for Android as an example.
• In the Tool module, the network evaluation mainly uses the coverage test and
business test. Other functions are not described in this course.
Network
Basic network information
Wi-Fi experience
Speed test
✓ Wi-Fi protocol
✓ Signal strength
Internet
✓ Signal strength
✓ Ping packet delay
✓ Network delay
✓ Channel
✓ Download Rate
✓ Download rate
✓ Frequency
bandwidth
✓ Website loading time
✓ Upload rate
✓ Negotiated rate
✓ Security detection
Intranet
✓ Network delay
✓ Download rate
✓ Upload rate
10
Huawei Confidential
Tool
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11
Huawei Confidential
Wi-Fi Status: displays the status of the current Wi-Fi network, such as the signal strength,
channel, and negotiated rate.
Find AP: displays the vendors of neighboring APs, roughly locates the APs, and checks
interference in the environment.
Interference: displays the signal interference of the current network, including the name,
working channel, and strength of the interference signal.
Terminal Scan: obtains information about unauthorized access terminals anytime, facilitating
terminal management by network O&M personnel.
Ping: allows you to perform connectivity test, with common ping addresses preset in the APP.
Speed Test: supports network speed tests for the Internet and intranet.
iPerf: works with an iPerf server to test the iPerf performance on the intranet.
Roaming experience: allows you to walk in the entire network coverage area and perform
continuous dotting tests to test the roaming function.
Game Test: allows you to check the network stability and test the fluctuation and packet loss
rate of the network.
Tracert: is a route tracing function used to trace the path along which data is routed to the
destination address.
Wi-Fi stability: allows you to test the stability of the current Wi-Fi network based on the realtime signal strength and connection rate.
Walking Test: is a test conducted while you are walking. It allows you to detect changes in the
Wi-Fi network status and services, and monitor the Wi-Fi signal strength and gateway
connectivity in real time.
Contents
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
◼
Networking Optimization
▫ Configuration Optimization
▫ Capacity Optimization
▫ Coverage Optimization
▫ Channel Optimization
▫ Client Optimization
4.
12
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Optimization Solution Design
⚫
Based on the problems found in network evaluation, the WLAN optimization solution design formulates a detailed
network rectification solution and provides guidance for customers to adjust the network. It is recommended that
the optimization solution be designed from the following six modules:
Module
13
Optimization Object
Optimization Mode
Networking
optimization
Network architecture optimization, VLAN assignment, device
security configuration optimization, device reliability
optimization, version upgrade, etc.
Wired network connected
to APs
Manual design
Configuration
optimization
Radio parameter optimization (power, channel, EDCA
parameters, short GI, etc.), authentication policy optimization,
security policy optimization, reliability optimization, etc.
WAC
Manual design
Capacity optimization
Adjustment for the number of APs, AP upgrade and
replacement, etc.
AP
Manual design +
Simulation tool
Coverage optimization
Adjustment for AP installation positions, the number of APs,
antenna positions, AP transmit power, etc.
AP
Manual design +
Simulation tool
Channel optimization
Adjustment for APs' working channels
AP
Manual design +
Simulation tool
Client optimization
Adjustment for the driver version and preferred frequency band
of the wireless network adapter, WLAN bearer mode, etc.
STA
Manual design
Huawei Confidential
Description
Overview of Networking Optimization
Networking optimization is a wired network optimization solution, which includes the following contents:
⚫
Networking architecture
optimization
Network planning
optimization
Wired-side function
optimization
•
Networking: WAC + Fit AP, mesh, or
cloud management
•
Networking between the WAC and
APs: Layer 2 or Layer 3
•
Control broadcast domain: user
isolation and port isolation
•
WAC deployment: in-path or off-path
•
Address pool capacity: IP pool
Reliability: VRRP, dual-link, N+1, etc.
Data forwarding mode: direct
forwarding or tunnel forwarding
•
•
•
•
Device selection: WAC, AP, switch, etc.
DHCP function: DHCP aging time and
lease renewal
•
Control multicast: multicast packet
suppression
...
•
VLAN planning: management VLAN
and service VLAN
•
IP address planning: management
address and service address
•
SSID planning: SSIDs for employees
and guests
•
Access control policy: ACL, etc.
•
Security policy: WPA/WPA2/WPA3
...
...
14
Huawei Confidential
• Networking architecture optimization: Before project implementation, the
networking architecture is determined based on the customer network status and
requirements. The networking architecture will not change greatly in the future
and is not be described in detail here. We can learn more about different WLAN
architectures and networking modes in the course WLAN Networking
Architectures.
Network Planning Optimization
Optimization Item
Optimization Description
Management addresses of APs and WACs are separated from service addresses of STAs, facilitating
management and control.
IP address
optimization
The address pool resources match the network capacity plan. This prevents STA access failures caused by
insufficient IP addresses in the address pool.
Avoid using 169.254.1.1 as the gateway address of the address pool, which conflicts with the default address
when the AP is not online.
In scenarios where users move frequently, the IP addresses used by online STAs are not released in the address
pool, wasting IP address resources. You are advised to shorten the lease of the address pool so that IP
addresses can be reclaimed in a timely manner.
It is recommended that the AP management VLAN be separated from the user service VLAN to prevent loops.
Do not set the AP management VLAN and user service VLAN to VLAN 1 to prevent loops.
VLAN division
For a project with a large number of APs, different SSIDs can use different service VLANs to prevent broadcast
storms caused by large VLAN broadcast domains.
Ensure that the single service VLAN is not excessively large.
15
Huawei Confidential
Wired-Side Function Optimization — Layer 2 Isolation
⚫
When the Layer 2 broadcast domain on a network is large, normal broadcast packets (such as ARP packets) affect
the network, especially on a WLAN (where broadcast packets are sent at the lowest rate), consuming a large
amount of air interface resources. Therefore, on a WLAN, if no Layer 2 communication is required, you are advised
to enable Layer 2 isolation.

User isolation
[WAC-wlan-view] traffic-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-traffic-prof-test] user isolate l2

In direct forwarding scenarios, configure port isolation on the switch port connected to the AP.
[SW] interface GigabitEntherent 0/0/1
[SW-GigabitEntherent0/0/1] port-isolate enable
16
Huawei Confidential
• After Layer 2 isolation is enabled, STAs in the same network segment cannot
transfer files to each other or ping each other. Therefore, do not enable Layer 2
isolation for sites that require mutual access between LANs.
Wired-Side Function Optimization — Multicast Packet Suppression
⚫
Similar to broadcast packets, multicast packets are sent at low rates on the wireless side. If there are a large number of multicast
packets on the network, a large number of air interface bandwidth resources are wasted, causing fluctuation on the WLAN.
Therefore, multicast packets need to be suppressed in both the uplink and downlink directions.

In direct forwarding scenarios, configure a traffic policy on the switch interface directly connected to the AP to control the multicast rate.
[SW] traffic classifier test
[SW-classifier-test] if-match destination-mac 0100-5e00-0000 mac-address mask ffff-ff00-0000
[SW] traffic behavior test
[SW-behavior-test] statistic enable
[SW-behavior-test] car cir 100
[SW] traffic policy test
[SW-policy-test] classifier test behavior test
[SW] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[SW-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] traffic-policy test outbound
[SW-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] traffic-policy test inbound

The AP performs multicast suppression on uplink packets from STAs.
[AC-wlan-view] traffic-profile name test
[AC-wlan-traffic-prof-test] traffic-optimize multicast-suppression packets 1000
17
Huawei Confidential
• In scenarios with multicast services, you are advised to set this parameter based
on the site requirements.
Contents
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
▫ Networking Optimization
◼
Configuration Optimization
▫ Capacity Optimization
▫ Coverage Optimization
▫ Channel Optimization
▫ Client Optimization
4.
18
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Configuration Optimization
⚫
Configuration optimization is mainly implemented for software features. Different parameter settings of the same function affect the
implementation effect and are also applicable to different scenarios. You can adjust function configurations to ensure WLAN
experience.
Access control for weaksignal STAs
Disconnecting weaksignal STAs
STA1
STA2
STA1
STA2
STA3
STA4
STA3
STA4
STA5
STA6
Higher than the RSSI
threshold
Lower than the RSSI
threshold
STA7
STA5
STA6
Higher than the RSSI
threshold
Lower than the RSSI
threshold
STA7
STA8
Access denied
Disconnected
Restricts the access of
low-speed STAs to
improve air interface
efficiency.
Automatically
disconnects low-speed
STAs, improving air
interface efficiency.
19
Huawei Confidential
Smart roaming
WAC
Airtime fair scheduling
Within the same
transmission time
AP
150
Mbps
STA
450
Mbps
300
Mbps
STA
Roaming
Enables STAs to roam to
neighboring APs with
better signals in a timely
manner.
Application protocolbased QoS policy
Voice
Video
Data
High-rate STAs can
send more packets.
Other
Enables users to fairly
share wireless
resources and transmit
more data.
Enables important
services to be
scheduled first.
Access Control for Weak-Signal STAs
⚫
If a WLAN has good signal coverage but signals at the coverage edge area are weak, you can configure SNR-based
user CAC to restrict access from weak-signal STAs, thereby ensuring network access quality for online STAs.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] uac client-snr enable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] uac client-snr threshold threshold

threshold: specifies the user CAC threshold based on the STA's SNR. The value ranges from 5 dB to 45 dB. The default value is 15.

Assume that the SNR threshold is 25 dB and the default noise floor is –95 dBm. When the signal strength of a STA is lower than
25 dB + (–95 dBm) = –70 dBm, the STA cannot access the network.
Key area
Common area
If the SNR is lower than –65 dBm, the STA
is not allowed to access the network. In
this case, you are advised to set the SNR
threshold to 30 dB.
If the SNR is lower than –75 dBm, the STA
is not allowed to access the network. In
this case, you are advised to set the SNR
threshold to 20 dB.
* Note: Engineers can adjust the parameter values based on the customer's requirements on the
STAs' signal strengths. If the threshold is set too high, STAs may fail to access the network.
20
Huawei Confidential
• The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) refers to the ratio of signals to noise (noise floor)
in the system. Generally, the SNR is used to measure the impact of interference
and noise on radio signals.
• The SNR is expressed as follows: SNR = 10lg (P1/P2), where:
▫ P1: valid power of the signal
▫ P2: effective power of the noise
Disconnecting Weak-Signal STAs
⚫
You can configure the device to quickly disconnect weak-signal STAs so that the STAs can reassociate with or roam
to APs with better signals. This ensures the Internet access quality of online STAs.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] undo smart-roam quick-kickoff-threshold disable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] smart-roam quick-kickoff-threshold check-snr
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] smart-roam quick-kickoff-threshold snr snr-threshold

threshold: specifies the SNR-based threshold for quickly disconnecting STAs. The value ranges from 5 dB to 45 dB. The default
value is 15.

Assume that the SNR threshold is 25 dB and the default noise floor is –95 dBm. When the signal strength of a STA is lower than
25 dB + (–95 dBm) = –70 dBm, the STA is disconnected from the WLAN.
Key area
Common area
If the SNR is lower than –65 dBm, the STA
is disconnected. In this case, you are
advised to set the SNR threshold to 30 dB.
If the SNR is lower than –75 dBm, the STA
is disconnected. In this case, you are
advised to set the SNR threshold to 20 dB.
* Note: Engineers can adjust the parameter values based on the customer's requirements on the
STAs' signal strengths. If the threshold is set too high, STAs may fail to access the network.
21
Huawei Confidential
Smart Roaming
⚫
In common coverage scenarios, STAs with poor signals can roam to APs with better signals to improve STA service experience and
overall wireless channel performance.
⚫
In high-density coverage scenarios, STAs usually have good signals and "stick" to APs even if the wireless rates are low. In this case,
configure mart roaming so that STAs are steered to APs with better signals to further improve wireless channel performance.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name wlan-rrm
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] undo smart-roam disable
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] smart-roam roam-threshold check-snr
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-wlan-rrm] smart-roam roam-threshold snr snr-threshold

snr-threshold: specifies the SNR-based smart roaming threshold. The value ranges from 15 dB to 45 dB. The default value is 20.

Assume that the SNR threshold is 25 dB and the default noise floor is –95 dBm. When the signal strength of a STA is lower than 25 dB + (–95 dBm) =
–70 dBm, the signal strength is lower than the SNR threshold. In this case, the STA is steered.
Key area
Common area
If the SNR is lower than –65 dBm, the STA
is forced to go offline. In this case, you are
advised to set the SNR threshold to 30 dB.
If the SNR is lower than –75 dBm, the STA
is forced to go offline. In this case, you are
advised to set the SNR threshold to 20 dB.
* Note: Engineers can adjust the parameter values based on the customer's requirements on the STAs' signal
strengths. If the threshold is set too high, STAs may be steered frequently. The default value is recommended.
22
Huawei Confidential
Airtime Fair Scheduling
⚫
Due to different radio modes supported by STAs or different radio environments where STAs are located, the actual PHY rates of
STAs differ greatly. If a STA with a low PHY rate occupies a wireless channel for a long time, user experience on the entire WLAN is
affected. After airtime fair scheduling is enabled, the device preferentially schedules the user who occupies the channel for the
shortest time before each data transmission. This ensures that each user occupies the channel fairly.
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] airtime-fair-schedule enable
User1
3
User2
User3
User4
4
After a round of
transmission of User1
6
7
After airtime fair scheduling is
enabled, the device schedules channel
resources preferentially for User1
since User1 occupies the channel for
the shortest time.
23
User1
5
User2
4
User3
User4
✓
Airtime fair scheduling:
preferentially schedules STAs
that occupy wireless channels
for a short time.
✓
You can enable this function
based on customer requirements
on the live network (without
involving parameter settings).
6
7
The channel occupation time of User1
increases to 5. Similarly, the device
schedules channel resources
preferentially for User2 that occupies
the channel for the shortest time.
Huawei Confidential
• There are four users on a radio waiting to transmit data. They have occupied the
channel for time periods of 3, 4, 6, and 7 respectively, and require a
corresponding time period of 2, 4, 6, and 7 for a round of data transmission.
1. After airtime fair scheduling is enabled, the device collects the channel
occupation time periods of the four users. The channel occupation time
periods of User1, User2, User3, and User4 become 3, 4, 6, and 7
respectively. User1 occupies the channel for the shortest time. Therefore,
the device allocates channel resources to User1 first.
2. It takes a time period of 2 for User1 to finish a round of data transmission.
The channel occupation time of User1 then increases to 5. The channel
occupation time periods of User1, User2, User3, and User4 become 5, 4, 6,
and 7 respectively. In this case, User2 occupies the channel for the shortest
time. Therefore, the data of User2 is preferentially transmitted.
3. It takes a time period of 4 for User2 to finish a round of data transmission.
The channel occupation time of User2 increases to 8. The channel
occupation time periods of User1, User2, User3, and User4 become 5, 8, 6,
and 7 respectively. User1 occupies the channel for the shortest time. Then
the device preferentially schedules channel resources for User1.
4. If User1 finishes all data transmissions, the device collects the channel
occupation time periods of only the remaining users. The channel
occupation time periods of User2, User3, and User 4 are 8, 6, and 7
respectively. User3 occupies the channel for the shortest time. Therefore,
the data of User3 is preferentially transmitted.
5. It takes a time period of 6 for User3 to finish a round of data transmission.
The channel occupation time period of User3 increases to 12. The channel
occupation time periods of User2, User3, and User4 become 8, 12, and 7
respectively. User4 occupies the channel for the shortest time. Therefore,
channel resources are preferentially scheduled for User4.
Application Protocol-based QoS Policy
⚫
With the rapid development of multimedia technologies, many P2P applications maliciously occupy network resources, resulting in
network congestion. Such traffic is mixed with key applications. As a result, non-key services occupy a large number of resources,
packet loss occurs on core services, and service quality cannot be guaranteed. You can configure application protocol-based QoS
policies to prevent non-key services from occupying too many network resources.
[WAC-wlan-view] sac-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-sac-prof-test] application-group group-name app-protocol app-protocol-name remark dscp dscp-value
[WAC-wlan-sac-prof-test] application-group group-name app-protocol app-protocol-name deny
[WAC-wlan-sac-prof-test] application-group group-name app-protocol app-protocol-name car cir-value
Identifying application protocols
Traffic
skypeforbusiness
facetime
qq_voip
......
Action
Mapping policy
remark: changes the packet priority.
deny: discards packets.
car: limits the packet rate.
Note: Set different policies for related applications based on the actual scenario, that is, services on the customer's live network.
25
Huawei Confidential
• application-group group-name: specifies the name of an application list. The
application list must be supported by the SAC signature database file.
• app-protocol app-protocol-name: specifies the name of an application. The
application must exist in the list.
Contents
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
▫ Networking Optimization
▫ Configuration Optimization
◼
Capacity Optimization
▫ Coverage Optimization
▫ Channel Optimization
▫ Client Optimization
4.
26
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Capacity Optimization (1/2)
⚫
During capacity optimization, service types and user models in different scenarios must be considered, and capacity
optimization suggestions must be provided based on network construction standards.
Service types and user models
Baseline Rate of a Single Service (Mbps)
Proportion of Each Service in Education Scenarios (%)
Service Type
Excellent
Normal
Classroom
4K video
50
30
10
Office Meeting Room Lecture Hall Library
20
10
10
10
Lab
10
Canteen Playground
10
10
1080p video
16
12
10
0
10
10
0
10
10
10
720p video
8
4
0
10
10
0
0
0
0
0
E-whiteboard
32
16
20
20
10
0
0
10
0
0
Email
32
16
10
5
10
10
0
0
0
0
Web browsing
8
4
40
30
30
50
70
60
60
60
10
Gaming
2
1
0
5
0
10
0
0
10
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
0
10
10
10
20
10
10
0
VoIP
0.256
0.128
10
0
10
0
0
0
0
10
27
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Capacity Optimization (1/2)
WLAN construction standards
Capacity optimization suggestions
Experience rate: 50 Mbps
Service-assured rate: 10 Mbps
STA rate limiting
Capacity KPI
• Number of STAs connected to a single AP: 50
• Concurrency rate: 40%
Load balancing
• Test speed (using SpeedTest): meets the
network construction standard.
Coverage KPI
AP capacity expansion
• RSSI @ 95% areas ≥ –65 dBm
Other KPIs
• Roaming delay < 20 ms, in-roaming packet loss
rate ≤ 10-5
• Delay of key services such as video and voice
services < 10 ms
28
AP replacement
...
Huawei Confidential
• Experience rate: perceived data rate under a light network load
▫ When the network load is light (channel utilization is less than 20%), the
target rate that can be reached by a speed test in 95% areas can be
regarded as the experience rate or peak rate.
• Service-assured rate: guaranteed rate under a heavy network load
▫ A service-assured rate is the target rate that can be achieved in 90% of
time according to SpeedTest in a multi-user concurrency scenario where the
network load is less than 80%. The rate is typically considered as the
guaranteed rate.
STA Rate Limiting
⚫
In an actual WLAN, due to different services accessed by STAs, some STAs may occupy too many network resources.
As a result, the STA experience of the entire WLAN deteriorates. In this case, you can configure rate limiting for
STAs to ensure relatively fair network resource usage and improve overall user experience.
[WAC-wlan-view] traffic-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] rate-limit client up rate-value
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] rate-limit client down rate-value

Set the STA rate limit based on the actual scenario, that is, the bandwidth required by services on the customer's live network.
Evaluate the rate limit of the corresponding STA based on the bandwidth required by each service type in the network planning
process course.
29
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Recommended Terminal Rate Limit (Mbps)
4K video
50
60
1080p video
16
20
E-whiteboard (wireless projection)
32
40
Email
32
40
Web browsing
8
10
Instant messaging
0.512
2
Huawei Confidential
Load Balancing
⚫
In scenarios with high overlapping coverage areas (such as lecture halls), some APs may be heavily loaded,
affecting user experience. You can configure the load balancing function to steer some STAs to APs with light loads.
In this way, AP resources are effectively used and the bandwidth of each STA is ensured.
Parameter
optimization
[WAC-wlan-view] rrm-profile name test
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] sta-load-balance dynamic sta-number start-threshold start-threshold-value
[WAC-wlan-rrm-prof-test] sta-load-balance dynamic sta-number gap-threshold { percentage percentage-value | number
number-value }
Start threshold for
dynamic load balancing
Load difference threshold for dynamic load balancing
Based on the percentage
of STAs
Based on the number of STAs
•
•
•
Default value: 10
High AP density: 5–10
Common AP density: 10–20
•
•
•
Default value: 3
High AP density: 1–3
Common AP density: 3–10
•
•
High AP density: 5–10
Common AP density: 1-20
* Note: The default configuration is recommended for load balancing. (The values here are
for reference only. Evaluate the specific values based on the actual project situation.)
30
Huawei Confidential
• The preceding load balancing configuration commands use dynamic load
balancing based on the number of STAs as an example.
• start-threshold-value: specifies the start threshold for dynamic load balancing
based on the number of STAs. The value ranges from 1 to 40.
• percentage-value: specifies the dynamic load difference threshold for based on
the number of STAs (percentage). The value ranges from 1 to 100. The load
difference between radios in a load balancing group is expressed in percentage,
that is, the percentage difference between the number of STAs on radios.
• number-value: specifies the load difference threshold for dynamic load balancing
based on the number of STAs. The value ranges from 1 to 20. The actual number
of STAs indicates the load difference between radios in a group, that is, the
difference between the number of STAs on each radio.
AP Capacity Expansion
⚫
Evaluate the number of required APs based on service types and network construction standards in different scenarios, and add APs
to meet service requirements. The following uses the conference room scenario as an example:
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline Rate (Mbps)
Percentage
Excellent
Good
Conference Room
4K video
50
30
10%
1080p video
16
12
10%
720p video
8
4
10%
E-whiteboard
(wireless projection)
32
16
10%
Email
32
16
10%
Web browsing
8
4
30%
Gaming
2
1
0%
Instant messaging
0.512
0.256
10%
VoIP (voice)
0.256
0.128
10%
Average Single-User Bandwidth (Mbps) — Excellent
Huawei Confidential
Number of access STAs x
Access concurrency rate
Number of concurrent
STAs on a single AP
300 x 30%
18
=5
16 Mbps
Scenario: conference room
Number of access STAs: 300
Access concurrency rate: 30%
Bandwidth required by a single STA (Excellent): 16 Mbps
Number of concurrent STAs supported by a single AP (dual-band, 16 Mbps): 18
31
Capacity evaluation
Number of APs required to meet capacity
requirements in this area =
AP capacity expansion: Increase the number
of APs and deploy five APs in this area.
Contents
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
▫ Networking Optimization
▫ Configuration Optimization
▫ Capacity Optimization
◼
Coverage Optimization
▫ Channel Optimization
▫ Client Optimization
4.
32
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Coverage Optimization
⚫
During coverage optimization, consider the access capacity, roaming, and interference. A larger receive field
strength indicates better user experience. Common coverage optimization methods are as follows:
AP position adjustment
AP power adjustment
11
1
11
1
1
6
6
Before optimization
After optimization
11
6
Before optimization
11
1
6
After optimization
Adjusting the number of APs
1
6
Before optimization
33
1
11
6
1
After optimization
Huawei Confidential
• In outdoor scenarios, APs use external antennas. In addition to adjusting AP
deployment positions, you can adjust antenna directions to meet coverage
requirements.
AP Power Adjustment
⚫
AP power adjustment can be used to meet signal coverage requirements. On the live network, different coverage areas have
different requirements. You are advised to adjust AP power based on the customer requirements. According to the network planning,
it is recommended that the field strength in all areas be greater than or equal to –65 dBm.
Network-wide coverage effect
evaluation
Automatic power adjustment
Failed to meet the signal
strength requirement at a
large number of positions
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] radio 0
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] calibrate auto-txpower-select enable
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] calibrate auto-txpower-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] calibrate enable manual
[AC-wlan-view] calibrate manual startup
Failed to meet the signal
strength requirement at
only a few positions
[WAC-wlan] ap-id 1
[WAC-wlan-ap-1] radio 0
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/0] calibrate auto-txpower-select disable
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/0] eirp eirp
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/0] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/1] calibrate auto-txpower-select disable
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/1] eirp eirp
Manual power adjustment
Use the CloudCampus APP to test
the signal strength at different
points in the coverage area.
34
Huawei Confidential
• In addition to the preceding methods, you can use the WLAN Planner to simulate
the AP coverage effect on the entire network, configure the AP power based on
the simulation data, and manually adjust the AP power for some points that do
not meet the requirements.
AP Position Adjustment
⚫
The AP deployment design may vary in different scenarios. During network optimization, check whether the current AP deployment
positions are proper. If the positions do not meet requirements or affect services, adjust the corresponding AP deployment positions.
The following uses the AP deployment design for large classrooms in education scenarios as an example:
Incorrect: Install an AP on the wall at the door
Large
classroom A
35
Large
classroom B
Large
classroom C
Correct: Install an AP in the middle of the ceiling
Large
classroom A
Large
classroom B
Large
classroom C
Huawei Confidential
• The detailed AP position planning and design methods have been described in
the network planning process and are not described here.
• In outdoor scenarios, in addition to AP position adjustment, antenna angle
adjustment is also involved.
Antenna Angle Adjustment
⚫
In outdoor scenarios, do not place antennas randomly. Install an antenna correctly according to the radiation
direction of the antenna to ensure that the beam direction evenly covers the specified area. The following figure
uses an outdoor AP with external omnidirectional antennas as an example. In actual installation, the AP must be
vertical.
Incorrect
36
Huawei Confidential
Correct
Adjusting the Number of APs (1/2)
⚫
If coverage holes exist in the coverage area, you are advised to add APs. The following uses AP deployment in
dormitories in education scenarios as an example:
Incorrect: A single AP covers multiple
rooms.
Dorm 1
Dorm 2
Dorm 3
Dorm 4
Correct 1: Each AP covers two
rooms.
Dorm 1
Dorm 2
Dorm 3
Dorm 4
Common glass or wooden
partition wall structure
37
Huawei Confidential
Correct 2: Each AP covers a
single room.
Dorm 1
Dorm 2
Dorm 3
Dorm 4
Metal, brick wall, or concrete
wall structure
Adjusting the Number of APs (2/2)
⚫
If too many APs are deployed in the coverage area, co-channel interference is severe, affecting user experience on
the entire network. You are advised to reduce the number of APs.
Incorrect: Deploy excessive APs, causing severe
interference
38
Huawei Confidential
Correct: Correctly deploy APs based on coverage
requirements
Contents
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
▫ Networking Optimization
▫ Configuration Optimization
▫ Capacity Optimization
▫ Coverage Optimization
◼
Channel Optimization
▫ Client Optimization
4.
39
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Overview of Channel Optimization
⚫
On a WLAN, the operating performance of APs is affected by the radio environment. For example, a high-power AP can interfere
with adjacent APs if they work on overlapping channels. To ensure user experience, channel optimization can be used to reduce the
impact of air interface interference.
⚫
If multiple floors are involved, plan channels horizontally and vertically. During channel optimization, in addition to the signal
interference used in the project, the interference of third-party signals must be considered to ensure the access performance of the
WLAN.
Horizontal
Vertical
11
1
1
149
6
11
165
64
11
1
2.4 GHz cellular coverage
40
Floor
36
Huawei Confidential
44
52
157
5 GHz cellular coverage
Channel Plan
5th floor
1
6
11
4th floor
11
1
6
3rd floor
6
11
1
2nd floor
1
6
11
1st floor
11
1
6
Channel Optimization
⚫
Through channel optimization, co-channel APs and adjacent-channel APs are kept as far as possible to improve the
channel reuse rate and ensure user experience on the entire network.
Network-wide evaluation for the working
channels of APs
Automatic channel adjustment
Severe interference [WAC-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] radio 0
from a large
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/0] calibrate auto-channel-select enable
number of APs
[WAC-wlan-ap-group-ap-group1] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] calibrate auto-channel-select enable
[WAC-wlan-group-radio-ap-group1/1] quit
[WAC-wlan-view] calibrate enable manual
[AC-wlan-view] calibrate manual startup
Manual channel adjustment
•
•
41
Log in to the WAC to check whether
neighboring APs use the same or adjacent
channels.
Log in to the WAC and check the AP
channel utilization to determine the AP
interference.
Interference only
between some APs
[WAC-wlan] ap-id 1
[WAC-wlan-ap-1] radio 0
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/0] calibrate auto-channel-select disable
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/0] channel 20mhz channel
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/0] radio 1
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/1] calibrate auto-channel-select disable
[WAC-wlan-radio-1/1] channel 20mhz channel
Huawei Confidential
• In addition to the preceding methods, you can also use the WLAN Planner to
simulate the working channels of APs on the entire network, configure AP
channels based on the simulated data, and manually adjust the channels of APs
that do not meet the requirements.
Parameter Optimization for Automatic Channel Adjustment
⚫
For the 2.4 GHz radio, non-overlapping channel combinations 1, 6, 11 or 1, 5, 9, and 13 are
recommended. For the 5 GHz radio, non-overlapping channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 149, 153,
157, 161, and 165 are recommended.
⚫
The radio calibration function depends on the channel scanning function. During channel scanning,
radio channel switching is triggered. At the moment of channel switching, the delay of user service
data increases, affecting wireless service experience. Therefore, you are advised to set the calibration to
the off-duty period, for example, in the early morning.
[AC-wlan-view] calibrate enable schedule time 02:00:00
[AC-wlan-view] regulatory-domain-profile name default
[AC-wlan-regulatory-domain-prof-default] dca-channel 2.4g channel-set 1,5,9,13
[AC-wlan-regulatory-domain-prof-default] dca-channel 5g channel-set 36,40,44,48,52,56,60,64,149,153,157,161,165
42
Huawei Confidential
• You can specify a calibration channel set for APs. The APs then select channels
from the channel set to calibrate. This reduces the burden on the APs.
• When configuring a calibration channel set, avoid radar channels and configure
channels supported by STAs. Otherwise, STAs cannot search for radio signals.
Contents
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
▫ Networking Optimization
▫ Configuration Optimization
▫ Capacity Optimization
▫ Coverage Optimization
▫ Channel Optimization
◼
4.
43
Client Optimization
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Client Optimization
⚫
The air interface is a complex environment, and WLAN user experience is related to many factors. In addition to the networking,
configuration, and working channels of the WLAN, you can adjust the parameter settings of STAs to ensure user experience.
1. Upgrade the driver of the wireless network
adapter to the latest version.
2. Set the preferred frequency band to 5 GHz.
3. Ensure that the energy saving mode of the wireless adapter in
the power supply solution is the highest performance version.
Optimal parameter settings on STAs can ensure user experience.
44
Huawei Confidential
• Typical optimization design solutions include:
▫ Upgrade the driver of the wireless network adapter to the latest version.
▫ Set the preferred frequency band of the wireless network adapter to 5 GHz.
▫ In the power supply solution, the energy saving mode of the wireless
adapter is the highest performance.
▫ Disable the WLAN bearer mode.
▫ Disable the U-APSD function.
Contents
45
1.
WLAN Optimization Overview
2.
WLAN Optimization Tools
3.
WLAN Optimization Solutions
4.
WLAN Optimization Cases
Huawei Confidential
Background of an Indoor WLAN Project
⚫
After communicating with the project contact person about
WLAN deployment in a new office area of a company, the
project requirements are collected as follows:

The figure on the right shows the building floor plan. The length of
the building is 50 meters, and services include web browsing and
email.

Among indoor areas, VIP coverage areas include office areas, meeting
rooms, and activity area are VIP coverage areas; common coverage
areas include restrooms, break rooms, and equipment rooms.
Elevators are not covered.

The two office areas can accommodate 400 persons, with each
accommodating 200 persons.

The maximum number of users in the activity area is 100, and the
concurrency rate is 60%. The maximum number of users in each
meeting room is 30, and the concurrency rate is 50%.

The WLAN must support 802.11ax.

The activity area is an atrium area.
46
Huawei Confidential
Information Collection — Analysis of Bandwidth Required by
a Single User
⚫
The following table lists the service types and proportions of users. Based on the following data, you can calculate the average
bandwidth required by each user. With the single-bandwidth requirement of a single user, you can further calculate the total
bandwidth of the WLAN, select APs, and calculate the number of APs.
Service Type
Single-Service Baseline Rate
(Mbps)
Percentage
Excellent
Web browsing
8
4
40%
Streaming media (1080p)
16
12
13%
Streaming media (4K)
50
22.5
10%
VoIP (voice)
0.25
0.125
10%
E-whiteboard
32
16
5%
Email
32
16
5%
File transfer
32
16
5%
Instant messaging
0.5
0.25
12%
Excellent and good criteria indicate user service experience at different
bandwidths.
In this project, excellent user experience is used to plan user bandwidth.
47
Huawei Confidential
Bandwidth required by a single user (Excellent)
Good
8 x 40% + 16 x 13% + 50 x 10% + 0.25 x 10% + 32 x 5% + 32 x 5% +
32 x 5% + 0.5 x 12%
15.165 Mbps
The planned bandwidth for a single user is 16 Mbps.
Information Collection — Requirements Collection
⚫
Optimize the WLAN project requirements collection based on the per-user bandwidth.
Requirement Type
Laws and regulations
Result
Country code: CN
Floor plan
JPEG scale drawing (building length: 50 m)
Coverage mode
Indoor AP with omnidirectional antennas
Office area 1: 200 users, 16 Mbps per-user bandwidth, 70% concurrency rate
Bandwidth
Office area 2: 200 users, 16 Mbps per-user bandwidth, 70% concurrency rate
Meeting room: 30 users, 16 Mbps per-user bandwidth, 50% concurrency rate
Activity area: 100 users, 16 Mbps per-user bandwidth, 60% concurrency rate
Coverage area
Key coverage areas: office areas, meeting rooms, and activity area
Common coverage areas: break room, restrooms, grocery room, and equipment rooms
Field strength
Field strength in key coverage areas ≥ –65 dBm; field strength in common coverage areas ≥ –80 dBm
Edge field strength: ≤ -80 dBm; interference field strength: –60 dBm; leakage field strength: no requirement
Networking mode
AC off-path networking + direct forwarding
Power supply mode
PoE switch for supplying power to APs
STA type
Acceptance items and criteria
48
Huawei Confidential
Common mobile phones and laptops that support 2x2 MIMO, 40 MHz @ 2.4 GHz, 80 MHz @ 5 GHz
No special requirements
Network Evaluation — AP Quantity Evaluation
⚫
When evaluating a WLAN, consider the number and models of APs to meet service requirements.

Take an office area as an example. The number of users in an office area reaches 200, the concurrency rate is 70%, and each user has two STAs (only
one STA is assumed in the activity area). The number of STAs in a single office area is calculated as follows:
Total number of STAs in a single office area = 200 x 2 x 70% = 280

Assume that the bandwidth requirement of a single user is 16 Mbps, a maximum of 18 concurrent STAs can be connected on dual radios or 30
concurrent STAs can be connected on triple radios of a Wi-Fi 6 AP. That is, 16 dual-radio APs or 10 triple-radio APs are required. Considering costs and
scenarios, triple-radio APs are recommended.

According to the preliminary plan, 10 APs are deployed in a single office area, and one AP is deployed in each meeting room. Three to four APs are
deployed in the activity area that is narrow and long and does not allow ceiling mounting for APs.
Maximum Number of Concurrent STAs (All STAs Support Wi-Fi 6 and Dual Spatial Streams) Supported by a Wi-Fi 6 AP (4x4 MIMO, HE40)
49
No.
Access Bandwidth
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Single-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Dual-Radio)
Maximum Number of Concurrent
STAs (Triple-Radio)
1
2 Mbps
56
85
141
2
4 Mbps
39
56
95
3
6 Mbps
27
38
65
4
8 Mbps
21
30
51
5
16 Mbps
12
18
30
Huawei Confidential
• When evaluating the number of APs, check whether the number of onsite APs
meets service requirements. If not, add APs.
Network Evaluation — CloudCampus APP
⚫
Use the CloudCampus APP to perform coverage test and business test.

The Wi-Fi status and stability tests are performed to evaluate the network quality. The overall quality is good.

The roaming experience test result shows that the coverage effect is good.

The interference test result shows that neighboring APs use the same channel. This requires channel optimization.
50
Huawei Confidential
Network Optimization — AP Channel Optimization
⚫
Channel bandwidth planning:

2.4 GHz: The user bandwidth requirement is 16 Mbps, and APs
Omnidirectional coverage
are densely deployed. Using 40 MHz will cause adjacentchannel or co-channel interference. Therefore, 20 MHz
bandwidth is recommended.

13 minus &
50 plus
5 GHz: Channel resources on this frequency band are sufficient
to meet the requirements of 40 MHz. However, only a few
STAs support 80 MHz channel resources. Therefore, 40 MHz
9&
165 minus
bandwidth is recommended.
⚫
Available channels for indoor deployment:


⚫
2.4 GHz: channels 1, 5, 9, and 13
5 GHz: channels 36–64 and 149–165
AP power:

51
Automatic AP power adjustment is enabled on APs by default.
Huawei Confidential
5&
149 plus
1&
36 plus
5&
50 plus
1 & 36 plus
13 minus &
149 plus
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) The CloudCampus APP can be used for test acceptance after
network deployment. Which of the following items are included in the acceptance? (
A. Field strength
B. Interference
C. Rate
D. Network delay
52
Huawei Confidential
1. ABCD
)
Summary
⚫
This course describes the entire WLAN optimization process and solutions, as well as
functions and usage of optimization tools such as the CloudCampus APP.
⚫
Upon completion of this course, you will have a clear understanding of the WLAN
optimization solutions and be able to leverage the optimization tools to optimize WLANs in
practice.
53
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
54
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (1/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
55
Full Name
ACL
Access Control List
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
BSSID
Basic Service Set Identifier
CAC
Call Admission Control
EDCA
Dynamic EDCA Parameter Adjustment
MIMO
Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
P2P
Point-to-Point
PoE
Power over Ethernet
QoS
Quality of Service
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indication
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (2/2)
Acronym/Abbreviation
56
Full Name
GI
Guard Interval
SNR
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SSID
Service Set Identifier
vMoS
Video Mean Opinion Score
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN O&M
Foreword
⚫
Traditional operations and maintenance (O&M) solutions for wireless local area networks (WLANs)
ensure normal network operation through routine maintenance, fault information collection, and
troubleshooting.
⚫
However, traditional O&M monitors only device indicators but lacks user and network association
analysis. That means that user experience may be poor in spite of normal indicators. In addition, issues
that may affect user experience cannot be effectively and proactively identified or analyzed. To address
this, iMaster NCE-CampusInsight uses telemetry technology to collect performance indicators and logs
of network devices in real time and detects network anomalies based on real service traffic. This big
data platform supports centralized data collection, storage, and analysis to process big data efficiently.
It resolves problems faced by traditional O&M, such as difficulties in locating and analyzing faults, in
measuring user experience, and in proactively identifying issues.
2
Huawei Confidential
• We will refer iMaster NCE-CampusInsight as CampusInsight for short.
Objectives
On completion of this course, you will be able to:
3

Describe the traditional WLAN O&M solution.

Describe the CampusInsight intelligent O&M solution.

Describe CampusInsight functions and features.

Understand how to locate common WLAN problems or faults.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
4
1.
Overview of Network O&M
2.
Traditional WLAN O&M
3.
CampusInsight Intelligent O&M
Huawei Confidential
Overview of WLAN O&M
The life cycle of a network typically includes network planning and design, implementation, optimization, and
⚫
maintenance. Network maintenance can be classified into routine O&M and troubleshooting.
Routine O&M aims to prevent problems and minimize unexpected faults. Troubleshooting aims to rectify faults,
⚫
locate fault causes, and provide reference cases for routine O&M, thereby improving O&M efficiency.
Network planning
and design
Network
implementation
Network optimization
Routine O&M
• By checking the versions, network bandwidth, and network security of
network devices, you can obtain the network parameters in normal cases,
helping to lay a solid foundation for troubleshooting.
• Routine O&M can prevent problems and minimize unexpected faults.
Troubleshooting
• Check and locate problems on the live network, and use technical means
to resolve them.
Network O&M
• The accumulated troubleshooting cases can be used as a reference for
routine maintenance.
5
Huawei Confidential
• This chapter focuses on routine maintenance. For details about troubleshooting,
see the following chapters.
Routine O&M Contents and Methods
Routine O&M involves maintenance for device running environments and device software and hardware.
⚫

Device running environment maintenance:
◼
The device running environment is the basis for stable device running, including the equipment room, power supply, and heat dissipation.
◼
Maintenance personnel need to maintain the device running environment onsite. They sometimes need to use professional tools for observation
and measurement.

Device software and hardware maintenance:
◼
The running status of device software and hardware is closely related to running services. Huawei products use the universal Versatile Routing
Platform (VRP). Network engineers must understand common maintenance commands on the VRP.
◼
Maintenance personnel can maintain device software and hardware onsite or remotely, in most cases, using the display command for check and
maintenance.
You can use either of the following methods to perform routine maintenance:
⚫
6

Onsite observation: Observe the hardware running environment of devices.

Remote operation: Learn about the running status of the device software and hardware.
Huawei Confidential
• This course focuses on how to maintain the software and hardware running
status of devices. The physical environment check is not described here.
Routine O&M Means
Traditional WLAN O&M
CampusInsight intelligent O&M
• Visualized experience management
• Device management
WAC web
system
• User journey playback
• Performance management
• Potential fault identification
• Alarm management
• Root cause locating
• Configuration management
AP and STA
data collection
• Check the versions, network bandwidth,
network security, and network performance
of network devices on the WAC web
system.
• Professional engineers are required to
locate faults and optimize networks based
on O&M results.
7
Telemetry
• Predictive network optimization
Second-level network data collection
• Visualized experience: Telemetry-based second-level data collection is supported,
visualizing experience of any user in any application at any moment.
• Minute-level proactive identification and root cause locating for potential faults:


Proactively identifies potential faults based on dynamic baselines and big data
correlation analysis.
Accurately locates root causes using KPI correlation analysis and protocol trace.
• Predictive network optimization: AI technologies are used to intelligently analyze
the load trend of APs to complete predictive optimization of wireless networks.
Huawei Confidential
• Traditional network management:
▫ Web system: The built-in web server of the device provides a graphical user
interface (GUI). You need to log in to the device to be managed from a
terminal through Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS).
▫ CLI mode: You can log in to a device through the console port, Telnet, or
SSH to manage and maintain the device. This mode provides refined device
management but requires that users be familiar with command lines.
Therefore, this course focuses on the web system.
• CampusInsight intelligent O&M:
▫ Huawei CampusInsight, an intelligent network analysis platform, radically
changes the traditional resource status-centric monitoring mode and
applies AI to the network O&M field. Based on existing O&M data (such as
device performance indicators and terminal logs), Huawei CampusInsight
uses Big Data analytics, AI algorithms, and more cutting-edge analytics
technologies to digitize user experience, helping customers quickly detect
network problems and improve user experience accordingly.
▫ CampusInsight uses Telemetry technology to performance indicators and
logs of network devices and detects network anomalies based on real
service traffic. Telemetry is a next-generation network monitoring
technology. It uses HTTP/2 and ProtoBuf to collect data from remote
devices, which is much more efficient than the traditional SNMP mode.
▫ This big data platform supports centralized data collection, storage, and
analysis to process big data efficiently.
▫ In addition to using algorithms to improve efficiency, CampusInsight
leverages scenario-based continuous learning and accumulated expert
experience to free O&M personnel from complex alarms and noises, making
O&M more automated and intelligent.
Contents
9
1.
Overview of Network O&M
2.
Traditional WLAN O&M
3.
CampusInsight Intelligent O&M
Huawei Confidential
WLAN Maintenance
⚫
You can perform routine maintenance for WACs and Fit APs on the WAC web system, including:
User experience
Device inspection
WAC
Fit AP
10
⚫
Check the WAC indicator status.
⚫
Check the online status of STAs.
⚫
Check WAC alarm information.
⚫
⚫
Check the WAC status.
Check reasons for STAs'
onboarding failures.
⚫
Check the WAC license status.
⚫
Check the AP indicator status.
⚫
Check the radio health.
⚫
Check the AP status.
⚫
Check the radio status.
⚫
Check whether APs need to be
replaced.
⚫
Check radio parameters such as
channel utilization.
Huawei Confidential
User
statistics ⚫
Radio
Check the overall STA distribution.
Checking the Indicator Status
⚫
Observe indicators on each device. If you find any indicator in an abnormal state, record fault information
immediately and take measures based on the description of the indicator states.
Category
WAC
Indicator
State Description
PWR (power supply)
Steady green: The power module is working properly.
SYS (system)
Slow blinking green: The system is running properly.
USB (USB port)
Steady green: A USB flash drive is connected and works properly.
CLOUD (cloud management)
Steady green: The cloud management controller is properly connected.
Fan indicator
Blinking green: The fan module is working properly.
Service port indicator
Steady green: The link is established.
Blinking green: Data is being received or transmitted.
Off: No link is established.
Slowly blinking white: The system is running properly, the Ethernet connection is normal.
AP
Single indicator
Quickly blinking white: This indicator state indicates a software upgrade, onboarding request,
or onboarding failure.
Steady red: The system is faulty.
* In this example, the AirEngine 9700-M1 is used as the WAC, and the AirEngine 5761-11 is
used as the AP. For details about other models, see related product manuals.
11
Huawei Confidential
• If all indicators on an AP are off, the indicators may have been turned off
through the configuration. It is recommended that you run the undo led off
command on the WAC to turn on the indicators and then check the indicator
status again.
Checking WAC Alarm Information
⚫
Log in to the web system, choose Maintenance > AC Maintenance > Alarm & Event, and check whether critical or
major alarms exist.
⚫
Alarms can be classified as critical, major, minor, warning, indeterminate, or cleared alarms in descending order of
severity. During routine maintenance, critical and major alarms must be handled in a timely manner.
12
Huawei Confidential
• Critical: A fault affects normal operation of the system. Effective measures must
be taken immediately.
• Major: A fault affects the QoS and requires emergency measures.
• Minor: A fault does not affect the QoS. To avoid worse faults, you need to
observe or process the fault properly.
• Warning: A potential fault exists and may affect services. You need to
troubleshoot the fault accordingly.
• Indeterminate: The alarm severity is not determined and the alarm impact varies
depending on the live network.
• Cleared: One or more previous alarms have been cleared.
Checking the WAC Status
⚫
Log in to the web system, and choose Monitoring > AC > AC to check whether the WAC is working properly.

Check whether the CPU usage and memory usage of the WAC are lower than 80%. If either of them is high, observe the CPU usage or memory usage
for a period of time (5-10 minutes). If the CPU usage or memory usage remains high during this period, record fault information and rectify the fault.

Check whether the WAC temperature is normal. If the WAC temperature is out of the operating temperature range, check whether fans of the WAC
are running normally and whether the ambient temperature is in the normal range. If the temperature keeps increasing and exceeds the upper
threshold, the device will be powered off automatically, causing service interruption.
13
Huawei Confidential
Checking the WAC License Status
⚫
Log in to the web system, and choose Maintenance > AC Maintenance > License to check whether License status
displays Normal. If License status does not display Normal, reload and activate the license.
⚫
Check whether the number of APs connected to the WAC is in the expected range. If an AP fails to go online, check
the AP status to analyze the cause. For details, see the following part describing how to check the AP status.
14
Huawei Confidential
Checking the AP Status (1/3)
⚫
Log in to the web system, choose Monitoring >
⚫
Summary, and check the AP health score.

A higher score indicates better health. If the score is
If the AP health score is 100, choose Monitoring >
AP to view the CPU usage and memory usage.

Check whether the CPU usage of the AP exceeds 90%
greater than or equal to 60, the indicator is normal. If
and whether its memory usage exceeds 80%. If the CPU
the score is less than 60, the indicator is low.
usage or memory usage is high, observe the CPU usage
or memory usage for 5–10 minutes. If it remains high,
record the CPU usage and memory usage data.
15
Huawei Confidential
• AP health score = (100% – Number of APs with an abnormal indicator/Total
number of APs) x 100
• Four indicators that affect the AP health:
▫ Proportion of abnormal APs (for example, APs in the idle or fault state)
▫ Access failure rate > 20%
▫ Disconnection rate > 20%
▫ Number of access STAs > 40
Checking the AP Status (2/3)
⚫
If the AP health score is lower than 100, check the version, status, STA access failure ratio, STA going-offline ratio,
number of STAs, CPU usage, and memory usage.

Check AP version information. Check whether the AP version matches the WAC version. If not, upgrade the AP to a version
matching the WAC version. Choose Maintenance > Device Upgrade > AP Upgrade to check the APs whose versions do not match
the WAC version.

16
Check the AP status. Choose Monitoring > AP and check whether the AP status is normal.
Huawei Confidential
• Check the AP status.
▫ Check whether the AP status displays as normal. Common AP states and
corresponding handling suggestions are described as follows:
▪ normal: The AP is running properly, and no action is required.
▪ fault: The AP failed to go online. Check the network environment and
AP onboarding configuration, and reconfigure the AP to go online.
▪ name-conflicted: Another AP with the same name has already gone
online. Rename the current AP.
▪ ver-mismatch: The AP and WAC versions do not match. Upgrade the
AP to a version matching the WAC version by referring to the AP
upgrade guide.
▪ download: The AP is upgrading. Wait until the upgrade is complete.
▪ config: The AP is initializing the configuration. Wait until the
initialization is complete.
▪ committing: The WLAN configuration is being delivered to the AP.
Wait until the configuration delivery is complete.
▪ standby: This is the AP status displayed on the standby WAC, and no
action is required.
▪ countryCode-mismatch: The AP version does not support the country
code configured on the WAC. Upgrade the AP or modify the country
code on the WAC.
▪ If the AP is in another state or its state cannot restore to normal after
you perform the preceding operations, collect network configuration
information.
Checking the AP Status (3/3)

Check the STA access failure ratio and logout ratio. Generally, the user access failure rate and logout rate cannot exceed 20%.

Check the number of STAs. Check whether more than 40 STAs connect to the same AP. If more than 40 STAs associate with the same AP, user
experience will deteriorate. In this case, reduce the maximum number of STAs that can associate with a VAP to deliver good experience to each user.

Choose Diagnosis > Intelligent Diagnosis, select an AP, and start the diagnosis. Handle the problem found in the diagnosis according to the
suggestions provided in the diagnostic result.
17
Huawei Confidential
• Check the STA access failure ratio and logout ratio.
▫ Check whether STA Access Failure Ratio and Logout Ratio values exceed
20%. If the STA access failure ratio or logout ratio exceeds 20%, record the
values.
• Check the number of STAs.
▫ Check whether more than 40 STAs connect to the same AP. More STAs
connected to a single AP mean fewer resources for each STA and therefore
deteriorated user experience.
• Only APs of specific models support the intelligent diagnosis function.
Checking Whether APs Need to Be Replaced
⚫
If you suspect that an AP is faulty, perform the following operations to quickly replace the AP and retain the original AP
configuration:
18

Replace the AP hardware.

Log in to the web system and choose Configuration > AP Config > AP Config > AP Info. Select the AP to be replaced and click Replace.

Enter the MAC address of the new AP and click OK.

After the replacement, the new AP with the ID of the original AP re-associates with the WAC and inherits all the data configured for the original AP.
Huawei Confidential
• Note: The model of the new AP must be the same as that of the original AP.
Checking the STA Status (1/2)
⚫
Log in to the web system, choose Monitoring >
⚫
Summary, and check the user health score.

If the user health score is 100, check Login Failure
Record and User Distribution.
A higher score indicates better health. If the score is

Choose Monitoring > User > Online User Statistics >
greater than or equal to 60, the indicator is normal.
User Login Failure Records to view users' login failure
If the score is less than 60, the indicator is low.
records. Locate and rectify the fault based on the login
failure causes.

Choose Monitoring > User > User Distribution to view
the user distribution. Check whether too many STAs
are connected to a single AP or a single radio. If STAs
are unevenly distributed, record STA distribution.
19
Huawei Confidential
• User health score = (100% – Number of users with an abnormal indicator/Total
number of users) x 100
• Four indicators that affect the user health:
▫ Rate < 12 Mbps
▫ SNR < 20 dB
▫ Downlink retransmission rate > 50%
▫ Downlink packet loss rate > 5%
Checking the STA Status (2/2)
⚫
If the user health score is lower than 100, check the negotiated rate, SNR, retransmission rate, packet loss rate,
login failure records, and user distribution.
⚫
Choose Monitoring > User > Online User Statistics. In the user list, check whether the negotiated rate, SNR, retransmission rate,
and packet loss rate of each user are normal.
20
Huawei Confidential
• Check whether the negotiated rate is lower than 12 Mbps. If the negotiation rate
of a user is lower than 12 Mbps, choose Configuration > AP Config > Profile >
Radio Management, select 2G Radio Profile or 5G Radio Profile, and set a larger
value for Maximum rate.
• Check whether the SNR of the user is lower than 20 dB. If the SNR of a user is
lower than 20 dB, check whether there is severe interference in the radio
environment, and record configuration, network deployment, and SNR data.
• Check whether the retransmission rate is greater than 50% and whether the
packet loss rate is greater than 5%. If the retransmission ratio exceeds 50% or
the packet loss ratio exceeds 5%, check whether network communication is
normal and whether the radio environment affects data transmission on the
network, and record related information.
Checking the Radio Status
⚫
Log in to the web system, choose Monitoring > Summary, and check the radio health score.
⚫
If the radio health score is lower than 100, choose Monitoring > Radio to view the number of access STAs, noise
strength, channel utilization, rate, downlink retransmission rate, and downlink packet loss rate of a radio.
21
Huawei Confidential
• Radio health score = (100% – Number of radios with an abnormal
indicator/Total number of radios) x 100
• Four indicators that affect the radio health:
▫ Channel utilization > 70%
▫ Noise strength > –80 dBm
▫ Interference ratio > 40%
▫ Downlink retransmission rate > 50%
▫ Downlink packet loss rate > 5%
• Check whether the radio channel utilization exceeds 70%. If so, choose
Configuration > AP Config > Radio Planning/Calibration to adjust the working
channel of the AP radio during off-peak hours.
• Check the noise strength and interference ratio. If the noise strength is greater
than –80 dBm or the interference ratio is greater than 40%, check the quality of
the radio network environment, check whether there are wireless interference
devices, and record related information.
• Check the downlink retransmission rate and downlink packet loss rate. If the
downlink retransmission rate exceeds 50% or the downlink packet loss rate
exceeds 5%, check whether the network communication quality and wireless
network environment affect network data transmission, and record related
information.
Contents
1.
Overview of Network O&M
2.
Traditional WLAN O&M
3.
CampusInsight Intelligent O&M
◼
Overview of Intelligent O&M
▫ Real-Time Experience Visualization
▫ Minute-Level Fault Demarcation
▫ Intelligent Network Optimization
22
Huawei Confidential
Challenges Faced by Traditional WLAN O&M
Precise
detection
Experience
awareness
Issue
identification
Traditional O&M collects data within
In traditional O&M, only device
Traditional O&M personnel
minutes based on SNMP. The data
metrics are monitored. However,
cannot proactively identify
cannot be obtained in real time once
user experience may be poor
and analyze issues that may
an issue occurs. Moreover, convenient
when the metrics are normal.
affect user experience until
backtracking method is unavailable.
There is no correlation analysis
users complain about them.
between users and networks.
Difficult issue locating
and analysis
23
Huawei Confidential
Difficult user experience
measuring
Difficult proactive issue
identification
CampusInsight: Improving User and Service Experience
24
Real-time experience visualization
Minute-level
fault demarcation
Intelligent network optimization
• Each area: provides multi-dimensional
wired and wireless network health
graphs to intuitively display the
network status and user experience on
the entire network or in each area.
• Proactive issue identification: uses the AI
algorithm continuously trained by more
than 200,000 Huawei devices to
proactively identifies 85% of potential
network faults.
• Real-time simulation feedback: evaluates
channel conflicts on wireless networks in
real time and provides optimization
suggestions based on neighbor and radio
information about devices on each floor.
• Each user: displays network experience
(who, when, which AP is connected to,
experience, and issue) of each user in
real time throughout the journey,
making faults easier to be traced.
• Minute-level fault locating: uses the
fault inference engine to locate issues
within minutes, identify root causes of
the issues, and provide effective fault
rectification suggestions.
• Each application: perceives experience
of audio and video applications in real
time, demarcates faulty devices quickly
and intelligently, and analyzes the root
cause of poor-QoE issues.
• Intelligent fault prediction: learns
historical data through AI to dynamically
generate a baseline, and compares and
analyzes real-time data with the
baseline to predict possible faults.
Huawei Confidential
• Predictive optimization: identifies edge APs
and predicts the AP load trend based on
historical data analysis, and performs
predictive optimization on wireless
networks.
• AI roaming: establishes roaming baselines
based on different terminal types, and
intelligently determine the optimal
roaming time, providing users with
intelligent lossless roaming experience.
CampusInsight: Logical Architecture
⚫
CampusInsight leverages the Huawei-developed big data analytics platform, receives device data
through telemetry, and analyzes and displays network data using intelligent algorithms.
Service
Access
analysis
Issue
analysis
Performance
experience
User
APIs
Intelligent analysis system
CampusInsight
AI engine
Big data analytics platform
Spark
Druid
Machine learning
algorithm library
HDFS
Kafka
Machine learning
framework
Telemetry
Campus
25
...
Huawei Confidential
• Service:
▫ Issue identification: identifies issues related to connections, air interface
performance, roaming, and devices.
▫ Access analysis and performance experience: analyzes the connection and
performance experience issues of wireless users.
▫ User and network profiles: retrospects user journeys.
• Data analysis:
▫ Data storage: real-time flow preprocessing, distributed processing of offline
flows, and data storage services
▫ Data analysis: mode identification, AI engine, and data aggregation and
query
• Data collection:
▫ Data collection: multi-dimensional data related to users, radios, APs,
switches, and user logs
CampusInsight: External Interfaces
⚫
The southbound interfaces of CampusInsight are used to connect to and manage devices, using the
following protocols: SNMP, HTTP/2 + ProtoBuf, Syslog, and SFTP.
SNMP
HTTP/2 + ProtoBuf
Syslog
SFTP
• Standard SNMPv2c and
SNMPv3 are supported.
• It is used to collect device metric
packets.
• SNMP enables southbound
interfaces of CampusInsight
to connect network devices.
• HTTP/2 can be used to
authenticate and encrypt
communication channels over
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
• It is a protocol that
forwards system logs
on an IP network.
• It provides a secure
network encryption
method for file
transfer.
• SNMP is an application-layer
network management
protocol based on the TCP/IP
architecture. SNMP uses UDP
as its transport-layer
protocol, and can be used to
manage network devices
that support proxy processes.
26
• ProtoBuf is a Google-developed
data serialization protocol
(similar to XML, JSON, and
Hessian), which can serialize data
and is widely used in data storage
and communication protocols.
• It is an industry
standards-compliant
protocol for
recording device logs.
• CampusInsight uses
SFTP to collect APrelated features.
• CampusInsight
receives log data
reported by devices
through the Syslog
protocol.
Huawei Confidential
• SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c are insecure and may bring security risks. You are advised
to use the secure SNMPv3.
CampusInsight Application Scenario: On-Premises Scenario
⚫
When deployed in independent mode,
CampusInsight can intelligently analyze wireless
and wired devices on the campus network of an
enterprise. The following networks are
Router
supported:

All WACs (including native ACs) + Fit APs

All WACs (including native ACs) + Central APs +
RUs

27
Switches + WLAN devices + BRAS devices
WAC
Core switch
Access switch
AP
AP
Huawei Confidential
• Broadband remote access server (BRAS): a network device that implements
access, authentication, accounting, control, and management of users connected
in various broadband network access modes. The NE8000 or ME60 provides the
BRAS function.
CampusInsight Application Scenario: Interconnection with
CloudCampus (Huawei Public Cloud Scenario)
⚫
In the Huawei public cloud scenario, the cloud
management platform (iMaster NCE-Campus and
Cloud management
platform
CampusInsight) is uniformly managed by Huawei
cloud management and operations team and
provides the SaaS service for end users. Devices on
Huawei public cloud DC
Carrier network
tenant networks are connected to the Huawei cloud
management platform through the carrier network.
WAC
WAC
Enterprise
network
Tenant A
28
Tenant B
Huawei Confidential
• Device restrictions: Management and intelligent analysis are supported for
Huawei switches, WACs, and APs.
• Networking structure: Huawei cloud management and operations team deploys
CampusInsight and iMaster NCE-Campus on Huawei public cloud DC, and
manages devices through iMaster NCE-Campus. CampusInsight synchronizes
device management information from iMaster NCE-Campus. Tenants need to
purchase management licenses of iMaster NCE-Campus and CampusInsight.
CampusInsight Application Scenario: Interconnection with
CloudCampus (MSP-owned Cloud Scenario)
⚫
MSPs purchase the controller (iMaster NCE-Campus)
and analyzer (CampusInsight) for operational
purposes. Software can be deployed in their DCs or
on the public cloud. MSPs develop their tenants and
provide SaaS services for tenants. Tenant network
Cloud
management
platform
MSP DC
Carrier network
devices connect to the DCs of MSPs or public cloud
through the carrier network.
WAC
WAC
Tenant network
Tenant A
29
Tenant B
Huawei Confidential
• Device restrictions: Management and intelligent analysis are supported for
Huawei switches, WACs, and APs.
CampusInsight Application Scenario: Interconnection with
CloudCampus (On-Premises Scenario)
⚫
An enterprise purchases the Huawei cloud
management platform (iMaster NCE-Campus and
CampusInsight) and deploys the platform in the
enterprise DC. O&M personnel of the enterprise
Cloud
management
platform
Enterprise DC
Carrier network
maintain the cloud management platform and
enterprise network. The platform is used within the
enterprise. The enterprise purchases related licenses
WAC
WAC
from the Huawei service team.
Enterprise
network
Enterprise HQ
30
Enterprise branch
Huawei Confidential
• Device restrictions: Management and intelligent analysis are supported for
Huawei cloud switches, cloud WACs, cloud APs, and BRAS devices.
• Networking structure: An enterprise deploys CampusInsight and iMaster NCECampus in its DC, and manages devices through iMaster NCE-Campus.
CampusInsight synchronizes device management information from iMaster NCECampus. The enterprise needs to purchase management licenses of iMaster NCECampus and CampusInsight.
CampusInsight: Functions and Features
Real-time experience
visualization
Minute-level fault
demarcation
Intelligent network
optimization
31
Huawei Confidential
Network
User
Application
Network Spectrum Large-screen Topology
Third-party
health
analysis
dashboard management
device
management
management
User Terminal
journey dialing
test
Mainstream Visualization
application and traffic
analysis
Individual fault analysis
Protocol
trace
Mainstream
application analysis
Poor-QoE
user analysis
Intelligent radio calibration
Group fault analysis
Wireless group
fault analysis
Wired group
fault analysis
AI roaming
Contents
1.
Overview of Network O&M
2.
Traditional WLAN O&M
3.
CampusInsight Intelligent O&M
▫ Overview of Intelligent O&M
◼
Real-Time Experience Visualization
▫ Minute-Level Fault Demarcation
▫ Intelligent Network Optimization
32
Huawei Confidential
Wireless Network Health: Network-wide Status Visualization
Rank different networks or different
areas of one network in terms of
comprehensive experience evaluation.
Evaluate the overall health of a
campus network based on a
weighted algorithm.
Automatically evaluate network quality
and send evaluation reports.
Diagnose and display details
about key experience metrics.
33
Huawei Confidential
• Wireless network health refers to the comprehensive experience evaluation of a
wireless network.
• Diagnose and display details about key experience metrics.
▫ With this module, the system diagnoses the health of experience metrics
and factors that affect the metrics.
▫ Key metrics that affect campus network service experience include access
success rate, time required for access, and signal coverage and interference,
as well as roaming, capacity, and throughput fulfillment rates.
• Evaluate the overall health of a campus network based on a weighted algorithm.
▫ The weighted algorithm can be used to comprehensively evaluate key
metrics of the campus network.
• Rank different networks or different areas of one network in terms of
comprehensive experience evaluation.
▫ With this module, the system identifies networks or areas at the bottom of
the ranking in terms of overall health status or key metrics. The network
O&M team can then upgrade the overall health of the campus network by
continuously improving the metrics at the bottom of the ranking.
• Automatically evaluate network quality, send evaluation reports, and provide
professional evaluation services.
▫ Network quality evaluation reports including the network overview, metric
details, and rectification suggestions are periodically generated, enabling
data-based network experience evaluation.
Network Health Evaluation Model
⚫
Intuitive display of wireless network quality based on six categories in three dimensions:
Access experience
Check whether users can access the network properly.
Roaming experience
Check whether the network experience is smooth and
whether frame freezing occurs during user movement.
Check whether interference exists on the wireless
Performance experience network and whether capacity expansion is required.
Dimension
Access
experience
Roaming
experience
Performance
experience
34
Evaluation Metric
Root Cause Metric
Access success rate
Association/Authentication/DHCP success rate
Timed required for
access
Time required for
association/authentication/DHCP allocation
Roaming
fulfillment rate
Roaming success rate/Roaming duration
Signal and
interference
RSSI fulfillment rate and interference
fulfillment rate
Capacity health
Channel utilization fulfillment rate and user
quantity fulfillment rate
Throughput
fulfillment rate
Proportion of dual band capable client
preferring 2.4G, air interface congestion
fulfillment rate, and physical layer bandwidth
Huawei Confidential
Exporting Health Reports
⚫
Network quality evaluation reports including the network overview, metric details, and rectification suggestions are
generated periodically or in real time, enabling data-based network experience evaluation.
35
Network overview
Metric details
Rectification suggestions
Intuitively display the resource
overview, user overview, and quality
overview across the entire network.
Identify issue objects from seven
dimensions of the quality evaluation
system and improve user experience .
Identify root causes of top network issues and
provide rectification suggestions to guide
users to continuously improve network quality.
Huawei Confidential
User Journey: Real-Time Experience Visualization for
Each User at Each Moment
Step 1: Experience overview
View the overall user experience metrics, such as
the average latency, experience time on the day,
traffic, average RSSI, average bandwidth, and
average packet loss rate.
Step 2: Experience trend
View the fluctuations of user experience metrics
(including RSSI, bandwidth,
rate, packet loss rate, and latency) and identify
issue objects, driving continuous improvement from
poor experience to good experience.
Step 3: Journey playback
View the user experience data at each moment,
including the connected AP and experience metric.
36
Huawei Confidential
Service Topology: Fault Visualization
⚫
The service topology collects statistics on the status, access, congestion, and error packet issues, as well as displays
the number of users and traffic volume based on sites, regions, buildings, and floors. This allows administrators to
quickly search for and view the buildings that users pass by, helping administrators quickly identify campus network
issues. It is recommended that the total number of sites, regions, buildings, and floors to be viewed be within 10.
Otherwise, the sites, regions, buildings, and floors may overlap.
Category
37
Issue
Abnormal status
Port alternating between up and down
states, and port of switch alternating
between up and down states.
Access fault
Failed authentication and timed out
authentication.
Congestion
Port congestion and queue congestion.
Error packets
Port error packets exceeding threshold and
error packets continuously increasing on
the port.
Huawei Confidential
Spectrum Analysis: Interference Visualization
⚫
With spectrum analysis, CampusInsight displays the status of all channels by AP in a user-friendly
manner.
3
CampusInsight displays the status of
all channels by AP in real time and
allows administrators to view the
historical trend chart, non-Wi-Fi
interference source types, and RSSI.
All-channel status monitoring
Historical trend in the channel dimension
2
The AP reports channel scanning
data to CampusInsight through WMI.
1
...
38
CampusInsight scans the status of
all channels by AP in real time,
including the co-channel
interference ratio, non-Wi-Fi
interference ratio, and normal usage
ratio of these channels.
Wi-Fi/Non-Wi-Fi interference source detection list
Huawei Confidential
• WLAN Maintaining Insight (WMI): CampusInsight can function as the WMI server
to receive KPI information reported by APs.
Application Analysis: Network-wide Application Visualization
⚫
Signature identification: determines an application by detecting the signatures in data packets after the system
analyzes service flows passing through a device, and compares the analysis result with the signature database on
the device.
⚫
Devices report traffic statistics to CampusInsight based on NetStream or applications. It is recommended that traffic
statistics be reported based on applications.
Traffic statistics of multiple applications on the entire network
39
Huawei Confidential
Traffic analysis details of a single application
Alarm Monitoring
⚫
The current alarm list is provided. The system proactively displays alarms in the current alarm list, including unacknowledged and
uncleared alarms, acknowledged and uncleared alarms, and acknowledged and cleared alarms. O&M personnel can monitor and
handle alarms on the current alarm page.
⚫
From the perspective of wireless networks, alarms include high channel utilization, weak-signal coverage, air interface congestion,
high interference, client capacity, authentication failure, multiple users going offline, and dual-band-capable client preferring 2.4G.
40
Huawei Confidential
• Alarm logs:
▫ The alarm log list is provided. O&M personnel can view current and
historical alarms.
• Historical alarms
▫ The historical alarm list is provided. O&M personnel can view
acknowledged and cleared alarms and export historical alarms for network
analysis.
• Masked alarms
▫ The masked alarm list is provided. O&M personnel can view masked alarms
and determine whether masking rules are appropriate.
• Alarm log statistics
▫ Alarms are collected and analyzed from different dimensions, enabling
O&M personnel to centrally analyze network alarms.
• Alarm setting
▫ Visualized pages are provided for managing alarm rules and settings.
• Remote notification
▫ Remote alarm notifications can be sent through emails and SMS messages.
When O&M personnel cannot browse alarms on the Current Alarms page,
remote alarm notification enables them to receive SMS or email
notifications about alarms so that they can handle alarms in real time.
Contents
1.
Overview of Network O&M
2.
Traditional WLAN O&M
3.
CampusInsight Intelligent O&M
▫ Overview of Intelligent O&M
▫ Real-Time Experience Visualization
◼
Minute-Level Fault Demarcation
▫ Intelligent Network Optimization
41
Huawei Confidential
CampusInsight: Individual and Group Issue Analysis
⚫
During campus network O&M, administrators may encounter the following issues:

Individual issues: for example, access failures caused by incorrect terminal configurations.

Group issues: for example, group authentication failures caused by authentication server faults and weak-signal coverage issues
caused by insufficient AP coverage.
Individual fault analysis
1
Journey analysis
2
Access analysis
Group fault analysis
⚫
User journey
(wireless + wired)
Association failure
Slow association
Protocol trace
(wireless + wired)
⚫
⚫
⚫
3 Experience analysis
4 Application analysis
Correlation analysis of
poor-QoE users
(Wireless)
Voice/Video application
quality awareness
(wireless + wired)
2
⚫
42
Connectivity issues
1
⚫
⚫
⚫
Authentication
⚫
failure
⚫
Authentication
timeout
Slow authentication
3
Roaming issues
Repeated roaming
Roaming exception
⚫
⚫
⚫
DHCP failure
Slow DHCP
User gateway
unreachable
Air interface
performance issues
Weak coverage ⚫
High channel
⚫
utilization
⚫
High
interference
Failure of 5Gprior access
Client capacity
Air interface
congestion
Huawei Confidential
• CampusInsight analyzes individual issues encountered during network O&M from
the perspective of the access network, user journey, experience, and application
detection. It analyzes protocol processes, visualizes user journey, performs
correlation analysis of poor experience, and detects poor-QoE applications,
helping administrators maintain networks and ensure high-quality user
experience.
• In terms of group issue analysis, CampusInsight:
▫ Quickly identifies a variety of network access issues such as group failure
and slow interaction that occur at the association, authentication, and
DHCP phases. It also quickly and accurately identifies the root causes of
each issue by matching them against a fault knowledge base and provides
troubleshooting suggestions accordingly.
▫ Monitors air interface performance data in real time. On the basis of realtime performance monitoring and Huawei's expertise in WLAN field,
CampusInsight intelligently identifies six types of air interface issues that
affect network access experience after users get connected to the wireless
network and provides troubleshooting suggestions accordingly.
▫ Analyzes the process when a user roams between APs to intelligently
identify network access experience issues when the user moves and
provides troubleshooting suggestions accordingly.
Individual Issue Analysis: Journey Analysis
⚫
A user at a site reports that the Wi-Fi experience is poor. With the user journey function, the O&M personnel find that the packet
loss rate is high, the RSSI is low, and the weak-signal coverage issue occurs during the user's access to the wireless network.
Step 1: Experience overview
It shows that the average packet loss rate of the user is
high (> 18%).
Step 2: Experience trend
View the Wi-Fi experience trend of the user. It shows that
the user's Wi-Fi experience deteriorates in a period of time
when the RSSI is low and the packet loss rate is high.
Step 3: Journey playback
View the user journey playback details. It shows that the
packet loss rate is high and the RSSI is low, together with a
weak-signal coverage issue.
43
Huawei Confidential
• With user journey, CampusInsight focuses on the actual Wi-Fi experience of users
and accurately traces the entire Wi-Fi access process of each user. The traced
information vividly presents the user, time, location, connected AP, experience,
and issue.
Individual Fault Analysis: Protocol Trace
⚫
A user at a site reports that the Wi-Fi cannot be connected. With the protocol trace function of CampusInsight, O&M personnel
detect that the DHCP address pool is full, causing the failure to assign IP addresses to mobile phones. Then the O&M personnel
modify the configuration to expand the range of available IP addresses in the DHCP address pool.
Step 1: Check the status
Check the access result in the session list to determine
whether access issues have occurred.
Step 2: Check the interaction
Check the protocol interaction at the association,
authentication, and DHCP phases to determine the
phase where an issue occurred. Ultimately, it is
confirmed that the issue occurred in the DHCP phase,
leading to the access failure.
Step 3: Check root causes
Check the possible root causes and rectification
suggestions.
44
Huawei Confidential
• With protocol trace, CampusInsight performs refined protocol-level analysis for
the three Wi-Fi access phases (association, authentication, and DHCP), presents
protocol interaction details at each phase, and provides root causes and
rectification suggestions for user access issues. This makes protocol trace a useful
tool for resolving Wi-Fi connection failures.
Individual Fault Analysis: Poor-QoE User Analysis
⚫
O&M personnel at a site perform routine inspection on users and the Wi-Fi experience of a user is poor. With the correlation analysis
function, they find that the most possible cause for the poor Wi-Fi experience is the high radio interference. Then they perform
troubleshooting based on the rectification suggestions. The fault is rectified.
Step 1: AI-based identification
Use AI algorithms to perform outlier detection and
intelligently identify the moments when Wi-Fi experience
deterioration occurs (marked by red shadows).
Step 2: AI-based analysis
During the Wi-Fi deterioration period, the radio
interference ratio is high, with a metric correlation of
71%, the highest among all related metrics.
Step 3: AI-based issue closure
CampusInsight provides appropriate rectification
suggestions based on the long-term O&M expertise of
Huawei engineers.
45
Huawei Confidential
• With correlation analysis for Wi-Fi experience deterioration, CampusInsight uses
the AI algorithm to perform outliers and intelligently identify users whose Wi-Fi
experience deteriorates. In addition, CampusInsight uses the correlation analysis
algorithm to analyze the most relevant network metric, so as to locate the root
causes of issues and provide appropriate rectification suggestions based on the
long-term O&M expertise of Huawei engineers.
Individual Fault Analysis: Audio Quality Analysis
⚫
O&M personnel at a site provide assurance for important video conferences attended by company executives and proactively inspect
the conference application quality. After detecting a quality issue, O&M personnel use the application troubleshooting function to
quickly demarcate the packet loss location of application flows and rectify the issue.
Step 1: Application quality identification
View basic information such as the 5-tuple of an
application flow and quality overview such as
packet loss, out-of-order, and jitter.
Step 2: Analysis and demarcation
Check the physical topology path and actual path
of the application flow. Yellow links indicate that
the air interface quality is poor. It is suspected
that the quality issue occurs on AP4.
Step 3: Correlation analysis
View the quality metric trend of application flows
on the device and metrics of ports to facilitate
issue locating.
46
Huawei Confidential
• With application quality awareness and fault demarcation, CampusInsight allows
O&M personnel to view the quality of specific application flows and demarcate
issues for application flows with poor quality. When an issue occurs on the
campus network, the O&M personnel can rectify the issue based on the packet
loss location. The network is fault-free if the issue occurs on the external
networks of the campus.
Group Fault Analysis: Connectivity Issue Analysis (1/2)
Exception identification: exception detection for network access behaviors.

Non-fault failure scenario (area A): Wireless network user access failures always exist, but they may not be faults.

Denoising of abnormal clients (area B): Impacts of individual clients are excluded. The failure rate increases sharply due to
abnormal clients. Although the failure rate exceeds the baseline, it is not an issue.

Intelligently identifying issues with a large number of failed clients and a large failure rate through machine learning (area C):
47
Area A
Green curve:
user quantity
Huawei Confidential
Blue curve:
failure rate
Area B
Area C
Gray shadow:
failure rate baseline
User quantity from low to high
Intelligently identify group issues with large impact scopes.
Failure rate from low to high
⚫
Area A
Wireless network user access failures always exist.
Area B
Impacts of individual clients are excluded.
Area C
A large number of failed clients exist.
Group Fault Analysis: Connectivity Issue Analysis (2/2)
⚫
Pattern identification: Causes may be different for issues with the same symptom. Through pattern identification,
possible causes can be found. In addition, features of clients that fail to access the network are abstracted and
analyzed using clustering algorithms.
⚫
Root cause analysis: Analyze possible root causes based on client online logs and provide rectification suggestions,
helping O&M personnel resolve issues.
Root cause analysis and rectification suggestions
Fault pattern
48
Huawei Confidential
Group Fault Analysis: Weak-Signal Coverage
⚫
The system identifies coverage issues when a batch of users have weak-signal coverage for a period and displays
the duration of weak-signal coverage, average RSSI of users, and number of affected users. Then the system
analyzes possible causes of the weak-signal coverage issues, and provides rectification suggestions on the issues.
Step 1: Issue detection
Intelligently identify weak-signal coverage issues.
Step 2: Issue analysis
Provide the RSSI distribution of users related to the
weak-signal coverage issues and fluctuations of the
AP power, facilitating issue analysis.
Step 3: Issue locating
Rectify issues based on the rectification suggestions.
49
Huawei Confidential
Group Fault Analysis: High Interference Issue
⚫
The system quickly identifies high co-channel interference issues lasting for a period of time. The high interference lasting duration,
number of affected users, and traffic used under the high interference radio can be analyzed. Then the system dynamically analyzes
possible root causes of high interference in different scenarios and provides operation suggestions.
Step 1: Intelligent identification
Quickly identify high co-channel interference issues
lasting for a period of time and record them as high
interference issues.
Step 2: Association analysis
Analyze metrics associated with high interference,
such as high interference lasting duration, number
of affected users, and traffic used under the high
interference radio.
Step 3: Issue locating
Provide possible causes and suggestions to help
locate root causes of the issues.
50
Huawei Confidential
Group Fault Analysis: Roaming Exception
⚫
The system identifies issues indicating that roaming exceptions frequently occur on an AP. The number of APs and
users affected by roaming exceptions can be analyzed.
Step 1: Roaming exception overview
Display the trend charts of Roaming Exception Rate and
Number of Roaming Clients&Number of Roaming Clients
Exception Rate.
Step 2: Issue identification
Display information such as the roaming time, user MAC
address, user name, and roaming result of each roaming
exception event in the original event list. You can view the
roaming-out and roaming-in details, and information
about APs that the user connects to in the roaming
process.
Step 3: Distribution
Display the issue overview and distribution of APs affected
by roaming exception issues to help locate root causes.
51
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1.
Overview of Network O&M
2.
Traditional WLAN O&M
3.
CampusInsight Intelligent O&M
▫ Overview of Intelligent O&M
▫ Real-Time Experience Visualization
▫ Minute-Level Fault Demarcation
◼
52
Intelligent Network Optimization
Huawei Confidential
Big Data Calibration Overview
⚫
It is recommended that radio calibration be enabled during off-peak hours at night to prevent impact on services. If
the radio environment of an AP differs significantly during off-peak hours and peak hours, the radio calibration
effect during off-peak hours may be inapplicable to service requirements during peak hours.
⚫
With the big data calibration function, CampusInsight — Huawei's data analyzer — analyzes KPI information
collected by APs on a daily basis and provides prediction data. In this manner, the radio calibration result during
off-peak hours may better suit service requirements during peak hours.
AI algorithm
Historical running data
within seven days
Baseline
training
Load prediction
Guidance for device
calibration
Data
reporting
Device
53
Huawei Confidential
• In densely populated scenarios such as canteens, offices, waiting rooms, and
cafes, a large number of STAs connect to APs and then disconnect from them
within a short period of time. The air interface resources of these APs are
occupied by these STAs, resulting in performance deterioration. In addition, the
network access experience of such STAs is affected due to unnecessary switching
of network access modes. For ease of description, these APs are called edge APs,
and STAs that are temporarily connected and quickly leave are called nomadic
STAs. The big data analyzer can determine whether an AP is an edge AP based
on the network metric data reported by the AP. In the next big data calibration,
the big data analyzer adjusts the AP's transmit power to suppress access of
nomadic STAs and improve the health of AP radios.
Big Data Calibration Process
⚫
An AP reports KPI information to the big data
analyzer through the KPI information reporting
CampusInsight
WAC
function. The big data analyzer then
summarizes, analyzes, and predicts the KPI
information. When scheduled radio calibration
is triggered next time, the device performs
radio calibration based on the real-time
channel quality and the prediction data
provided by the big data analyzer. The radio
calibration result can help avoid noncontinuous interference sources and better
meet service requirements.
54
Huawei Confidential
AP
Enable KPI reporting.
Report KPI information.
Perform analysis and prediction
based on historical data.
Request the prediction data.
Deliver the prediction data.
Enable channel scanning.
Report scanning information.
Perform radio calibration.
Deliver calibration results.
Big Data Calibration Case (1/2)
⚫
A company temporarily re-allocates its employees from the original office area that needs a wireless network upgrade and
reconstruction to Building C4. With more employees in Building C4, the network load increases and employees complain that the
wireless network becomes slow. To solve this, the company enables the intelligent radio calibration function to automatically identify
high-load areas in Building C4 and adjust the AP bandwidth, improving the bandwidth and Wi-Fi experience for employees.
1 Choose Optimization > Big Data Calibration.
55
Huawei Confidential
2
Enable Intelligent Radio Calibration and click Next. On the Load
Optimization page, high-load APs on the third floor of C4 are displayed.
Big Data Calibration Case (2/2)
3
56
On the second day after big data calibration is enabled, the
average bandwidth of APs on the third floor of C4 increases
4 Check the calibration details. The 5 GHz frequency bandwidth
of high-load APs on the third floor of C4 is changed from 20
to 252 Mbit/s and the average channel utilization decreases
MHz to 40 MHz. As a result, the Internet access experience of
to 4%.
employees is improved and no frame freezing occurs.
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) CampusInsight uses southbound interfaces to connect to devices. Which of
the following protocols are supported by CampusInsight southbound interfaces? (
)
A. SNMP
B. FTP
C. HTTP/2 + ProtoBuf
D. Syslog
2. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following functions can CampusInsight implement? (
A. Wireless health evaluation
B. Protocol trace
C. User journey analysis
D. Application analysis
57
Huawei Confidential
1. ACD
2. ABCD
)
Summary
⚫
The course describes the traditional WLAN O&M solution. You can log in to the WAC's web
system to perform routine maintenance, including viewing the status of the WAC, APs, and
users, and radio conditions.
⚫
After learning this course, you will be able to understand the traditional WLAN O&M
solution and CampusInsight intelligent O&M solution, improving the capabilities of
analyzing and resolving issues during routine wireless network O&M.
58
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
59
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (1/3)
Acronym/Abbreviation
60
Full Name
AI
Artificial Intelligence
API
Application Programming Interface
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
CLI
Command-Line Interface
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
HDFS
Hadoop Distributed File System
HTTP2
Hypertext Transfer Protocol version 2
HTTPS
Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
IaaS
Infrastructure as a Service
JSON
JavaScript Object Notation
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (2/3)
Acronym/Abbreviation
61
Full Name
KPI
Key Performance Indicator
MSP
Managed Service Provider
ProtoBuf
Protocol Buffers
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indication
RU
Remote Unit
SaaS
Software as a Service
SFTP
Secure File Transfer Protocol
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SSH
Secure Shell Protocol
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations (3/3)
Acronym/Abbreviation
62
Full Name
SSL
Secure Sockets Layer
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TLS
Transport Layer Security
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
VRP
Versatile Routing Platform
WMI
WLAN Maintaining Insight
XML
Extensible Markup Language
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors
that could cause actual results and developments to differ
materially from those expressed or implied in the predictive
statements. Therefore, such information is provided for reference
purpose only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance.
Huawei may change the information at any time without notice.
WLAN Troubleshooting
Foreword
⚫
The wireless local area network (WLAN) has become the most cost-effective and convenient
network access mode. WLAN technology allows users to easily access a wireless network
and move around within the coverage area of the wireless network. However, when a fault
occurs on the wireless network, services on the entire network may be interrupted.
Therefore, wireless network engineers must be capable of troubleshooting WLAN faults.
⚫
2
This course describes the WLAN troubleshooting methods.
Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫
3
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

Describe the troubleshooting process.

Understand WLAN troubleshooting methods.
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. Overview of WLAN Troubleshooting
2. Reliability Faults
3. Cloud Management Faults
4. Wireless Bridge Faults
5. Radio Resource Management Faults
6. Roaming Faults
4
Huawei Confidential
Introduction to WLAN Faults
With increasing requirements for network portability and mobility, WLANs have been applied to various industries. The WLAN
⚫
functions as the access layer of the network. Once a fault occurs on the WLAN, services may be interrupted.
WLAN faults can be detected on the network side (for example, device exception alarms) or on the user side (for example, Internet
⚫
access failure). After a fault is detected, you need to collect fault information about each device immediately. Common wireless
network faults are as follows:
Device faults
STA experience
faults
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
5
High CPU usage
PoE exception
Device upgrade
failure
...
Huawei Confidential
✓
✓
✓
✓
Failure to associate with
an AP
Internet access failure
Slow network speed
Unexpected going-offline
...
WLAN service
faults
✓
✓
✓
✓
Ineffective radio
calibration
Ineffective user rate
limiting
MPs' failures to go online
on a mesh network
...
Cloud management
faults
✓
✓
✓
✓
Onboarding failures of
cloud APs
Roaming failures of
STAs between cloud APs
Failure to deliver
configurations to cloud
APs
...
Reliability faults
✓
✓
✓
✓
VRRP HSB fault
Dual-link HSB
fault
Dual-link
switchover failure
...
Troubleshooting Process
The basic idea of troubleshooting is to systematically reduce or isolate all the possible causes of a fault into several subsets, thus
⚫
reducing the complexity of the fault. Troubleshooting is to find fault causes step by step, and finally resolve the fault.
After a fault is detected, collect fault information about each device immediately, analyze fault information, and then locate and
⚫
rectify the fault. For solution-level troubleshooting on the entire network, the key is to quickly locate the failure point to a
component or device based on the fault symptom and then rectify the fault. The following figure shows the troubleshooting process.
Fault detection
Fault information collection
Fault information collection
Fault information analysis
• Basic fault information: fault occurrence time, fault symptom, severity,
networking information, and measures that have been taken.
Fault locating
Fault rectification
6
• Running status information: startup configuration, current configuration,
interface information, and system version.
• Device log information: logs recorded when the fault occurs on the device.
• Intelligent diagnostic information: diagnostic information generated after
the intelligent diagnosis tool diagnoses the WAC/AP or users.
Huawei Confidential
• Troubleshooting rules:
▫ Recover the system as soon as possible.
▫ During fault locating, collect fault data in a timely manner and save the
data to mobile storage media or PCs on the network.
▫ Before determining the fault handling solution, evaluate the solution's
impact and ensure normal running of services.
Contents
1. Overview of WLAN Troubleshooting
2. Reliability Faults
3. Cloud Management Faults
4. Wireless Bridge Faults
5. Radio Resource Management Faults
6. Roaming Faults
7
Huawei Confidential
Reliability Faults
In real-world applications, many non-technical factors can cause network failures and service interruptions. An effective way to
⚫
enhance system reliability is to improve fault tolerance capabilities of the system, speed up fault recovery, and reduce the impact of
faults on services.
Common WLAN reliability technologies focus on network fault recovery, such as VRRP HSB, dual-link HSB, dual-link cold backup,
⚫
and N+1 backup. WLAN reliability faults refer to the faults related to the preceding reliability technologies.
WAC1
HSB channel
!
Core switch
Common faults
WAC2
•
Failure to deploy VRRP HSB
•
Failure to deploy dual-link backup
•
Wireless configuration synchronization failure
•
Active/Standby switchover failure when the active WAC is
faulty
Access switch
AP
8
Huawei Confidential
•
Active/Standby switchback failure
•
Incorrect selection of the active WAC in dual-link mode
•
Dual-link HSB failure
•
...
Flowchart for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy VRRP HSB
Failure to deploy
VRRP HSB
Is the HSB channel
between the master and
backup WACs
normal?
Yes
Is the HSB service
configured?
No
No
Modify the link
configuration.
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
Configure the HSB
service.
Yes
Is VRRP is correctly
configured?
No
Modify the VRRP
configuration.
Is the fault
rectified?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the source address
correctly configured?
No
Configure the VRRP
virtual IP address as
the source address.
Yes
Is HSB enabled?
No
Enable HSB.
Yes
9
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes are as follows:
▫ The active/standby relationship fails to be established.
▫ The HSB service is incorrectly configured.
▫ The VRRP virtual IP address is not configured.
▫ The source address is not configured.
▫ HSB is disabled.
Collect information
and seek help.
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy VRRP HSB (1/3)
⚫
Step 1: Check whether the HSB channel between the master and backup WACs is normal.

Log in to the master WAC and check whether the link between the master and backup WACs is normal. Run the display hsb-service 0 command to
check whether the link status is Connected.

Connected indicates that the link is normal, and Disconnected indicates that the link is disconnected. You need to check the link to restore it to the
Connected state.
[WAC] display hsb-service 0
Hot Standby Service Information:
---------------------------------------------------------Local IP Address
: 10.1.1.1
Peer IP Address
: 10.1.1.2
Source Port
: 10241
Destination Port
: 10242
Keep Alive Times
:5
Keep Alive Interval
:2
Service State
: Connected
Service Batch Modules :
----------------------------------------------------------
⚫
Step 2: Check whether the VRRP HSB service is configured on the master and backup WACs. For details, see Step 1.

To back up AP information, you need to bind the AP module. To back up user information, you need to bind the Access-user module.

Log in to the master and backup WACs and check the bound service types.
10
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy VRRP HSB (2/3)
⚫
Step 3: Check whether the VRRP virtual IP address is configured on the master and backup WACs.

Log in to the master and backup WACs to check the VRRP status and virtual IP address using the display vrrp brief command.
[WAC] display vrrp brief
Total:1 Master:1
Backup:0
Non-active:0
VRID
State
Interface
Type
Virtual IP
---------------------------------------------------------------2
Master
Vlanif1360 Normal
10.1.1.6
⚫
Step 4: Check whether the CAPWAP source address is correctly configured.

Run the display capwap configuration command. The CAPWAP source address must be set to the VRRP virtual IP address.
[WAC] display capwap configuration
-----------------------------------------------------------Source interface
:Source ip-address
: 10.1.1.6
Echo interval(seconds)
: 25
Echo times
:6
......
11
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy VRRP HSB (3/3)
⚫
Step 5: Check whether HSB is enabled.

Run the display this command in the HSB group view.
[WAC-hsb-group-0] display this
#
hsb-group 0
track vrrp vrid 2
interface Vlanif1360
bind-service 0
hsb enable
#
return
12
Huawei Confidential
Flowchart for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy Dual-Link HSB
Failure to deploy
dual-link backup
Is dual-link backup
enabled on the active and
standby WACs?
No
Enable the dual-link
backup function.
Yes
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
No
Is the IP address of the
standby WAC correct?
Change the IP address of
the standby WAC.
Yes
Yes
Does the standby WAC start
properly?
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Analyze packets
and seek help.
Yes
Are the IP addresses of the
active and standby WACs
specified on the standby
WAC?
No
Restart the standby WAC.
No
Configure the IP addresses
of the active and standby
WACs.
Yes
13
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes of a failure to establish dual links between the active and
standby WACs include:
▫ The dual-link backup function is disabled on the active WAC.
▫ The standby WAC IP address is not configured on the active WAC, or the
configured standby WAC IP address is different from the standby WAC IP
address.
▫ The standby WAC is not started properly.
▫ The dual-link backup function is disabled on the standby WAC.
▫ The active WAC IP address is not specified on the standby WAC.
▫ When the AP selects a WAC, the selected active WAC has not started.
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy Dual-Link
Backup (1/2)
⚫
Step 1: Check whether the dual-link backup function is enabled on the active and standby WACs.

Run the display ac protect command on the active and standby WACs to check whether the dual-link backup function is enabled. If not, run the ac
protect enable command to enable the dual-link backup function.
[WAC] display ac protect
-----------------------------------------------------------Protect state
: disable
Protect AC IPv4
: 10.23.100.3
Protect AC IPv6
:Priority
:0
Protect restore
: enable
Coldbackup kickoff station : disable
Alarm restrain
: disable
------------------------------------------------------------
⚫
Step 2: Check whether the configured IP address of the standby WAC is the same as the actual IP address of the standby WAC.

Check the IP address of the standby WAC on the active WAC. For details, see step 1.

Run the display capwap configuration command on the standby WAC. If the source address is an IP address, it is directly displayed. If the source
address is a VLANIF interface, check the IP address of the VLANIF interface.

14
Check whether the two IP addresses are the same. If they are different, change the IP address of the standby WAC configured on the active WAC.
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deploy Dual-Link
Backup (2/2)
⚫
Step 3: Check whether the standby WAC is running properly. If the standby WAC is not running properly, rectify the fault as required.
⚫
Step 4: Check whether the IP addresses of the active and standby WACs are correctly specified on the standby WAC. If this parameter
is not configured, the standby WAC does not deliver dual-link information to APs during link establishment with the APs. As a result,
dual links cannot be established.
[WAC] display ap-system-profile name wlan-net
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------AC priority
:Protect AC IP address
:Primary AC
: 10.23.100.2
Backup AC
: 10.23.100.3
...
15
Huawei Confidential
Flowchart for Troubleshooting a Wireless Configuration
Synchronization Failure
Wireless configuration
synchronization
failure
Is the wireless configuration
synchronization link
established?
No
Check the configuration to
ensure that the master and
backup master WACs can
communicate.
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
Yes
Are the master and backup
master WACs configured
Consistent?
No
Manually add inconsistent
configurations or manually
trigger wireless configuration
synchronization.
Yes
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
Is wireless configuration
synchronization executed
successfully?
No
Manually run the commands
that fail to be synchronized
or manually trigger wireless
configuration
synchronization.
Yes
16
Collect information
and seek help.
Huawei Confidential
• In active/standby scenarios, the possible causes of wireless configuration
synchronization failures are as follows:
▫ The wireless configuration synchronization link is not set up.
▫ The configurations of the master and backup master WACs are inconsistent.
▫ When wireless configuration synchronization is manually performed, the
configuration fails to be restored after the standby WAC restarts.
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Wireless Configuration
Synchronization Failure (1/2)
⚫
Step 1: Check whether the wireless configuration synchronization link is properly set up.

If the status of the wireless configuration synchronization link is up, the configurations of the master and backup master WACs
have been synchronized.

If the wireless configuration synchronization link is down, the configuration synchronization link is not established. Ensure that
the master and backup master WACs can ping each other and check whether the wireless configuration synchronization
configuration is correct.
[WAC] display sync-configuration status
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait for a moment. done.
Controller role: Master/Backup/Local
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Controller IP
Role
Device Type Version Status Last synced
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------192.168.10.1 Local up
–
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1
17
Huawei Confidential
• The following lists the status of a wireless configuration synchronization link. You
can rectify the fault based on the site requirements.
▫ down: The configuration synchronization link is not established.
▫ initial: The configuration synchronization link starts to be established.
▫ up: The configurations of the active and standby WACs have been
synchronized.
▫ psk-mismatch: The PSKs of the active and standby WACs are inconsistent.
▫ ver-mismatch: The versions of the active and standby WACs are
inconsistent.
▫ cfg-mismatch(config proc fail): The configuration synchronization link is set
up successfully. The configuration on the active WAC is synchronized to the
standby WAC, but the configuration fails to be executed.
▫ cfg-mismatch(config check fail): When a link is established for the first time
during configuration synchronization, the configurations of the active and
standby WACs are inconsistent.
▫ dev-mismatch: The models of the active and standby WACs are different.
▫ cfg-mismatch(sync failed): The configuration synchronization message fails
to be sent. As a result, the configuration synchronization fails.
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Wireless Configuration
Synchronization Failure (2/2)
⚫
Step 2: Check whether the configurations of the master and backup master WACs are consistent. If the status of the wireless
configuration synchronization link in step 1 is cfg-mismatch(config check fail), the configurations of the master and backup master
WACs are inconsistent. In this case, perform the following operations:

Run the display unresumed-configuration command in the diagnostic view of the backup master WAC to check whether configuration restoration
failure records exist.

Run the display sync-configuration compare command on the master WAC to check whether the public configurations of the master and backup
master WACs are consistent.
⚫
Step 3: Check whether there are commands that fail to be executed during configuration synchronization. If the status in step 1 is
cfg-mismatch(config proc fail), the configuration synchronization link is successfully established, but the command for synchronizing
configurations from the master WAC to the backup master WAC fails to be executed.

⚫
Run the display sync-configuration fail-record command on the backup master WAC to check which commands fail to be executed.
Step 4: Run the synchronize-configuration command in the WLAN view of the master WAC to manually trigger wireless
configuration synchronization.
18
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. Overview of WLAN Troubleshooting
2. Reliability Faults
3. Cloud Management Faults
4. Wireless Bridge Faults
5. Radio Resource Management Faults
6. Roaming Faults
19
Huawei Confidential
Cloud Management Faults
⚫
Huawei wireless cloud management solution includes cloud-based WAC management and cloud-based AP
management.


Cloud-based WAC: After WACs are registered with iMaster NCE-Campus, administrators can remotely manage and control WACs and Fit APs on
enterprise networks, implementing automatic deployment, service provisioning, monitoring, and O&M of wireless networks.
Cloud-based APs: APs are registered with iMaster NCE-Campus, and iMaster NCE-Campus delivers operations to APs in a unified manner, facilitating
batch service configuration.
Router
Management faults
Cloud WAC
Core switch
Access switch
Fit AP
Huawei Confidential
Service faults
Onboarding failures of
cloud WACs
•
Ineffective radio
calibration on cloud APs
•
Onboarding failures of
cloud APs
•
Roaming failures of STAs
between cloud APs
•
Failure to deliver
configurations to cloud
APs
•
In cloud AP scenarios, STA
signals are weak.
•
•
Cloud AP upgrade failure
...
•
...
Cloud AP
STAs
20
•
Flowchart for Troubleshooting Onboarding Failures of Cloud
WACs and APs
Onboarding failures of
cloud WACs and APs
Is the basic configuration
correct?
No
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
Change the basic
configuration.
Yes
Is the network connectivity
normal?
No
Yes
Resolve network
connectivity issues.
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
Can the onboarding
failure cause be
displayed?
Yes
Rectify the fault based
on the login failure
cause.
Collect information
and seek help.
No
21
Huawei Confidential
• Common causes of cloud WAC/AP onboarding failures are as follows:
▫ The current device is not working in cloud mode.
▫ The device is not correctly registered with the cloud management platform.
▫ The onboarding configuration on the device is incorrect.
▫ The network between the device and cloud management platform fails.
Procedure for Troubleshooting Onboarding Failures of Cloud
WACs and APs (1/3)
⚫
Step 1: Check basic configurations.

Check whether the device is in cloud mode. If not, switch to the cloud mode.

Run the display cloud-mng info command to check information about the cloud management platform on the device.
<Huawei> display cloud-mng info
-----------------------------------------------------------AP status
: Online
Controller URL
:Controller IP address
: 10.1.1.1
Controller port
: 10020
Controller address source : configuration
------------------------------------------------------------

Run the display cloud-mng register-center status command to check the status of the registration query center.
<Huawei> display cloud-mng register-center status
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Register center URL
: register.naas.huawei.com
Register center IP
:Register center port: 10020 Current status
: sleeping
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22
Huawei Confidential
• If the configuration is incorrect, perform the following operations to reconfigure
the cloud AP or cloud WAC. To configure the cloud AP or cloud WAC to go
online, you need to obtain the IP address or URL of the cloud management
platform.
▫ Using DHCP:
▪ When a device sends a DHCP request to obtain the IP address of the
cloud management platform, the DHCP response packet returned by
the DHCP server carries the Option 148 field (IP address/URL of the
cloud management platform). The AP proactively registers with the
platform based on the IP address.
▫ Manual configuration using commands:
▪ <Huawei> system-view
▪ [Huawei] cloud-mng controller ip-address 10.1.1.1 port 10020
▫ Using the registration query center:
▪ If an AP cannot obtain the IP address of the cloud management
platform through DHCP or manually, the AP sends a query packet to
the registration query center to obtain the IP address of the cloud
management platform.
Procedure for Troubleshooting Onboarding Failures of Cloud
WACs and APs (2/3)
⚫
Step 2: Check the network connectivity between the device and the cloud management platform.

Check whether Ethernet0/0/47 is Up and has a correct IP address.
#
interface Ethernet0/0/47
ip address 169.254.3.1 255.255.255.0
#

Use bidirectional ping packets to check whether the two devices can ping each other.
<Huawei> ping -c 1000 10.1.1.1
PING 10.1.1.1: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=128 time=3 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=5 ttl=128 time=1 ms

During a bidirectional ping test, specify the ping packet size to check whether the ping operation is successful.

If the ping operation fails, check the network between the AP and iMaster NCE-Campus. Ensure that they can communicate with
each other.
23
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting Onboarding Failures of Cloud
WACs and APs (3/3)
⚫
Step 3: Run the display cloud-mng online-fail-record command in the diagnostic view to check the cause of the
device onboarding failure and rectify the fault based on the failure cause.
24
Failure Cause
Troubleshooting Method
AP can't obtain address
Check the DHCP server configuration and ensure that the device can obtain an IP address.
DNS failed
Check the DNS server and ensure that the device can correctly resolve the IP address of
the cloud management platform.
Register Fail: Internal error, the controller is not already
Contact the system administrator of the cloud management platform to ensure that the
cloud management platform is running properly.
Register Fail: License is not authorized or expired
The license is not authorized or has expired. Ensure that the license resources on the
cloud management platform are sufficient.
Register Fail: The device is not added to the controller
Add the ESN of the device to a site of the cloud management platform.
Register Fail: The cloud APs cannot add to AC site
Add the device to a site of the AP type.
Register Fail: The ESN is not in allow rule
Contact the system administrator of the cloud management platform to check the
configuration and add the ESN of the current device to the device whitelist.
Connect to controller failed
Check the network connectivity and port to ensure that the device can access port 10020
of the cloud management platform.
Other
Collect related information and contact technical support personnel.
Huawei Confidential
• The preceding troubleshooting methods are performed on the device side. You
can also perform troubleshooting on the cloud management platform side, which
is not described in detail. The possible causes are as follows:
▫ The device version does not match.
▫ The ESN added to the cloud platform is inconsistent with the actual ESN of
the device.
▫ The controller license has expired.
▫ The registration service is not started.
▫ The network IP addresses conflict.
▫ The device fails to obtain an IP address due to management VLAN
switching.
▫ The length of the registration response packet exceeds the MTU of the
device. As a result, the device fails to process the packet.
Flowchart for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deliver
Configurations to Cloud APs
Failure to deliver
configurations to
cloud APs
Is the cloud AP status
normal?
No
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
Ensure that the AP
status is normal.
Yes
Is the network between
the cloud AP and cloud
management platform
stable?
No
Ensure network stability
between cloud APs and
the cloud management
platform.
Yes
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
Is the MTU properly
configured?
No
Modify the MTU.
Yes
25
Collect information
and seek help.
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes are as follows:
▫ The configuration fails to be delivered due to network problems.
▪ When the network is unstable, the time when an AP goes offline is
almost the same as the time when the configuration fails.
▫ The configuration fails to be delivered due to AP restart.
▪ After the AP is restarted, the configuration fails to be delivered. After
the AP is restarted, the configuration is delivered successfully.
▫ The configuration fails to be delivered because the MTU is small.
▪ The default tunnel MTU of a cloud AP is 1400, corresponding to the
maximum segment size (MSS) of 1360. Tunnels are configured on
some networks, and the actual MTU or MSS is smaller than the value
of this parameter. As a result, the configuration fails to be delivered.
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deliver
Configurations to Cloud APs (1/2)
⚫
Step 1: Check whether the AP goes online on the cloud management platform. If not, ensure that the cloud AP is online.
⚫
Step 2: Check the network connectivity between the device and cloud management platform. Run the ping command to check
whether packet loss occurs between the AP and cloud management platform. If packet loss occurs, configurations may fail to be
delivered. In this case, ensure network stability.

If the ping operation fails, check the network between the AP and cloud management platform. Ensure that they can communicate with each other. If
the ping operation succeeds but Telnet fails, check whether port 10020 is disabled.
# Ping packets in both directions to check whether the ping operation is successful.
<Huawei> ping -c 1000 10.1.1.1
PING 10.1.1.1: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=128 time=3 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=5 ttl=128 time=1 ms
# Telnet the cloud management platform on the cloud AP.
<Huawei> telnet 10.1.1.1 10020
26
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting a Failure to Deliver
Configurations to Cloud APs (2/2)
⚫
Step 3: Check whether the MTU is properly configured.

Check whether the cloud AP and cloud management platform can ping each other using packets of a specified size.

If the ping operation fails, the MTU between the AP and cloud management platform is improper. Change the MTU to a value
greater than 1400 (default MTU value of a cloud AP).
<Huawei> ping -s 1372 -f 10.1.1.1
// parameter, 1372 indicates that the MTU value is 1400 and the MSS value is 1360.
PING 10.1.1.1: 1500 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=1372 Sequence=1 ttl=128 time=3 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=1372 Sequence=2 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=1372 Sequence=3 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=1372 Sequence=4 ttl=128 time=1 ms
Reply from 10.1.1.1: bytes=1372 Sequence=5 ttl=128 time=1 ms
--- 10.1.1.1 ping statistics --5 packet(s) transmitted
5 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 1/1/3 ms
27
Huawei Confidential
• To change the MTU, perform the following steps:
▫ In an on-premises scenario, change the MTU value of the network between
the cloud AP and cloud management platform.
▫ For a Huawei public cloud, run the tcp adjust-mss command in the
interface wan0 view of the cloud AP to change the MSS of TCP packets on
the interface, or run the mtu command in the system view to change the
MTU.
▫ For devices connected across the public network, the MTU on the public
network may change dynamically or the configuration may fail to be
delivered. In this case, adjust the MTU value based on the actual situation.
Flowchart for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration
on Cloud APs
Ineffective radio
calibration on cloud APs
Are the automatic
channel and power
calibration functions enabled
for the cloud APs?
No
Enable the automatic
channel and power
calibration functions.
No
Allocate APs to the same
site.
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
Yes
Are the APs at the
same site?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the calibration group
established?
No
Modify the configuration
to ensure Layer 2
connectivity between APs.
Yes
28
Is the fault
rectified?
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes are as follows:
▫ Cloud APs belong to different sites.
▫ The calibration group is not created.
▫ The fixed channel mode or power mode is used.
Collect information
and seek help.
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration
on Cloud APs (1/2)
⚫
Step 1: On the cloud management platform, check the states of the automatic channel and power calibration
functions for a cloud AP. Enable these two functions if they are disabled.
⚫
Step 2: On the cloud management platform, check whether the cloud APs involved in radio calibration are at the
same site. APs at different sites cannot establish a calibration group. Ensure that the cloud APs involved in radio
calibration are at the same site.
29
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration
on Cloud APs (2/2)
⚫
Step 3: Check whether the calibration group is properly established.

Log in to the AP and run the display wem leader-info all command in the AP diagnostic view to check the leader
AP.
[AP] diagnose
[AP-diagnose] display wem leader-info all
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------MAC
IP Address
IsValid Role
DeviceSn
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4cfa-cab7-4ca0 192.168.1.232 1
SLAVE
56a943fc0bfba650
c4ff-1fac-d210
192.168.1.131 1
LEADER
56a943fc0bfba650
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2

If no leader AP exists, no calibration group is created and unified calibration cannot be performed. In this case,
check whether Layer 2 isolation is configured. If so, modify the configuration to ensure that APs can
communicate with each other at Layer 2.
30
Huawei Confidential
Flowchart for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures in
Cloud AP Scenarios
Roaming failures of
STAs between cloud
APs
Are the HAP and FAP at
the same site?
No
Ensure that the HAP
and FAP are at the
same site.
No
Check whether Layer 2
isolation is configured
and whether APs can
scan each other.
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting result.
Yes
Is a mobility group
established?
Yes
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
Is the NAT
networking
configured?
No
Configure the NAT
networking on upperlayer NEs.
Yes
31
Collect information
and seek help.
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes for STA roaming failures in cloud AP scenarios are as follows:
▫ Cloud APs are not deployed at the same site.
▫ No mobility group is established between cloud APs.
▫ Cloud APs go online in NAT mode.
Procedure for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures in
Cloud AP Scenarios (1/2)
⚫
Step 1: On the cloud management platform, check whether the cloud APs involved in roaming are at the same site. APs at different
sites do not allow STA roaming.
⚫
Step 2: Log in to the APs before and after roaming and run the display wlan wmg mobility-group command to check whether the
mobility group is set up.

If the value of State in the command output is 2, the inter-AP roaming link is successfully set up.

If other APs exist in the mobility group but links fail to be established in the mobility group, ensure that the APs before and after roaming can ping
each other and NAT is not configured between the APs.

If no other AP exists in the mobility group, query information about neighboring APs on the AP. If no neighboring AP can be scanned, check the AP
signal strength, whether obstacles exist between APs, or whether coverage holes exist between APs.
[Huawei-diagnose] display wlan wmg mobility-group
MemSet Size: 512, MemSet CurSize: 0, MemSet LocalMemID: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MemID
Local-IP
Peer-IP Role IsLoc IsAct IsTun State GrpID RSSI(dBm) Description Time
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------GrpSet Size : 32, GrpSet CurSize : 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------GrpID
LocalMemID MemCount Name
MemSet[X,X,X,X]
32
Huawei Confidential
• Run the following command on the AP to query neighboring APs:
▫ [AP-diagnose] display umac calibrate neighbor info radio radio-id all
Procedure for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures in
Cloud AP Scenarios (2/2)
⚫
Step 3: Check the reason why the STA goes offline during roaming. Check whether the roaming failure is caused by
the NAT mode configured on the cloud AP.
<Huawei> display station offline-record all
Reason distribution
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Reason
Count
Percent
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The device in NAT mode does not support roaming.
1
100%
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Count: 1
Recent records
Rf/WLAN: Radio ID/WLAN ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------STA MAC
Ap name
Rf/WLAN Last record time
Reason
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------044b-ed3f-3db9 0006-f499-9880 1/3
XXXX-XX-XX/12:10:26 The device in NAT mode does not support roaming.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total stations: 1 Total records: 1
33
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. Overview of WLAN Troubleshooting
2. Reliability Faults
3. Cloud Management Faults
4. Wireless Bridge Faults
5. Radio Resource Management Faults
6. Roaming Faults
34
Huawei Confidential
Flowchart for Troubleshooting MP Onboarding Failures
MP onboarding failure
Is the MPP online?
No
Check the reason of the MPP
onboarding failure and ensure
that the MPP is online.
Yes
Is the MP imported
manually?
No
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting
result.
Import the MP manually.
Yes
Is the link is created
normally?
No
Is the basic
configuration
correct?
Yes
Does the
number of links exceed the
specifications?
Yes
No
No
Perform multiple queries to
ensure the link is stable.
Is the fault
rectified?
Modify configurations.
Yes
No
Collect information
and seek help.
Adjust the threshold or reduce
the number of APs that
establish links.
Yes
Is information about
neighboring APs detected?
No
Adjust parameters
Yes
35
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes for MP onboarding failures are as follows:
▫ The MPP is not online.
▫ The MP is not imported.
▫ Mesh links are not established.
▫ Configurations on the WAC are incorrect, such as the Mesh function state,
Mesh whitelist, and Mesh role.
▫ The number of links reaches the upper limit.
▫ The distance parameter is not properly configured.
▫ The signal strength is improper.
▫ The AP does not obtain neighbor information of the peer AP.
▫ The possible causes listed here do not include the AP model or antenna
hardware problems. Before troubleshooting, ensure that the AP model is
correct, the Mesh function is supported, and antennas match the
corresponding APs.
Procedure for Troubleshooting MP Onboarding Failures (1/4)
⚫
Step 1: Check whether the MPP is online.

Similar to common APs, the MPP must go online before MPs can go online in bridging mode.
<WAC> display ap all
Total AP information:
nor : normal [17]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ID MAC
Name Group
IP
Type
State STA Uptime
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 dcd2-fcf6-20c0 MPP1 ap-group1 192.168.120.254 AP_XXX
nor
0
4H:49M:11S
...
⚫
Step 2: Check whether the MP is imported manually.

On a mesh network, MPs connect to the network in wireless mode. Before going online on a WAC, you need to import MP
information.
<WAC> display ap all
Total AP information:
nor : normal [17]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ID MAC
Name Group
IP
Type
State STA Uptime
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 dcd2-fcf6-18c0 MP1 ap-group1 192.168.120.25
AP_XXX
nor
0
4H:49M:11S
...
36
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting MP Onboarding Failures (2/4)
⚫
Step 3: Check whether mesh links are set up.

Check mesh links on the WAC.
[WAC-wlan-view] display wlan mesh link all
Info: Mesh link does not exist.

Check mesh link information, and mesh link setup and disconnection records on the MPP.
[AP-diagnose] display umac mesh link-info
...
radio_1 mesh link info as follow:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Peer MAC
Link ID
Channel
Current RSSI(dBm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------00e0-fc67-080f 123
157
-56
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------[AP-diagnose] display umac mesh link-record
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------RadioID PeerMac
Time
Action
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
4CFA-CAC1-845F XXXX-XX-XX/16:19:49 delete link (peer VAP down)
1
4CFA-CAC1-845F XXXX-XX-XX/16:19:02 create link
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total:2
37
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting MP Onboarding Failures (3/4)
⚫
Step 4: Check whether the mesh configuration is correct.

Log in to the WAC to check whether the mesh function is enabled, whether the whitelist is configured, whether the mesh role is
correct, whether the security profile is correctly configured, whether the mesh ID in the mesh profile is correct, and whether the
country code and channel set configured on the MP are the same as those configured on the MPP. Ensure that mesh
configurations are correct. For details, see the Mesh Configuration in the WLAN product documentation.

Log in to the AP to check whether the configuration is correctly delivered.
[AP-diagnose] display umac mesh fsm //Query the current mesh state machine.
---------------------------------------------------------------------State : MESH_FSM_STATE_STOP
Checked counts : 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------
38
Huawei Confidential
[AP-diagnose] display umac mesh fsm
--------------------------------------------radio_0 mesh config as follow:
--------------------------------------------Mesh switch
: On
Mesh role
: mesh portal
Mesh id
: mesh-net
Mesh max link num
: 32
Mesh rssi threshold(dBm) : -89
Mesh report interval(s)
: 30
Mesh link aging time(s)
: 60
Mesh whitelist num
:2
Mesh whitelist mac0
: 00e0-fc64-4600
Mesh whitelist mac1
: 00e0-fcc0-0ac0
Procedure for Troubleshooting MP Onboarding Failures (4/4)
⚫
Step 5: Check whether the number of mesh links reaches the upper limit.

If there are multiple APs on the network and all APs are configured with whitelists, all APs can set up mesh links. If the number
of links established by the AP reaches the upper limit, subsequent APs cannot establish mesh links with the AP. For details about
the query method, see step 3.
⚫
Step 6: Check whether the AP has obtained neighbor information of the peer AP.

If neighbor information is displayed but the link cannot be established, check whether the RSSI of the peer AP in the neighbor list
is small. If so, reduce the link establishment threshold to allow the peer AP to establish a link.
[mp-diagnose] display umac mesh neighbor-info
F: Is link full
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Neighbour MAC MPP MAC
RadioID Channel HopCount RSSI F
--------------------------------------------------------------60d7-55b5-3c00 00e0-fc74-9640 1
157
1
-33
0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1
39
Huawei Confidential
Contents
1. Overview of WLAN Troubleshooting
2. Reliability Faults
3. Cloud Management Faults
4. Wireless Bridge Faults
5. Radio Resource Management Faults
6. Roaming Faults
40
Huawei Confidential
Flowchart for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration
Ineffective radio
calibration
Is the basic service configuration
of the AP is correct?
No
Configure the AP to go online,
enable the radio, and correctly
configure the VAP profile.
Yes
Enable automatic channel and
power adjustment.
Yes
Delete the bound WDS or mesh
profile.
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting
result.
Yes
Are the automatic channel
and power adjustment
functions disabled?
No
Is a WDS or mesh
profile bound?
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Is the calibration channel
set properly configured?
No
Properly configure the
calibration channel set and
power bandwidth.
No
Switch the channel for neighbor
AP detection.
No
Wait until the optimization is
complete.
Yes
Does the AP detect
neighbor information?
Yes
Is the calibration
process complete?
Yes
41
Huawei Confidential
• The possible causes are as follows:
▫ No VAP profile is configured.
▫ A WDS or mesh profile is bound.
▫ The radio is disabled.
▫ The calibration channel set is incorrectly configured.
▫ The AP does not detect information about neighboring APs.
▫ The channel is blocked.
Yes
No
Collect
information
and seek help.
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration (1/5)
⚫
Step 1: Check the basic service configuration of the AP.

Check whether the status of all APs is normal on the WAC.
<WAC> display ap all
Total AP information:
nor : normal [2]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ID MAC
Name Group
IP
Type
State STA Uptime
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 dcd2-fcf6-76a0 area_1 ap-group1 192.168.120.254 AP_XXX
nor
0
4H:49M:11S
1 60de-4474-9640 area_2 ap-group1 192.168.120.253 AP_XXX
nor
0
6H:3M:40S
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2

Check whether the AP radio is disabled. If the status of an AP radio is off, the radio is disabled. In this case, enable the radio.
<WAC> display radio all
...
ST:Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------AP ID Name RfID Band Type ST CH/BW CE/ME STA CU
WM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
area_1 0
2.4G
bgn on 6/20M 24/24
0
55% normal
1
area_1 1
5G
an
on 56/20M 25/25 0
3%
normal
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total:2
42
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration (2/5)

Check whether a VAP profile is configured and whether the VAP status is ON.
<WAC> display vap all
WID : WLAN ID
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------AP ID AP name RfID WID BSSID
Status Auth type STA SSID
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
area_1
0
1
dcd2-fcf6-76a0 ON
Open
0
wlan-net
0
area_1
1
1
dcd2-fcf6-76b0 ON
Open
0
wlan-net
1
area_2
0
1
60de-4474-9640 ON
Open
0
wlan-net
1
area_2
1
1
60de-4474-9650 ON
Open
0
wlan-net
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 4

If no VAP information is displayed, no VAP profile is configured. In this case, configure a VAP profile and bind it to the AP group.
If the VAP status is OFF, the VAP service is disabled. Check whether the VAP service is manually disabled or whether the
scheduled VAP auto-off function is configured.
43
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration (3/5)
⚫
Step 2: Check whether automatic channel and power selection is disabled.

If automatic channel and power selection is disabled, radio calibration cannot adjust the channels or power for APs.
<WAC> display ap-group name ap-group1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------...
Radio 0
...
Auto channel select
: enable
Auto transmit power select : enable
...
Radio 1
...
Auto channel select
: enable
Auto transmit power select : enable
...
⚫
Step 3: Check whether the WDS/Mesh profile is bound to the AP or AP group.

For details about how to query the WDS or mesh profile, see step 2. If a WDS or mesh profile is incorrectly bound, delete the
configuration.
44
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration (4/5)
⚫
Step 4: Check whether the calibration channel set and calibration bandwidth are correctly configured.

Check whether the calibration channel set is correctly configured.
<WAC> display regulatory-domain-profile name default
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Profile name
: default
Country code
: CN
2.4G dca channel-set
: 1,6,11
5G dca bandwidth
: 20mhz 5G
dca channel-set
: 149,153,157,161,165
Wideband switch
: enable
Channel load mode
: outdoor
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

If the calibration bandwidth is set to 40 MHz or 80 MHz, ensure that the configured calibration channel set contains valid 40
MHz or 80 MHz channels.

Outdoor APs may not support low frequency channels according to WLAN Country Code & Channels Compliance. In this case,
configure calibration channel set containing channels supported by outdoor APs based on this table.

If the calibration bandwidth is set to 40 MHz or 80 MHz, the configured calibration bandwidth takes effect only after the next
calibration is triggered.
45
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting Ineffective Radio Calibration (5/5)
⚫
Step 5: Check whether the AP detects neighbor information.

If the AP does not detect neighbor information, check whether there are obstacles between APs and whether the signals of the current AP are normal.
<WAC> display ap neighbor ap-id 1
Radio: Radio ID of AP
In control AP:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Radio AP ID AP name Channel Received RSSI(dbm) Path loss(db)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0
0
area_1
1
-38
56
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1 ...
⚫
Step 6: Check whether the current calibration status is complete.

Global radio calibration takes a period of time. If radio calibration does not take effect, check whether the current radio calibration is complete.
[AC-diagnose] display wlan wrfm calibrate status
RRM calibrate status :
---------------------------------------------------------------------Calibrate mode
: manual
Calibrate phase(2.4g) : stop
Calibrate phase(5g)
: stop
Calibrate sensitivity
: middle
Calibrate policy
:...
46
Huawei Confidential
• The Calibrate phase field has the following states:
▫ deploy: deployment phase
▫ prerun: trial running (global calibration)
▫ period: periodic calibration
▫ stop: Calibration stops.
• If Calibrate phase is not in the prerun state, the current global calibration is
complete.
Contents
1. Overview of WLAN Troubleshooting
2. Reliability Faults
3. Cloud Management Faults
4. Wireless Bridge Faults
5. Radio Resource Management Faults
6. Roaming Faults
47
Huawei Confidential
Flowchart for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures
STA roaming
fails.
Is the security profile
configured consistent?
No
Modify the security profile to make
the configurations consistent before
and after roaming.
Yes
Is Layer 3 roaming
disabled?
Yes
Test services
to verify the
troubleshooting
result.
Enable Layer 3 roaming.
No
Is the VLAN configuration
correct?
No
Modify the VLAN configurations
Is the fault
rectified?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the mobility group
status normal?
No
Modify the mobility group
configuration.
No
Increase the transmit power or add
APs.
Yes
Is continuous signal
coverage available?
Yes
Does a rogue SSID with
the same name exist?
No
48
Huawei Confidential
Yes
Disable rogue SSIDs.
Analyze packets
and seek help.
Procedure for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures (1/3)
⚫
Step 1: Check whether the security profile configurations on the APs before and after roaming are the same.

Enter the security profile view. Configure a new key and ensure that the same key is configured in the security profiles of APs
before and after roaming.
[WAC-wlan-view] security-profile name default
[WAC-wlan-sec-prof-default] security wpa2 psk pass-phrase huawei123 aes
⚫
Step 2: Check whether Layer 3 roaming is disabled.
[WAC] display vap-profile name default
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------......
Service VLAN ID
: 101
Service VLAN Pool
:Permit VLAN ID
:Auto off service switch
: disable
Auto off starttime
:Auto off endtime
:STA access mode
: disable
STA blacklist profile
:
STA whitelist profile
:
Home agent
: ap
VLAN mobility group
:2
Layer3 roam
: enable
49
Huawei Confidential
• Check the VLAN IDs and roaming domains corresponding to the VAPs of the APs
before and after roaming. Layer 2 roaming is performed only when the VAPs
have the same VLAN and roaming domain. Otherwise, Layer 3 roaming is
performed.
• If the STA initiates Layer 3 roaming but Layer 3 roaming is disabled, the roaming
fails. You can determine whether to disable Layer 3 roaming based on service
requirements. To enable Layer 3 roaming, run the undo layer3-roam disable
command.
Procedure for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures (2/3)
⚫
Step 3: Check whether the VLAN configurations before and after roaming are correct.
⚫
Step 4: If the STA roams between WACs, check whether the mobility group status is normal.

Run the display mobility-group command on the WAC to check whether members in the mobility group are in normal state. If
members are not in normal state, inter-WAC roaming fails.
<WAC> display mobility-group name roam
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------AC ID State
IP address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
normal 192.168.10.3
2
fault
192.168.10.4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

If the state of a mobility group member is fault, check whether the mobility group configuration is correct.
[AC-mc-mg-mobility] display this
#
member ip-address 192.168.10.1
member ip-address 192.168.10.2
#
return

50
If the configuration is correct, run the ping command to check whether the WACs can communicate with each other.
Huawei Confidential
Procedure for Troubleshooting STA Roaming Failures (3/3)
⚫
Step 5: Check whether the signal coverage of APs before and after roaming is continuous.

If two APs are too far away from each other, STAs may go offline and online again due to discontinuous signal coverage, causing
roaming failures.

If the signal coverage of APs is discontinuous, increase the transmit power of the APs or add APs to ensure continuous signal
coverage.
⚫
Step 6: Check whether a rogue SSID with the same name exists on the WLAN.

Check whether a rogue SSID with the same name exists on the rogue neighboring AP. If so, disable the rogue SSID.
<WAC> display ap neighbor ap-id 0
Radio: Radio ID of AP
......
Uncontrol AP:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Radio
BSSID
Channel
RSSI(dBm) Last Update Time
SSID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
d0d0-4b22-df00
1
-50
XXXX-XX-XX/15:32:18
0
c4b8-b4f0-6980
1
-44
XXXX-XX-XX/15:31:06
0
10c1-72dd-12e0
11
-41
XXXX-XX-XX/15:28:27 test
0
9c50-ee45-6240
1
-54
XXXX-XX-XX/15:32:06
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 4
51
Huawei Confidential
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) A WLAN functions as the access layer of a network. Once a
fault occurs on the WLAN, services may be interrupted. What are the common wireless
network faults? (
)
A. Internet access failures of STAs
B. Poor user experience, such as low network speeds and long roaming time
C. Unexpected going-offline of STAs
D. Failures to deliver configurations to APs
52
Huawei Confidential
1. ABCD
Summary
⚫
This course describes the troubleshooting process and measures for reliability, cloud
management, wireless bridge, radio resource management, and roaming service faults.
⚫
On completion of this course, you will be able to understand the WLAN troubleshooting
process and troubleshoot common network faults.
53
Huawei Confidential
Recommendations
⚫
54
Huawei official websites:

Enterprise service: https://e.huawei.com/en/

Technical support: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html

Online learning: https://www.huawei.com/en/learning
Huawei Confidential
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym/Abbreviation
55
Full Name
DCA
Dynamic Channel Allocation
HSB
Hot-Standby Backup
MSS
Maximum Segment Size
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
NAT
Network Address Translation
SSID
Service Set Identifier
VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
WDS
Wireless Distribution System
Huawei Confidential
Thank you.
把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Copyright© 2022 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive
statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.